Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080201454 | Multi-Level Thin-Clients Management System and Method - A system and method for managing connections between a proxy server and a distination server are provided. The multi-level thin-clients management system (TCMS) comprises a representation of the managed organization structure, per-level configurable management parameters and administrative permissions, management console adapted to enable user interaction for administrative purposes, database containing management parameters, Front End Servers adapted to foreward client management information to the TCMS and apply management rules, control functions on clients, and managed device having management agent adapted to communicate and to enable management by the TCMS. | 08-21-2008 |
20080201455 | Moving Execution of a Virtual Machine Across Different Virtualization Platforms - Various embodiments of a system and method for moving execution of a virtual machine from a first server computer to a second server computer are disclosed. The first server computer and the second server computer may implement different types of virtualization platforms. The first server computer may be configured to execute a first virtual machine within a first virtualization platform, create snapshot information for the first virtual machine, and transmit the snapshot information to the second server computer. The second server computer may be configured to create a second virtual machine within a second virtualization platform, where the second virtualization platform is a different type of virtualization platform than the first virtualization platform. The second server computer may set the second virtual machine to a state corresponding to the state of the first virtual machine using the snapshot information. | 08-21-2008 |
20080201456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RENDERING USER ACCOUNTS PORTABLE - Improved approaches for enabling user accounts to be portable across different multi-user computer systems are disclosed. A user account created at a multi-user computer can be stored to an external, portable data store, thereby rendering the user account portable. The multi-user computer system, e.g., through its operating system, locates user accounts on not only in local storage of the multi-user computer system, but also in any removable data storage attached to the multi-user computer system. Hence, by coupling the external, portable data store to another multi-user computer, a user is able to login to any supporting multi-user computer and be presented with their user configuration and user directory. Since the data store that stores the user account is not only external but also portable, a user can simply tote the data store to the location of different multi-user computers. In one embodiment, the external, portable data store can not only store the user account but can also provide general data storage. In another embodiment, the external, portable data store can be a portion of a portable computing device (e.g., media player) that provides other functionality besides data storage. | 08-21-2008 |
20080209015 | CHECKING AND REPAIRING A NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A technique for performing configuration checking of a network is provided. A network data store is scanned for at least one transaction. At least one event is generated for the transaction. At least one configuration policy is associated with the event. The configuration policy is compared with configuration data associated with the event. It is determined whether the configuration policy has been violated based on the comparison. | 08-28-2008 |
20080215711 | Configuring output on a communication device - In one general sense, display of content communicated by a sender communication device to a destination communication device may be enabled by receiving, at a destination communication device, content to be displayed by the destination communication device. Characteristics of a display of the received content by the destination communication device may be algorithmically identified in accordance with display configuration settings for the destination communication device. Based on the identified characteristics, at least one change to be made to capture configuration settings at a capturing communication device used to capture the received content may be identified. At least one alternative capture configuration setting may be communicated to the capturing communication device. Content that is captured by the capturing communication device is received at the destination communications device based on the alternative capture configuration setting communicated. | 09-04-2008 |
20080215712 | Electronic apparatus and system capable of assigning appropriate address - In order to prevent unnecessary APIPA process from being executed in a LAN environment which does not adopt APIPA, an ICMP echo request for a predetermined IP address is broadcast. Whether there are more than N apparatuses using APIPA is checked based on the replies, and if there are, IP address setting by APIPA is executed. In a LAN environment which adopts APIPA, whether the IP address to be assigned to an apparatus is already being used by another apparatus is checked. If the date and time when the another apparatus was assigned the IP address is earlier than the date and time when the apparatus was assigned the IP address, APIPA is executed to decide the IP address of the apparatus. | 09-04-2008 |
20080222275 | Server System, Server Device and Method Therefor - A server system manages information so that no inconsistency may occur between a plurality of servers. The server system includes a plurality of server devices, which process, using a plurality of pieces of processing data without any overlap. Each server device relays the signal received at first by any server device, so that the signal may be passed through all server devices and may be received at last by the server device having transmitted the signal at first. The server device transmits, when any processing data is to be used, a first signal indicating the use of that processing data, to another server device, and receives the first signal from another server device and relays the same to another server device. When transmission means transmits the first signal so that the first signal is relayed from another server device, the use of the processing data to be used is permitted. | 09-11-2008 |
20080222276 | Control system apparatus and systems based thereon that transfer control apparatus information over IP networks in web page-less transfers - A system for process control comprises a server digital data processor and a client digital data processor that are coupled by a network, such as the Internet or an Intranet. The server digital data processor, which is additionally coupled to a control/sensing device and any associated interface equipment (collectively, referred to as “process control apparatus”), includes a command processor that transfers information between the network and the process control apparatus. The client digital data processor includes an information client (e.g., a so-called Internet web browser) capable of requesting and receiving an applet from the server digital data processor. The information client, further, defines a hardware-independent and operating system-independent virtual machine environment within the client digital data processor. The client digital data processor executes, within that virtual machine environment, an applet for configuring the client digital data processor as a “process controller” that establishes communications over the network with the command processor and that monitors and/or controls the process control apparatus via those communications. | 09-11-2008 |
20080228901 | NETWORK PARAMETER AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION APPARATUS AND METHOD IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A network parameter automatic configuration apparatus and a method of a portable terminal are provided. The network parameter automatic configuration apparatus includes a memory, a configuration database, a smart card, a configuration searcher and a configuration processor. According to the present invention, without any addition user actions for network parameter configuration, the network parameters can be automatically configured and user convenience can be enhanced thereby. | 09-18-2008 |
20080228902 | Configuring processing entities according to their roles in a data processing system with a distributed architecture - A mechanism is provided for configuring different computers of a network. Each computer plays a specific physic role (defined by an architecture of the network) and/or a specific logic role (defined by the applications running in the network). A reference model and a transition table are associated with each product to be installed in the network; the reference model specifies a target configuration for each role (defined by the components of the product to be installed), while the transition table specifies the actions required to reach each target configuration from each current configuration of the computers. A server identifies the role and the current configuration of each computer; the actions required to enforce the desired target configuration on the computer are then established and executed. | 09-18-2008 |
20080235357 | ON-LINE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method for on-line configuration management of a production environment having a plurality of target nodes, each of which has a current configuration of software controlling at least some of the functions of the node. The system includes a central configuration management server, a plurality of agents associated with the target nodes, and a central configuration database in communication with the central server. Each agent is installed on an associated target node to monitor the configuration of the software on the associated node and to report to the server, configuration changes detected by the agent. The central configuration database stores the configuration of the software as reported by the agents for the plurality of nodes. | 09-25-2008 |
20080235358 | Proxy Device, Network System, and Communication Method - The present invention provides a proxy device, a network system, and a communication method to enable communication between an information appliance capable of communicating only within a closed network and an information appliance capable of communicating only within a closed network different from the network, via an open network, wherein in a proxy device | 09-25-2008 |
20080235359 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING PROGRAM APPLICATIONS STORABLE IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - Management server | 09-25-2008 |
20080244041 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING BEST PRACTICES FOR CONFIGURING A NETWORKED SYSTEM - A method, system, and computer program product for automatically generating best practices for configuring a networked system of entities are provided. The method includes identifying a networked system configuration problem and determining a set of problematic entities. The set of problematic entities includes the entities reporting the networked system configuration problem. The method further includes determining a set of problem associated entities, where the set of problem associated entities includes the entities with a common association having a strongest correlation to the set of problematic entities. The method additionally includes classifying the set of problem associated entities on an attribute basis to determine one or more attributes of the entities that contribute to the networked system configuration problem, and reporting the best practices for configuring the networked system of entities as avoiding the one or more attributes of the entities that contribute to the networked system configuration problem. | 10-02-2008 |
20080244042 | Method and system for communicating media over a computer network - Media is partitioned into k recurring frames or packets. Recurring frames of the same position 1 to k collectively define k media substreams which may be communicated from sending computers to a receiving computer over a computer network pursuant to a substream mask. The substream mask is defined by the receiving computer. Received substreams may be communicated to subsequent computers, and/or buffered for reassembly and playback at the receiving computer. Network node lists for substream and packet mask negotiation may be communicated to the receiving computer by sending computers or a rendezvous host. | 10-02-2008 |
20080250121 | FACILITATING CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE INSTANCES OF AN APPLICATION ON A SERVER CLUSTER - Facilitating configuration of multiple instances of an application executing in a server cluster. A centralized storage is provided at which configuration data for multiple application instances potentially executing on different servers (of a server cluster) is stored. The application instances may retrieve the configuration data from the centralized storage and operate using the data. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250122 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Network and device configuration systems and methods are described. In an embodiment, a first user interface configured to receive from a user configuration information regarding a first network provided. Program code stored in computer accessible memory is configured to generate a barcode that includes information related to the first network configuration information, wherein the barcode can be scanned by a device having a barcode scanner and a network interface to configure the network interface to access the first network. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250123 | NETWORK SWITCH AND METHOD OF PREVENTING IP ADDRESS COLLISION - A network switch and a method of preventing an IP address collision is provided. When a new node tries to use an IP address, which is being used in one broadcast domain, it is possible to detect and prevent an IP address collision in real-time, disconnect only the new node which caused the IP address collision, and quickly resolve network environment to the original state that existed prior to the collision, in order to prevent communication breakdown without the use of an additional device. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250124 | REDUNDANCY-PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION IN A RING NETWORK - In a network having a plurality of nodes each with at least two ports and lines or links connecting the ports in a ring. The improvement wherein one of the nodes is configured as a ring manager capable of configuring the other nodes via the links. Thus starting from a node used as ring manager the redundancy protocol of the other nodes is automatically configured via the lines by means of data packets containing the configuration data, which data packets are sent out via the lines by the ring manager. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250125 | SUPERVISOR PARTITIONING OF CLIENT RESOURCES - A system for supervisor partitioning of client resources in a subnet communications environment includes a plurality of client nodes, each receiving an allocated set of resources determined by a central authority, which assigns resources to a supervisor key associated with each supervisor of the plurality of client nodes. At each of the client nodes, the allocated set of resources are partitioned using a local supervisor associated therewith, with each supervisor associating one or more resource keys with one or more resources allocated to the corresponding client node, and assigning the one or more resource keys to the one or more applications. The supervisor keys are configured so as to prevent a given supervisor from partitioning resources not allocated to the client node associated therewith. Following the partitioning, communication packets are issued from the one or more applications to a resource provider node without inspection by the corresponding supervisor. | 10-09-2008 |
20080263183 | Management of Kernel configurations for nodes in a clustered system - Various approaches for managing kernel configuration files in a cluster computing arrangement are disclosed. In one approach, a first set of kernel configuration files are installed networked storage, and a first node is booted using the first set of kernel configuration files. A copy of the first set of kernel configuration files is stored in networked storage as a default kernel configuration in response to an administrator initiated first operation. In response to an administrator-initiated second operation a copy of the default kernel configuration is stored as a second set of kernel configuration files for a second node of the cluster. The second node is booted with the second set of kernel configuration files. | 10-23-2008 |
20080263184 | Tv-Pc Architecture - An apparatus includes at least a first hardware part (AP | 10-23-2008 |
20080263185 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF THE NETWORK DEVICES VIA CONNECTION TO SPECIFIC SWITCH PORTS - A method and system for automatically configuring devices in a network is disclosed. A network management software application is provided that enables a user to associate policy settings with physical locations in the network. During an operational mode of the network management application, the application automatically detects when a network device is plugged into the network, and determines a location of the device in the network. The device is then automatically configured based on the policy settings associated with the corresponding location. | 10-23-2008 |
20080270580 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING PSEUDOWIRES USING DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP) MESSAGES - A technique for configuring a pseudowire involves extending the functionality of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). In an embodiment, pseudowire configuration information is embedded into DHCP messages that are communicated between a customer edge (CE) device and a provider edge (PE) device and used to configure a pseudowire between the two devices. The pseudowire configuration information may include an indication of the pseudowire capabilities of the CE device, the types of pseudowires desired by the CE device, the types of pseudowire encapsulations supported by the CE device, the types of pseudowires that are to be configured, the pseudowire encapsulations that are to be used, and pseudowire labels. Pseudowire configuration information can be embedded into the options field of a DHCP message using a new option, using multiple new options, or by overloading an existing option. | 10-30-2008 |
20080270581 | Communication management tools for a secure information sharing architecture to facilitate post merger integration - Disclosed herein are architectures and related processes and communication tools for enabling secure information sharing and post-merger integration planning during the regulatory review period of mergers and acquisitions. The disclosed embodiments include a secure information sharing architecture and related communication processes and tools for facilitating data flow from companies involved in a merger transaction into a quarantined center of a secure information sharing architecture while ensuring that information integrity is maintained in compliance with regulatory restrictions, and automated tools for allowing users to track and view the status of communications into and out of the quarantined center. | 10-30-2008 |
20080270582 | Table Based Distributed Control for a Network of Consumer Electronics - A system with a number of consumer electronics units interconnected by a digital data network, each of the units comprising a computer for controlling the functioning of the unit itself and the functioning in interplay with the other units in the network. The computer is provided with at least one general table with interrelated table entrances, wherein each available functional state of the unit and each available interplay with other units is given by an entrance in this at least one table. | 10-30-2008 |
20080275968 | Managing a master method and a child method defined by differing sets of required configurations - According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention, a device is provided for managing a master method, defined by a first set of required configurations, and a child method, derived from the master method and being defined by a second set of required configurations, wherein each of the master method and the child method comprises a sequence of instructions for an instrument for at least one of analysing, testing, and measuring a substance, wherein each of the required configurations of the master method and of the child method comprises a set of operating conditions being required for an execution of the master method and of the child method, respectively, using the instrument, the device comprising a determining unit adapted for determining if the second set of required configurations differs from the first set of required configurations, and a classification unit adapted for classifying the child method based on a result of the determination. | 11-06-2008 |
20080275969 | System and method for managing a plurality of network clusters - Exemplary systems and methods for managing a plurality of network clusters are provided. In exemplary embodiments, a network cluster is established within a super cluster. Each network cluster comprises one or more groups/organizations having a common interest. Once established, the network cluster defines customized administrative components for the network cluster. These administrative components may define how groups are organized within the network cluster and individual's roles and functionalities within the network cluster. The administrative components may also define what components may be provided to a user associated with the network cluster. | 11-06-2008 |
20080281947 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY DEPLOYING A NETWORK DESIGN - A system and method for automatically deploying a network design is provided. Design deployment may be automated by a system that receives a machine-readable network design as an input, validates design topology requirements, and automatically deploys the design over actual hardware elements without manual intervention. Thus, the system and method provided may eliminate errors and streamline network design deployment, which may be particularly useful in a network characterized by a complex design, which may be difficult and tedious to configure manually. | 11-13-2008 |
20080281948 | DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF A COMMUNICATION PORT IN A STORAGE SYSTEM BETWEEN TARGET AND INITIATOR MODES - A storage system includes a communication port, the mode of operation of which can be dynamically switched by a user between a target mode and an initiator mode. The port may be a Fibre Channel port. The storage system may be a unified storage system operable to provide file-level access and block-level access to stored data. | 11-13-2008 |
20080288612 | Online Social Network Management System and Method For Simulating Users to Build Various Faces of Relation - A system and method of managing a social network are disclosed. The method includes the step of recording the IDs and corresponding personal information of users who have subscribed to a service via a network, in a user DB; the step of recording corresponding relationships between the users and relationship indices R, reflecting the degrees of trustworthiness of the users having the corresponding relationships, in a relationship information DB; and the path search step of evaluating one or more paths based on the relationship indices R of respective links constituting the paths and providing evaluation results to a first user so that the first user can select an optimal path from among the paths existing between the first user and a second user on the social network constructed with the users used as nodes and the corresponding relationships of the users used as the links. | 11-20-2008 |
20080288613 | Method for operating an object-based configuration system for field devices of automation technology - A method for operating an object-based configuration system CS for field devices of automation technology, with a frame application FA, which serves for managing and instantiating a plurality of objects, wherein, to individual groups of device objects, field device types are assigned, which enable, as device managers, a configuration of the corresponding field device type. A first main object MO- | 11-20-2008 |
20080288614 | Client Addressing And Roaming In A Wireless Network - A managed network receives client device requests for network addresses for communications over the managed network and computes a network address for a client device based on a hardware address of the client device, such as the MAC address of the client device, and returns the network address to the client device along with a predetermined gateway address for communications over the managed network with external networks. The MAC address is hashed to the network address that is assigned such that the client address will always receive the same network address whenever it accesses the managed network. | 11-20-2008 |
20080288615 | Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) Network System and Method - A bidirectional radio frequency identification (RFID) network system and method are presented. The system allows users to configure, monitor, and manage different sensor devices by using a graphical user interface real-time. The reconfiguration is done through a network management computer at the top system level that receives user input, generates code images according to the user input, and appropriately routes the code images to sensor routers that directly control the sensors. If the system is multi-layered, some code images are also sent to the intermediate-level network management computers. The system allows users to not only monitor a business flow but react to problematic situations quickly by adjusting the workflow. The aspect-oriented nature of the system allows users to reconfigure the system based only the Functionality aspects without worrying about the Partitioning aspects (e.g., how the network and the sensors are physically connected). | 11-20-2008 |
20080294754 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION-DRIVEN DEPLOYMENT - A computer enabled method and system that can expose distributed transaction services as web services from a service architecture comprises steps of configuring the service architecture; receiving a invocation request through web services from a client; invoking a distributed transaction service from a distributed transaction application, wherein the distributed transaction service is defined in the invocation request; and exporting the distributed transaction service in the form of web services. | 11-27-2008 |
20080294755 | Method and Arrangement in an Access System - An access node connected to end-users, routers, and a DHCP-server. The end-user defines desired services provided via the routers. A purpose is to automatically provide simultaneous access to services via two or more of the routers, although the end-user simultaneously handles only one router. The connections are secure. The end-user requests one of the services. The access node identifies the end-user and sends a corresponding request to the DHCP-server, which dynamically allocates addresses to the end-user and to all the routers for the desired services. The access node snoops the addresses in a DHCP option message from the DHCP-server, resolves the router addresses, stores IP router addresses and IP MAC addresses in a memory and sets MAC addresses in MAC filters. An option reply with one router is sent to the end-user, which after request for one service, reaches all the services stored in the memory. | 11-27-2008 |
20080301266 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Exemplary embodiments include methods and systems for identifying information associated with a remote user system and/or a wireless system, determining the compatibility of the remote user system and a wireless system, formulating one or more configuration plans for the remote user system and/or a wireless system and automatically implementing one or more configuration plans to establish a wireless network. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301267 | Method and System for Network Management with Platform-Independent Protocol Interface for Discovery and Monitoring Processes - A method, system, apparatus, and computer program product is presented for management of a distributed data processing system. An action at a target device is requested, and the completion of the action depends upon communication protocol operations on a set of devices along a logical route through the distributed data processing system. A set of supported protocols that are common to the set of devices along the logical route are identified, and a subset of supported protocols in the set of supported protocols that can be used to complete the action is then identified. An allowable supported protocol is selected for the action based on the type of requested action, after which the requesting application may use the action in accordance with the selected allowable supported protocol, e.g., to monitor or discover the target device. A topology mapping is used to derive an endpoint-to-endpoint route for completing the requested action. A comparison of assigned priorities of each allowable supported protocol may be performed to choose the selected allowable supported protocol. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301268 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring and Modeling Server Information in an Enterprise Tooling Environment - A computer implemented method, an apparatus, and a computer usable program product are provided for configuring and modeling server connection and deployment information in an enterprise tooling environment. A software model is provided that comprises a connections object, which includes a plurality of connection objects and deploy spec objects. Each of the connection objects is specific to a backend server type. A deploy controller is provided at run time to examine the connections object for a connection object. A backend resource manager is loaded for a specific application server. If a connection object is present, the backend resource manager loads a connection interpreter, which transforms development time connection information in the connection object to the run time connection information in corresponding deploy spec object and connection factory spec object. The backend resource manager then writes the deployment information to the configurations files of the application server. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301269 | METHOD FOR BINDING AN ADDRESS OF A USER TERMINAL IN AN ACCESS EQUIPMENT - A method for binding an address of a user terminal in an access equipment includes the following steps. The user terminal requests a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server via the access equipment to assign an IP address, and the access equipment receives a response message from the DHCP server during the process in which the DHCP server assigns the IP address to the user terminal. The access equipment binds the address of the user terminal with a corresponding port of the access equipment according to the address information and the port information in the response message. By using the scheme of the invention, the access equipment may use the access information and the corresponding port information, which is obtained when the user terminal requests to assign the IP address for implementing binding the address of the user terminal and managing the user terminal effectively and expediently. In addition, since the binding relationship of the user terminal is created dynamically, it could be avoided effectively if the IP address is stolen. | 12-04-2008 |
20080307075 | Sensor-net system and sensor node - A sensor-Net system includes sensor nodes which are in intermittent operation so as to save power by repeating activated state and inactivated state at a regular interval. Synchronization of time in the system is executed by aligning to the intermittent operation of the sensor nodes. A management server issues a setTime command for configuring the time to each gateway node at a specified interval. Each router node sets or corrects the time of it based on the time received from the gateway node and thereafter turns ON the time configuration flag for each sensor node in order to expand the setTime command to all of its sibling sensor nodes. The router node, upon reception of a polling, which is a command request, from the sensor node, obtains the time at that time, then uses the time to generate a setTime command to transmit to that sensor node. | 12-11-2008 |
20080307076 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING NODE BEHAVIOR IN A SENSOR NETWORK - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for controlling sensor networks. A sensor network has a plurality of sensor nodes, which have sensors for monitoring operational parameters of devices within an application-specific system. A wireless communication module is provided for each node to enable the node to wirelessly communicate with other nodes of the network. A user defines various scripts for controlling the behavior of one or more nodes, and the network distributes the scripts, as appropriate, to various nodes thereby implementing the behavior defined by the scripts. Accordingly, a user can easily and dynamically configure or re-configure the behavior of any node without having to physically access the node that is being configured or re-configured. | 12-11-2008 |
20080313311 | Information Service for Subscribers Who are Not Registered in Enum - At the ENUM introductory phase, a problem occurs when a called subscriber is not registered in the ENUM directory listing. In such a situation, a calling subscriber can initiate the ENUM request but it receives an error message only since no inscription exists in the ENUM registration with respect to said FQDN. The aim of said invention is to shorten said introductory phase. According to the invention, the subscriber called according to the ENUM request, is thereby informed about possibilities offered by the ENUM system in the case when the DNS registration is not available. | 12-18-2008 |
20080320108 | Management Policies For Dense Wireless Access Point Infrastructures in Wireless Local Area Networks - Techniques for enhancing the throughput capacity available to client devices connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. Specifically, existing WLAN resources are converted into wireless access points (APs) to create a dense infrastructure of wireless APs. To leverage this dense AP infrastructure, central management techniques are employed. With client-to-AP mapping, these techniques are used to prevent the discovery of multiple APs in a WLAN by a client device and to select a single AP (using certain policies) to associate with the client device and provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN. Additionally, techniques are employed to centrally determine, using certain policies, when the AP should disassociate from the client device and when another centrally selected AP should respond to, and associate with, the client device to provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN—without interrupting/disrupting the client device's access. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320109 | COMPLEX SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT - Systems and methods of deploying one or more software components to a target computer infrastructure are disclosed. A descriptor file that declares a desired state of one or more target computing devices of a target computer infrastructure is parsed. A live state of the one or more target computing devices is obtained. A set of target computing devices having the live state different from the desired state is identified. A plan script that includes deployment commands configured to deploy one or more software components to each computing device is generated. The plan script can be optimized such that when executed the software components are deployed with higher efficiency, system stability, minimum downtime, etc. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320110 | FIRMWARE ROLLBACK AND CONFIGURATION RESTORATION FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Techniques are described for managing one or more electronic devices connected on a network. A central management system may be configured to control firmware rollback activity for the devices. The central management system may in some embodiments also rollback configuration settings. In another embodiment, a central management system may perform device cloning activities. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320111 | Method for Domain Name Configuration in Ipv6 Access Network and the Network Device Hereof - The present invention provides a method and device for hierarchical configuration of domain name in IPv6 network. Said method comprises: a) negotiating a unique user network's name between a user and a network SP; b) a client terminal device at the user network side obtaining prefix of IPv6 network address and suffix of the user network's domain name by sessioning with a network access device, said suffix of the user network's domain name being consisting of the user network's name and suffix of the network SP's domain name; c) the network access device further informing the network SP's DNS server of establishing the resource record of said user network's domain name server; d) said client terminal device conducting the address configuration and providing domain name service for hosts at the user network side according to the obtained prefix of IPv6 network address and suffix of the user network's domain name. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320112 | Highly scalable and highly available cluster system management scheme - A cluster system is treated as a set of resource groups, each resource group including a highly available application and the resources upon which it depends. A resource group may have between 2 and M data processing systems, where M is small relative to the cluster size N of the total cluster. Configuration and status information for the resource group is fully replicated only on those data processing systems which are members of the resource group. A configuration object/database record for the resource group has an associated owner list identifying the data processing systems which are members of the resource group and which may therefore manage the application. A data processing system may belong to more than one resource group, however, and configuration and status information for the data processing system is replicated to each data processing system which could be affected by failure of the subject data processing system—that is, any data processing system which belongs to at least one resource group also containing the subject data processing system. The partial replication scheme of the present invention allows resource groups to run in parallel, reduces the cost of data replication and access, is highly scalable and applicable to very large clusters, and provides better performance after a catastrophe such as a network partition. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320113 | Highly Scalable and Highly Available Cluster System Management Scheme - A cluster system is treated as a set of resource groups, each resource group including a highly available application and the resources upon which it depends. A resource group may have between 2 and M data processing systems, where M is small relative to the cluster size N of the total cluster. Configuration and status information for the resource group is fully replicated only on those data processing systems which are members of the resource group. A configuration object/database record for the resource group has an associated owner list identifying the data processing systems which are members of the resource group and which may therefore manage the application. A data processing system may belong to more than one resource group, however, and configuration and status information for the data processing system is replicated to each data processing system which could be affected by failure of the subject data processing system—that is, any data processing system which belongs to at least one resource group also containing the subject data processing system. The partial replication scheme of the present invention allows resource groups to run in parallel, reduces the cost of data replication and access, is highly scalable and applicable to very large clusters, and provides better performance after a catastrophe such as a network partition. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320114 | Client Device Configuration With Configuration Services Providers - Configuring a client device, including receiving, from a manufacturer, a configuration bundle for a client device, receiving, from a vendor, vendor provided configuration parameters for the client device, receiving, from a user, user provided configuration parameters for the client device, and associating the vendor provided configuration parameters and the user provided configuration parameters with the configuration bundle for the client device; thereby producing an associated configuration bundle for the client device. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320115 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING IPV6 ADDRESS - An apparatus, method and system for acquiring IPV6 address is described. The apparatus includes a request module ( | 12-25-2008 |
20090006583 | Method and system for distributing restricted media to consumers - Techniques for distributing restricted media to consumers are disclosed. According to one aspect of the present invention, personalized settings (e.g., parameters or table) are managed in a primary client device associated with a user. A copy of the personalized settings is maintained in a server. When the primary box is replaced, a copy of the personalized settings is uploaded to a different client device that is configured to respond to the personalized settings. Data pertaining to titles in a personal vault is preloaded. When there is an order for a release that is restricted for distribution over an open network, data pertaining to such a release is also loaded. As a result, the subscriber sees the familiar settings on the different client device and would not miss any release while the primary box is being replaced or repaired. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006584 | Service Personalization in a Terminal Device - Two service signals are transmitted from a service server through a first network in such a way that users' terminal devices display personalized service data items. When service signals are filtered, a terminal device extracts common data items accessible for several terminal devices and a parameter type from a service signal identified by a stored identifier. An end address is determined by applying a stored parameter, related to the parameter type, to a pre-recorded or transmitted algorithm. The end address is transmitted, through a second network, to a server which transmits a first personalized file associated with the end address and bearing personalized data items displayed with the common data items in the device. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006585 | Ip Address Allocation Method - A DHCP server allocates IP addresses to DHCP clients and the IP address validation process is moved from the client to the DHCP server. The DHCP server is required to periodically select a predefined number of validated IP addresses from its unused IP addresses. When a client applies for an IP address, the DHCP server allocates an IP address from its selected validated IP addresses to the client, and the client then directly uses the IP address allocated by the DHCP server. This method may be used for providing VoIP in mobile phones, wherein the voice session interruption is shortened sufficiently before the mobile terminal acquires a new IP address through the fast IP address re-allocation to a mobile terminal, thereby ensuring mobile VoIP communication quality. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006586 | MODEL DRIVEN PORTLET DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND PROGRAM PRODUCT - Under the present invention desired portlet behaviors are embodied as portlet patterns. When a developer wishes to create a new portlet for a portal page, the developer will select a presentation template, select one or more portlet patterns and input values for the selected portlet patterns. Thereafter, the portlet will be encoded by binding the values to the selected patterns according to the presentation template. Once encoded, the portlet will be bound to a portal server catalog corresponding to the portal page. The binding to the portal server catalog allows the portlet to be visible to end users visiting the portal page. Then, if an end user selects the portlet, an instance thereof will be created by an instantiator portlet. Any underlying functions of the portlet can then be carried out by the instantiator portlet. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006587 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THIN CLIENT CONFIGURATION - A method for configuring a thin client connected to a communications network includes the thin client sending a request for a network address to an address server. The address server sends an assigned network address back to the thin client together with a location of a configuration server. The thin client sends a request for configuration information to the configuration server. The request for configuration information includes information on the thin client. The configuration server generates a configuration file containing configuration information based on the received thin client information. The configuration file is then sent by the configuration server to the thin client, which uses the configuration file for configuration. | 01-01-2009 |
20090006588 | Method for Heterogeneous System Configuration - A method for provisioning systems within a solution which includes mapping a physical identifier of a component within a system to a logical identifier of the component within a system and mapping the logical identifier of the component within a system to an implementation identifier of the component within the system. The mapping conforms to a predetermined user identifiable naming convention. | 01-01-2009 |
20090019136 | Method of discovery of a domestic network and device implementing the method - The invention relates to audio and video interoperability over networks based on network technologies other than the 1394 bus. The invention relates more particularly to a method of discovery, by a device connectable to a communication network, of the other devices connected to this network, which comprises a step of connection of the device to the said network, a step of despatching of an announcement message containing autodescription information describing the device destined for all the other devices connected to this network, a step of despatching of an autodescription information request message to all the other devices connected to this network and a step of reception of a response message from each of the other devices of the network containing the autodescription information of this other device. The invention also relates to the corresponding connectable device. | 01-15-2009 |
20090019137 | METHOD AND REMOTE SYSTEM FOR CREATING A CUSTOMIZED SERVER INFRASTRUCTURE IN REAL TIME - System and method enabling creating a server environment in real or near-real time. Major elements of the system include a provisioning engine that controls server chassis coupled to frontend network and backend network. The frontend network enable connection of any server to the Internet or Intranet through a firewall and IDS security systems. The backend network couples specific servers to specific storage resources of a network storage. A GUI or direct API functions enables a user to specify server environment parameters, and the provisioning engine then controls the frontend and backend networks and other system elements to create the specified server environment. | 01-15-2009 |
20090019138 | Repository-Independent System and Method for Asset Management and Reconciliation - A system and method for managing network device configurations is described. In one embodiment a device configuration is represented by configuration knowledge and configuration data, wherein the configuration knowledge may comprise one or more configuration knowledge instances, and the configuration data may comprise one or more configuration data instances. In preferred forms, the configuration knowledge instances and configuration data instances may comprise one or more schemata, which may be created, modified, or deleted without affecting other portions of a configuration knowledge instance or configuration data instance. | 01-15-2009 |
20090019139 | Repository-Independent System and Method for Asset Management and Reconciliation - A system and method for managing network device configurations is described. In one embodiment a device configuration is represented by configuration knowledge and configuration data, wherein the configuration knowledge may comprise one or more configuration knowledge instances, and the configuration data may comprise one or more configuration data instances. In preferred forms, the configuration knowledge instances and configuration data instances may comprise one or more schemata, which may be created, modified, or deleted without affecting other portions of a configuration knowledge instance or configuration data instance. | 01-15-2009 |
20090024722 | PROXYING AVAILABILITY INDICATIONS IN A FAILOVER CONFIGURATION - Under high load conditions, an intermediate network, element can act as a proxy for a primary network element and transmit availability indications for a heavily loaded primary network element. When the primary network element fails to provide an availability indication to one or more backup network, elements, an intermediate network element generates the availability indications and transmits them to the one or more backups. Generating and transmitting availability indications from an intermediate network element for an active primary network element avoids false failover and avoid dedication of a network interface solely for availability indications. | 01-22-2009 |
20090031008 | System and method of configurating a network device - In a particular illustrative embodiment, a method of configuring a network device is disclosed that includes determining network device information at a network device using a boot strapping protocol during an initial set-up process of the network device. The method further includes automatically modifying a configuration profile of the network device to connect to a network in a first device mode using the network device information. The method also includes receiving configuration information transmitted from a configuration server without requesting the configuration information. The configuration information includes routing information and configuration parameters particular to the network device. The method further includes automatically modifying the configuration profile of the network device to operate in a second device mode based on the configuration information. The first device mode is a non-operational mode and the second device mode is an operational mode. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031009 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION - A communication method and a communication device that includes obtaining a network configuration in a user's operating system; loading a customized operating system and an application; and communicating, by the application, with other entities under the customized operating system according to the network configuration. | 01-29-2009 |
20090031010 | OS Independent Device Management Methods and Apparatuses - An apparatus adapted to facilitate remote configuration and/or management of a system, independent of its operating system, is disclosed. In various embodiments, the apparatus includes a first and a second interface coupled to an input device and a network interface of the system respectively, and a controller. | 01-29-2009 |
20090037560 | NETWORK-ATTACHED STORAGE DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A system comprises a computer configured using a configuration setting and a network-attached storage (NAS) device coupled to the computer via a network. The NAS device receives the configuration setting from the computer via the network and configures the NAS device using the configuration setting. | 02-05-2009 |
20090037561 | Automatically Adjusting Command Parameters To Support Devices Of A Computer Network - Adjusting one or more command parameters for a device of a computer network includes accessing command sets. A command set comprises one or more commands supported by a known device, and a command has one or more command parameters. One or more command sets associated with an unknown device are identified. The following are repeated for each command set of the one or more command sets until a termination event occurs: applying the command set to the unknown device to perform an operation; determining whether the command set has failed to perform the operation; and automatically adjusting the command parameters of the command set if the command set has failed to perform the operation. | 02-05-2009 |
20090037562 | NETWORK TOPOLOGY AWARE CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK ADDRESSES IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS - In a method for configuring the network address for a node in a IP wireless network a network address is selected out of an available range of network addresses. At least one address resolution request (ARP) is sent over the network. A response to the ARP requests is awaited during a pre-defined timeout. In case no response is received from the network, the selected address is used to configure the node of the network. | 02-05-2009 |
20090037563 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING DEVICE PARAMETERS IN DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINE ACCESS NETWORK - A method for configuring device parameters in a Digital Subscriber Line access network is disclosed. According to the method, a managing device sends a parameter modifying command to a managed device; the managed device makes a response to the parameter modifying command and modifies parameters; the managed device obtains an applying opportunity of unapplied parameters; the managed device applies the unapplied parameters according to the applying opportunity. A Digital Subscriber Line access system and a network device are also disclosed. | 02-05-2009 |
20090043871 | System and Method for Network Setup of Wireless Device For Home Network - A network device such as a wireless network device is configured using information input from a user computer or a user telephone for a specific home network to which the device will belong. This may be accomplished by obtaining from the user account information which is sent to a configuration server that automatically sets up the device for network use without the users further direct involvement. | 02-12-2009 |
20090049158 | AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDER TOPOLOGY - A server includes a processing system configured to register a first ad hoc service provider and to register a second ad hoc service provider. The processing system is further configured to receive from the first ad hoc service provider information regarding the second ad hoc service provider. The information includes service information of the second ad hoc service provider. A method is also provided for a server to acquire or distribute information related to one or more alternate ad hoc service providers. | 02-19-2009 |
20090055514 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION DEVICE - An article of manufacture includes an interface component configured to couple to a computer, the computer being part of a network having a gateway device. The article further includes a memory component containing computer-implementable instructions that, when executed by the computer, gather network configuration information from the gateway device. The network configuration information is configured to enable an electronic device to join the network. | 02-26-2009 |
20090055515 | Facilitating distributed and redundant statistics collection - A method comprises a plurality of operations. An operation is performed for loading an entire configuration information dataset from a configuration information source onto a first collector system of each one of a plurality of collector groups. The configuration information at least partially defines a manner in which operational statistics for a network node are collected. An operation is performed for loading the entire configuration information dataset from the first collector system of each one of the collector groups onto a second collector system of a respective one of the collector groups after the entire configuration information dataset is loaded onto the first collector system thereof. | 02-26-2009 |
20090055516 | Method and system for managing bluetooth communication using software or firmware filtering - Aspects of method and system for managing secure Bluetooth communication using software or firmware filtering are provided. In this regard, the IT or system administration may select one or more Bluetooth profiles for Bluetooth devices and inform the host software on the selection. The host software passes the information to host control interface (HCI). A Bluetooth security filter is integrated into the HCI to ensure a security policies set for the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth security filter may be part of the Bluetooth host stack or the Bluetooth host controller stack. All HCI packets such as HCI commands, HCI events and HCI data packets are parsed in the Bluetooth security filter and act upon the policies determined by the IT or system administration. | 02-26-2009 |
20090063662 | Arrangements for Auto-Merging Processing Components - In some embodiments a method for auto-configuring a network is disclosed. The method can include communicating with at least one node in a processing complex, receiving node connection data from the at least one node querying a node to verify at least a portion of the node connection data and auto-configuring system partitioning in response to the node connection data. In some embodiments the method can also include verifying the node connection data by transmitting a request for a universally unique identifier and a node identifier. The node identifier can be associated with the universally unique identifier. The node identifier can be utilized in data transmitted between nodes. | 03-05-2009 |
20090063663 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, DEVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD AND MEDIUM - The present invention in its first aspect provides a device management apparatus, which manages a virtual device that implements a cooperative function upon cooperating a plurality of physical devices connected via a network, comprising an acquisition unit adapted to acquire statuses from the physical devices that implement the cooperative function of the virtual device; and a display unit adapted to display whether or not the virtual device is usable, based on the statuses of the physical devices that implement the cooperative function of the virtual device acquired by the acquisition unit. | 03-05-2009 |
20090070439 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING A PLUGGABLE NETWORK STACK INTERFACE - The subject application is directed to a system and method for generating a pluggable network stack interface. A plurality of common network communication features associated with each of a plurality of network stacks are first mapped via a network interface stack. A network stack associated with an installed network communication component is then sensed. Features associated with a sensed network communication component are then mapped in accordance with the mapping of the plurality of common network communication features. Network services are then commenced in accordance with the output of the mapping of features associated with a sensed network communication component. Thereafter, configuration file data corresponding to commenced network services is communicated to an associated data storage. | 03-12-2009 |
20090070440 | CONTROLLING PRESENTATION ENGINE ON REMOTE DEVICE - A communication mechanism or facility for enabling interaction with, and control of, a remote presentation engine for presenting a rich media application, such as one written using animated graphics allows the presentation engine to be configured or instructed remotely to perform certain actions, to send requests, and/or to send information, independently of the animated graphics application being executed. The communication facility between a workstation enables a presentation engine to pass a request by the application for resource stored on a workstation—an image file or a data file, for example—thereby creating a virtual file system. Local resource references can thus be maintained in the application during development without having to download all resources to the device in connection with testing | 03-12-2009 |
20090070441 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMPUTER NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION - A system for simplifying the configuration and administration of computer networks. A the server system first sends a broadcast message out to the other network nodes on the computer network to learn configuration of each other network nodes on the local network. Next, network software within each other network node (not shown) responds to the broadcast message with a response containing configuration information and an identifier key value. In one embodiment, the identifier key value may be a randomly generated number. The server system then builds a table of network nodes using the information received in the response messages sent in response to the broadcast message. The server may then communicate with systems having duplicate addresses using the identifier key value. In some embodiments, the server system may send request messages to one or more network nodes specifying a network configuration change. | 03-12-2009 |
20090077206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF INSTALLING A NETWORK DEVICE - A method of installing a network device is disclosed that includes downloading installation data at a portable computing device from a communications provider server via an Internet Protocol (IP) network connection. The installation data includes a script that is adapted to establish IP connectivity between a first network device and at least a second network device. The method also includes determining, at the portable computing device, when the first network device is configured according to a communications provider specification while the portable computing device is disconnected from communicating with the communications provider server. The communications provider specification relates to providing at least one communications service to one or more customer premises. In addition, the method includes sending the script from the portable computing device to the first network device via the local connection after determining that the first network device is configured according to the communications provider specification. | 03-19-2009 |
20090077207 | MULTI-MODE CONTROLLER - Techniques for controlling and managing network access are used to enable a wireless communication device to selectively communicate with several wireless networks. A portable communication device constructed according to the invention can communicate with different networks as the device is moved through the areas of coverage supported by the different networks. As a result, the device can take advantage of services provided by a particular network when the device is within the area of coverage provided by that network. Thus, the device can selectively switch to networks that provide, for example, high speed Internet access, different quality of service, low cost service and/or different services (e.g., voice, data, multimedia, etc.). A multi-mode controller in the device may be used to alternately poll different networks to determine whether the device is within the area of coverage of a network and to selectively establish communications with those networks. | 03-19-2009 |
20090083397 | Method for Loading a Program Module into a Network Device and Network with Network Devices - A method for loading program modules into programmable network devices of a network comprises loading an ID-generator into each network device for generating a unique identification code for the network devices. Next the program modules are loaded into the network devices based on the identification codes. Thus selective programming of network devices within a network is possible. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083398 | Autonomous network device configuration method - An embodiment of the present invention comprises a method of configuring one or more target network devices for operation, that further comprises the steps of creating an object for deployment to a predetermined target network device, the object having configuration data for configuring the target network device, and at least one of identification data identifying the object, an autonomous encapsulated agent for executing necessary steps for installing the configuration data, identification data identifying the predetermined target network device, and authentication data for authenticating at least one of the predetermined target network device identification data and object identification data, transporting the object to the predetermined target network device, and the autonomous encapsulated agent begins an on-site process of installing the configuration data in the predetermined target network device. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083399 | NETWORK TRAFFIC ROUTING - A service appliance is installed between production servers running service applications and service users. The production servers and their service applications provide services to the service users. In the event that a production server is unable to provide its service to users, the service appliance can transparently intervene to maintain service availability. To maintain transparency to service users and service applications, service users are located on a first network and production servers are located on a second network. The service appliance assumes the addresses of the service users on the second network and the addresses of the production servers on the first network. Thus, the service appliance obtains all network traffic sent between the production server and service users. While the service application is operating correctly, the service appliance forwards network traffic between the two networks using various network layers. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083400 | Network Service Configuration Management - The system remotely manages the configuration of one or several network services ( | 03-26-2009 |
20090083401 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY SETTING UP CONFIGURATIONS OF HOME NETWORK - Provided are a system and method for automatically setting up configurations of a home network. The system includes a setting information manager, placed within an individual home, for collecting and managing setting information associated with configurations of the home network. The setting information manager shares the setting information with a remote setting information management server or another setting information manager. Since customized setting information of an individual home is shared, setting information of home network configurations can be effectively managed, thereby reducing costs and efforts required for maintenance and repair of the home network. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083402 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISPLAYING BROWSER IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and system are provided which enhance a browser function in a portable terminal by controlling MIME types to be received and processed according to a network condition. User's preferred one or more MIME types can be previously set. When the portable terminal is connected to the server, it determines whether data transmission rate, use state and memory use state of the portable terminal are normal or abnormal. When the communication condition is abnormal, the portable terminal can control MIME types transmitted from the server. Although all the MIME types have been already received from the server, when the use state and memory use state of the portable terminal is abnormal, the portable terminal extracts the one or more MIME types set by a user and then releases memory resources that have been already allocated, thereby enhancing the browser performance. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083403 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING VPN CONFIGURATION SERVICE - The present invention provides a method, device and system for implementing a VPN configuration service. According to the invention, a VPN configuration request message is received at a network side and a verification is performed on the VPN configuration request message with a directory service table; and the directory service table is updated after the verification is passed; and, thus, a VPN configuration is implemented. Thus, the efficiency of the VPN service is improved. Through configuring the VPN policy information, the VPN connection request of the user is limited within a closed user group and a corresponding control is performed on the VPN connection request of the user. Thus, a flexible management mode is achieved. | 03-26-2009 |
20090089405 | FILE TRANSFER VIA ELECTRONIC MESSAGE - An industrial automation system comprising an embedded system. The embedded system has hardware and firmware that enable the embedded system to perform its intended function. The hardware is adapted to enable the embedded system to communicate via a communications network. The firmware is adapted to enable the embedded systems to communicate using an Internet protocol suite. In addition, the hardware and firmware of the embedded system are adapted to enable the firmware to be revised by attaching the revisions to the firmware as an attachment to an e-mail sent to the embedded system. In addition, any information regarding the revision of the firmware, such as a problem in downloading the firmware revision, may be communicated to the sender via an e-mail program. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089406 | VIRTUAL CLUSTER BASED UPON OPERATING SYSTEM VIRTUALIZATION - Virtual clusters are based upon virtual operating systems. The physical cluster includes a plurality of physical server nodes. Each physical server node includes a plurality of physical resources and a virtualizing subsystem. The virtualizing subsystem is capable of creating separate environments that logically isolate applications from each other. The separate environments are virtual operating systems. A virtual operating system is configured on each physical server node by defining properties of the virtual operating system. A virtual cluster is composed of a plurality of virtual operating systems that are on a plurality of physical server nodes. A cluster application runs on the virtual cluster. The virtual cluster presents the plurality of virtual operating systems that compose the virtual cluster to the cluster application such that the cluster application is isolated from any other virtual operating systems that compose other virtual clusters on the plurality of physical server nodes. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089407 | Deployment Wizard - A method and apparatus are provided for collecting deployment information from a user for a multi-tier computer system. The method includes the steps of receiving a deployment size of the multi-tier system from the user and identifying a set of virtual appliances by function based upon the deployment size received from the user. The method further includes the steps of prompting the user for a name for each identified virtual appliance, collecting network information of each virtual appliance based upon the name and generating a deployment configuration file for a mandatory virtual appliance of the set of virtual appliances. | 04-02-2009 |
20090089408 | XML Router and method of XML Router Network Overlay Topology Creation - A system and method are provided for creating an XML network. As each XML router is added to the XML network, the new XML router registers with a group of existing XML routers in the network, and thereafter regularly exchanges hello messages with other XML routers in order to announce its initial and continued presence. Once an XML router is added to the group of routers forming the network, the adjacency of the new XML router is determined. The new XML router selects its adjacency based on a prioritized set of metrics, including TCP hops, IP cost, and fanout, along with specific parameters relating to fanout and IP cost. The order of priority of the metrics and the specific parameters can be set by an operator, allowing flexibility in creating an optimum XML network topology. | 04-02-2009 |
20090094349 | Device roaming on a zigbee network - An end device in a Zigbee network space is configured to roam between available Zigbee networks. When the end device determines that a quality of a current connection has fallen below a minimum threshold, the end device evaluates the network space for available networks. The end device stores a list of Zigbee networks that it is authorized to join and joins the most preferred Zigbee network, as determined by, for example, a signal strength or a stored network ranking. | 04-09-2009 |
20090094350 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE SERVICES FOR MULTIPLE MANAGED COMPUTER SYSTEMS - A method to facilitate provision of services to a managed system (e.g., a PC, PDA, cell phone) includes causing installation of an agent application on the managed system, the agent application including an install component to install at least one of a plurality of service applications on the managed system. Each of the plurality of service applications is to facilitate provision of a service provided by a respective service provider of a number of service providers to the managed system. A service input (e.g., from an IT administrator) is received at the management system. The service input identifies a subset of a number of service applications to be installed on the managed system. The subset of service applications is distributed to the managed system for installation by the agent application on the managed system. | 04-09-2009 |
20090094351 | ACCESS TERMINAL CONFIGURATION AND ACCESS CONTROL - Provisioning and access control for communication nodes involves assigning identifiers to sets of nodes where the identifiers may be used to control access to restricted access nodes that provide certain services only to certain defined sets of nodes. In some aspects provisioning a node may involve providing a unique identifier for sets of one or more nodes such as restricted access points and access terminals that are authorized to receive service from the restricted access points. Access control may be provided by operation of a restricted access point and/or a network node. In some aspects, provisioning a node involves providing a preferred roaming list for the node. In some aspects, a node may be provisioned with a preferred roaming list through the use of a bootstrap beacon. | 04-09-2009 |
20090094352 | Method and Apparatus for a Secure Network Install - A method, an apparatus, and computer instructions are provided for a secure network install. One aspect of the present invention provides a proxy server within the same subnet of the client for performing a lookup of the boot image file and downloading the boot image file from a boot file server in a secure manner. The client in turn downloads the file from the proxy TFTP server. Another aspect of the present invention modifies the client remote boot code to include a secure boot file download discovery (SBDD) mode. The client starts the SBDD mode by sending a request for a boot image file to a subnet broadcast address and port, which is listened by a proxy TFTP server. The proxy TFTP server receives the client request and downloads the boot image file. The client in turn downloads the boot image file from the proxy TFTP server. | 04-09-2009 |
20090100154 | AUTOMATICALLY INSTRUMENTING A SET OF WEB DOCUMENTS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method and system for automatically instrumenting a set of web documents, such as web pages, as well as embedding structures that present advertising content via the web pages. The instrumentation automatically embeds tags that enable usage information associated with the web documents to be tracked and recorded. Many hundreds or thousands of web pages can be automatically modified without user intervention, enabling comprehensive reporting and tracking to be performed on each page. The web pages are analyzed and insertion points intelligently located. Changes can be verified to ensure that no undesirable effects resulted from embedding the content. The tags can receive parameters customized to the level of users and pages. The tags, insertion information, and other configuration information can be stored in a central repository to make subsequent tagging easier. | 04-16-2009 |
20090100155 | METHOD AND DEVICE TO SET DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS - A device to set device configurations, and a method thereof. The method includes requesting a server for address information to be used by a device and cloning information for setting configurations, and receiving the cloning information from the server according to the address information to be used by the device and setting configurations for the device. Accordingly, when a new device is installed, the method can receive device configuration information previously stored in a server that manages devices, and can automatically set configurations for the new device. | 04-16-2009 |
20090100156 | Method and System for Configuring Settings for a Communications Client Utilizing Host Device Drivers - A system and method for configuring a client on a host device using a configuration application on a configuring device, the system comprising: a link between the configuring device and the host device; host drivers for communicating between the host device and the configuring device over the link; and an interface between the host drivers and the configuration application, wherein said interface allows said configuration application to be independent of the host drivers while allowing the configuration application to configure the client. | 04-16-2009 |
20090106401 | System and method for Intra Network Internet Protocol (IP) address modification by dual controller - An intranet IP address modification system and method for a dual controller, and is used to modify the intranet IP addresses dynamically under the condition of keeping an intranet based TCP connection of a dual controller from disruption and disconnection. Before modifying the intranet IP address, blocking all data transmission of an intranet connection simultaneously at both ends of the intranet connection of a dual controller; next, re-determining the network card IP's at both ends of the intranet connection based on a conflicting internet IP address; then, revising the intranet IP's and routing table according to the re-determined IP address, modifying correspondingly the remote terminal IP's in an ARP buffer storage and a corresponding MAC address, and modifying correspondingly portal IP address of the intranet connection; and finally, upon the completion of intranet IP address modification, resuming data transmission of the intranet connection simultaneously at both ends of the connection. | 04-23-2009 |
20090106402 | Web Service Architecture for Product Configuration - Various techniques for providing product configuration as a Web Service are disclosed. One method involves receiving a Web Service signature requesting access to a product configuration session to configure a product and accessing information representing an instance of the product, in response to receipt of the Web Service signature. A responsive Web Service signature, containing information such as the price of the instance of the product, whether the instance of the product represents a valid configuration, and/or indicative of options available to further configure the product, can be returned to the application that requested access to the session. The requester can request multiple changes to the instance of the product, and validation of those changes can be delayed until after all of the changes have been applied (as opposed to each change being validated independently). A single configurator can handle requests received via multiple different sales channels. | 04-23-2009 |
20090113027 | PERSONAL NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD AND PERSONAL NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A personal network management method wherein if an access request is received from a communication terminal exterior to a personal network and the association of communication terminal information of the access request with the corresponding terminal in the personal network has not been registered yet, then the registration as to whether the connection to the communication terminal is permissible can be dynamically performed, and wherein the procedure of a registration from a communication terminal exterior to a personal network is facilitated, and an access into the personal network also can be performed. In a network system ( | 04-30-2009 |
20090113028 | NETWORK-CENTRIC PROCESSING - In one aspect, a network-centric processing (NCP) system includes sensors configured to monitor activities associated with testing of an asset, a first system configured to provide the testing on the asset, a second system configured to provide training of personnel using the asset, a third system configured to record problems associated with the testing and the training of the asset as input for an acquisition process and a network connected to the first system, the second system, the third system and the sensors. | 04-30-2009 |
20090125611 | SHARING LOADED JAVA CLASSES AMONG A PLURALITY OF NODES - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for sharing loaded Java classes among a plurality of nodes connected together for data communications using a data communication network, the plurality of nodes including an execution node and other nodes, that include: executing, by the execution node, a Java application, including identifying a Java class utilized for the Java application; determining, by the execution node, whether the Java class is already loaded on at least one of the other nodes; retrieving, by the execution node, the loaded Java class from the other nodes if the Java class is already loaded on at least one of the other nodes; and executing, by the execution node, the Java application using the loaded Java class retrieved from the other nodes. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125612 | CONFIGURATION DOMAINS FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF WEB SERVICES AND CONSUMER PROXIES - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for configuration domains for the configuration of web services and consumer proxies. In general, data characterizing one or more web services to activate is received and run-time configurations are caused to be generated for each of the web services and each of consumer proxies for the web services. The web services are from a provider system in a group of systems having a profile having one or more policies to be adhered to by the systems. The systems may include a consumer system and the provider system. The consumer system may have one or more consumer proxies to call the web services. The run-time configurations may include one or more settings derived from the policies of the profile. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125613 | Network Router Employing Enhanced Prefix Limiting - A disclosed method of managing a provider edge (PE) router includes defining a neighbor specific prefix limit and a neighbor specific restart parameter applicable to a neighbor of the PE router. The neighbor may be a customer edge (CE) router connected to the PE router. A neighbor specific count of prefixes advertised by the CE router is monitored against the prefix limit. When a neighbor specific prefix limit violation occurs, the PE-to-CE connection is suspended for a duration determined at least in part by the restart parameter and then automatically resumed. The PE router may define an address family prefix limit and an address family restart parameter applicable to the CE router's address family. Violations of the address family prefix limit may result in temporary suspension of all connections between the PE router and the members of the address family. | 05-14-2009 |
20090125614 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - Each of presence servers | 05-14-2009 |
20090132682 | System and Method for Secure Configuration of Network Attached Devices - A system and method for supplying, to a provider of the device, requirements for information to be stored on a device, obtaining device data for provisioning the device on a network, storing device configuration information on storage associated with the network, receiving a service request from a user of the device, detecting attachment of the device to the network, authenticating the device utilizing a device identifier and shared credentials to enable the device to be configured without storing a network address for configuration in the device, providing network information to the device, and providing configuration information to the device. | 05-21-2009 |
20090132683 | DEPLOYMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM - A deployment method and system in the OS deployment software are disclosed in which the deployment is possible to server units having various hardware configurations. In a computer system, a disk image of a deployer server unit is managed by a management server and a deployee server unit is connected to the management server through a network. The hardware configuration information of the deployer server unit and a hardware configuration tolerance list obtained from a driver information file in the disk image are held in the disk image. In response to a deployment instruction from the user, the management server compares the hardware configuration of the deployer server unit with that of the deployee server unit, and by detecting the difference therebetween, changes the deployment method in accordance with the detected difference. | 05-21-2009 |
20090132684 | NORMALIZATION ENGINE AND METHOD OF REQUESTING A KEY OR PERFORMING AN OPERATION PERTAINING TO AN END POINT - A normalization engine and a method of requesting a key or performing an operation pertaining to an end point. In one embodiment, the normalization engine includes: (1) a data manager configured to receive a request to execute an operation or obtain a key/value pair pertaining to an end point and determine a normalized version of the key in the key/value pair and (2) a normalization mapping repository configured to contain normalization mechanisms, the data manager further configured to employ the normalized version to obtain one of the normalization mechanisms from the normalization mapping repository, carry out the normalization mechanism and employ a data source corresponding to the end point to retrieve a device-specific value corresponding to the normalized version. | 05-21-2009 |
20090138577 | Network operating system for managing and securing networks - Systems and methods for managing a network are described. A view of current state of the network is maintained where the current state of the network characterizes network topology and network constituents, including network entities and network elements residing in or on the network. Events are announced that correspond to changes in the state of the network and one or more network elements can be configured accordingly. Methods for managing network traffic are described that ensure forwarding and other actions taken by network elements implement globally declared network policy and refer to high-level names, independently of network topology and the location of network constituents. Methods for discovering network constituents are described, whereby are automatically configured. Routing may be performed using ACL and packets can be intercepted to permit host to continue in sleep mode. The methods are applicable to virtual environments. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138578 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING TERMINAL DEVICES - A method, system, and apparatus for managing terminal devices are disclosed. The method includes: a terminal device checks whether an actual value of its parameter is within a preset range and sends alarm information to a managing device if the actual value of the parameter exceeds the preset range. With the technical solution of the present disclosure, when the actual value of a terminal parameter exceeds the normal range (or threshold), the terminal device sends a notification to the managing device; when the parameter value changes within a preset range, the terminal device does not notify the managing device, thus reducing the load of the managing device effectively. | 05-28-2009 |
20090144399 | Setting a preliminary time on a network appliance using a message received from a server - A method and system for setting a time on a network appliance. The method may include attempting to establish a secure connection with a backend server using a certificate issued for a network appliance, and determining that an attempt to establish a secure connection has failed. The method may further include soliciting a response from one or more predefined servers, extracting time data from one or more responses received from the predefined server, and updating the time on the network appliance using the time data extracted from the received responses. | 06-04-2009 |
20090144400 | DELIVERY SERVER, CONTENT DELIVERY METHOD OF DELIVERY SERVER, BOOSTER SERVER, CONTENT DELIVERY METHOD OF BOOSTER SERVER - A delivery server includes a content output unit configured to output content, a delivery request reception unit which receives a delivery request transmitted from a client terminal connected to a network, a determination unit which determines whether the content is to be delivered to the client terminal in response to the delivery request when the delivery request is received using the delivery request reception unit, and a transmission unit which transmits the content output from the content output unit to the client terminal when the determination unit determines that the content is to be delivered, and transmit the content output from the content output unit to a booster server connected to the network and further transmit a transfer command including information on the booster server to the client terminal when the determination unit determines that the content is not to be transmitted. | 06-04-2009 |
20090144401 | Technique for Communicating by Utilizing Communication Setting Information - A communication device is configured to connect with a network including a plurality of types of external devices. The communication device is provided with a spec storage device, a type obtaining device, and a communication attempt device. The spec storage device is configured to store an association of a type of external device and a spec of communication setting information which is capable of being set in the type of external device. The type obtaining device is configured to obtain type information of each external device. The communication attempt device is configured to attempt to communicate with each external device by utilizing communication setting information which complies with the spec associated with the obtained type information of external device by the type obtaining device. | 06-04-2009 |
20090150521 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING A VIRTUAL NETWORK PATH - In general, the invention relates to a method for creating a virtual network path. The method includes instantiating a number of virtual network interface cards (VNICs) on a number of virtual machines, where each virtual machines is located in one of the computers, each of the computers is connected using a chassis interconnect, and the computers share a physical network interface. The method further includes populating a virtual switching table associated with the VNICs and implementing the virtual network path using the virtual switching table. The virtual network path includes a first virtual wire between a first VNIC and a second VNIC, wherein the first VNIC is located in a first computer and wherein the second VNIC is located in a second computer selected from the plurality of computers. | 06-11-2009 |
20090150522 | Transparent configuration of a network appliance - A method and apparatus for configuring a remotely available service. In one embodiment, the method includes downloading configuration data for the remotely available service while running a current instance of the service, and invoking a new instance of the service without causing a current instance of the service to terminate. The method may further include causing the current instance of the service to continue performing designated operations until the new instance completes initialization using the configuration data and is able to perform the designated operations. | 06-11-2009 |
20090150523 | Configuration of IP telephony and other systems - The present specification provides a configurable end-user device comprising a computing environment comprising at least one central processing unit, volatile storage, non-volatile storage, and a network interface interconnected by a bus. The network interface is connectable to one or more other end-user devices via a local area network. The end-user devices, including the configurable end-user device, for accessing at least one service that is available on a wide area network connected to the local area network. The configurable end-user device having a configuration profile storing user-associated feature sets associated with respective log-in data, each user-associated feature set defining how the configurable end-user device is to be configured when the respective log-in data is received at the configurable end-user device. Furthermore a user configuration profile server, a local configuration profile server and an aggregator are provided for storing copies of configuration profiles. | 06-11-2009 |
20090150524 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - An administrator | 06-11-2009 |
20090150525 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VERIFYING AND UPDATING THE CONFIGURATION OF AN ACCESS DEVICE DURING AUTHENTICATION - A system and method is provided to verify configuration of a client access device requesting access to a network by establishing a communications link between a network access system and the client access device to authenticate and authorize the client access device and a user associated with the client access device. The network access system further receives client device configuration data from the client access device over the communications link during an authentication and authorization exchange and processes the client device configuration data to determine if the client access device will be granted access to the network. | 06-11-2009 |
20090150526 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT OF DEVICES IN NETWORK - A method for implementing configuration management of devices in a network, device and system thereof are disclosed. The system includes first and second devices corresponding to first and second configuration management servers respectively. The method comprises: determining, by the first configuration management server corresponding to the first device, that the second configuration management server corresponding to the second device can perform configuration management on the first device; triggering, by the second configuration management server corresponding to the second device, the configuration management operation on the first device. In the case that the configuration management servers corresponding to different devices are not the same, a configuration management solution is accordingly provided. For example, in a DSL system, the configuration management server of the device can not only automatically configure and mange the device, but also manage and configure the device and services of the device on the gateway. | 06-11-2009 |
20090157851 | Migrating Port-Specific Operating Parameters During Blade Server Failover - Migrating port-specific operating parameters during blade server failover including querying, by a system management server of a data center, a switch for port-specific operating parameters of a first port, the data center comprising blade servers coupled for data communications to one another and to the system management server by a network, the system management server comprising a computer subsystem that automates server management processes in the data center, the switch comprising a data communications component of the network, the switch comprising ports, the ports comprising physical points of connection between the switch and blade servers, each port having associated port-specific operating parameters, the switch connected at the first port to a failing blade server; and assigning, by the system management server, the port-specific operating parameters to a second port in a same switch or another switch connected at the second port to a replacement blade server. | 06-18-2009 |
20090157852 | FLEXIBLE AND SCALABLE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC SUBSCRIBER SERVICES CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus is described for configuring a network element for providing services for subscribers by dynamically generating a set of one or more internal network attributes based on a set of relatively simple attributes passed from a server. | 06-18-2009 |
20090157853 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR CAPACITY ON-DEMAND SERVER MECHANISM FOR SEAMLESS 3D VIRTUAL WORLDS - Systems, methods and computer program products for a capacity on-demand server mechanism for seamless 3D virtual worlds. Exemplary embodiments include a method including, partitioning the 3D world into the domains, associating each of the domains with a server relating each of the partitioned domains to nodes of a graph, storing a list of edges adjacent the domain, storing each list of edges associated with each of the servers in a central management server, performing a node split, performing an edge contraction, transferring data among the domains, determining an effect in the one or more of the domains in response to the interaction of an object with the domains, determining a location of the object in the domains by analyzing a pointer associated with each of the edges and updating each of the servers associated with the domains through which the object has interacted. | 06-18-2009 |
20090157854 | ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT PROTOCOL - Exemplary embodiments of the present invention provide a method comprising receiving, at a node, an address assignment message, allocating, by the node, a predetermined address interval of an available address space to a respective port of the node which predetermined address interval is defined in the address assignment message, and assigning at least one address for performing communication via a respective port starting with a center address of the predetermined address interval of the available address space allocated for the port concerned. Further, exemplary embodiments of the present invention also relate to respective devices and system. | 06-18-2009 |
20090164608 | File sharing system and file sharing system setting method - The file sharing system of the present invention can collectively carry out the settings for a primary NAS and a secondary NAS by sending a plurality of pieces of configuration information to the respective NAS from a setting device. The configuration information setting device sends NAS configuration information, disk configuration information, snapshot configuration information, and remote copy configuration information to the primary NAS and the secondary NAS in a prescribed order. The respective NAS determine whether or not the respective configuration information received from the configuration information setting device can be realized, and when the determination is that this configuration information is realizable, respectively set the configuration information in their own devices. | 06-25-2009 |
20090172133 | CONTROL POINTS FOR CONTROLLING DEVICES IN A NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for a control point of initiating actions on a device in a communication network comprising at least two control points both adapted to control said device. Further, the present invention relates to a method for a device of initiating actions on said device in a communication network comprising at least two control points both adapted to control said device. Further, the present invention relates to a control point of initiating actions on a device in a communication network comprising at least two control point both adapted to control said device. Further, the present invention relates to a device in a communication network comprising at least two control points both adapted to control said device based on action requests received from a control point along with control point identification. | 07-02-2009 |
20090172134 | AUTOMATED PROVISIONING SYSTEM - An automated provisioning system for provisioning a service or device in a communications network, which system comprises a listener ( | 07-02-2009 |
20090177762 | NETWORK DEVICE, NETWORK SYSTEM, IPv6 ADDRESS ASSIGNING METHOD, AND NETWORK DEVICE MANAGING METHOD - To explicitly identify network devices without providing a database server using an IPv6 address. An IPv6 address for address management on a network is set in a network device connected to an IPv6 network and the network device keeps and maintains the address. An interface ID | 07-09-2009 |
20090187641 | Optimization of network protocol options by reinforcement learning and propagation - In one embodiment, a method for optimization of network protocol options with reinforcement learning and propagation is disclosed. The method comprises: interacting, by a learning component of a server of a network, with one or more clients and an environment of the network; conducting, by the learning component, different trials of one or more options in different states for network communication via a protocol of the network; receiving, by the learning component, performance feedback for the different trials as rewards; and utilizing, by the learning component, the different trials and associated resulting rewards to improve a decision-making policy associated with the server for negotiation of the one or more options. Other embodiments are also described. | 07-23-2009 |
20090187642 | CONFIGURATION PROFILING FOR REMOTE CLIENTS - A method and system for a securely gathering and sharing metrics on configurations of client systems. In one embodiment, a system includes a client that determines which components are installed in the client. The client receives, from a user, rating information for individual components in the client, and generates a configuration profile. The configuration profile includes a unique identifier of the client such as a universally unique identifier (UUID), rating information received from the user, and component information for which rating information was received. The configuration profile is sent to a server that stores the configuration profile in a database. The server can send to the client, in response to receiving the configuration profile, received rating information provided from other users having types of components in common with components provided in the configuration profile. | 07-23-2009 |
20090187643 | System and Method for Configuring Networked Enterprise Information Handling System Solutions From a Product and Options Template - Networked enterprise information handling system solutions are configured by reference to a components template having plural components, each component having one or more associated attributes, such as in an XML structure. A selector interface provides end user access to the component template to accept end user inputs for products and constraints. A configuration engine applies selected products and constraints to products and constraints of the component template to automatically generate an enterprise solution of networked information handling systems. | 07-23-2009 |
20090187644 | Address distribution system and method and program for the same - An internal unit acquires a first internal use address and uses the first internal use address to acquire a second internal use address. When receiving a notification of change of IP address from the main unit, the internal unit uses the second internal use address as a first internal use address to acquire a new second internal use address from the main unit. | 07-23-2009 |
20090187645 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MULTI-PATH INPUT/OUTPUT IN A CLUSTERED DATA STORAGE NETWORK - A network storage system is provided. A storage server system can comprise at least two data storage servers. Each server can comprise a network interface operable to transmit/receive communications to/from a network infrastructure; at least one data storage device; a processor operable to receive, from said network interface; an iSCSI network command and generate, to carry out said iSCSI network command, one or more device specific commands for said at least one data storage device. Each server can further comprise a host computer containing a host network interface operable to transmit/receive network communications; and a host processor operable to receive a storage command; determine if said at least two data storage servers are needed; generate one or more iSCSI network commands; and transmit said one or more iSCSI network commands to each of said at least two data storage servers using said host network interface. | 07-23-2009 |
20090193102 | AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING A NETWORK DEVICE DURING A DISSIMILAR SYSTEM RESTORE - Various embodiments of a system and method for restoring a backup image to a target computer system such that a network device of the target computer system is automatically configured with network settings specified in the backup image are disclosed. A backup image created from a first computer system may be restored to a second computer system, where the backup image includes first network settings for a first network device of the first computer system. The method may comprise configuring an operating system setup program to automatically apply the first network settings to a second network device of the second computer system, and invoking execution of the operating system setup program. | 07-30-2009 |
20090198796 | Layered Architectures for Remote Dynamic Administration of Distributed Client Configurations - This description provides tools related to layered architectures for remote dynamic administration of distributed client configurations. These tools provide methods that may include subscribing to have online configuration services remotely manage applications installed on client systems. The methods may also include receiving dynamically-updated lists from the online configuration services, with these lists including the installed applications. The methods may also receive configuration payloads that specify how to configure the installed applications, and may configure the installed applications based on these configuration payloads. The methods may also present user interfaces on the client systems, with the user interfaces including the configured applications. The tools also provide methods that may include receiving subscription information from the customer sites, with the subscription information indicating that the customer sites have subscribed to the online configuration services. The methods may also include sending the dynamically-updated lists and the configuration payloads to the customer sites. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198797 | NETWORK DEVICE PROVISIONING USING DOCUMENTS - Described is a technology by which a network device uses a document to provide its device description information to a network entity upon connection to a network. From the device description information, the device is provisioned, via a provisioning document by which the device configures itself for interaction with the network. In one example, the documents are XML-based documents each referenced via a uniform resource locator. In one implementation, a discovery agent detects a device broadcasting a discovery message on a network. The discovery agent determines whether the device has been previously provisioned on the network, (and is not being re-provisioned). If so, an assigned network server is directed to take over interaction with the device. If not, the discovery agent provides data to a provisioning agent that provisions the device by providing a device provisioning document by which the device configures itself for interaction with the network. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198798 | HANDHELD COMPUTING UNIT BACK-UP SYSTEM - A computing device includes a handheld computing unit and an extended computing unit. The extend computing unit stores a digital replica of an operational handheld computing unit. When the handheld computing unit is operably coupled to the extended computing unit and is in a configure mode, the handheld computing unit retrieves the digital replica of the operational handheld computing unit and configures itself in accordance with the digital replica the operational handheld computing unit. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198799 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING A ROUTE - The embodiment of the present invention provides a method for establishing a route, which includes searching a target node by a node from a first level node group according to first level route information, returning to query a result or data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise executing the following step; searching a target node by the node from a higher level node group according to higher level route information, returning to query a result or the data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise repeating the step. Through the hierarchical communication system, most of the flows of daily service operations in the communication network are limited within a small region, thereby preventing from excessively occupying the band width of a backbone network being originally not wide enough. | 08-06-2009 |
20090204691 | USAGE OF HOST GENERATING INTERFACE IDENTIFIERS IN DHCPv6 - The present invention provides a local area network system including a computational device or a host, a network apparatus and communication channel (e.g. router). The invention also provides a method for configuring IPv6 addresses in the host. The method includes separating a prefix assignment from generation of an interface identifier. The prefix may be stored in a DHCPv6 server. The procedure further includes requesting the prefix from the DHCPv6 server by the host, generating the interface identifier in the host, and combining the prefix and the generated interface identifier to formulate an IP address in the host, registering the IP address in the DHCPv6 server, and granting the usage of the IP address to the host by the DHCPv6 server. | 08-13-2009 |
20090210518 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DYNAMICALLY PROVISIONING A DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP) CLIENT AS A CLIENTLESS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVICES (CLIPS) SUBSCRIBER ON A LAST-RESORT INTERFACE - Methods and apparatuses for providing clientless IP services for subscribers on a network interface that does not require either explicit client subnet configurations or explicit routes from the interface to the client subnets. | 08-20-2009 |
20090210519 | EFFICIENT AND TRANSPARENT REMOTE WAKEUP - Systems and methods that facilitate remote wake up are described that provide for efficient and transparent wake up of target hosts by remote hosts. In various embodiments, a separate address can be used by a target host for wake up network traffic, which is different from a regular address associated with a target host for normal network communications. In addition, the disclosed subject matter facilitates controlling wake up operations according to trust, identity, and/or a wake up policy. | 08-20-2009 |
20090216862 | Method for the remote configuration of voice over ip telephone - A method for the remote configuration of a voice over IP device (“voIP device”) on a local TCP/IP network, which can be implemented in software. The method includes a preliminary step of asking a user to select a voIP device from a list of one or more different voIP devices downloaded from a remote database using an Internet connection. The list can be regularly updated as new voIP devices come onto the market. The local TCP/IP network is analyzed to determine one or more network settings. The method then downloads a configuration module specific to the voIP device selected by the user from a remote database using the Internet connection. The configuration module is used to determine one or more configuration parameters for the voIP device. Finally, the one or more network settings and the one or more configuration parameters are used to automatically configure the voIP device for use on the local TCP/IP network. | 08-27-2009 |
20090216863 | Performance Optimization Of Business Processes By Stochastic Environmental Changes - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for optimizing applications, such as applications included in a business process. In one aspect, there is provided a computer-implemented method. The method may include receiving information representative of one or more interfaces and aspects of each of the interfaces. The interfaces may be adjustable by a business process supervisor. The business process supervisor may adjust one or more aspects of the one or more interfaces. The results of the adjustment may be received and used to determine optimum settings to the one or more interfaces. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 08-27-2009 |
20090216864 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS, FOR AUTOMATICALLY FINDING CONFIGURATION SETTINGS FOR SERVICES - An apparatus may include a processor configured to receive an indication of a service and determine whether configuration settings for the indicated service are previously stored. The processor may be further configured to retrieve stored configuration settings for the indicated service if configuration settings for the indicated service are previously stored and to receive suggested configuration settings for the indicated service if configuration settings for the indicated service are not previously stored. The processor may additionally be configured to verify the stored or suggested configuration settings and to store the verified configuration settings in association with the indicated service. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 08-27-2009 |
20090234936 | Dual-Band Communication Of Management Traffic In A Blade Server System - In one embodiment, a communication system for a multi-blade server system includes a multi-drop serial bus network interconnecting a management module with each of a plurality of servers in a multi-server chassis. A first transceiver subsystem is configured for communicating over the serial bus network between the management module and each server within a first frequency band. A second transceiver subsystem is configured for simultaneously communicating over the serial bus network between the management module and the servers within a second frequency band higher than the first frequency band. A first signal-filtering subsystem substantially filters out signals in the second frequency band from the first transceiver subsystem. A second signal-filtering subsystem substantially filters out the signals in the first frequency band from the second transceiver subsystem. | 09-17-2009 |
20090234937 | OPTIMIZATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system comprises a configuration manager which includes an optimizer for performing a Radio Access Network (RAN) optimization process. An optimization characteristic for the RAN optimization process and operational data for a plurality of remote terminals is determined, and based on this information a grouping processor determines a plurality of groups of remote terminals. A policy processor determines an operational policy for each of the groups in response to the optimization characteristic and the operational data and a policy distributor transmits the operational policy of each group to at least the remote terminals in the group. Each remote terminal then continues to operate in accordance with the operational policy of the group to which the remote terminal belongs. The invention may typically allow improved performance and specifically may allow operation to be adapted to the specific optimization processes being performed. The invention is suitable for a heterogeneous communication system. | 09-17-2009 |
20090240788 | Ethernet Virtualization Using Automatic Self-Configuration of Logic - A method of Ethernet virtualization using automatic self-configuration of logic of a data router. The method comprising maintaining control parameters at a master device, accessing, by a slave device, the control parameters at the master devices, and configuring the slave device based on the accessed control parameters. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240789 | Method and system for removing a tunnel between portal points - Systems and methods of removing a tunnel created when a client having an active IP session with a first portal point in a first subnet of a network, disconnects from the first portal point and reconnects to a second portal point in a second subnet of the network, the client maintaining an IP address assigned to it by the first subnet, embodiments of the method including the steps of determining whether data is scheduled to transfer from the second portal point to the client; if no data is scheduled, disconnecting the client from the second portal point; deactivating the IP session, whereby the IP address is released to the first subnet; removing the tunnel; reconnecting the client to the second portal point; and activating a second IP session between the client and the second portal point, whereby a second IP address is assigned to the client by the second subnet. | 09-24-2009 |
20090248840 | NETWORK TOPOLOGY DETECTION USING A SERVER - Various technologies and techniques are disclosed for automatically detecting whether a local network that a computer is connected to is a public or private network by utilizing a trusted online service and/or heuristics. Techniques are also described for detecting whether or not two computers are connected to the same local area network. | 10-01-2009 |
20090248841 | UNIQUE PREFIX ASSIGNMENT WITH AUTOMATIC ADDRESS CONFIGURATION | 10-01-2009 |
20090254636 | VIRTUAL ARRAY SITE CONFIGURATION - A method, system, and computer program product of configuring a virtual array site on a remote storage server is provided. The virtual array site provides on-demand storage capacity to a local storage server of a customer. The method includes creating a virtual array. The virtual array incorporates an attribute selectable by the customer. A virtual extent pool is created. The virtual extent pool is associated with the virtual array. A volume associated with the virtual extent pool is created. The volume comprises at least a portion of the virtual array site. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254637 | CODING METHOD OF VECTOR NETWORK ADDRESS - A coding method of vector network address (VNA), which encodes the VNA according to output port names (OPN) of one source device and the forwarding devices along the Data Transmission Path (DTP). Each OPN acts as a component address, and all component addresses compose a sequence in the order along the direction of the DTP. This sequence is the result of the coding method, i.e. the VNA. More specifically, the VNA is a finite sequence as follows: The first component address in the sequence is the OPN of the source device, the second that is the OPN of the first forwarding device in the DTP, the third that is the OPN of the second forwarding device in the DTP, and so on. The final OPN in the sequence is the OPN of the final forwarding device in the DTP. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254638 | Topology Aware Content Delivery Network - A method of assigning a server to a client system includes determining an ingress point of the client system and identifying possible egress points for the client system. The method further includes selecting the server from a plurality of servers to reduce network cost and delivery time. | 10-08-2009 |
20090254639 | CONFIGURING NETWORK SETTINGS USING PORTABLE STORAGE MEDIA - A portable computer-readable media device and method of use enable automatic configuration of a computing device, such as a conventional network device or a thin client device, for operation in a network. Configuration information, including network settings and security information, is incorporated in an XML file written to the portable media device while it is installed in a first device. This configuration is then automatically transferred to a second device by installing the portable media device in the second device. The second device then writes device information, incorporated in an XML file, to the portable media device, to be uploaded to the first device. | 10-08-2009 |
20090259734 | DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, A DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND A DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SERVER - A distribution management system is provided which can have a high software distribution efficiency by using client terminals substituting for software distribution relay and can reliably collect distribution results without depending upon the statuses of client terminals. A distribution management server groups a plurality of representative clients in charge of software distribution relay, and changes assignment of software distribution target client terminals by monitoring the distribution execution status of each representative client terminal. Further, the client terminal can reliably notify the distribution result to the distribution management server in accordance with a list of grouped representative client terminals. Furthermore, for the client terminal not notifying the distribution result even if the notice term expires, a distribution result notice representative client terminal is set further so that the distribution result can be reliably notified to the distribution management server. | 10-15-2009 |
20090259735 | Cookie Management Systems and Methods - A cookie management system serves as a central storage location for information and other data on users. A user's machine contains a cookie having a key and the cookie management system associates user information with this key. Upon receiving a request from a user, a web site retrieves the key from the user's machine and queries the cookie management system for the user information. The cookie management system retrieves the data associated with the key and returns the user information to the site. The sites therefore do not need to store information on all users nor do they need to place their own cookies on the user's machine. If sites obtain more data about a user during an interaction, the sites send this data to the cookie management system which updates its database. The user's machine may contain multiple cookies that correspond to different people and the site can prompt the user to select the appropriate one. The cookies may correspond to the same user and specify different amounts or categories of information. The user may supply a password to enable sites to access their data from the cookie management system. | 10-15-2009 |
20090265449 | Method of Computer Clustering - A method for clustering comprising acquiring the required number of nodes for cluster formation based on node selection criteria; electing a cluster coordinator; and assigning the packages on the member nodes. The cluster coordinator is elected based on the mean time between failures value of the member nodes which may be calculated with the help of a diagnostic tool by logging the failure instances of the member nodes. | 10-22-2009 |
20090271503 | System and Method for Customizing Settings in a Communication Device for a User - The illustrative embodiments described herein provide a method, apparatus, and computer program product for customizing settings in a communication device for a user. In one illustrative embodiment, the process identifies a user profile to which a user belongs. The process identifies a set of custom communication device settings associated with the user profile. The process also sets a current set of communication device settings for a set of functions in a communication device to the set of custom communication device settings. In one embodiment, identifying the user profile to which the user belongs includes identifying the user profile to which the user belongs based on one or more characteristics of the user. | 10-29-2009 |
20090271504 | Techniques for agent configuration - Described are techniques for monitoring the performance, security and health of a system used in an industrial application. Agents on components included in the industrial network report data to an appliance or server. The agents on a component may include a configuration agent and one or more other agents. The configuration agent receives agent configuration data that may be communicated at a network application level. The agent configuration data may include information used to configure the configuration agent and other agents on the component. The configuration agent may be disabled. Once disabled, the configuration agent cannot be used to further modify agent configuration data as applied to the configuration agent and the one or more other agents until re-enabled. | 10-29-2009 |
20090271505 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXECUTING THIRD PARTY MODULE WITH WEB SERVERS - A computer-implemented system that can support executing a third party module with Web Servers comprises one or more web server instances, a third party module that interacts with the one or more web server instances, and an execution environment that contains a web server wrapper instance that can encapsulate a web server instance of the one or more web server instances. The web server wrapper instance is associated with a web server configuration tool that can configure the one or more web server instances based on the third party module. | 10-29-2009 |
20090276506 | GENERATING DOCUMENT TEMPLATES THAT ARE ROBUST TO STRUCTURAL VARIATIONS - A template or wrapper tree for a document such as a web page is generalized from the bottom up (from leaf toward root of a logical tree structure of the template). At a given level in the tree, sub-trees are clustered and the clustered sub-trees are generalized, and the process is repeated at a next higher level in the tree, resulting in a generalized template or wrapper tree. This can be done by generating a nested pattern regular expression based on the sub-tree clusters, merging sub-trees based on the nested pattern regular expression, and then replacing sub-trees in a tree-based regular expression of the template or wrapper at the given level with the merged subtrees. This process is repeated at a next higher level of the tree (progressing from leaf towards root) until the wrapper or tree-based regular expression that represents the template is fully generalized. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276507 | PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME - A peer-to-peer (P2P) network system and a method of operating the P2P network system are provided. The P2P network system includes at least one edge peer storing resources and at least one super peer sharing and managing resource information corresponding to the resources of the at least one edge peer. By updating changes in characteristics of peers due to elimination and movement of any one of a plurality of edge peers and super peers included in the P2P network, path reconfiguration may be performed efficiently. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276508 | Automatic address assignment apparatus, control method, and program - When an automatic address assignment apparatus is operating in a network, another automatic address assignment apparatus stops the automatic address assignment service thereof. When a wireless LAN access point which functions as an automatic address assignment apparatus (DHCP server device) sends a DHCP discover message on the network and a DHCP offer message is returned as a response therefor, and when the address of the transmission source of the DHCP offer message does not match the IP address thereof, it is determined that another DHCP server exists on the network, and the DHCP server service of the former DHCP server is stopped. Thus, by avoiding contention with another DHCP server and by preventing confusion of the network, a wireless LAN access point suitable, in particular, for use in a small-scale office or a home network managed by an ordinary user having no knowledge of IP can be formed. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276509 | Method and Apparatus for Operating a Host Computer in a Network Environment - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus that utilize a portable apparatus to operate a host computer in a network environment. The portable apparatus including an operating system and a list of software applications are installed in a removable data storage medium. The basic input/output system (BIOS) of the host computer will directly or indirectly identify the portable apparatus as its boot drive. The host computer immersed in a network environment will further load the operating system in the portable apparatus into its random access semiconductor memory (RAM). In one embodiment of the invention, a hardware profile which contains host and peripheral device-related information is either stored or operatively accessible by the host computer. The operating system is capable of incorporating information from the hardware profile during an OS-loading procedure. | 11-05-2009 |
20090276510 | System and Method for Network Design - A system and method for network design are disclosed. In one embodiment of a method incorporating teachings of the present disclosure, embedded network information describing at least one existing network element and a plurality of physical locations available for locating new network nodes may be received. A demand forecast for a coverage area of a proposed network may also be received. In an embodiment in which a proposed network has a core layer, a number of core layer nodes to be included in the proposed network may also be received. In an embodiment in which a proposed network has an aggregation layer, a number of aggregator layer nodes to include in the proposed network may be calculated by adding a positive integer to a lower bound number of aggregator layer nodes. Consideration may be given to these and other inputs in connection with generating a network design. | 11-05-2009 |
20090282129 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEFINING A POLICY ENABLED NETWORK - A system and method for communicating with network devices without regard to the device type and/or manufacturer is described. In one embodiment, the present invention provides a global graphical user interface (GUI) for communicating with various network devices. The global GUI includes an intuitive interface driven by a template library. For each device type and each device manufacturer, this template library can store both the attribute fields required for device configuration and the format for communicating those attribute fields. When a network administrator wants to communicate with a particular network device, the template associated with that device can be retrieved from the template library. The network administrator can then populate the attribute fields of that template with the appropriate data. This attribute data can be formatted and provided to the network device. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282130 | RESOURCE SHARING VIA CLOSE-PROXIMITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system for sharing information between users and/or devices via close-proximity wireless communication. Devices located in close-proximity may be configured to transmit/receive wireless messages including information used to configure at least one of the devices. The configuration information may include, for example, information needed to add another user and/or device to a network group residing on the device receiving the configuration information. The configuration information may also serve other purposes, for example, to grant access to a resource located remotely to the device receiving the configuration information so that this wireless-enabled apparatus may remotely access and/or control the remote resource. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282131 | Medical system architecture - A medical system architecture with a communication network for data transmission for a better and more comprehensive diagnosis of patients is provided. The medical system architecture includes at least one first modality for acquiring in-vivo examination images, a processing apparatus assigned to the modality for processing the examination images, a transmission apparatus for transmitting the examination images, at least one second modality for acquiring in-vitro examination data, a processing facility assigned to the second modality for processing the examination data and a transmission apparatus for transmitting the examination data, and at least one storage apparatus for storing the examination images and the examination data. | 11-12-2009 |
20090287798 | System and Method for Configuring Devices for Wireless Communication - A system and method for configuring devices for wireless communication are disclosed. A method may include detecting one or more available wireless access points. The method may also include accessing filtering information including at least one of (a) factory default information identifying one or more factory defaults for each available wireless access point and (b) a secured status of each available wireless access point. The method may also include filtering the available wireless access points based on at least the accessed filtering information. The method may further include selecting one of the filtered wireless access points as an associated wireless access point to be associated with an information handling system based on at least one of (a) a signal strength of each filtered available wireless access points and (b) a user input. | 11-19-2009 |
20090287799 | PROGRAM DEPLOYMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD - With a program deployment apparatus that is connected via a network to at least one physical server including a physical server with a virtualization facility for providing a virtual server to a client and deploys a program to the at least one physical server as necessary, and by a program deployment method for such a program deployment apparatus for deploying a program to the at least one physical server as necessary, one or more nodes which are connected via the network and are any of the physical server, the virtualization facility, and the virtual server are detected, first configuration information about a virtual layer of each detected node is acquired for each detected node, and the program is selectively deployed to the relevant node based on the first configuration information for each acquired node. | 11-19-2009 |
20090287800 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING NETWORK DEVICES - A method for managing network devices includes: after detecting that a primary network device is connected to a network management device, sending an information query to a secondary network device to query the management configuration information of the primary network device; receiving response information sent by the secondary network device in response to the information query, where the response information includes the management configuration information of the primary network device; using the management configuration information to manage the primary network device. | 11-19-2009 |
20090287801 | Multicomputer System and Method for the Configuration of a Multicomputer System - To configure a multicomputer system with a plurality of computers, at least one computer group is set for providing each service, wherein a first one of the computers, on which runs an agent, assigned to the corresponding service and the corresponding computer group, is assigned to each computer group. A request from at least one of the agents is received by a central control unit. The request concerns the provision of at least one additional computer to the computer group to which the requesting agent is assigned. An assessment value is determined for each of a plurality of possible configurations of the multicomputer system that satisfy the request. From the set of determined assessment values, a superior assessment value is determined. The multicomputer system is then configured in a configuration associated with the superior assessment value. | 11-19-2009 |
20090292792 | MANAGEMENT INFON, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention relates to a computer readable medium containing a management infon modeling an execution result of a management activity in a communications network. The management infon comprises a descriptor of the management activity, at least one value representing a managed object involved in the management activity and an indication of the execution result of the management activity. The invention further relates to a method for workflow management in a communications network comprising the steps of executing a management activity defined by at least one workflow, creating a management infon modeling an execution result of the management activity and managing said at least one workflow using said management infon. The invention also relates to a computer system in a communications network comprising a processor for executing a function creating a management infon modeling an execution result of a management activity. | 11-26-2009 |
20090300147 | SYNTHETIC BRIDGING - A method of creating a synthetic bridge ( | 12-03-2009 |
20090300148 | Configuration data deployment control systems and methods - Methods and systems of controlling distribution of configuration data are disclosed. One method includes receiving a request for configuration data for storage in a memory of a programmable circuit useable in a device, the configuration data controlling one or more operational characteristics of the device. The method also includes determining operational capabilities of the device based on the contents of a configuration database. The method further includes generating a single-use configuration data file. The configuration data file containing configuration data includes an identifier of the device, an identifier of the programmable circuit, and configuration data configured to define operational characteristics of the device. Various encryption techniques can be employed as well. | 12-03-2009 |
20090307336 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A SEQUENTIAL SYNCHRONIZATION HIERARCHY AMONG NETWORKED DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for implementing a sequential synchronization hierarchy among networked devices are disclosed. An example synchronization method disclosed herein comprises configuring a first networked node to be a parent node associated directly with second and third networked nodes configured to be respective first and second direct child nodes, selecting other networked nodes to be a set of indirect child nodes associated indirectly with the parent node through the first direct child node, and configuring the parent node to send information undergoing synchronization to the direct child nodes sequentially based on a plurality of hierarchical synchronization levels associated with the direct child nodes, but to not send the information to the set of indirect child nodes, wherein the first direct child node is to propagate the information to the set of indirect child nodes while the parent node is to send the information to the second direct child node. | 12-10-2009 |
20090307337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEVICE IDENTIFICATION - According to one aspect, a device identification system is provided for automatically identifying mobile devices and providing data which may be used to optimise content or services to be provided to the mobile device. According to some embodiments, a system is provided for implementing a method for device identification wherein a mobile content server requests device identification from a local device identifying station, which attempts to find matching identification data in a locally stored repository. According to one embodiment, in the event that matching data is found, the local station transmits matching identification data to the content server; in the event that matching data is not found, the local station transmits the received data to a central identifying station, receives device identifying data from the central identifying station and transmits the received device identification data to the server. | 12-10-2009 |
20090313356 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUCTION AND USE OF DECORATED NETWORKING IDENTIFIER - A method and apparatus are provided for producing a decorated networking identifier at a client terminal for transmission to a server side element. The networking identifier is obtained at the client terminal. The networking identifier is appended with one or more extensible decorations at the client terminal creating the decorated networking identifier. The one or more extensible decorations are separated from the networking identifier by a first predetermined character. The one or more decorations each include a decoration sequence and an identifier corresponding to the decoration sequence. The identifier and the decoration sequence are separated by a second predetermined character. The decorated networking identifier is transmitted from the client terminal to the server side element. | 12-17-2009 |
20090313357 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BETWEEN USER-NETWORK OF OTHER TECHNOLOGY AND DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM PROXY SERVER FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - The present invention relates to a method for establishing a connection between heterogeneous user-networks and a domain name system proxy server for controlling the same. The present invention has features of providing a method for supporting communication between user-computers included in Internet-compatible heterogeneous networks through a gateway based on an Internet public network and a domain name system proxy server for controlling the method. According to the present invention, supporting mutual communication between various networks based on one network can be expected. | 12-17-2009 |
20090319640 | PORTABLE DEVICE INTEGRATED WITH A PROVISIONING APPLICATION TO AID IN DISCOVERY OF NON-NETWORK ATTACHED RESOURCES AND PROVIDE SUGGESTIONS FOR PHYSICAL SETUP OF THE RESOURCES BASED ON DATA CENTER NEEDS - A portable, e.g. handheld, device that would assist in the discovery of hardware ‘in the box’, and non-connected resources in general, by using detection methods such as scanning a barcode, manually entering a UPC, or detecting an RFID tag on the asset or resource, and then recommending the physical location, cabling and other setup information based on datacenter needs and real-time load information and displaying the instructions on the portable device. The above-mentioned portable device may also include a GPS receiver to locate various resources, i.e. pieces of hardware, based on their location in a large datacenter. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319641 | Method, apparatus and system for registering a terminal with an application server in an IMS - Method for registering a terminal with an application server being a member of a pool of available application servers in an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, interconnected through a network, for providing services to the terminal, the method comprising: receiving a registration request from the terminal, selecting in accordance with a predefined set of rules comprising at least two rules, an application server for servicing a requested service to the terminal; and registering the terminal with the selected application server. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319642 | WIRELESS NETWORK FACILITATOR AND MONITOR - Techniques are presented for facilitating and monitoring wireless network connections. Clients and intermediate nodes are configured to interact with one another via network connections. Initially, the clients wirelessly connect to a select one of the intermediate nodes. Tests may be periodically issued to the clients and to the intermediate nodes to measure and track performance and quality of the network connections. Billing records may also be recorded and billing policies verified for client activities occurring during the network connections. | 12-24-2009 |
20090327455 | RESOURCE CONFIGURATION METHOD, SERVER, NETWORK EQUIPMENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A resource configuration method, a server, a network equipment, and a network system are provided. The resource configuration method includes performing a resource configuration on a network equipment according to a resource requirement of the network equipment and updated resource configuration information. The resource configuration information includes resource registration information reported by each of network equipments in a network. By implementing the present invention, the number of lookups for the resources is reduced and the process thereof is shortened, thereby achieving an effective resource allocation. In the case that an update frequency is fast enough, a search for resources is realized by one lookup. With such dynamic resource configuration information, the resource allocation is performed quickly and the waste of processing capacity of the server is avoided effectively. | 12-31-2009 |
20100005158 | Network address assignment - In a non-limiting and exemplary embodiment, a method is provided for network address assignment. A network address request is received with an indication of a specific network address space. A network address belonging to the specific network address space may be assigned in response to detecting the indication in the received request. A response to the network address request is transmitted, the response indicating the assigned network address. | 01-07-2010 |
20100011094 | Systems and Methods of Detecting Non-Colocated Subscriber Devices - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving address configuration information for each of a plurality of subscriber devices associated with the same customer account. The method also comprises identifying, using the address configuration information, any of the subscriber devices that are not colocated with the other subscriber devices associated with the same customer account. | 01-14-2010 |
20100011095 | Method for reproducing configuration of a computer system in a remote site - A computer system that has formerly handled a service is quickly reproduced with another computer system to resume the service immediately. The association relations between services run by a primary site ( | 01-14-2010 |
20100023602 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING INFORMATION ON AN EMBEDDED SYSTEM - A target system is dynamically configured to boot from a network connection upon power-up. A portable data loader connected to the target system may receive communications from the target system that a connection has been established. In response, a copy of a target-specific software data loader (SWDL) application may be transmitted from the portable data loader to the target system. The copy of the SWDL application may be stored in volatile memory on the target system and may be executed to support at least one maintenance operation. A user may invoke a maintenance operation by entering a command into the portable data loader. By isolating the data loader application from the operational software stored on the target system, the disclosed methods and apparatus may allow for reduced development and software certification costs for implementing maintenance operations on an embedded system. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023603 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVISIONING A COMMUNICATION CLIENT - According to embodiments of the present invention, there is provided a method, system and apparatus for provisioning a communication client. The method comprises receiving via a communication network a request from the communication client. The method further comprises determining a positioning object associated with the communication client. The method further comprises, based on the positioning object, determining a subscription profile associated with the communication client. The method further comprises, based on the subscription profile, compiling a configuration file. | 01-28-2010 |
20100030874 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURE STATE NOTIFICATION FOR NETWORKED DEVICES - The subject application is directed to a secure state notification system and method for networked devices. Security settings associated with networked devices are each self tested by the corresponding networked device. Report data is then generated by each of the networked devices from the output of the self testing. A network message is then generated by each of the networked devices via an associated network interface in accordance with the generated report data. A network message is then received from each networked device into an associated administrative device, and a display is generated on the administrative device corresponding to the report data in accordance with each received network message. | 02-04-2010 |
20100030875 | Method and System For Remote Device Management - A system for remote device management includes in a network an auto-configuration server managing device, at least one database, and a plurality of auto-configuration servers. The auto-configuration server managing device and the database are coupled in a communicative connection. The database holds information for identification of electronic devices. The auto-configuration server managing device is arranged for communication with a manageable electronic device over the network. The auto-configuration server manager is further being arranged for:
| 02-04-2010 |
20100042703 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSIGNING ADDRESSES TO NODES OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK TREE STRUCTURE - The invention relates to a method for assigning addresses to nodes of a communication network tree structure, wherein each node corresponds to a network device of the communication network, comprising a step of determining first tree parameters (C | 02-18-2010 |
20100049836 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION INFORMATION GENERATION FOR DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A method and system for configuring information for a distributed computing environment is provided. The method and system comprises providing a job containing a list of tasks to a controller, the tasks including a bootstrap tool and configuration information related to the computer network. The method and system also comprises providing a task to each of a plurality of agents on the distributed computer network, each task being based on one of the tasks of the job. The method and system further comprises executing code by each of the plurality of agents based upon the tasks process, wherein the code provides configuration information for a master process and a plurality of slave processes within the distributed computer network. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049837 | NETWORK EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION METHOD, NETWORK EQUIPMENT NETWORK SYSTEM - A network equipment configuration method, network equipment, and a network system are provided. The network equipment receives configuration information. The configuration information comprises an identifier of a configuration template to be called and configuration parameters. The network equipment calls a configuration template that is locally pre-stored and identified by the configuration template identifier and puts the configuration parameters into the configuration template, so that the network equipment is configured. The configuration template is based on an extensible markup language (XML). The technical solutions in which the embodiments are applied may reduce configuration codes that need to be delivered for each configuration and decrease information redundancy of interactions between a management user and the network equipment for each configuration, so as to increase a configuration efficiency of the network equipment. | 02-25-2010 |
20100057890 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ASSIGNING PROVISIONING SERVERS IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A software provisioning environment can include several provisioning servers for providing software provisioning to one or more target machines. To assign provisioning servers to the target machines, a provisioning server can be configured to assign the provisioning servers utilizing the provisioning objects. The provisioning server can be configured to associate selected provisioning objects with respective provisioning servers. By associating a provisioning object with a respective provisioning server, the respective provisioning server will operate as the provisioning server for any provisioning processes performed on target machines utilizing the selected provisioning object. The provisioning server can be configured to associate the provisioning objects with the provisioning servers based on any number of factors such as location of the provisioning servers, specifications of the provisioning servers, load on a provisioning server, and performance of a provisioning server. | 03-04-2010 |
20100057891 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INTERNET SERVICES BY A PORTAL DEVICE - A method for providing Internet services by a portal device capable of electronically communicating with at least one user terminal over a communication medium is provided. The method includes connecting to at least one user terminal, detecting hardware capabilities of the at least one user terminal and saving the hardware capabilities as a configuration file for a first connection between the portal device and the at least one user terminal, receiving a service request indicating a service selected by the at least one user terminal, and executing the selected service dependent on the configuration file of the at least one user terminal and transmitting results to the at least one user terminal. A system providing the Internet services by the portal device is also provided. | 03-04-2010 |
20100057892 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING ALARM/EVENT INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for processing alarm/event information are disclosed. The method includes: parsing received notification information that includes uniformly sorted alarm/event information; and obtaining the uniformly sorted alarm/event information. The apparatus includes: a parsing module, configured to parse received notification information that includes uniformly sorted alarm/event information; and a processing module, configured to obtain the uniformly sorted alarm/event information. The method and apparatus implement data interworking, reduce XML tags, and improve the efficiency of transmitting data on the network. | 03-04-2010 |
20100064031 | Identifying a Subnet Address Range from DNS Information - Embodiments of identifying a subnet address range from DNS information are disclosed. | 03-11-2010 |
20100064032 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF AN ACCESS ROUTER COMPATIBLE WITH THE DHCP PROTOCOL, FOR SPECIFIC AUTOMATIC PROCESSING OF IP FLOWS FROM A CLIENT TERMINAL - Method and device for automatic configuration of an access router | 03-11-2010 |
20100064033 | INTEGRATION OF AN INTERNAL CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE WITH EXISTING ENTERPRISE SERVICES AND SYSTEMS - In various exemplary embodiments, a system architecture and associated method for establishing the system architecture are disclosed to provide cloud computing in an existing enterprise. The system architecture provides cloud computing in an existing enterprise. The system architecture comprises a service communications interface and an infrastructure communications interface. A cloud structure is communicatively coupled to the service communications interface and the infrastructure communications interface, with the cloud structure arranged to be coupled through the service communications interface to individual business units. The cloud structure is further arranged to be coupled through the infrastructure communications interface to a plurality of enterprise resources. | 03-11-2010 |
20100064034 | COMMUNICATION SERVER DEVICE, ADDRESS DETERMINATION METHOD AND ADDRESS DETERMINATION PROGRAM - A communication server device includes: a management information registration unit for registering at least a combination of virtual addresses and real addresses of a plurality of terminal units as management information in correspondence with a service type and a communication port of the local device; and an address determination unit for searching, upon reception of a communication start request designating the virtual address and the service type of any of the plurality of the terminal units from another terminal unit, the management information with the combination of the virtual address and the service type as a key and determining the real address and the communication port used as a transferee of the communication start request. | 03-11-2010 |
20100070616 | System and method for managing an application or software component for use in a device to be controlled in a home network - The present invention relates to a system and method for managing an application wherein a function of a controlled device can be dynamically extended by continually updating the application for use in the controlled device. According to the present invention, a framework capable of providing integrated support to a variety of home network middleware is loaded on an application server corresponding to a control device, and Internet access services and middleware services for accessing various kinds of devices are bundled into the framework. Thus, application installation and management can be performed within a home network environment regardless of the hardware, network protocol and operating system used. | 03-18-2010 |
20100070617 | IP address assignment for access to IP services via WiMAX or 3GPP access network - In one aspect, a method for IP address assignment for access to IP services via WiMAX or 3GPP access network is provided, said method comprising, in an embodiment:
| 03-18-2010 |
20100077062 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVISIONING A COMMUNICATIONS CLIENT ON A HOST DEVICE - An apparatus for provisioning a data communications client on a host communications device, the host communications device adapted to operate on a communications network, the apparatus comprising: a first data store adapted to store variant configuration information; a second data store adapted to store provisioning information; a provisioning module adapted to select the provisioning information stored in said second data store as a function of the variant configuration information stored in said first data store and apply the selected provisioning information to provision the data communications client; and a user interface interacting with said provisioning module to enable a user of the host communications device to provision the data communications client. | 03-25-2010 |
20100082777 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING NETWORK ACCOUNTS AND CONFIGURING DEVICES FOR USE THEREWITH - Creating service accounts involves receiving an account identifier entered by a user via a user interface to initiate registering a user device with a network account. One or more host names are determined based on a domain name portion of the account identifier. The one or more host names need not be preconfigured on the user device. Connections are attempted with each of the one or more host names. Each of the connection attempts uses one or more application protocols associated with a type of the network account. It is determined that at least one of the connection attempts results in a successful connection, and a user account is configured on the user device based on a host and protocol combination associated with the successful connection. | 04-01-2010 |
20100082778 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A NETWORK OF AFFILIATED WEBSITES - A plurality of affiliated network of websites may be configured to log user interactions thereon. The respective logs may comprise user identification information to allow a profile aggregation service to correlate user interactions across the plurality of websites and to generate respective user profiles, which may be used to configure the websites. A context aware platform (CAP) website may be configured to provide web services for entities in a business hierarchy. The CAP website may capable of presenting content in one of a plurality of operational modes associated with a geographical granularity of the franchise hierarchy. In addition, the CAP website may be configurable according to a user profile generated using user interactions across a plurality of websites and/or on the CAP website. | 04-01-2010 |
20100082779 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING IP ADDRESS OF IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS USING DHCP, IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS AND SYSTEM OF ALLOCATING IP ADDRESS USING DHCP - A method of allocating an IP address of an image forming apparatus using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), and an image forming apparatus and system performing the method, the method including requesting a DHCP server to allocate an IP address to an image forming apparatus having a previously allocated IP address in response to the image forming apparatus being re-connected to a network, responding to the IP address allocation request by the DHCP server, declining to respond to the response of the DHCP server, and providing the previously allocated IP address to the image forming apparatus upon receiving no response from the image forming apparatus after a predetermined time. | 04-01-2010 |
20100088397 | SYSTEMS FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING VIRTUAL DESKTOPS OR VIRTUAL APPLICATIONS - Methods and systems for dynamically updating a computer system are provided. In some embodiments, these methods and systems collect information pertaining to a desktop unit in access by a user; provide the information to a network service on a server; send the information to a network service associated with a desired service; send the information to a user session; update a desktop unit variable; and initiate an event based on the updated unit variable. | 04-08-2010 |
20100088398 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DOMAIN NAME RESOLUTION INTERCEPTION CACHING - The present solution provides a variety of techniques for accelerating and optimizing network traffic, such as HTTP based network traffic. The solution described herein provides techniques in the areas of proxy caching, protocol acceleration, domain name resolution acceleration as well as compression improvements. In some cases, the present solution provides various prefetching and/or prefreshening techniques to improve intermediary or proxy caching, such as HTTP proxy caching. In other cases, the present solution provides techniques for accelerating a protocol by improving the efficiency of obtaining and servicing data from an originating server to server to clients. In another cases, the present solution accelerates domain name resolution more quickly. As every HTTP access starts with a URL that includes a hostname that must be resolved via domain name resolution into an IP address, the present solution helps accelerate HTTP access. In some cases, the present solution improves compression techniques by prefetching non-cacheable and cacheable content to use for compressing network traffic, such as HTTP. The acceleration and optimization techniques described herein may be deployed on the client as a client agent or as part of a browser, as well as on any type and form of intermediary device, such as an appliance, proxying device or any type of interception caching and/or proxying device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100094977 | Method for Managing Configuration Profiles of Network Elements Deployed in a Network - A method for a network having a network element with an original configuration profile stored therewith which specifies operation of the network element in the network includes connecting a server to the network such that the server is in communication with the network element via the network. The server retrieves the original configuration profile from the network element after the network element has been operating in the network. The server analyzes the original configuration profile for compliance with desired characteristics. If the original configuration profile is not in compliance with the desired characteristics, then the server manipulates the original configuration profile to generate a new configuration profile in compliance with the desired characteristics and forwards the new configuration profile to the network element for the network element to store therewith in place of the original configuration profile. | 04-15-2010 |
20100100610 | Unattended installation of drivers for devices that are not automatically found and installed during operating system installation - The unattended installation of drivers for devices that are not automatically found and installed during operating system installation is disclosed. A method determines which drivers are needed for devices on client computing systems that are not automatically found and installed during operating system installation. Entries for the drivers are created within a master driver file. The method copies the master driver file to each client computing system, and drivers that are needed for the devices. For each client computing system, references are created within an unattended installation file to the entries for the drivers within the master driver file. Operating systems are remotely installed on the client computing systems in an unattended manner. The drivers are able to be installed in the unattended manner due to the references created within the unattended installation files to the entries for the drivers within the master driver file. | 04-22-2010 |
20100106808 | REPLICA PLACEMENT IN A DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM - Replica placement in a network of nodes is provided. Nodes are selected for replica placement to satisfy location-based preferences. Additionally, nodes are selected for replica placement to spread replicas of the same data over different fault domains and upgrade domains. In some instances, nodes may be selected for replica placement based on load-based information for the nodes. | 04-29-2010 |
20100106809 | ALARM AND DIAGNOSTICS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A DISTRIBUTED-ARCHITECTURE HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING NETWORK - The disclosure includes an HVAC data processing and communication network and a method of manufacturing the same. In one embodiment, the HVAC data processing and communication network includes a first system device and a second system device. The first system device is configured to send and receive messages over a data bus. The second system device is configured to send configuration data associated with a configuration of the second system device to the first system device. The first system device is further configured to receive and persistently store the configuration data. | 04-29-2010 |
20100106810 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A DISTRIBUTED-ARCHITECTURE HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING NETWORK - The disclosure provides an HVAC data processing and communication network and a method of manufacturing the same. In an embodiment, the network includes a first subnet controller and a first system device. A second subnet controller is configured to archive configuration data of the first subnet controller and the system device. | 04-29-2010 |
20100106811 | System and Unified Setting Interface For Configuring Network Manageable Devices - A unified setting interface that enables a management application to configure network manageable devices, regardless of their type or manufacturer. Configuration of a network manageable device requires that certain information be provided to the network manageable device. For different types of devices from different manufacturers, this information and its format can vary. A management application using the unified setting interface does not require the individual interfaces for configuring network manageable devices from different manufacturers. | 04-29-2010 |
20100115065 | Methods, Devices and Computer Program Products for Configuring Network-Enabled Devices - Methods, devices and computer program products are provided for configuring network-enabled devices. One or more additional network-enabled devices containing configuration parameters relevant to a first network-enabled device are discovered. The relevant configuration parameters are obtained from the one or more additional network-enabled device by the first network-enabled device and the first network-enabled device is configured using the obtained configuration parameters. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115066 | INTERNET SMALL COMPUTER SYSTEMS INTERFACE (ISCSI) SOFTWARE TARGET BOOT AND DUMP ROUTING DRIVER - A method, a system and a computer program product for mapping a client's request to perform boot and/or dump operations to a set of backing files which enable boot and dump operations in a data processing system. A Target Routing Driver (TRD) utility creates multiple Network Installation Management (NIM) objects and/or Network Dump Management (NDM) objects including (1) an Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI) boot station and (2) an iSCSI dump collection point. The boot station exports a single iSCSI software (S/W) target from which a set of Diskless Servers obtain a boot image which enables a boot operation. The dump collection point exports a single iSCSI S/W target which is used by Diskless Servers as a dump location. The TRD utility uses the single target (exported from a particular NDM object type) to utilize the minimal resource allocation which allows listening on a single connection. The TRD utility enables block range mapping of the request to the backing files on a remote/separate storage device for the associated Diskless Server. | 05-06-2010 |
20100125650 | Method and arrangement for configuring a device in a data network - Methods for the configuration of a device in a data network are provided. According to one method, a domain name is first stored in the device. The device then transfers an inquiry message comprising the domain name to an addressing server that serves for the conversion between the domain name and the associated internet addresses. In a further step, the addressing server transmits an address information of a parameter server associated with said device to the device as a response to said inquiry message. The device establishes a link to the parameter server on the basis of said address information. The parameter server transmits via this link parameters to the device which serve to configure the device. | 05-20-2010 |
20100125651 | Method and System for Establishing a User-Friendly Data Transfer Service Application Executing Within a Heterogeneous Distributed Service Application Execution Environment - Various embodiments of the present invention are directed to methods and systems for data transfer between electronic, hand-held devices, including cell phones, and computer systems, including servers and PCs, as well as component methods and systems of these data-transfer methods and systems. Component methods and systems of the present invention include secure links between various devices, enhancements to electronic hand-held devices that enable service applications to run continuously or intermittently on the devices, deployment of dynamically created service applications to electronic, hand-held devices, and various additional component methods and systems that facilitate the above-mentioned component methods and systems. One embodiment of the present invention is a robust, efficient, secure, and user-friendly method and system for transferring data between cell phones and personal computers. | 05-20-2010 |
20100131618 | COMMON CONFIGURATION APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE - A network and connection provisioning framework for configuring and provisioning multiple aspects of network connectivity (e.g., multiple networks, media types, and/or connections). The framework may comprise a unified configuration interface that enables an administrator to configure multiple different types of network connectivity. A single configuration file comprising settings for multiple aspects of network connectivity may be generated based on preferences entered by a system administrator, or by exporting current settings from a particular computing device. Global configuration policies or other configuration settings that span multiple types of network connectivity may be also created and stored in one or more configuration files. Stand-alone media managers and/or plug-in modules may implement one or more standardized application programming interface functions so that they may interoperate with the network and connection provisioning framework. The standardized API may be used to ensure that configuration information is handled and stored in a standardized manner by different media managers and/or plug-in modules. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131619 | CREATING CROSS-TECHNOLOGY CONFIGURATION SETTINGS - A network and connection provisioning framework for configuring and provisioning multiple aspects of network connectivity (e.g., multiple networks, media types, and/or connections). The framework may comprise a unified configuration interface that enables an administrator to configure multiple different types of network connectivity. A single configuration file comprising settings for multiple aspects of network connectivity may be generated based on preferences entered by a system administrator, or by exporting current settings from a particular computing device. Global configuration policies or other configuration settings that span multiple types of network connectivity may be also created and stored in one or more configuration files. Stand-alone media managers and/or plug-in modules may implement one or more standardized application programming interface functions so that they may interoperate with the network and connection provisioning framework. The standardized API may be used to ensure that configuration information is handled and stored in a standardized manner by different media managers and/or plug-in modules. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131620 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BATCHABLE HIERARCHICAL CONFIGURATION - The present solution provides a centralized configuration of a Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) site hierarchy that may be batched across a plurality of appliances in a multi-site deployment. A single GSLB site hierarchy configuration may be distributed and operated on each appliance at each site. This reduces the configuration maintained for the multi-site deployment. Furthermore, in this manner, each appliance across multiple sites has an understanding of the entire topology of the multi-site deployment. Responsive to this configuration and understanding, each appliance may perform and optimize operations according to the site topology. For example, the appliances may selectively determine which sites to establish connections with in order to share metrics. In another example, appliances may select which remote sites to monitor services according to the topology. | 05-27-2010 |
20100138519 | Networking Hardware Elements With Network Layout Maps Thereon, And Related Methods - Examples of networking hardware with network layout maps thereon are disclosed herein. Other examples, embodiments, and related methods are also described herein. | 06-03-2010 |
20100138520 | USER ALIASES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique is disclosed in the context of a communications system whereby parties accessible through the system may be referenced by multiple alternative symbolic names. User profile information for a given party may be maintained in the system to control features and routing behavior in response to session request involving the party. By virtue of a mapping capability, one or more symbolic names may be associated with the same user profile information. A session request involving any of the alternative names for a party will evoke the same user profile. | 06-03-2010 |
20100146085 | REALTIME KERNEL - A realtime kernel supports realtime communications between communicants operating on respective network nodes. The realtime kernel handles the complex tasks of connecting to communicants, virtual areas, and other network resources, switching those connections in response to user inputs, and mixing realtime data streams. The realtime kernel enables developers to focus on developing high-level communications functionality instead of low-level plumbing code. The realtime kernel imposes relatively low computational resource requirements so that realtime communications performance can be achieved using a wide range of computing devices and network connections that currently are available. | 06-10-2010 |
20100153523 | SCALABLE INTERCONNECTION OF DATA CENTER SERVERS USING TWO PORTS - Large numbers of commodity servers in a data center may be inexpensively interconnected using low-cost commodity network switches, a first network port on each commodity server, a second network port on each commodity server, and a traffic-aware routing module executed on each commodity server. Connecting two or more commodity servers via the first network ports on each server to a commodity network switch forms a unit. Connecting two commodity servers in different units forms a group. Each unit has a direct connection via a second network port on a commodity server in the unit to another unit. Each group may have a direct connection via a second network port on a commodity server in the group to another group. Traffic-aware routing modules executed on each commodity server determine routing of data between servers and balance traffic across the first and second ports. | 06-17-2010 |
20100161768 | Auto-detection and selection of an optimal storage virtualization protocol - A means for automatic detection and selection of an optimal network storage virtualization protocol. The invention is a solution for the problem of complexity and the resulting lack of optimization in storage virtualization implementations. The invention shields the user from the complexity of network analysis and allows the engaging of multiple storage virtualization protocols—as opposed to a single protocol. The invention enables automatic detection and selection of an optimal network storage virtualization protocol on a per resource basis, which is a unique capability and something that has not been accomplished in the prior art. The net result is a simplified user experience and optimized performance when using virtualized storage. | 06-24-2010 |
20100169466 | CONFIGURING HOSTS OF A SECONDARY DATA STORAGE AND RECOVERY SYSTEM - A software suite, a method and a system of configuring hosts of a secondary data storage and recovery system are disclosed. In an embodiment, a system includes hosts saving data in primary storage devices, a software suite to provide secondary storage and a recovery service to one or more networked node includes a portion to configure at least one network node to perform a service, a portion to order a service and to generate metadata about data generated to store in secondary storage using a processor and a non-volatile memory, and a portion to perform data write validation and a portion to receive and prepare data to store in secondary storage. The portion to perform service configuration, the portion to perform ordering, and the portion to perform metadata generation are part of a client instance may be provided one instance per to the one or more networked node. | 07-01-2010 |
20100169467 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A NETWORK TOPOLOGY DURING NETWORK PROVISIONING - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a provisioning instruction including a device identifier from an external management entity, receiving the device identifier from a network device, associating the provisioning instruction the network device, and sending a portion of the provisioning instruction to the network device. The device identifier being associated with a virtual resource. The associating is based on the device identifier of the virtual resource and a device identifier of a network device. The portion of the provisioning instruction is sent to the network device based on the associating. | 07-01-2010 |
20100169468 | NETWORK DEVICE MANAGEMENT UNIT, NETWORK DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT UNIT - A network device management unit manages a first network device, communicable with a second network device, managed by a counterpart network device management unit, in a network environment. The network device management includes a device information storage, a communication-start information, a network device management information operation unit, an available function information acquisition unit, and a display-information generator. The device information storage stores network device management information of the first network device. The communication-start information acquisition unit obtains communication-start information when the first and second network devices start to communicate. The network device management information operation unit lets the counterpart network device management unit to obtain the network device management information of the first network device. The available function information acquisition unit obtains available function information of the second network device. The display-information generator generates networked-device-function information corresponds to the obtained available function information. | 07-01-2010 |
20100180014 | PROVIDING NETWORK IDENTITY FOR VIRTUAL MACHINES - Techniques for assigning an internet protocol (IP) address to a virtual machine are provided. The techniques include tunneling a request for an IP address to an initialization protocol server, using the server to mask an identity of one or more guest virtual machines and obtain an IP address for the virtual machine based on a media access control (MAC) address of the virtual machine, and tunneling the IP address to the virtual machine. | 07-15-2010 |
20100180015 | PERFORMING CONFIGURATION IN A MULTIMACHINE ENVIRONMENT - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to performing configuration in a multi-machine environment. In aspects, a client connects with one of a plurality of storage appliances. This storage appliance is sometimes called the coordinator appliance. Any of the storage appliances may act as the coordinator appliance. The coordinator appliance receives configuration data from the client and configures itself and the other storage appliances. During configuration, connectivity between the client and the coordinator appliance and between the coordinator appliance and the other appliances may be lost and re-established. | 07-15-2010 |
20100180016 | AUTOMATED NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND NETWORK DEPLOYMENT - Automatically configuring network device, network system architecture, and method for configuring one or a plurality of devices on a network. Device and network system architectures and methods for automatically self-initiating and configuring one, a plurality, or hundreds of wired or wireless network devices. Autoconfiguring wireless Local Area Network switch and access point devices connected to the switch. Method for accessing remote server by a device to acquire device configuration information. Method for deploying a network including at least one network device at a facility without the participation of a person having knowledge of networks or network devices at the facility. Computer program and computer program product. | 07-15-2010 |
20100180017 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring Information for Multiple Network Access Providers - A computer program product that provides a graphical user interface for configuring communication information for multiple network service providers on a computer system. The program product is operable to display a network communication scene that includes edit windows and selectable options for a user to view, enter, remove, and modify configuration information for at least one network service provider, and allows the user to enter information for establishing communication with the same network service provider using at least two different communication mediums, and from several different geographical locations. | 07-15-2010 |
20100180018 | REMOTELY CONFIGURABLE USER DEVICE FOR ACCESSING A DISTRIBUTED TRANSACTION SYSTEM - A system for interfacing predetermined external services provided by service providers to a user at a fixed location includes a processing platform running an operating system and a plurality of physical system resource interfaces for interfacing with available physical system resources allowing a user to gain access to the predetermined external services, a data store associated with the processing platform stores configuration information defining ones of a plurality of external services, a communication interface enables the operating system to communicate with a central office to download of configuration information for one or more of the external services and to facilitate access to a selected one of the external services. | 07-15-2010 |
20100185754 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AND AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAMMING NETWORK ADDRESSES FOR DEVICES OPERATING IN A NETWORK - A method for configuring a network device including an optical sensor includes activating the optical sensor of the network device to generate data representing an image in view thereof, and analyzing the data from the optical sensor to determine image information represented by the image. A network address is automatically assigned to the network device based on the image information represented by the image in view of the optical sensor. Related methods, systems, and apparatus are also discussed. | 07-22-2010 |
20100191834 | Method and system for containing routes - A system and method for limiting network access for a network subscriber based on limited network routing defined within at least one data container is disclosed. The system includes at least one network server adapted for receiving a request for network access and checking whether the network subscriber is identified in at least one data container having an approved route list comprising at least one permissible route for the subscriber; and if the network subscriber is part of the data container, limiting network access for the network subscriber to the at least one permissible route by provisioning at least one router in the network to limit routing requests from the subscriber to the approved route list. | 07-29-2010 |
20100191835 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF CONFIGURATION DATA - Embodiments of methods and apparatuses for distributing configuration data to one or more mobile terminals. An embodiment of one method of the invention includes receiving from the host application a request from a client to transmit a configuration data value to a mobile terminal. The configuration data value can include a designation of a new precedence level for a mobile terminal corresponding to a new operating characteristic of the mobile terminal. The method can include the step of transmitting from the NMC a configuration data value including the new precedence level to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal can include a mobile application defining a previous precedence level such that the mobile terminal loads the configuration data in response to the new precedence level different from the previous precedence level. | 07-29-2010 |
20100191836 | Communications device user interface - In a communications network including a plurality of communication channels through which communications are configured to be transmitted between a plurality of network users, a method of managing communications to be transmitted to a particular user from the plurality of communication channels and/or network users, the method including: receiving a communication from a particular communication channel or another network user, the communication intended for transmission to a particular user; determining whether or not to transmit the communication to the particular user, based upon whether or not the communication satisfies one or more predefined characteristics relating to the particular communication channel and/or the other network user; and transmitting the communication to the particular user when the communication satisfies the predefined characteristics. | 07-29-2010 |
20100191837 | LOCATION-AWARE CONFIGURATION - A networking device may operate according to a first configuration profile adapted to cause the device to conform to restrictions applicable within a plurality of different locations. The networking device may obtain a second, location-aware configuration profile, which may include restrictions applicable to the location where the device is deployed. The second, location-aware configuration profile may be provided by a location-aware configuration service responsive to a request from the device. The service may determine a location of the device from the request. The service may identify restrictions applicable within the region the device is located. | 07-29-2010 |
20100191838 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMPUTER READALE MEDIUM FOR THE SAME - A terminal device includes an access unit accessing content summary information on a server based on location information, the content summary information containing first information and second information, the first information providing association between an identification for identifying a status of the terminal device and second location information for accessing the second information, the second information providing summary information of contents regarding the status of the terminal device, an identification acquiring unit acquiring the identification, a first location storage unit storing first location information for accessing the first information, a first access controller controlling the access unit to access the first information based on the first location information stored, a retriever retrieving the second location information associated with the acquired identification based on the first information accessed, and a second access controller controlling the access unit to access the second information based on the second location information retrieved. | 07-29-2010 |
20100191839 | SYNCHRONIZING RESOURCE BINDINGS WITHIN COMPUTER NETWORK - In general, techniques are described for synchronizing resource bindings within computer networks. An intermediate network device comprising an interface card and a control unit may implement these techniques. The interface card receives a message from a server that allocates a network address for use by a client device identified by a unique identifier. The control unit stores data defining a binding between the unique identifier and the network address. The control unit includes a binding synchronization module that determines, based on a determination to release the binding, whether the binding release occurs in response to receiving a release message from the client device, and automatically generates a release message on behalf of the client device upon determining that the binding release did not occur in response to receiving a release message. The binding synchronization module outputs the automatically generated release message to the server that reserved the L3 network address. | 07-29-2010 |
20100198946 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) PARAMETER CHANGE - A system and method for redirecting or duplicating a media flow to one or more alternative media presentation devices and providing updated quality of service parameters to the application server providing the media flow. The user of a mobile communication device can manually initiate the media flow change or the user can configure the media flow change to automatically transfer based on the proximity of the mobile communication device to the alternative media presentation device. If desired, the media flow can be reverted to the mobile communication device. A media flow can also be divided, such as by audio and video to different alternative media presentation devices. | 08-05-2010 |
20100205281 | NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT BY PHYSICAL LOCATION - A method of managing a network including maintaining a database of network configuration profiles, each network configuration profile corresponding to a network device type and a physical location relative to the network, determining with a network device a physical location of the network device relative to the network upon the network device being initially connected to the network, the network device being of a network device type, and determining a network configuration profile with which to configure the network device from the database based on the physical location and the network device type of the network device. | 08-12-2010 |
20100205282 | NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TYPE FOR FLEXIBLE NEIGHBOR SELECTION IN OVERLAY NETWORKS - An overlay network uses flexible neighbor selection based on network address translation (NAT) to define routing between nodes. The NAT type is used as a flexible neighbor selection criteria, either alone or in conjunction with other criteria. A method of selecting a neighboring node for a first node in a distributed hash table network includes determining a desired key value for a node finger table entry and requesting a set of candidate neighboring nodes near this desired key value. The method determines a network address translation type of each of the set of candidate neighboring nodes and ranks the set of candidate neighboring nodes accordingly. The method selects one of the set of candidate neighboring nodes based on the ranking. The NAT types of candidate neighboring nodes are determined by sending probe messages or from data received from a central overlay network server. | 08-12-2010 |
20100211656 | Configuring A Blade Environment - Configuring a blade environment, the blade environment including a chassis, a plurality of blade servers, and a management module, including receiving prior to delivery of the blade environment, from an end-user of the blade environment by a configuration module accessible through a wide-area network, configuration information for the blade environment; wherein the configuration information is specific to the end-user; storing, by the configuration module, the configuration information in a configuration file; after delivery of the blade environment to the end-user; downloading, from the configuration module to the management module on the blade environment, the configuration file; and configuring, by the management module, the blade environment using the configuration information stored in the configuration file. | 08-19-2010 |
20100217840 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REPLICATING PROVISIONING SERVERS IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A software provisioning environment can include several provisioning servers for providing software provisioning to one or more target machines. In the environment, one of the provisioning servers can initiate a replication action. The replication action can transfer and apply the metadata from one provisioning server to another provisioning server. Additionally, the replication action can transfer and apply portions of an inventory of provisioning objects from one provisioning server to another provisioning server. During the replication action, the provisioning server can utilize the interfaces and protocols of standard provisioning processes to transfer the metadata and portions of the inventory. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217841 | PROVISIONING NETWORK RESOURCES BASED ON ENVIRONMENT - A network appliance sends a configuration request to multiple different servers, each of which is associated with a different environment. A response is received from at least one server. Each received response includes configuration data that pertains to an environment associated with the server from which the response is received. The network appliance is then configured based on the configuration data included in the response to enable the network appliance to operate in the environment associated with the server from which the response originated. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217842 | REGISTRATION AND USE OF PATTERNS DEFINED BY EXPRESSIONS AS DOMAIN NAMES - A domain name registration service permits registrants to register names that are defined by a pattern-matching expression that may include one or more wildcard values in any portion of the domain or subdomain name. A domain name server utilizes pattern matching with expressions, such as REGEX systems, to parse incoming domain name requests to identify text strings that conform to the domain defined by the registered regular expression. Other components assign economic value to defined patterns and prevent conflicts between registered patterns and domain names. | 08-26-2010 |
20100223363 | Apparatus and Method for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Version 6 Extensions for Configuring Hosts with Multiple Interfaces - An apparatus comprising a plurality of communication interfaces configured to receive a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) reply message comprising routing information for at least one of the plurality of interfaces, and a processor configured to select one of the plurality of interfaces for transmission based upon the routing information. An apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising receiving a DHCP request message comprising a first multi-homed routing policy entry (MHRPE) option, selecting default route information based upon the first MHRPE option, and transmitting a DHCP reply message comprising a second MHRPE option comprising the default route information. A method comprising receiving a DHCP request message comprising a first MHRPE option, selecting default route information based upon the first MHRPE option, and transmitting a DHCP reply message comprising a second MHRPE option comprising the default route information. | 09-02-2010 |
20100223364 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AND LOAD BALANCING - A method for providing load balancing and failover among a set of computing nodes running a network accessible computer service includes providing a computer service that is hosted at one or more servers comprised in a set of computing nodes and is accessible to clients via a first network. Providing a second network including a plurality of traffic processing nodes and load balancing means. The load balancing means is configured to provide load balancing among the set of computing nodes running the computer service. Providing means for redirecting network traffic comprising client requests to access the computer service from the first network to the second network. Providing means for selecting a traffic processing node of the second network for receiving the redirected network traffic comprising the client requests to access the computer service and redirecting the network traffic to the traffic processing node via the means for redirecting network traffic. For every client request for access to the computer service, determining an optimal computing node among the set of computing nodes running the computer service by the traffic processing node via the load balancing means, and then routing the client request to the optimal computing node by the traffic processing node via the second network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100228836 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR FACILITATING SYNCHRONIZATION OF SETTING CONFIGURATIONS - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for facilitating synchronization of setting configurations. An apparatus may include a processor and a memory storing instructions that when executed by the processor cause the apparatus to configure a setting on the apparatus. The instructions when executed by the processor may further cause the apparatus to generate a settings data package comprising the setting configuration. The instructions when executed by the processor may additionally cause the apparatus to send the settings data package to a settings management service for synchronization of the setting configuration to at least one of a service or a user device. The settings management service may be configured to synchronize the setting configuration by distributing the settings data package to the at least one of the service or the user device. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228837 | METHODS FOR AUTO-CONFIGURING A ROUTER ON AN IP SUBNET - An autoconfiguring data router is connected to a communications network subnet having a second network data router. The autoconfiguring data router includes a configuration determination module that determines configuration attributes for operably connecting the autoconfiguring data router to the subnet, and an autoconfiguration module that configures the autoconfiguring data router according to the configuration attributes so that the autoconfiguring data router is operably connected to the subnet. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228838 | Method and System for Provisioning a Set-Box - A method and system of provisioning a set-top box (STB) with a STB provisioning system are provided which include storing STB profile information in a provisioning datastore, receiving a customer order at a service provisioning system, notifying a billing system of the customer order, and notifying a conditional access system of the customer order. The method and system further include storing information from the customer order in a provisioning datastore, notifying a video device manager about the STB, and delivering a cable operator configuration message from the video device manager to the STB, the configuration message being based on information from the provisioning datastore, thereby provisioning the STB without essential involvement of the conditional access system. | 09-09-2010 |
20100235477 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING SERVER INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In a communications system where a mobile node seeks to establish contact with a server node within or outside the home network of the mobile node by first providing the general location information and the server type of the server node to a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server. The DHCP server then matches the provided information with its record in storage to arrive at an IP (Internet Protocol) address of the sought server node. The DHCP server then sends the IP address to the mobile node, thereby allowing the mobile node to directly access the server node. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235478 | MANAGED NODE INITIAL OPERATIONAL STATE - A device associated with a network receives a fetch request from a managed node connected to the network, and provides, to the managed node, trigger information specifying one or more conditions under which the managed node is to be enabled and is to receive traffic from the network. The device also receives an operational state associated with the managed node based on the trigger information. | 09-16-2010 |
20100241737 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADDRESS VERIFICATION DURING MULTIPLE ADDRESSES REGISTRATION - In this present invention, when the HA is performing Bulk Registration for a Multimode Node, the HA will tagged those CoAs specified within the single BU as unverified. A verification mechanism implemented at the HA will be triggered to test the addressability of the unverified CoA before using the said unverified CoA. The method of verification involves the HA to send an acknowledgment message to an unverified CoA of the Multimode Node to test the said unverified CoA for its addressability. When the Multimode Node receives the acknowledgment message from the HA, the Multimode Node replies the HA with another single BU. Upon the receipt of the second single BU from the Multimode Node, the HA can then verify that the said unverified CoA of the Multimode Node. | 09-23-2010 |
20100241738 | DEVICE SETTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, DEVICE SETTING MANAGEMENT METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM FOR DEVICE SETTING MANAGEMENT - Provided are a device setting management system, a device setting management method, and a recording medium for device setting management, which efficiently change the setting of a device. A control unit of a device management system specifies a newly connected device which is not specified in mode setting management data as a target device. The control unit determines the sequential processing order of the specified target device, and sequentially transmits information on a setting change request to the device according to the determined sequential processing order. Upon reception of information on a setting change result including a device identifier of a device whose setting has been changed, the control unit stores a “mode-ON flag” and a “mode-OFF flag” in the mode setting management data including this device identifier to update a setting management flag. | 09-23-2010 |
20100250714 | On-Site Dynamic Personalization System and Method - An on-site dynamic personalization system and method having a browser interacting through an internet connection with web pages of members in a cooperative network is described. The system includes a processor coupled through the internet connection to the browser. In addition, the system includes a memory with a cooperative membership database that stores data collected as the browser navigates web pages in the cooperative network. The memory also includes a software module with program code that the processor executes to cause the system to perform certain operations. These operations include: collecting data in the form of universal resource locators as the browser navigates web pages, storing the collected data and assimilating the data by aggregating the stored data, analyzing the assimilated data to determine user preferences based on identification of particular web pages with content viewed by the browser, and dynamically inserting personalized content from a particular member in the cooperative network into a web page associated with the particular member to create a personalized web page. This personalized content is based on the determined user preferences for the browser. | 09-30-2010 |
20100250715 | RECORDING MEDIUM THAT STORES INTERNET-PROTOCOL (IP) ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT CONTROL PROGRAM, IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT CONTROL APPARATUS, AND IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT CONTROL METHOD - An internet-protocol address assignment control apparatus obtains, via an interface provided in a first communication device, a first unique number for a first interface provided in a server apparatus connected to the interface provided in the first communication device and a second unique number for a second interface provided in the server apparatus connected to an interface provided in a second communication device. The apparatus stores, in a storage, the obtained second unique number for the second interface provided in the server apparatus on a basis of the first unique number for the first interface provided in the server apparatus. | 09-30-2010 |
20100262678 | CONFIGURATION OF A SINGLE-PURPOSE APPLICATION VIA A WEB APPLICATION - Architecture for providing easy and convenient configuration of a single-purpose application (SPA). A web-based SPA is retained on a client device for viewing specific information provided from a web server. A web-based identification component obtains an identity associated with the client device or device user. A website user interface enables the user to enter configuration information of the SPA. Subsequently, the configured SPA receives the requested information from the web server based on the identity. A storage component stores the configuration information on a remote web server and/or the client device for backup purposes. A communications component refreshes the requested information to provide updated information to the user via the SPA. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262679 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CHECKING AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTIVITY STATUS OF AN IP LINK ON IP NETWORK - The invention provides a method and a system for method for checking automatically connectivity status of an IP link on IP network. The method for checking automatically connectivity status of an IP link on IP network comprises: sending automatically Ping request through the IP link at a dynamic auto ping rate. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262680 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING HEARTBEAT INTERVAL OF ACTIVESYNC SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for determining a HeartBeat Interval (HBI) of an activesync service in a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a predetermined minimum value is set as the HBI, and transmission/reception of a ping message is performed. Whether transmission/reception of a ping message corresponding to the set HBI is performed successfully is determined. When the transmission/reception of the ping message succeeds successively within a predetermined frequency, the HBI is set to a predetermined maximum value. | 10-14-2010 |
20100268797 | CORRELATING NETWORK TRANSACTIONS - The correlating network transactions techniques include a method, an apparatus, and/or a computer program product. In some embodiments of these techniques, the method includes receiving, at a first monitor server, a first plurality of network transmissions from a first plurality of communication networks and correlating, at the first monitor server, the first plurality of network transmissions based on information associated with the first plurality of network transmissions to form a first correlated network transaction. The method further includes transmitting the first correlated network transaction from the first monitor server to a second monitor server based on a first correlation flag and correlating, at the second monitor server, the first correlated network transaction with a second network transmission based on at least one of the first correlation flag, information associated with the second network transmission, and information associated with the first correlated network transaction to form a second correlated network transaction. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268798 | DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF CONNECTION SETUP REQUEST PARAMETERS - The number of connection setup request packets that are accepted for processing by a network element are dynamically adjusted based on the run time capacity of the network element. The number of accepted connection setup request packets that can be initiated for processing are dynamically modified based on the processor utilization and average latency of completion of processing the connection setup requests. The network element can apply a scheduling policy to those connection setup request packets to differentiate the processing treatment of different types of connection setup requests. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268799 | Methods of Structuring Data, Pre-Compiled Exception List Engines, and Network Appliances - A computer executed method is disclosed for sorting a plurality of internet protocol (IP) addresses. The method includes dividing the range of IP addresses into a plurality of clusters representing a plurality of contiguous sub-ranges, assigning each IP address to the cluster associated with the sub-range that includes that IP address, and assigning the IP addresses in each cluster to one of a plurality of pages. If one of the pages has a size less than a page size limit, the method includes duplicating on that page at least one of the IP addresses assigned to that page. For each page, the IP addresses assigned to that page are ordered by numeric value. A network appliance incorporating aspects of the method is also disclosed. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268800 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING NETWORK-ATTACHED STORAGE - A method for configuring a network-attached storage (NAS) includes: coupling the network-attached storage to a user-end personal computer (PC) via an external bus which supports a plug & play function; and utilizing the user-end PC to configure a network interface of the NAS via the external bus. A network-attached storage (NAS) includes a network interface, a bus interface, and processor. The network interface is for connecting with a network. The bus interface is for connecting with an external bus which supports a plug & play function and for receiving network interface setting parameters outputted by a user-end PC via the external bus. The processor is coupled between the network interface and the bus interface, and implemented for configuring the network interface according to the network interface setting parameters received by the bus interface. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268801 | WIRELESS APPARATUS AND NETWORK CONFIGURING METHOD - Provided is a technique whereby a device can be shared efficiently by multiple hosts in a network having a host as a control apparatus and a device has a controlled apparatus. A communication system that includes a wireless apparatus having a host function in which the wireless apparatus serves as a control apparatus and a device function in which the wireless apparatus serves as a controlled apparatus constructs a first network in which a first wireless apparatus serves as a host and a second wireless apparatus serves as a device, and constructs a second network in which the first wireless apparatus serves as a device and the second wireless apparatus serves as a host based upon a connection request transmitted from the second wireless apparatus to the first wireless apparatus via the first network. | 10-21-2010 |
20100268802 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR A HIERARCHICAL, REDUNDANT OAM&P ARCHITECTURE FOR USE IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer program products for a hierarchical, redundant OAM&P architecture for use in an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) are disclosed. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a system for managing an Internet protocol multimedia system (IMS) network. The system includes a network operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) entity for communicating with an operator's network, a system OAM&P entity associated with the network OAM&P entity, and at least one message processing entity associated with the system OAM&P entity for processing signaling information and for implementing at least one application. The system OAM&P entity receives OAM&P information from one or more message processing entities and communicates at least some of the received OAM&P information to the network OAM&P entity. The network OAM&P entity receives OAM&P information from the system OAM&P entity and communicates at least some of the received OAM&P information to the operator's network. | 10-21-2010 |
20100287262 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GUARANTEED END-TO-END DATA FLOWS IN A LOCAL NETWORKING DOMAIN - A local manager in a local networking domain may configure, in conjunction with one or more switching devices, a plurality of network and/or switching devices to establish guaranteed end-to-end data flows in the local networking domain for servicing applications and/or processes running in the network devices. The network devices supporting or using guaranteed end-to-end data flows may determine data flow requirements for each serviced application, and may communicate the determined data flow requirements to switching devices supporting the local manager, for configuring the guaranteed end-to-end data flows. Data flow requirements may comprise bandwidth, quality of service (QoS), security, and/or service level agreement (SLA) related parameters. The network devices may allocate networking resources to guarantee the end-to-end data flow for each application running in each network device. Data flow routing tables maybe maintained and/or updated based on use of existing guaranteed end-to-end data flows. | 11-11-2010 |
20100293256 | GRACEFUL DEGRADATION DESIGNING SYSTEM AND METHOD - When information about a failed physical server is inputted, the number of processing programs which are insufficient to meet an availability requirement specified in advance is calculated for each subsystem executing on a computer system, and a graceful degradation which meets the availability requirement is determined by changing the quantity of computer resources allocated to processing programs. | 11-18-2010 |
20100299412 | Automatic detection of agents - A telecommunication network has agents, managers for configuring agents, and at least one central directory service element with a memory to store information about these agents and these managers, which information is at least partly used in case of a further agent or manager being inserted into the telecommunication network. The central directory service element can use an object model and it can support a handshake mechanism for enabling communication between an agent and a manager in case of a new agent or manager in the telecommunication network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100299413 | IDENTIFICATION AND/OR ADDRESSING OF A DATA TERMINAL DEVICE OF A LOCAL NETWORK - The invention relates to identifying and/or addressing a data terminal device (DEE | 11-25-2010 |
20100299414 | Method of Configuring Routers Using External Servers - A system includes a router, a user device, and an external server. The router includes a series of configuration templates and is configured to forward requests from the user device to the external server and to direct responses from the external server to the user device. The responses include a name of one of the configuration templates with which the router is to be configured. | 11-25-2010 |
20100299415 | NETWORK I/O SYSTEM AND NETWORK CONFIGURING METHOD - A network I/O system includes a central communication unit having a communication port and a plurality of terminal communication units each having an upstream communication port and a plurality of downstream ports wherein the central communication unit transmits, to the terminal communication units, routing data of the central communication unit to the terminal communication units for setting identification numbers in the terminal communication units and data of the identification number of the terminal communication units, the terminal communication units refer to the data to transmit to the downstream communication port and set the identification number in a targeted terminal communication unit, and a communication port number of the downstream communication port is appended to routing recognition data to be transmitted from the terminal communication units to the central communication unit at a time of passing through the terminal communication units, thereby recognizing a network configuration. | 11-25-2010 |
20100306346 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MODIFYING A DATA STREAM COMMUNICATION - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprises at least one processor and at least one memory. The at least one memory includes computer program code. Further, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following receive a user configuration related to a data stream from an electronic device; and share or unshare the data stream with the electronic device based at least in part on the user configuration. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306347 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING, MONITORING, AND CONFIGURING SERVICES IN A NETWORK - A services tool can detect, monitor, and manage software providing services in and for the network. The services tool can identify different types of software that provides services for the network (“services software”) and types of software that provide support (“support software”) to the services software. The services tool can determine configuration data for both the services software and the support software. The services tool can automatically identify when particular services software needs to be linked to particular support software. The services tool can configure the services software and/or support software to link the two according to the rules. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306348 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISPLAYING AND COMPARING STORAGE ZONING CONFIGURATIONS - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for displaying and comparing storage zoning configurations is provided. The method comprises generating a table representing data paths between a plurality of source and target devices in a storage area network. Symbols are added symbols to the table, the symbols indicating whether communication between particular source and target devices along a particular data path is permitted, or not permitted, according to defined zone sets. The portions of the table may be sorted according to at least one desired parameter using a user interface. Also, a new zone set may be defined in response to a change in at least one of the values in the table made through a user interface. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306349 | Method and System for Configuring Service on Terminal - A method for performing service configuration on a terminal, comprises configuring service configuration codes and deploying one or more service configuration application servers in a next generation network in advance, said service configuration application server supporting said service configuration codes, and the method further comprises: a user terminal sending a session initiation protocol message to the network, and said session initiation protocol message carrying a service configuration code; after receiving said session initiation protocol message, the service configuration application server extracting said service configuration code, and performing corresponding service processing according to content of said service configuration code. A system for performing service setting with a terminal is also disclosed. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306350 | HIP Node Reachability - A method of configuring a plurality of rendezvous servers to provide a Host Identity Protocol, HIP, based mobility service to HIP nodes, where the servers are arranged in a hierarchical branching structure. For each HIP node, a Host Identity Tag, HIT, and contact address mapping is registered with a rendezvous server. That server then identifies itself and the HIT to each higher level server within the same branch, without explicitly identifying the contact address to those higher level servers wherein, in use, when a first rendezvous server receives a HIP contact message addressed to a given HIT, if that first server is unaware of the destination HIT, it forwards the message to a higher level server within the same branch and if the first server is not the server at which the HIT is registered but is aware of the HIT, it forwards the contact message to the neighbouring rendezvous server corresponding to the HIT. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306351 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOMAIN NAME AUTOCONFIGURATION IN IP-BASED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method and apparatus for domain name autoconfiguration in an IP-based wireless sensor network is provided. The method includes: receiving sensor node information including position information for representing an installed position of a sensor node, a type of data to be provided by the sensor node, and an internet address of the sensor node; searching for area information including an administrative address corresponding to the position information of the sensor node; generating a domain name of the sensor node based on a type of the sensed data and the found area information; and binding the generated domain name with an internet address of the sensor node and registering the bound result in a domain name server. | 12-02-2010 |
20100318636 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MOBILE SERVICE - A system for providing mobile service comprises an application executing section for executing an application, a component section for transmitting the result of the execution of the application to a mobile terminal on the basis of the operation data in the mobile terminal and allowing the application to be remotely operated in the mobile terminal, an authentication section for authenticating the user, a service management section for storing the configuration file or data file of the application, providing the file to the mobile terminal and regulating the connection with the component section according to the result of the authentication, and an application operation section for receiving and displaying the result of the execution in the application executing section on the mobile terminal, and transmitting the operation data in response to a user operation. | 12-16-2010 |
20100325247 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATION OF PARAMETER VALUES IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for allocating a value of a parameter to a client host by an access point in a communications system comprising an IP network, where the parameter value has previously been assigned to the same client host by a first parameter-value assigning node. The method includes using a DHCP message to carry a signed information package from the first parameter-value-assigning node to the access point via the client host. The signed information package comprises information on a preferred value of the parameter and a signature of the first parameter-value-assigning node. The signature can be verified by the access node, and if true, and if the preferred value is available for allocation, the access node will allocate the preferred value of the parameter to the client host. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325248 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING LEGACY NODES - A method of enabling a legacy host, attached to a local network, to discover a service provided by a remote server. The method comprises the following steps to be performed by an IP Multimedia Subsystem Gateway within said local network. (1) Subscribing to an IP Multimedia Subsystem presence service and receiving presence information published by the presence service including Globally Routable User agent URIs. (2) Receiving a service discovery message sent by said legacy host. (3) Searching said presence information to identify a requested service and an associated Globally Routable User agent URI. (4) Sending a response to said legacy host including a local network address of the Gateway, whilst maintaining a mapping between said local network address and said Globally Routable User agent URI. | 12-23-2010 |
20100332622 | Distributed Resource and Service Management System and Method for Managing Distributed Resources and Services - A distributed resource and service management system includes at least one node and a registry service. The at least one node is configured to execute at least one node controller. The registry service is configured to provide at least one service description via a control interface, and to offer logical resources to the at least one node controller. The at least one node controller is configured to discover the registry service, to initiate on-going communications with the registry service, and to execute at least one of queries, updates and inserts to the registry service to maintain service levels. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332623 | ADDRESS INFORMATION PROVIDING DEVICE - An address information providing device may be provide with an obtaining unit configured to obtain address information indicating an IPv6 address, a creation unit configured to create address information for display from the address information, and a supplying unit configured to supply the address information for display to a display device. The address information for display may be information in which a prefix portion of the address information has been replaced by a particular symbol. The address information for display may be information in which a prefix portion of the address information has been omitted. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332624 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR MANAGING ADDRESS BOOK DATA, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING CONTROL PROGRAM THEREFOR - An information processing apparatus that is capable of improving security by restricting improper registration of address book data. A registration unit registers a destination into an address book. A first determination unit determines whether the destination that is to be registered by the registration unit is a new destination. An addition unit adds identification information that shows a new destination to the address book when determined as a new destination by the first determination unit. A requirement unit requires transmitting and registering the address book data to another information processing apparatus. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332625 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Described herein are methods and systems for protocol configuration in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the system includes an access service network device configured to receive a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) message, including protocol configuration information of a mobile station, and to relay at least a portion of the protocol configuration information to a data server to which the mobile station seeks access. The protocol configuration information is translated to a protocol used by the access service network device and the data server, before relaying the protocol configuration information. The access service network device can act as a proxy or a relay between the mobile station and the data server. According to an embodiment, the wireless communication system includes a WiMAX communication system. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332626 | COMBINING LOCALLY ADDRESSED DEVICES AND WIDE AREA NETWORK (WAN) ADDRESSED DEVICES ON A SINGLE NETWORK - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for methods and systems for allowing a variety of devices desiring Internet Protocol (IP) addresses from potentially different locations to all operate on the same local area network. For example, a node, e.g., a gateway device, can receive a request for an IP address and determine whether that request was issued by a locally addressable device or a wide area network (WAN) addressable device. The node can then selectively locally provide an IP address or request an IP address, e.g., from a WAN, based on the determination. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332627 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR REGISTERING WITH LOCAL MOBILITY ANCHORS - A method, system and device for registering with a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) are disclosed. The method includes: receiving a message from at least one local device; selecting a new local device according to the message; and registering with the new local device. The present invention enables dynamic registration with the LMA based on the network. In the Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol (PMIP) domain, network sharing and load balancing are properly supported, the network is more reliable, and it is convenient for the operator to deploy the network massively. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332628 | DYNAMIC DISCOVERY OF QUALITY OF SERVICE NODES - A method of using a computer network for Dynamic Discovery of Quality of Service Nodes is provided. The method comprises requesting for a level of Quality of Service (QoS) of communication for a service of an Internet Service Provider (ISP) by a Application Service Provider (ASP). The request is based on a Quality of Service by Reference (QoSbyR) information that is received by the ASP from a user. The QoSbyR information comprises a ISP location information and a level of Quality of Service information. | 12-30-2010 |
20110004672 | Server Identifier Acquisition Based on Device Location - The present invention relates to a method, apparatus, system, and computer program product, in which a unique identifier of a node of a network is used to request from a database location-dependent information for a device attached to said node. An identifier of at least one server serving an area in which said device is located is then retrieved by using said location-dependent information. | 01-06-2011 |
20110004673 | ADDRESS DETERMINATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ADDRESS DETERMINATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An address determination apparatus that determines a valid address that a communication apparatus designates as the address at which a communication starts for indicating the origin of a transmission includes: a duplicate valid address determination means that selects a tentative address, and by an inquiry on a network, determines the existence of a valid address that duplicates the tentative address in the network; a memory means that stores the tentative address as an uncertain address when it is determined by the duplicate valid address determination means that there is no valid address that duplicates the tentative address in the network; and an address determination means that, when a communication apparatus begins communication that designates the address at which the transmission originates, determines the uncertain address that is stored in the memory means as the valid address designated as the address at which the transmission of the communication apparatus originates. | 01-06-2011 |
20110004674 | ADDRESS CONFIGURATION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - An address configuration method, apparatus, and system are disclosed. The method includes: after receiving a neighbor solicitation message sent by a terminal and inclusive of a Link-Local Address (LLA), comparing the LLA with addresses in an Internet Protocol (IP) address cache, and judging whether any address in the IP address cache matches with the LLA; and sending a proxy neighbor advertisement message to the terminal if an address in the IP address cache matches with the LLA, where the message indicates that the LLA is a duplicate address. In the embodiments of the present disclosure, after a neighbor solicitation message is received, duplicate addresses are detected for the LLA; after the Duplicate Address Detection (DAD), an IPv6 address is generated and delivered. In this way, IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration is realized on the terminal. | 01-06-2011 |
20110004675 | VIRTUAL INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT DEVICE FOR PERFORMING INFORMATION UPDATE PROCESS FOR DEVICE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - An information management device for performing an information update process from a virtual integrated management device that manages a plurality of device configuration information management devices to the device configuration information management devices, comprises a meta information management unit and an update processing unit. The meta information management unit, which is used to store meta information, indicates from which device configuration information management devices managed information comes. The update processing unit is used to narrow down the device configuration information management devices having information. The information is the basis of information on an update process such as registration, update and deletion based on the meta information, and giving a request for the update process, such as registration, update and deletion only to the device configuration information management devices narrowed down. | 01-06-2011 |
20110016199 | SYSTEM FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICE MONITORING - The present invention relates to telemetry methods and systems and more particularly, to telemetry network connectivity systems, devices and methods. In accordance with various embodiments, a suite of software components configured to provide machine-to-machine network connectivity includes a configurable device translation server module, a complex message constructor and at least one database. In some embodiments the suite of software components, specifically the complex message constructor, may be configured to authenticate commands between an interface and the device translation server. Additionally, the suite of software components, specifically the complex message constructor, may be configured to manage messages between the interface and the device translation server. Managing messages may include initiating alerts and notifications based on a comparison of programming and substantially synchronous and stored information. | 01-20-2011 |
20110016200 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING DEMAND RESPONSE SERVICES - A system for providing demand response services relative to a resource. Demand response information may be conveyed by a provider of the resource to demand-response logic. The logic may translate the demand response information into one of a pre-defined finite amount or number of demand response levels. These levels may be translated to device states, and in turn the device states may be translated to device commands. The translations may be based on rules designed to effect a resource usage scenario. The rules may be easily changed. The commands may be provided to devices at one or more facilities. The devices may control loads, which consume the resource, in accordance with the device commands. The devices may also provide information, such as conditions and resource consumption, relative to the facilities to the provider of the resource. The commands and information may be conveyed via local and wide communication networks. | 01-20-2011 |
20110016201 | MULTI NODE SERVER SYSTEM - A server system has, in addition to extensibility of scale-out type of a braid server system, extensibility of scale-up type by making SMP coupling among nodes. Each node has a unit for SMP coupling to other nodes. A module management unit responds to system configuration information to switch between a mode in which the node operates singularly as a braid server and a mode in which the node operates as a constituent module of an SMP server. Links among individual nodes are laid through equidistant wiring lines on a back plane and additionally a loop wiring line having a length equal to that of the inter-node link on the back plane is also laid in each node, thereby setting up synchronization among the nodes. Synchronization of reference clocks for SMP coupled nodes is also established. | 01-20-2011 |
20110022687 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATED, PEER-BASED CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK SERVICES - The subject application is directed to a system and method for automated, peer-based configuration of network services. An initial query is broadcast in a constrained communication protocol over a network via a network interface in accordance with a data peripheral including a processor operable in conjunction with associated memory. A reply, inclusive of identification data for each peer device, is received via the network interface in the constrained communication protocol. The acceptability of a peer device is then determined based on the received identification data. Network communication parameters are extracted from one of the peer devices in accordance with the determination. The extracted network communication parameters are stored in the memory, and the network interface is configured in accordance with the stored network communication parameters, so that the interface, configured with the network communication parameters, is operable in extended network communication protocol relative to the constrained communication protocol. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022688 | OBTAINING AND DISPLAYING NETWORK TOPOLOGY INFORMATION - Computer-readable media, methods and network information computer systems are provided for obtaining network topology information about a relationship between a configuration item and a network of configuration items based upon a property of the selected configuration item, and displaying the network topology information as a topological map. | 01-27-2011 |
20110029644 | Method for Vehicle Internetworks - Vehicle internetworks provide for communications among diverse electronic devices within a vehicle, and for communications among these devices and networks external to the vehicle. The vehicle internetwork comprises specific devices, software, and protocols, and provides for security for essential vehicle functions and data communications, ease of integration of new devices and services to the vehicle internetwork, and ease of addition of services linking the vehicle to external networks such as the Internet. | 02-03-2011 |
20110035469 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FILTERING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A method of filtering a plurality of DNS queries, wherein each DNS query includes a query name and a resource record type, includes defining a filter rule including a domain name, a filter type, and a throttle percentage and forming a filter file including the filter rule. The method also includes transmitting the filter file from a server to a plurality of filter proxies, transmitting the filter file from each of the plurality of filter proxies to one or more processing engines, and receiving the plurality of DNS queries at one of the one or more processing engines. The method includes determining a match between the domain name and the query name and between the resource record type and the filter type for a subset of the plurality of DNS queries, and blocking a predetermined percentage (equal to the throttle percentage) of the subset of the plurality of DNS queries. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035470 | Various Methods and Apparatuses for Tunneling of UDP Broadcasts - A method, apparatus, and system are described for a central station to allocate virtual IP addresses. A device service manager server (DSM) has a network access module configured to cooperate with two or more device service controllers (DSCs). The DSM serves as a central management station for allocating and assigning Virtual IP addresses to network devices to proxy communications for networked devices on a local area network (LAN) where each DSC resides. In some embodiments, various protocols may use UDP broadcasts to perform device discovery. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035471 | SELF-CONFIGURING IP ADDRESSABLE DEVICES UTILIZING TWO ETHERNET PROTOCOL IP PORTS - The present invention is related to a method and apparatus for monitoring and controlling devices comprising connecting an external manager to a communication protocol, connecting a first device to the external manager, assigning an IP address to said first device publishing a second IP address from the first device, connecting a second device to said first device such that it obtains the said second IP address, publishing a third IP address from said second device. | 02-10-2011 |
20110040853 | KVM switch and KVM system - A KVM switch connected between an information processing device and a remote terminal, includes a memory part that stores boot screen data generated when the information processing device is booted or rebooted, and a transmission control part configured to send predetermined key data to the information processing device independently of the remote terminal when screen data received from the information processing device coincides with the boot screen data stored in the memory part. | 02-17-2011 |
20110040854 | Context Transfer and Common IP Address for DHCP Proxy Solution in WiMAX - A network comprising a network component configured with a common internet protocol (IP) address, wherein a similar network component in a similar network is configured with the common IP address, and wherein the network is in communication with the similar network. The disclosure includes a network component comprising a processor configured to implement a method comprising communicating with a mobile station (MS) using an IP address that is common for similar elements in similar networks, and receiving a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) context associated with the MS. Also disclosed is a first access network in communication with a second access network, the first access network comprising a first DHCP proxy configured with a substantially identical IP address as a second DHCP proxy in the second access network, and an agent configured to promote transfer of a DHCP context to the second access network. | 02-17-2011 |
20110040855 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF REDUCING SIGNALING IN A NETWORK HAVING A DATABASE SERVER - In one aspect of the invention, a system and method reduce central database signalling. The system and method select a gateway in response to an event; determine whether to transmit a gateway identifier identifying the selected gateway to a central database; and indicate whether the gateway identifier has been transmitted to the central database. | 02-17-2011 |
20110047252 | Adaptive Routing of Content Requests Using Multiple Anycast Addresses - A system includes a plurality of cache servers and a domain name server. Each of the cache servers is configured to respond to a content request. The plurality of cache servers is divided into a plurality of subsets and configured to respond to an anycast address for each subset to which the cache server belongs. The domain name server is configured to receive a request from a requester for a cache server address, identify an anycast address for a largest available subset, and provide the anycast address of the largest available subset to the requester. | 02-24-2011 |
20110078288 | NETWORK UNIT AND METHOD FOR EXECUTING A FUNCTION OF A NETWORK TERMINATION UNIT USING THE SAME - A network unit and method for executing a function of a network termination unit include computing hash values corresponding to configuration parameters, confirming function pointers of functions corresponding to the configuration parameters, and inserting the hash values and the function pointers into a hash table. The network unit and method further include computing a hash value of a configuration parameter name acquired from a configuration command, confirming a function pointer corresponding to the hash value if the hash table includes the hash value, and executing a function corresponding to the function pointer. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078289 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION METHOD FOR NETWORKING DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED NETWORK CONFIGURATION MODULE - A network configuration method for a networking device and an associated network configuration module are provided to simplify the network configuration process of the networking device, thereby increasing user's convenience. The method connects a storage device to another networking device, so as to obtain network configuration information thereof and store it into the storage device. Next, the method connects the storage device to the networking device, and configures the networking device according to the network configuration information stored in the storage device. | 03-31-2011 |
20110082918 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING AND/OR CONFIGURING A MOBILE PLATFORM TO PROVIDE A SUITE OF SERVICES - A system and method for determining a service provider set of one or more service providers to provide a service suite of one or more services in a platform (e.g., a mobile device platform) and configuring such platform to utilize such service provider set to provide such service suite to a user, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 04-07-2011 |
20110093570 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY TRANSITIONING OF CONFIGURATION SETTINGS AMONG COMPUTER SYSTEMS - A method and system for automatically transitioning configuration settings among computer systems. Multiple configuration settings comprising a computer “personality” are located on a source computing system using multiple transition rules from a personality object. The computer personality includes customization choices, data files, electronic mail, system preferences, application customization choices, the network environment, browser information, etc. The configuration settings are extracted from multiple locations on the source computing system. The multiple extracted configuration settings are stored in a pre-determined transition format. The multiple extracted configuration settings are manipulated. A transition package is created from the multiple manipulated configuration settings. The transition package includes the multiple manipulated configuration settings. The transition package is sent to a target computing system. The transition package is infused on the target computing system to automatically transition configuration settings from the source computing system to the target computing system. The method and system may vastly reduce transition, configuration and deployment times for service providers, corporations, and end-users when a new computing system is deployed. | 04-21-2011 |
20110093571 | NETWORK MOBILITY FOR MULTI-LEVEL NETWORKS - There are disclosed measures of address assignment for a network element being operable in a multi-level network, comprising retrieving a network prefix of said multi-level network and network prefix information including at least one of a top-level indication, a suffix length parameter and a maximum prefix length parameter, generating a first address in accordance with a topology of said multi-level network on the basis of said retrieved network prefix and network prefix information, and assigning said generated address to an egress interface of said network element. | 04-21-2011 |
20110093572 | LOW LEVEL INITIALIZER - Various embodiments of a method of configuring a predefined set of electrically isolated blades to function as a single blade are described. In one embodiment, a configuration rule is accessed, wherein a portion of the configuration rule assigns roles to management processors coupled with the predefined set of conjoined blades of a blade partition. Assistant management processors are directed to configure blade manageability modules to support the assigned roles. The blade manageability modules are coupled with the management processors. In one embodiment, the assistant management processors are directed to configure resources to be shared across the blade partition according to the configuration rule. After determining that the conjoined blades are configured according to the configuration rule, the conjoined blades are initialized. Thus, the conjoined blades are coordinated to function as a single blade. | 04-21-2011 |
20110099252 | NETWORK ADDRESS ALLOCATION - Apparatus, systems, and methods assign a permanent network address to a user identity, detect access to a network by a node associated with the user identity, generate an identifier associated with the user identity, and send the identifier to the node to enable the node to obtain replacement of a temporary network address allocated to the node, with the permanent network address. Activities may include receiving a release request from a node to release a temporary network address allocated to the node (associated with the user identity), receiving an allocation request (including the identifier) from the node to allocate a permanent network address previously assigned to the user identity, and allocating the permanent network address to the node as a replacement for the temporary network address. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed. | 04-28-2011 |
20110099253 | CONSOLIDATED NOTIFICATIONS TO NFS CLIENTS - A computer implemented method and apparatus for rebooting a host having a plurality of network interfaces. A server reboots the host by stopping an NFS server process on the host. The server sends at least one consolidated notification to a plurality of clients identified in a consolidated notification table, wherein the consolidated notification comprises at least two addresses of network interfaces of the host. The server determines that an acknowledgement is received from each of the plurality of clients. The server halts resending of consolidated notifications, responsive to determining that an acknowledgement is received from the each of the plurality of clients. | 04-28-2011 |
20110106919 | AUTOMATED DNS CONFIGURATION WITH LOCAL DNS SERVER - A client process may identify a local DNS server and may change a DHCP-supplied DNS setting to the local DNS server when the local DNS server is present. The client process may periodically monitor the local DNS server and, if the local DNS server is not present, the client process may revert the DNS setting to the originally supplied DHCP DNS setting. The client process may actively monitor the local DNS server by initiating communication with the local DNS server, or may passively monitor by listening for activity by the local DNS server. | 05-05-2011 |
20110106920 | Mapping Network Addresses to Organizations - Network addresses (e.g., IP addresses) are considered candidates for association with organizational entities (organizations or various subgroups thereof), based on some evidence of a relationship between them. The candidate addresses are scored based on one or more factors that indicate a probability that the candidate address actually belongs to the organizational entity. The candidate addresses with sufficient scores are stored as actual associations between the candidate address and the organizational entity. | 05-05-2011 |
20110113125 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A DATA FORMAT FOR PROCESSING DATA AND DEVICE EMPLOYING THE SAME - A method for determining a data format for processing data to be transmitted along a communication path is disclosed. In one aspect, the method includes identifying at run-time an operational configuration based on received information on the conditions for communication on the communication path. The method may also include selecting according to the identified operational configuration, a data format for processing data to be transmitted among a plurality of predetermined data formats. | 05-12-2011 |
20110113126 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR APPLYING CONFIGURATION - A method for applying configuration includes: receiving configuration commands sent by an Auto-Configuration Server (ACS), performing configuration according to the configuration commands, and applying the configuration according to a configuration application policy. The present disclosure also provides a device and a system for applying configuration. | 05-12-2011 |
20110113127 | PROGRAM DEPLOYMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD - With a management server that is connected via a network to at least one physical server including a physical server with a virtualization facility for providing a virtual server to a client and deploys a program to the at least one physical server as necessary, and by a program deployment method for such a management server for deploying a program to the at least one physical server as necessary, there is provided units for detecting one or more nodes which are any of the physical server, the virtualization facility, and the virtual server and connected via the network, acquiring first configuration information about a virtual layer of each detected node for each detected node, and selectively deploying the program to the relevant node based on the first configuration information for each acquired node. | 05-12-2011 |
20110119357 | Methods and Apparatuses for Terminating an IP Multimedia Subsystem Service When IP Address is No Longer Allocated to the User - A method of terminating an IP Multimedia Subsystem enabled communication service involving a user terminal, the terminal having been allocated an IP address by an access network used by the terminal to access the communication service. The method comprises determining when the IP address is no longer allocated to the user by the access network, and as a consequence of the determination, terminating the IP Multimedia Subsystem communication service. | 05-19-2011 |
20110119358 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPERATING NETWORKED COMPUTER SYSTEMS - In various embodiments of the invention, a server monitors a network for a startup message from a client computer as appropriate. The server may include a computer application that generates configuration instructions in response to commands from an administrator and/or information obtained from a client computer. The instructions may be in the form of scripts, data, objects, or the like. The instructions may be passed to the client computer, which may execute various administrative functions as directed. In exemplary embodiments, the instructions may command direct placement, verification and/or replacement of files, directory entries, BIOS attributes or other characteristics of the client computer. | 05-19-2011 |
20110119359 | Method, Apparatuses And Computer Program For Parental Control Over Children's Activities In An IMS Network - The present invention faces the issue of exercising a parental control over children's activities in the IMS network, in terms of registering into the IMS network as well as in terms of call establishment, and provides for a new IMS subscription model supporting a hierarchy of IMPI's, so-called ‘primary’ IMPI's and so-called ‘secondary’ IMPI's, whereby only the primary IMPI's are allowed to register themselves, whereas the secondary IMPI's can only register themselves after having been previously registered by a primary IMPI. To this end, the present invention provides for a new method and an enhanced HSS to allow the implicit registration of one or more ‘secondary’ IMPI's upon the explicit registration of an IMS subscriber with a given IMPI/IMPU pair, wherein the given IMPI is a ‘primary’ IMPI and the given IMPU is associated with a registration set of IMPI's which includes said one or more ‘secondary’ IMPI's. | 05-19-2011 |
20110125880 | Method and Device for Uniform Resource Identifier Handling of User Device - A user device ( | 05-26-2011 |
20110131300 | COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR MANAGING CONFIGURATION ITEM, AND METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM THEREFOR - There is provided a method for managing a plurality of configuration items. The method includes holding, at a repository, for each configuration item, one set of data indicating at least one predetermined attribute of the configuration item and a relationship with another configuration item. The method also includes detecting, at a discovery section, information on configuration items. The discovery section performs subsequent detection based on at least one of a predetermined attribute and a predetermined relationship in a new set of data created from the information detected by the discovery section. | 06-02-2011 |
20110131301 | COMMUNICATING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is provided of communicating configuration information to a network service that is scaled over a plurality of network nodes. The method comprises designating one of the nodes of the plurality as a master node (S | 06-02-2011 |
20110138023 | PROGRAMMING METHOD OF NETWORK NODES IN SENSOR NETWORK AND OPERATING METHOD OF SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is a programming method of network nodes in sensor network. The programming method receives a code to be programmed in the network nodes. The programming method determines the kind of the received code. The programming method selects a programming scheme according to the determined kind of the code. The programming method programs the received code in the network nodes based on the selected programming scheme. | 06-09-2011 |
20110138024 | Environment Customization Based On Location - A user's location is automatically transmitted to a network, and the network automatically customizes one or more environments, such as by customizing communication devices, other types of devices, or the like, based on the detected location and on profile information. Customizing an environment may include enabling services, such as setting up a public telephone or hotel telephone with a user's home base telephone settings and/or services, and/or may include disabling functions, such as disabling long-distance service when the user is away from home. | 06-09-2011 |
20110145373 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MEDICAL DEVICES - Systems and methods for configuring communication between medical devices are provided. One method includes transmitting a broadcast query via the medical network from a local device to a plurality of remote devices and receiving a response from at least one of the plurality of remote devices identifying communication parameters for the remote device. The method further includes configuring communication between the local device at the at least one remote device at the local device based on the received communication parameters from the remote device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110145374 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DISTRIBUTED MODULES IN DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION METHOD USING THE SAME - A software system capable of enabling efficient communication between an application and an operating environment in a heterogeneous network is provided. A distributed processing system adopting the software system may obtain optimized latency during a network communication between distributed software modules. | 06-16-2011 |
20110145375 | NETWORK APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A disclosed network apparatus is capable of being connected to one of a restricted area where a communication is restricted and a non-restricted area where a communication is not restricted via a DHCP server and a network based on a DHCP address assigned by the DHCP server. The network apparatus includes a communication unit configured to carry out communications including a broadcast communication and a multicast communication, and a reporting unit configured to generate a report containing apparatus own information of the network apparatus to be sent over the network. In network apparatus, when the network apparatus is connected to the non-restricted area based on the DHCP address, the communication unit sends the report containing the apparatus own information of the network apparatus via the broadcast communication in place of the multicast communication. | 06-16-2011 |
20110153786 | Method for offline servicing of a field device of automation technology - A method for offline servicing of a field device (FD) of automation technology by means of a service unit (SU), wherein a web server is associated with the field device (FD) and a web browser is associated with the service unit (SU), wherein the method has the following steps: the service unit (SU) connects via the web browser with the web server of the field device (FD) to be serviced; a control logic (CL) made available by the web server is loaded into the web browser; the control logic (CL) starts the download of offline web pages, which are present in the web server or are produced by it, and loads the web pages and the configuration data of the field device (FD) into the service unit (SU); and the current configuration data are, with involvement of the web pages and the loaded configuration data, edited or created offline in the service unit (SU). | 06-23-2011 |
20110161468 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CASCADING PEER-TO-PEER CONFIGURATION OF LARGE SYSTEMS OF IEDS - A method and system of efficiently distributing configuration information for IEDs across one or more networks in an electrical monitoring system is disclosed. Changing configuration information is managed by a configuration management system. The IEDs in the network or networks are organized in peer relationships, each peer relationship having at least one seed IED. The configuration information is loaded to the seed IED or seed IEDs which make the configuration parameter available to other IEDs in a peer relationship with the seed IED. The other IEDs may in turn become seed IEDs for other IEDs. The configuration information therefore cascades throughout the network without further communication between the configuration management system and the selected IEDs. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161469 | METHOD FOR BUILDING SPONTANEOUS VIRTUAL COMMUNITIES BASED ON COMMON INTERESTS USING INTEREST BANDS - The present invention refers to a method for establishing communication between equipments within groups and/or communities, which are formed according to the interest of each user. The equipments are programmable, allowing inserting predicates based on the interests of the user, creating interest bands. The communication equipment syntonizes the interests of an user with the interests of a group. The interest bands are formed with predicates which contain both anonymous and identified information; in this case, the user allows such information to be shared with all or with groups of same interest bands. The method is preferably distributed and communication is spontaneous and volatile. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161470 | Method, System and Computer Program Product for Server Selection, Application Placement and Consolidation Planning of Information Technology Systems - A plurality of application profiles are obtained, for a plurality of applications. Each of the profiles specifies a list of resources, and requirements for each of the resources, associated with a corresponding one of the applications. Specification of a plurality of constraints associated with the applications is facilitated, as is obtaining a plurality of cost models associated with at least two different kinds of servers on which the applications are to run. A recommended server configuration is generated for running the applications, by formulating and solving a bin packing problem. Each of the at least two different kinds of servers is treated as a bin of a different size, based on its capacity, and has an acquisition cost associated therewith. The size is substantially equal to a corresponding one of the resource requirement as given by a corresponding one of the application profiles. Each of the applications is treated as an item, with an associated size, to be packed into the bins. The bin packing problem develops the recommended server configuration based on reducing a total acquisition cost while satisfying the constraints and the sizes of the applications. | 06-30-2011 |
20110167140 | REMOTELY CONFIGURED MEDIA DEVICE - Improved techniques for controlling operation of a portable electronic device are disclosed. Portable electronic devices which interact with a host electronic device can have their operational settings (e.g., configurations or preferences) remotely controlled. As a result, a host electronic device can offer a more sophisticated user interface and portable electronic devices need less local user interface features because these operational settings can be remotely controlled. The remotely-controlled (i.e., host controlled) operational settings are transferred to the portable electronic devices, whereby the portable electronic devices can thereafter operate in accordance with such settings. | 07-07-2011 |
20110173302 | Cluster Configuration - Computer implemented methods, system and apparatus for configuring a cluster using a plurality of hosts include identifying a plurality of features for forming the cluster. The plurality of features define requirements needed in a host for forming the cluster. A plurality of hosts are identified to be part of the cluster. A compatibility analysis is executed for each of the identified hosts. A plurality of suggested adjustments to particular hosts are presented to enable the particular hosts to be compatible with the features requirements. A configuration template is constructed for the hosts in the cluster that are compatible with the requirements. The hosts are configured for the cluster using the configuration settings in the configuration template. The configured hosts enable the features in the cluster. | 07-14-2011 |
20110173303 | Cluster Configuration Through Host Ranking - Computer implemented methods, system and apparatus for configuring a cluster using a plurality of hosts include identifying a plurality of features for forming the cluster. The plurality of features define requirements needed in a host for forming the cluster. A plurality of hosts are identified to be part of the cluster. A compatibility analysis is executed for each of the identified hosts wherein a ranking is provided for each of the identified hosts. A plurality of suggested adjustments to particular hosts are presented to enable the particular hosts to be compatible with the features requirements. A configuration template is constructed for the hosts in the cluster that are compatible with the requirements. The hosts are configured for the cluster using the configuration settings in the configuration template. The configured hosts enable the features in the cluster. | 07-14-2011 |
20110173304 | MANAGEMENT AND USE OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A configuration as discussed herein includes a content management system. The content management system can reside in a central location or be distributed amongst multiple different locations in a network environment. In general, the content management system keeps track of configuration information for the retrieval of content. For example, the content management system identifies a presence of one or more content delivery sources in the network environment. The content management system utilizes the contact information to communicate with content delivery sources for discovery of configuration information. The configuration information can indicate: i) a respective address of the content delivery source, ii) a type of content outputted by the respective address, iii) a format of the content such as streaming data outputted by the respective address. The configuration information can be used to identify an address in which to retrieve requested content according to a desired format. | 07-14-2011 |
20110179147 | UNAFFILIATED WEB DOMAIN HOSTING SERVICE BASED ON SERVICE POOLS WITH FLEXIBLE RESOURCE - A website hosting architecture provides a plurality of services, from a plurality of service pools, to each of a plurality of unaffiliated websites, each of the plurality of service pools is adapted to contribute services to distinct service packages for at least a plurality of unaffiliated websites, each of the plurality of service pools is distributed across a plurality of servers, at least a portion of the servers being adapted to provide an overlapping service set in order to facilitate flexible resources from each of the plurality of service pools. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179148 | EDGE QAM CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT - A method of configuring an edge device in a network wherein a transport network interfaces with edge devices that interface with client devices involves a configuration file. The edge device can be configured by downloading the configuration file to the edge device. The method comprises connecting the edge device to the network, downloading the configuration file to the edge device, and configuring the edge device. The configuration file may contain configuration information for the edge device including information relating to at least one edge device input and information relating to at least one output. | 07-21-2011 |
20110185047 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A DISTRIBUTED FAULT TOLERANT NETWORK CONFIGURATION REPOSITORY - An autonomous management cluster of network elements serves as a distributed configuration repository. Network elements sharing a common pre-determined shared identifier autonomously form themselves as a management cluster. The network elements in the cluster exchange configuration files. In the event of a loss, destruction, or corruption of one of the network element's configuration file, the network element recovers its configuration file from its closest neighbor in its management cluster. The management cluster can also be used to efficiently disseminate configuration changes by simply communicating the changes to one or more elements in the cluster, and allowing the other nodes in the cluster to discover and retrieve their updated configuration files. | 07-28-2011 |
20110191450 | BLOCKING A SELECTED PORT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF AN APPLICATION - An installer application implemented in a computational device receives a command to install a test application in the computational device. The installer application determines whether a selected port of a plurality of ports of the computational device is to be blocked prior to installing the test application in the computational device. In response to determining that the selected port is to be blocked prior to installing the test application in the computational device, the installer application blocks the selected port, installs the test application by binding a socket to the selected port of the plurality of ports, and tests functions of the test application by executing one or more code paths of the test application, in response to installing the test application. | 08-04-2011 |
20110191451 | CABLE MODEM AND MULTIMEDIA TERMINAL ADAPTER PARAMETER CONFIGURATION FILE CONFIGURING METHOD - A cable modem stores an original public Internet protocol (IP) address of the cable modem in an original country, and a mapping relationship among a plurality of country codes, a plurality of public IP address ranges, and a plurality of multimedia terminal adapter (MTA) parameter configuration files. The cable modem obtains a new public IP address of a current country in which the cable modem is located. The cable modem determines whether the new public IP address and the original public IP address belong to one of the plurality of public IP address ranges. The cable modem selects one of the plurality of MTA parameter configuration files to configure the cable modem according to the mapping relationship if the new public IP address and the original public IP address belong to different public IP address ranges. | 08-04-2011 |
20110196945 | CREATING A PUBLIC IDENTITY FOR AN ENTITY ON A NETWORK - A system is disclosed for establishing a public identity for an entity on a private network. In one embodiment, a first entity can initiate a request to create a binding of a public address to a private address for itself. The existence of this public address for the first entity can be made known so that other entities can use the public address to communicate with the first entity. The present invention allows entities outside of a private network to initiate communication with an entity inside a private network. | 08-11-2011 |
20110196946 | CONFIGURING NETWORK SETTINGS USING PORTABLE STORAGE MEDIA - A portable computer-readable media device and method of use enable automatic configuration of a computing device, such as a conventional network device or a thin client device, for operation in a network. Configuration information, including network settings and security information, is incorporated in an XML file written to the portable media device while it is installed in a first device. This configuration is then automatically transferred to a second device by installing the portable media device in the second device. The second device then writes device information, incorporated in an XML file, to the portable media device, to be uploaded to the first device. | 08-11-2011 |
20110202638 | MIXED INTEGER PROGRAMMING MODEL FOR MINIMIZING LEASED ACCESS NETWORK COSTS - A device receives network configuration information from a network, determines a logical network based on the network configuration information, and constructs a mixed integer programming (MIP) model based on the logical network. The device also calculates an optimal solution, which minimizes network costs, using the mixed integer programming (MIP) model, performs a post-optimization mapping procedure on the optimal solution to produce an optimal network configuration mapping, and outputs the optimal network configuration mapping for implementation. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202639 | CALCULATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, PROGRAM CREATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM CREATION PROGRAM - A calculation processing apparatus includes a monitor, a CPU, a memory and a hard disk. The hard disk stores an initial program input from outside, a network creation program, a network modifying program, network information, node operation definition, and learning variables. The CPU executes the network creation program, and creates network information related to a network representing an algorithm structure of the initial program. Further, the CPU executes the network modifying program and modifies the network information based on the result of calculation by the network, using a learning algorithm. | 08-18-2011 |
20110208840 | Cookie alert - A portable compatible browser with cookie alert and, allowing a user to take the browser display settings to another PC, or PC to PC without altering the browser settings setup from the first PC when moving to a second PC. And gives the user the capability to set the amount of cookies that can tag or logon to the user browser. Cookies that are logon or tag on to the user browser, automatically displaying on the user monitor or screen in or on a dropdown box, tag, cookie jar and or container giving the user the option to eat or burp the cookie that is display. | 08-25-2011 |
20110208841 | INCREMENTALLY MANAGING DISTRIBUTED CONFIGURATION DATA - A configuration management system provides a partitioned data model for collecting and representing configuration information from a diverse set of sources to allow easier modeling of very large, highly redundant sets of enterprise configuration information. The system partitions large configuration schema into logical subcomponents that can be combined, shared, and reused. The system also partitions instantiated data models into logical sub-models that can be combined, shared, reused, and incrementally updated. Each product team can provide its own configuration schema, which allows the domain experts in a particular field to provide reusable models for their products. These models may include sub-models that allow reuse of selected portions of the configuration schema. When the system stores data related to each portion of the model, it stores the data in a partitioned manner that makes incremental updates of each component of the model more straightforward and less resource intensive. | 08-25-2011 |
20110208842 | Identification of Relay Nodes in a Communication Network - A relay node identified by a unique relay node identifier relays communications between a donor base station and one or more user terminals. The donor base station acquires the relay node identifier during a relay node attach procedure from where the relay node or another node in the core network (e.g., mobile management entity). The donor base station may use the relay node identifier to retrieve configuration information for the relay node. The configuration information may be used to configure the relay node, to perform radio resource management functions, and/or to monitor the performance of the relay node. | 08-25-2011 |
20110208843 | Method and Arrangement for Improved Configuration of a Network Device - In a method in an intermediate gateway device enabling improved configuration of a device in an IP system, said device being associated with a first network for utilization of a resource associated with a second network, where said two networks are in communication via said intermediate gateway device, performing the steps of receiving (S | 08-25-2011 |
20110213863 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NIC-CENTRIC HYPER-CHANNEL DISTRIBUTED NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A server comprising a network interface controller (NIC) may be operable to determine network components and/or resources that may be utilized to create, modify and/or terminate a hyper-channel in a network fabric. A configuration for creating, modifying and/or terminating the hyper-channel may be initiated by the NIC based on knowledge of the network fabric up to the edge of network and each of the switches along a path of the hyper-channel may be instructed by the NIC to configure the hyper-channel. The configuration may also be initiated by the NIC based on knowledge of the network fabric up to a first hop and each of the switches along a path of the hyper-channel may then be allowed to configure the hyper-channel based on knowledge of the network fabric surrounding each of the switches. | 09-01-2011 |
20110213864 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMPUTER NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION - A system for simplifying the configuration and administration of computer networks. A the server system first sends a broadcast message out to the other network nodes on the computer network to learn configuration of each other network nodes on the local network. Next, network software within each other network node (not shown) responds to the broadcast message with a response containing configuration information and an identifier key value. In one embodiment, the identifier key value may be a randomly generated number. The server system then builds a table of network nodes using the information received in the response messages sent in response to the broadcast message. The server may then communicate with systems having duplicate addresses using the identifier key value. In some embodiments, the server system may send request messages to one or more network nodes specifying a network configuration change. | 09-01-2011 |
20110213865 | Dynamic Power Usage Management Based on Historical Traffic Pattern Data for Network Devices - Particular embodiments provide power usage management for network devices according to historical traffic pattern data. Network traffic statistics for traffic flowing through a network device may be determined. A traffic pattern for a time period based on the traffic flowing through the network device is then determined. The network device may then manage power based on the pattern. For example, when a pattern indicates that traffic flowing through the network device is light during a time period, then the network device may operate in a lower power mode, such as a standby mode and when it indicates that there is higher usage, the network device may operate in a normal power mode. In one embodiment, a power usage policy may be determined based on the historical traffic patterns and is automatically enforced by the network device. The power usage policy may also be dynamically adjusted over time based on network traffic statistics. | 09-01-2011 |
20110231524 | METADATA MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR NAS GLOBAL NAMESPACE DESIGN - A global namespace (GNS) is constructed across heterogeneous network-attached storage (NAS) devices by organizing metadata servers into a cluster layer having cluster nodes and a consistent hashing overlay layer having overlay nodes. The global namespace is distributed based on workload at the cluster and overlay nodes, and a portion of the GNS namespace may be migrated from one layer to the other. Cluster nodes may be added to the cluster layer, overlay nodes may be added to the consistent hashing overlay layer. Further, a cluster node may become an overlay node or an overlay node may become a cluster node. To access the global namespace, a request for namespace metadata managed by a cluster node is serviced by the cluster node, but if the requested namespace metadata have been migrated to the consistent hashing overlay layer, the cluster node will forward the request to the responsible overlay node for servicing. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231525 | CONFIGURING CLOUD RESOURCES - A computer implemented method, system and/or program product configure cloud resources. A request is received for a specific set of cloud resources. The set of cloud resources comprises at least one cloud resource that has been associated with an ontological database. The ontological database defines descriptive terms for the cloud resource and describes relationships between the descriptive terms used by different cloud resources. An optimal set of cloud resources that satisfies the request is configured and saved for future usage in responding to requests for the specific set of cloud resources. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231526 | ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND MONITOR SYSTEM USING THE ACCESS POINT DEVICE - A monitor system includes at least one network camera distributed in an area to be monitored, an access point device connected to the at least one network camera. The access point device includes ports, a central processing unit (CPU), and a storage device containing an information table. Each of the ports is connected to the CPU, and the CPU is connected to the storage device. The table records a serial number, a media access control (MAC) address, and an area monitored by each camera in the system, and records an Internet protocol (IP) pool previously assigned to each monitored area. After an IP request from one of the cameras, the CPU searches an associated IP pool in the table according to the MAC address, and randomly assigns an IP address from the IP pool to a corresponding network camera. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231527 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURATING DEVICES - A method and apparatus for performing automatic device configuration are disclosed. A portable device contains information relevant to configuration of a second device. The second device obtains the relevant information from the first device, and configures itself according to configuration information obtained based on the relevant information. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231528 | LANGUAGE SETTING DEVICE, METHOD FOR SETTING LANGUAGE OF LANGUAGE SETTING DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN LANGUAGE SETTING PROGRAM - A language setting device | 09-22-2011 |
20110231529 | System and Method for Assessing a Distributor of Correspondence - A method of assessing a distributor of correspondence, comprising providing a unique address for receiving correspondence from the distributor; receiving an evaluation of the distributor based on the correspondence received at the unique address; and forming an assessment of the distributor based on the received evaluation. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231530 | PUBLISHING USER SUBMISSIONS AT A NETWORK-BASED FACILITY - According to the present invention, there is provided a method to facilitate propagating a plurality of transaction listings to a network-based transaction facility. An input interface is presented at a seller application to receive from a user, a plurality of transaction listings, each transaction listing including an associated start time. Also, a data file is composed at the seller application to include the plurality of transaction listings. Moreover, the data file is propagated, using the seller application, from the client computer to the network-based transaction facility. | 09-22-2011 |
20110238792 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING AND MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY OF A CONFIGURATION - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for monitoring and maintaining consistency of a configuration across a plurality of cores or packet engines in a multi-core system. A configuration manager handles communication of configuration commands to a plurality of cores or packet engines. If a command executes successfully on a first packet engine but fails on a second packet engine, the configuration manager may communicate an undo command to the first packet engine. Successful execution of the undo command may restore the packet engines to a consistent configuration. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238793 | MANAGING DISTRIBUTED ADDRESS POOLS WITHIN NETWORK DEVICES - In general, techniques are described for managing distributed address pools within network devices. A network device that includes a control unit and at least one interface may implement these techniques. The control unit stores data defining a network address pool shared by both the network device and another network device. The control unit includes a shared pool manager module that evaluates the data defining the network address pool to determine a block of addresses of the network address pool that is not in use by the other network device. The at least one interface transmits a request to the other network device requesting the determined block and receives a response from the other network device indicating whether one or more addresses of the requested block are available. The control unit then allocates one or more addresses from the requested block to subscriber devices based on the indication in the response. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238794 | PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK CONNECTIVITY STATUS - The embodiments disclosed herein provide a system, apparatus, and method for managing requests in a peer-to-peer network. A processor determines whether to reduce an amount of checks for connectivity for the device in the peer-to-peer network in response to a device being in the peer-to-peer network. The processor configures the device to send a message indicating a status of the device to a number of other devices in the peer-to-peer network without receiving a request for the status of the device in response to a determination to reduce the amount of checks for connectivity for the device in the peer-to-peer network. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238795 | Semantic Matching of Federation Intents and Services Capabilities in a Planning System for Automatic Service Federation - A method, device, and computer program product are provided for automatically generating connectivity configuration between domains by a device. A rule is received by the device. The rule is read by the device to determine a first domain invoking a service, a second domain having the service, and connectivity requirements for the first and second domains. A first proxy and a second proxy are automatically determined to fulfill the rule by the device. The first proxy is automatically assigned to the first domain and the second proxy is automatically assigned to the second domain. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238796 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD - According to one example of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device comprising one or more configurable features. The device comprises an interface for receiving configuration data for configuring a feature of the electronic device and a data store or memory for storing feature configuration data associated with a configurable feature. The device further comprises logic for determining whether the received configuration data is compatible with configuration data stored in the data store. If the logic determines that the received configuration data is compatible the device is configured in accordance with the received configuration data. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238797 | CLOUD-BASED SOFTWARE ECO-SYSTEM - A novel eco-system is provided which first supplies a standardized template of one or more virtual machine images for software module providers/vendors. A plurality of modules executing on the virtual machine images is selected by a user to comprise a plurality of configurations. A suitable configuration may be determined according to a metric and the determined suitable configuration of software modules is subsequently used to build an end-to-end solution. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238798 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device including a registration unit that registers an IP address of the communication device and a method information including a first method information indicating a first setting method for setting a dynamic IP address and a second method information indicating a second setting method for setting a static IP address. The registration unit includes a change unit that changes registered contents of a memory in accordance with a user's instruction. When the first method information and a first IP address are registered in the memory, the change unit does not change the method information in the memory from the first method information to the second method information in a case where a method change instruction for changing the first setting method to the second setting method is given by the user under a state where the first IP address has not been changed to another IP address. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238799 | MIGRATION OF DATA BETWEEN COMPUTERS - Techniques and mechanisms that allow configuration information, applications and/or data to be transferred between computer systems in an automated, or partially automated, manner, which may allow for more efficient transfer as compared to manual transfer. A source computer system may be coupled with a destination computer system directly via a wired or wireless communications channel. Data including, for example, user identification information, network settings, system settings, permissions and/or other data may be transferred from the source computer system to the destination computer system. | 09-29-2011 |
20110246626 | LOCAL AND REMOTE CLIENT COMPUTER SYSTEM BOOTING - Alternative desktop computing solutions provide client devices configured with a local boot image and a connection to a remote storage device having a boot image. The clients are configured to boot either locally or remotely, and furthermore to determine from which image (local or remote) they have booted. | 10-06-2011 |
20110246627 | Data Center Affinity Of Virtual Machines In A Cloud Computing Environment - Administration of virtual machine affinity among data centers in a cloud computing environment, where the cloud computing environment includes a plurality of virtual machines (‘VMs’), the VMs composed of modules of automated computing machinery installed upon cloud computers disposed within data centers, the cloud computing environment further including a cloud operating system and data center administration servers operably coupled to the VMs, including installing, by the cloud operating system on at least one VM, an indicator that at least two of the VMs have an affinity requirement to be installed upon cloud computers in separate data centers; communicating, by at least one of the VMs, the affinity requirement to at least one data center administration server; and moving by the at least one data center administration server the VMs having the affinity requirement to cloud computers in separate data centers in the cloud computing environment. | 10-06-2011 |
20110246628 | INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - An information communication system comprising an information processing apparatus and a plurality of node devices in which contents delivered within the information communication system are stored in a distributed manner by an overlay network constituted by the plurality of node devices, the information processing apparatus comprising: an acquisition unit that configured to acquire a plurality of contents associated by a predetermined structure; a generation unit that configured to generate first information comprising location information indicating locations of the plurality of contents in the predetermined structure and the identification information for identifying the plurality of contents associated by the predetermined structure, and the location information and the identification information are corresponding to each other; a second assignment unit that configured to assign identification information for identifying the first information in the overlay network to the first information. | 10-06-2011 |
20110246629 | ASSIGNMENT OF A COMMON NETWORK ADDRESS TO MULTIPLE NETWORK INTERFACES OF A COMPUTING OFFICE - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for enabling assignment of a common network address to multiple network interfaces of a computing device attached to a network domain. An apparatus ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110258297 | Locator Table and Client Library for Datacenters - A system including a plurality of servers, a client, and a metadata server is described herein. The servers each store tracts of data, a plurality of the tracts comprising a byte sequence and being distributed among the plurality of servers. To locate the tracts, the metadata server generates a table that is used by the client to identify servers associated with the tracts, enabling the client to provide requests to the servers. The metadata server also enables recovery in the event of a server failure. Further, the servers construct tables of tract identifiers and locations to use in responding to the client requests. | 10-20-2011 |
20110264772 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROXIMITY-BASED, PEER-INITIATED DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A method and a system for configuring of a client device using a configuration device in a peer to peer communication local network including a plurality of client devices, the configuration device including configuration information designated as sharable information. The method comprises generating a discovery request at the configuration device, the discovery request targeted to the plurality of handheld devices, in response to the discovery request, generating a request for communication with the configuration device from at least one client device, establishing communication between the configuration device and the client device, assigning, at the configuration device, a group to the at least one client device, identifying, at the configuration device, a selection of components from among the sharable information, the selection of components associated with the assigned group and for downloading to the at least one client device; and downloading, for installation at the client device, the selection of components to the at least one client device of the assigned group. | 10-27-2011 |
20110270956 | EXTERNAL PROCESSOR FOR A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK ACCESS SYSTEM - An external processor for a network access system having a programmable access device includes a service controller that provides at least one service for network traffic, a message processor that processes network messages for service processing by the service controller, and a programmable access device controller that programs the programmable access device in response to service controller processing. It is advantageous for the external processor to include primary and secondary service controllers for a particular service so that, if the primary service controller fails, the secondary service controller can provide the particular service for message received from the programmable access device. In preferred embodiments, the service controller further includes a reporting processor that provides an interface through which reporting messages received from the programmable access device can be communicated to the service controller and a signaling controller that transmits signals to configure network hardware to establish requested network connections. The external processor preferably further supports a service policy interface through which the service controller can request policy decisions from a possibly remote policy server. | 11-03-2011 |
20110276665 | METHOD OF PERFORMING PAIRING BETWEEN COORDINATOR AND DEVICE IN NETWORK, METHOD OF PERFORMING PAIRING BETWEEN DEVICES, METHOD OF PAIRING BETWEEN COORDINATORS AND NETWORK SYSTEM INCLUDING THE COORDINATORS AND THE DEVICES - Provided are methods and apparatuses for performing pairing. A method of performing pairing between a coordinator and a peer device includes: if a second coordinator of a second network relays first pairing information indicating that a first coordinator of a first network is a device to perform pairing, from the first coordinator to a peer device of the second network, disassociating, by the peer device, from the second network, associating with the first network, and then transmitting, to the first coordinator, the first pairing information and second pairing information indicating that the peer device is a peer device to perform pairing. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276666 | Obtaining Information from Different Devices in a Computer Network - Illustrative embodiments of the invention provide for obtaining information from different devices in a computer network. Data representing the information from each of the different devices is received, the data is in a specific form relating to each of the different devices. The data from each of the different devices is assigned to one or more entities as defined by an information model. The data from each of the different devices is grouped using an adaptation layer before assigning the data from that device to one or more entities. | 11-10-2011 |
20110282975 | TECHNIQUES FOR DYNAMIC CLOUD-BASED EDGE SERVICE COMPUTING - Techniques for dynamic cloud-based edge service computing are provided. A principal requests a service and a policy is evaluated to select a cloud processing environment capable of supplying the service from an optimal network location as defined by the policy. The selected cloud processing environment is configured to supply the requested service and to monitor and control access of the principal to the requested service from the selected cloud processing environment. | 11-17-2011 |
20110282976 | MAPPING OF LOGICAL VOLUMES TO HOST CLUSTERS - A method for data storage includes defining a host cluster within a group of host computers, which access a storage system that includes multiple logical volumes. The host cluster includes two or more of the host computers. A single mapping instruction, which specifies the host cluster and a set of one or more of the logical volumes, is accepted. Responsively to the single mapping instruction, each of the host computers in the host cluster is mapped to access the logical volumes in the set. In another disclosed method, a single control instruction, which specifies the host cluster and a configuration operation to be applied to the host computers in the host cluster, is accepted. Responsively to the single control instruction, the configuration operation is applied to each of the host computers in the host cluster. | 11-17-2011 |
20110282977 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING POLICIES ON A COMPUTER - An apparatus, system, and method are disclosed for managing policies on a computer having a foreign operating system. Policies may specify hardware or software configuration information. Policies on a first computer with a native operating system are translated into configuration information usable on a second computer having a foreign operating system. In an embodiment, a translator manager manages the association between the policy on the first computer and the translator on the second computer. Computer management complexity and information technology management costs are reduced by centralizing computer management on the native operating system. Further reductions in management complexity are realized when the present invention is used in conjunction with network directory services. | 11-17-2011 |
20110289196 | METHOD OF DISTRIBUTING PCC RULES AMONG IP-CONNECTIVITY ACCESS NETWORK (IP-CAN) BEARERS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and system for distributing policy and charging control (PCC) rules among a plurality of IP-Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) bearers. The method may include one or more of the following: receiving, at a PCRN, an UE request (CCR) message, processing the UE message to generate one or more PCC rules, determining one or more requested service data flows (SDFs) from the UE message, and for each requested SDF, generating a new PCC rule based on the UE message. The method may further include, providing each new PCC rule to a Policy and Charging Enforcement Node (PCEN), controlling distribution of the generated PCC rules among a plurality of IP-CAN bearers, and binding each requested service data flow to select ones of IP-CAN bearers of the plurality of IP-CAN bearers. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289197 | METHOD TO SET SETTING INFORMATION IN DEVICE AND DEVICE TO SET SETTING INFORMATION - A device obtains network setting information by using a function for obtaining the network setting information used for network communication through a network. The device receives from an apparatus for transmitting setting information to be set in a device to the device, setting information containing information to stop using the function to set the received setting information in the device. | 11-24-2011 |
20110295982 | SOCIETAL-SCALE GRAPH-BASED INTERDICTION FOR VIRUS PROPAGATION SLOWDOWN IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention enable very rapid intervention on detection of computer network attacks by viruses or other malicious code. Targeted disruption of links between selected nodes in the network is used to hinder the spread of such malicious code. This applies to e-mail and other modes of communication. For instance, identification of and response to an attack may occur within 5-10 minutes instead of the hours or days timescale associated with known signature-based virus protection techniques. Aspects of the invention directly adapt to observed patterns of social contacts and exchanges to provide a substantial increase, e.g., on the order of a 10-fold increase, in the time until a virus affects 70-80% of network users. This provides anti-virus inoculation mechanisms significant time, for instance on the order of 1-2 additional days, before an attack disrupts worldwide communication networks. | 12-01-2011 |
20110295983 | APPLICATION-LAYER TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION SERVICE ENDPOINT TYPE ATTRIBUTE - Using the ALTO Service, networking applications can request through the ALTO protocol information about the underlying network topology from the ISP or Content Provider. The ALTO Service provides information such as network resource preferences with the goal of modifying network resource consumption patterns while maintaining or improving application performance. This document describes, in one example, an ALTO server that implements enhancements to the ALTO service to assign a PID-type attribute to each of a set of one or more PIDs each associated with a subset of one or more endpoints of a network, wherein a PID-type attribute specifies a type for the subset of endpoints associated with the PID. The ALTO server generates an ALTO network map that includes a PID entry to describe each of the PIDs, wherein each PID entry includes a PID-type field that stores the assigned PID-type attribute for the PID described by the PID entry. | 12-01-2011 |
20110295984 | CARTRIDGE-BASED PACKAGE MANAGEMENT - A method for establishing a support environment for a program may include identifying one or more support environment features depended upon by the program to run on one or more nodes, selecting one or more support software components indicated to provide the features, loading the selected support components on the one or more nodes, automatically configuring the selected support components based on the program, and causing the program and the selected support components to be executed one or more nodes. | 12-01-2011 |
20110295985 | ENHANCED NETWORK ADAPTER FRAMEWORK - An enhanced network adapter framework, in which parameters are stored in a configuration table, the parameters being customized for a network and an application. A network adapter customized for the network and the application is instantiated based on invoking a generic network adapter which externally references the configuration table, and communication between the application and the network is effected using the instantiated network adapter. | 12-01-2011 |
20110302280 | Performing Administrative Tasks Associated with a Network-Attached Storage System at a Client - Installer code is received from a network-attached storage (NAS) system at a client device. The installer code executing at the client device performs a selected subset of administrative tasks at the client device, where the administrative tasks are tasks associated with the NAS system. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302281 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CONFIGURATION DATA SUCH AS FOR CONFIGURING ELECTRONIC MAIL ACCESS - A system, method and computer-readable medium provides configuration data, such as for electronic mail access. A configuration module retrieves the configuration data from a source of configuration data, such as a user system. The configuration in one aspect could be for accessing different electronic mailboxes of a user. Data object are generated. Each data object is submitted as a distributed object module to a web service. The web service in one aspect of the invention could be for a pass-through access for configuring electronic mailboxes. | 12-08-2011 |
20110314136 | Method and System for Improved Communication Network Setup - Aspects of a method and system for improved communication network setup may comprise receiving authentication enablement information from a configurator station comprising indication of a current state of a configurator timing window. In response to input at a client station to communicate authentication response information to the configurator station, receiving at the client station, configuration information and/or status information resulting from input at the client station. Other aspects of the invention may comprise responding to input at a configurator station to transmit authentication enablement information comprising indication of a current state of a configurator timing window, receiving authentication response information from the client station based on the transmitted authentication enablement information, and transmitting to the client station configuration information and/or status information from the configurator station based on the received authentication response information. | 12-22-2011 |
20110320573 | APPLICATION SERVER FOR MAINFRAME COMPUTER SYSTEMS - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for running software on an adapter. In response to a connection of a hardware interface for the adapter with a current host computer, a processor unit in the adapter determines whether a set of protocols for communicating with the current host computer to access resources is present on the adapter. In response to the set of protocols being absent on the adapter, the processor unit obtains the set of protocols from the current host computer. The processor unit identifies a set of available resources in the current host computer for use by the adapter using the set of protocols. The processor unit runs software stored on a set of storage devices in the adapter using the set of available resources identified for use by the adapter. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320574 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING APPLICATION SERVER CONFIGURATION USING CONFIGURATION GROUPS - Disclosed is an approach for using a declarative model to configure domains, where the declarative model allows definition of applications and services within groups, definition of topology units in groups and a mapping between the application and service groups and topology groups. Processing of this model, embodied in XML, involves automatically changing the application server configuration to reflect the association of applications and services to the topology units, enabling the application server to deploy applications and services to servers, clusters, and other elements upon boot-up of the components. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320575 | STORING AND SYNCHRONIZING MEDIA DEVICE INFORMATION - Systems, devices, and methods for storing and synchronizing data using Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) or any other protocol that provides for authentication, presence and messaging. One such method is performed in a digital media device, such as a set top. Device and user-configured settings associated with a digital media device may be saved to a network. The settings may be synchronized with other devices of a user, or used to configure a newly provisioned replacement digital media device. The settings may include pointers to network resources where content is stored such that content need not be transferred from an old or failed digital media device to the newly provisioned digital media device. | 12-29-2011 |
20110320576 | SYSTEM FOR CREATING AN AIR-TO-GROUND IP TUNNEL IN AN AIRBORNE WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORK TO DIFFERENTIATE INDIVIDUAL PASSENGERS - The Aircraft Air-To-Ground IP Tunnel System provides wireless communication services to passengers located onboard an aircraft by storing data indicative of the individually identified passenger wireless devices located onboard the aircraft. The Aircraft Air-To-Ground IP Tunnel System assigns a single IP address to each Point-to-Point Protocol link connecting the aircraft network to the ground-based communication network and creates an IP subnet onboard the aircraft. The IP subnet utilizes a plurality of IP addresses for each Point-to-Point link, enabling each passenger wireless device to be uniquely identified with their own IP address. This is enabled since both Point-to-Point Protocol IPCP endpoints have pre-defined IP address pools and/or topology configured, so each Point-to-Point Protocol endpoint can utilize a greater number of IP addresses than one per link. Such an approach does not change IPCP or other EVDO protocols/messaging but allows this address to be directly visible to the ground-based communication network. | 12-29-2011 |
20120005317 | NETWORK SERVICE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - The system remotely manages the configuration of one or several network services ( | 01-05-2012 |
20120011229 | ENHANCED NETWORK/DOMAIN NAME HASHING TECHNIQUES - Described herein are techniques related to a generation of a short identifier of a domain/network that is based upon the long human-readable network/domain name (NDN) that a user or admin typically gives to the network/domain. With one or more implementations described herein, the short network/domain identifier (DNI) is based upon a version of the long human-readable NDN that has been modified to remove any data that is superfluous to distinguishing the NDN for any other. This Abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 01-12-2012 |
20120011230 | Utilizing a Gateway for the Assignment of Internet Protocol Addresses to Client Devices in a Shared Subset - A gateway may be utilized to assign Internet protocol (IP) addresses to client devices in a shared subnet. The gateway may include a dynamic host protocol configuration (DHCP) proxy server. The proxy server may receive discover messages from the client devices. The proxy server may send proxy discover messages to a master DHCP server and receive offer messages containing IP addresses and local options. The proxy server may add/modify the local options to create proxy offer messages, send the proxy offer messages to the client devices and receive IP address request messages from the client devices. The proxy server may send proxy IP address request messages to the master DHCP server and receive acknowledgement messages. The proxy server may add/modify local options in the acknowledgement messages to create proxy acknowledgement messages and send the proxy acknowledgement messages to the client devices to assign the IP addresses and the local options. | 01-12-2012 |
20120011231 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING EXECUTION OF AN AUTOMATIC PROCESS - The present invention discloses a method for controlling execution of an automatic process. The method includes: receiving a resume command that carries stoppoint information; determining whether the stoppoint information carried in the resume command is the same as information about a current stoppoint of a current automatic process; and resuming the current automatic process from the current stoppoint when the stoppoint information carried in the resume command is the same as the information about the current stoppoint. The present invention also discloses another method for controlling execution of an automatic process, a system, a management apparatus, an automatic apparatus, a computer program product, and a computer readable storage medium, ensuring that the automatic process is executed in accordance with user expectations. | 01-12-2012 |
20120011232 | PORTABLE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK ADDRESS SETTING METHOD THEREOF - A portable communication terminal apparatus which is connected to a router through a cable includes a storage which stores a plurality of allocated Internet Protocol (IP) addresses, a detector which detects information on the cable connected to the router, and an address setting part which sets one of the plurality of IP addresses as a network IP address based on the detected information on the cable. | 01-12-2012 |
20120016970 | Method and System for Network Configuration and/or Provisioning Based on Open Virtualization Format (OVF) Metadata - Certain aspects of a method and system for network configuration and/or provisioning based on open virtualization format (OVF) metadata may include accessing a set of port profiles for one or more virtual machines from a port profile database based on OVF metadata. One or more virtual machines may be configured, deployed, and/or managed based on the accessed set of port profiles. One or both of a uniform resource identifier (URI) to the profile data base and/or a port profile identification may be included in the OVF metadata to allow a virtual machine (VM) administrator device to access the set of port profiles for the one or more virtual machines from the port profile database. Alternatively, the set of port profiles may be included in the OVF metadata to allow the VM administrator device to access the set of port profiles for the one or more virtual machines from the port profile database. | 01-19-2012 |
20120016971 | SERVER SYSTEM AND CONSTRUCTION METHOD FOR I/O CONFIGURATION OF SERVER SYSTEM - At least one second I/O switch which a plurality of I/O devices is coupled to is coupled to at least one first I/O switch to which a plurality of servers is coupled. A configuration in which all servers that are coupled to the first I/O switch can be coupled to all I/O cards that are coupled to the at least one second I/O switch that is coupled to the first I/O switch is executed. The controller receives the specifications of a server unit and an I/O device unit that is to be coupled to the server unit. The controller executes a setting in which at least one I/O device that configures the specified I/O device unit is allocated to at least one server that configures the specified server unit to the second I/O switch to which the at least one I/O device is coupled. | 01-19-2012 |
20120016972 | SNMP AGENT DEVICE AND CONFIGURATION UNDO METHOD - An SNMP agent device includes: a receiving unit configured to receive an SNMP configuration command from a manager device; a configuration processing unit configured to update, when the configuration command designates management information and a configuration value, the management information in the agent device by the configuration value; and a configuration history storage unit configured to store the configuration command, mapping the configuration to a pre-update value of the management information. When the configuration command designates undo, the configuration processing unit performs an undo process of returning the management information updated by a past configuration command to the value occurring before the update. | 01-19-2012 |
20120016973 | CONFIGURATION ORCHESTRATION - One embodiment of the present invention provides a network device that facilitates configuration orchestration. During operation, the system interprets a configuration command and stores a data structure representing a set of business logic. The business logic can be triggered by the configuration command, a local condition, or both. Furthermore, the system configures the switch according to an outcome of the business logic. | 01-19-2012 |
20120023205 | RELIABLE SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK NOTIFICATIONS - The present disclosure provides reliable systems and methods for network notifications, i.e. Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 Protocol Data Unit (SNMPv2-Trap-PDU) messages, asynchronous notifications, InformRequest-PDU messages, and the like, between network elements, element managers, and other element managers. In an exemplary embodiment, the present invention includes a network management system and method with a plurality of network elements operating a management agent communicatively coupled to an element manager which in turn is communicatively coupled to another element manager, a network management system (NMS), an operations support system (OSS), or the like. The present invention may utilize SNMPv2 and/or v3, and includes various techniques and processes ensuring reliable notifications between any of the network elements, element managers, or the like in the network management system. | 01-26-2012 |
20120023206 | ADDRESS DISTRIBUTING METHOD AND DEVICE - A system is disclosed that includes a plurality of node devices arranged in sequence; a first node device operable to generate a device count frame with a device count number and transmit the device count frame to the next node device in the sequence; a control device in communication with at least the first node device; wherein each node device is operable to increase the device count number of the device count frame upon receipt of the device count frame and transmit the device count frame to the next node device in sequence; and wherein the control device operable to receive the device count frame to the first node device after each node device has increased the device count number of the device count frame and assign an IP address for each node device, the number of IP addresses determined by the device count number. | 01-26-2012 |
20120030318 | SETUP AND CONFIGURATION OF A NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM - This is directed to providing access to content stored on a personal cloud. In particular, a personal cloud can be constructed by sharing the resources of several devices owned by a user and by other users trusted by the user. To add a device to a personal cloud, the device can identify its owner to a librarian, which can provide addressing information for other devices forming a cloud on behalf of the owner. The new device can establish a communications path with the other devices, and configure itself based on the services or data required for the personal cloud (e.g., as determined from communications with the other devices). Services operating on individual devices of the personal cloud can migrate dynamically and automatically to ensure that a user can remove a device from the personal cloud at will without adversely affecting the operation of the personal cloud. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030319 | MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A NETWORK FOR TRANSFERRING DATA - A method for configuring a network path of a network for transferring a data flow, whereby said path has a network device susceptible of network congestion and arranged for storing at least a part of the data flow. The method includes determining at least one possible path for transferring between locations of source and destination a data flow, the data flow being classified according to a footprint measure indicative of a possible difference between the total amount of incoming data and the total amount of outgoing data in the at least one network device over a time interval having a duration of one or more time units, the time unit is chosen that individual data units of the at least one data flow are distinguishable at byte level by the network device, and configuring the at least one path according to the footprint measure. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030320 | NETWORK POWER MANAGEMENT - A system for managing energy efficiency and control mechanisms in a computer network having a plurality of network components is provided. The system includes a network power manager (NPM) coupled to at least one of the plurality of network components. The NPM is configured to receive and analyze power information from at least one of the plurality of the network components. The NPM is further configured to generate configuration instructions based on the analyzing of the power information and send the configuration instructions to at least one of the network components. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030321 | NETWORK MERGE TESTING - A method and system for performing network merge testing are disclosed. In one embodiment, the network merge testing method comprises: (i) gathering configuration information from at least two networks; (ii) comparing the configuration information; and (iii) displaying a report that indicates whether an attempted merge of the at least two networks would succeed. The report preferably identifies conflicts between the network configurations, and the method may further include automatic or guided resolution of the conflicts. The configuration information may include: zone names and memberships; domain and port names; security settings; inter-op modes; and long distance modes. A system for implementing the method is also disclosed herein. The system and method may advantageously prevent or diagnose causes of network segmentation. | 02-02-2012 |
20120036231 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVER INITIATED CONNECTION MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for managing server initiated connections via a multi-core system that provides VPN access between clients and servers. The solution described herein provides a mechanism by which server and client communications via the multi-core system for a server initiated connection may be received on different cores and for the system to manage these communications across different cores to provide an end-to-end connectivity between the client and the server. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036232 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING ROUTE - The embodiment of the present invention provides a method for establishing a route, which includes searching a target node by a node from a first level node group according to first level route information, returning to query a result or data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise executing the following step; searching a target node by the node from a higher level node group according to higher level route information, returning to query a result or the data saved by the target node if the target node is found, otherwise repeating the step. Through the hierarchical communication system, most of the flows of daily service operations in the communication network are limited within a small region, thereby preventing from excessively occupying the band width of a backbone network being originally not wide enough. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036233 | ADDRESSING SCHEME - An addressing scheme enables mobile web-service providing devices located within private address domains to be contacted by other devices located on the same LAN segment regardless of whether or not the two devices are located in the same private IP address domain, providing a working network path can be identified directly or indirectly between the two devices. In this way, if a device-label (such as a telephone number which is associable with an addressed device) is provided by an addressing device to an addressing server, the server is able to resolve the device-label to a private address via which the addressing device can contacted. The private address is utilized by the web-browser application to seamlessly and transparently obtain a requested web-service from the addressed device using any suitable communications channel, e.g. WiFI, Bluetooth, etc, that provides a working path between the two devices. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036234 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A NETWORK - A method of managing a network. The method includes receiving an activation key transmitted from a device connected to the network, automatically transmitting a configuration to the device, automatically maintaining the configuration of the device, and receiving log information from the device. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036235 | USE OF DYNAMIC PROFILES FOR CREATING AND USING A DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A system is configured to create a profile that allows a job to be performed within a distributed computing environment comprising one or more computing devices; provide an interface that allows the profile to be specified; obtain a scheduler component via the interface, where the scheduler component identifies a scheduler to be used to perform the job and an application that at least one of the computing devices, that is specified by the scheduler, is to use when performing the job; obtain, via the interface, a project component that identifies data on which the job is to be based; and create the profile based on the scheduler component and the project component. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036236 | CONFIGURING INTERCOMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN COMPUTING NODES - Techniques are described for configuring intercommunications between multiple computing nodes, such as multiple virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems. In some situations, virtual networks may be established and maintained for groups of computing nodes, such as those operated by or on behalf of various users. Such virtual networks may be established in some situations by automatically configuring various communication manager modules to associate communications from a computing node belonging to a virtual network with one or more networking identifiers associated with the virtual network, such that other communication manager modules may appropriately forward or otherwise process such communications. | 02-09-2012 |
20120042054 | System and Method for Virtual Switch Architecture to Enable Heterogeneous Network Interface Cards within a Server Domain - A server includes a plurality of virtual machines partitioned on the server and a first virtual switch. The first virtual switch is in communication with the virtual machines, and is configured to detect a connection of a first converged network adapter to the server, to determine network requirements of the virtual machines, and to determine whether the first converged network adapter has a first virtual network interface card that is compatible with the network requirements of the virtual machines. If the first virtual network interface card of the first converged network adapter is compatible with the network requirements of the virtual machines, then the first virtual switch provisions the first virtual network interface card as a second virtual switch for the virtual machines, otherwise the first virtual switch provisions a software-based virtual network interface card in the first virtual switch. | 02-16-2012 |
20120042055 | END-TO-END PROVISIONING OF STORAGE CLOUDS - Embodiments discussed in this disclosure provide an integrated provisioning framework that automates the process of provisioning storage resources, end-to-end, for an enterprise storage cloud environment. Such embodiments configure and orchestrate the deployment of a user's workload and, at the same time, provide optimization across a multitude of storage cloud resources. Along these lines, input is received in the form of workload requirements and configuration information for available system resources. Based on the input, a set (at least one) of storage cloud configuration plans is developed that satisfy the workload requirements. A set of scripts is then generated that orchestrate the deployment and configuration of different software and hardware components based on the plans. | 02-16-2012 |
20120042056 | Hard Disk Drive Integrated Circuit With Integrated Gigabit Ethernet Interface Module - A system including a network interface module, a first processor, a hard disk control module, and a second processor. The network interface module is configured to communicate with a network. The first processor is configured to communicate with the network interface module and perform processing related to communication of a hard disk drive with the network via the network interface module. The hard disk control module is configured to communicate with the first processor and control operation of the hard disk drive. The second processor is configured to communicate with the hard disk control module and perform processing related to storing data on the hard disk drive. The second processor and the hard disk control module are configured to process packets communicated via the network interface module using a hyper-text transfer protocol, a peer-to-peer sharing protocol, and an Internet protocol-based small computer system interface standard. | 02-16-2012 |
20120047239 | System and Method for Installation and Management of Cloud-Independent Multi-Tenant Applications - An application framework may include a cloud-independent application manager, a cloud-independent content services manager, and cloud-independent content services servers. The framework may dynamically install and manage scalable, multi-tenant applications in a cloud, and may scale the applications, as needed. The application manager may receive and handle requests to install application domains and configurations thereof, and may receive and respond to requests for information about servers on which installed methods are available. The content services servers may execute installed methods, using underlying resources of the cloud, through a cloud-specific SPI. The content services manager and application manager may work together using shared cloud storage to provide scalable content services at a very large scale. In the context of the framework described herein, an “application” may be defined by methods bundled into configurations, and by various cost-based and/or performance-based rules that specify how server instances providing those methods are to be managed. | 02-23-2012 |
20120059915 | MANAGING REMOTE COMPUTER TRAINING LABS - An educational and training system allows organization and management of computers and course material used in teaching and administering classes of computer based information. Remote users access computers in laboratories or virtual classrooms as if they were actually using the computers within the laboratory or classroom. The system also allows management and tracking of the remote users and of other various course details. | 03-08-2012 |
20120066355 | Method and Apparatus to Provide an Ecosystem for Mobile Video - A method or apparatus to provide a video ecosystem is described. The video ecosystem, in one embodiment, permits live video streaming between users on different platforms, carriers, and/or devices. | 03-15-2012 |
20120066356 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY ADDRESSNG DEVICES ON A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method automatically assigns unique addresses to devices connected on a communication bus based on the parameters measured by each device. Assignment of addresses may be provided centrally by a controller or may be distributed, in which each device negotiates with other devices to assign unique addresses to each device. | 03-15-2012 |
20120072551 | AMBIGUITY MEASUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT FOR CONFIGURATION ITEMS - Systems and methods for measuring and managing ambiguity among a plurality of configuration items residing in a configuration management database include determining for at least a first configuration item, at least a second configuration item such that a first set of attributes associated with the first configuration item and a second set of attributes associated with the second configuration item have at least one attribute with an identical value. As an indicator for the ambiguity, an ambiguity index for the first configuration item may be measured. One of the first configuration item and the second configuration item may be identified as an ambiguous configuration item. Upon identification, an operational state of the ambiguous configuration item or a set of one or more attributes associated with the ambiguous configuration item may be modified. The ambiguity for configuration item transactions may likewise be measured and managed to locate and resolve transaction ambiguity. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072552 | Enabling Server Support of Client Specific Behavior - A wireless device attempting to join a wireless network may provide its software version as part of the bootstrap process. A server may then check the software version to determine whether any workaround is needed and, if so, may provide the workaround in response to receiving the software version. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072553 | Mass Configuring Technical Systems - A computer-implemented method for mass configuring technical systems includes receiving a call that is associated with a configuration manager and generated from a first of multiple systems. Each of the multiple systems has at least one instance of the configuration manager, and each system includes multiple technical systems configured using a corresponding instance of the configuration manager. The method includes retrieving, from the corresponding instance and in response to the call, identifiers for at least a subset of the technical systems in the first system. The method includes retrieving, from the corresponding instance and from the subset of the technical systems, configurations for the subset of the technical systems. The method includes forwarding an execute configuration communication to the corresponding instance including at least one parameter that has been changed from the retrieved configurations. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072554 | NODE CLUSTERING - Large sets of unorganized data may provide little value in identifying useful observations from such data. For example, an online merchant may maintain a database of millions of user IDs (e.g., a cookie ID, a login ID, a device ID, a network ID, etc.) along with content viewed and/or actions taken with the user IDs, where minimal associations are known between user IDs. It may be advantageous to link together user IDs of respective users to capture a comprehensive view of respective users' activities. Accordingly, one or more systems and/or techniques for identifying a cluster of nodes based upon transforming a set of node pairings (e.g., pairings of related nodes) one or more times are disclosed herein. Iterative transformations may be performed until respective nodes are paired with merely their smallest neighboring node and are paired with no other node. In this way, node clusters may be identifiable. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072555 | LINKING INSTANCES WITHIN A CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an approach to allow a user to link multiple cloud instances (e.g., virtual machines) together such that an action on one (cloud) instance is triggered when a second instance's state changes thereby invoking a predefined set of rules. Specifically, instances can be linked to one another via a graphical user interface (GUI or the like), and associated with a set of rules. The set of rules indicates a behavior/reaction of one instance when an action is performed with respect to another instance linked thereto. These embodiments could be implemented external to or within a cloud operating environment. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072556 | Method and System for Detecting Network Upgrades - A system and method identify a network upgrade from a data set including a plurality of configuration sessions. The system performs the method by receiving a plurality of configuration sessions. Each of the configuration sessions comprises a plurality of configuration commands. The configuration commands are generated by a same user identifier and within a time threshold. The method further includes identifying one of the configuration sessions as a network upgrade session. The identification is based on a rareness of the configuration session or a skewness of the configuration session. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072557 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR EXECUTING PROCESSING IN RESPONSE TO REQUEST FROM EXTERNAL DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD OF INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus includes a generation unit configured to generate a first identifier and a second identifier for identifying an external device, a storage unit configured to store the generated first and second identifiers in association with each other, a first processing unit configured to execute processing based on a received first processing request, a transmission unit configured to transmit the first identifier together with a processing result of the first processing unit to the external device, and a second processing unit configured to, if a reception unit receives a second processing request including the first identifier transmitted from the transmission unit, identify the external device by the second identifier corresponding to the first identifier, and execute the processing based on the second processing request. | 03-22-2012 |
20120079080 | Apparatuses, Methods and Systems For An Interactive Proximity Display Tether With Remote Co-Play - The APPARATUSES, METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR AN INTERACTIVE PROXIMITY DISPLAY TETHER WITH REMOTE CO-PLAY (“CO-PLAY”) teaches an interactive cooperative gameplay platform, which provides an interactive communications and display tether between a source device and a remote display device, and between a source device and a co-play client device. The CO-PLAY allows multiple users to operate an application platform, e.g., in game environments. For example, a user may employ a mobile device, such as the Apple iPhone, and launch a CO-PLAY implemented video game to query and connect to an available client device (e.g., another Apple iPhone) to co-play the video game. In one implementation, the CO-PLAY may tether the mobile device with a remote display device for visualization on a larger display. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079081 | IMAGE-PROCESSING SYSTEM AND IMAGE-PROCESSING METHOD - An image-processing system comprising a peripheral device | 03-29-2012 |
20120079082 | User Data Convergence Network System and Method for Subscription to Notification - A method for implementing subscription to notification is disclosed in the present invention, which is applied in a user data convergence network including a user data repository. The method comprises: establishing a subscription to notification relationship in the user data repository; said subscription to notification relationship comprises notification triggering condition that describes the condition of the user data repository sending a notification message; when receiving an update data request, if the update data request meets the notification triggering condition, the user data repository sends a notification message to notification event subscriber. Compared with the prior technology, the present invention effectively solves the problem about how to implement subscription to notification in a network system in which the application logic processing and data storage are separated, and implements the triggering of the expected notification message based on the established subscription to notification relationship. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079083 | Sharing Performance Data Between Different Information Technology Product/Solution Deployments - A method and system for dynamically sharing performance information among multiple computing nodes. One implementation involves dynamically obtaining performance information from deployments of an information technology (IT) product/solution at said computing nodes, and transmitting the obtained performance information to a server over a communication network for storing the obtained performance information in a knowledge database. The server operates to dynamically determine new configuration information based on the information in the database, store the new configuration in the database, and provide the new configuration information to said deployments by transmitting the new configuration information over the network. | 03-29-2012 |
20120084406 | Logical Networks - An invention is provided for creating logical network abstractions of physical networks, and deploying computer services to physical networks based on a specified logical network. In an embodiment, a physical network is divided into one or more logical networks. Upon receiving an indication to deploy a computer service to a logical network, a mapping from that logical network to a sub-network of the physical network is determined, the service is configured to execute on the sub-network of the physical network, and an indication of this configuration of the service is stored. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084407 | REAL-LOAD TUNING OF DATABASE APPLICATIONS - A database environment that includes one or more database production servers, one or more database test servers, and a virtualization connection that provides incoming service request traffic to both the database production server and the database test server. However, the database production server responds to the database service requests, while the database test server does not. The database test server may be tested for a variety of different configurations in an attempt to find a better performing configuration. The testing is in real-time as the database test server is subjected to the same incoming service request traffic as the database production server. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084408 | APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY CONFIGURING NETWORK INTERFACES IN A REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - According to one aspect, a computer system for remotely configuring network interfaces of a host computer is disclosed, the system including a remote management computer and a managed host computer communicatively connected to the remote management computer over a communications link. The host computer includes a first network interface operable to communicatively connect to two or more server computers on two or more corresponding port numbers, and a second network interface operable to communicatively connect to two or more server computers on two or more corresponding port numbers. The system also includes a microcontroller operatively connected to the first network interface and the second network interface. The microcontroller has a programmable processor that is programmed to cause the host computer to perform functions that include receiving configuration data from the remote management computer over the communications link. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084409 | DIRECTORY SERVER PLUG-IN CALL ORDERING - A method and apparatus for ordering callbacks for server plug-ins of a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory server. Each plug-in registers with the LDAP server and has a designated priority and set of dependencies. The priority and dependency data are stored in an LDAP callback configuration entry or set of entries. The LDAP server analyzes the priority and dependencies to determine the order of each plug-in or individual callback relative to one another. This allows the LDAP directory server and LDAP operations to rely on the order of callbacks thereby improving the efficiency of the system. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084410 | Configuring Interfaces of a Switch Using Templates - Configuring an interface of a switch includes sending an authentication request requesting authentication for an endpoint from a switch to an authentication server. The switch comprises interfaces and is operable to access templates, where a template is operable to generate one or more interface commands for an interface. An instruction is received from the authentication server. The instruction instructs the switch to apply an identified template to an interface, where the identified template is identified by the authentication server as associated with the endpoint. The identified template is applied to configure the interface according to the instruction. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084411 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING MOBILITY RESISTANT IP TUNNELS USING A MOBILE ROUTER - A method, apparatus and system enable a mobile device to roam while maintaining a persistent IP tunnel. Specifically, a mobile router may be utilized to enable a mobile device to maintain a persistent IP tunnel while the device roams. In one embodiment, the mobile device is a virtual host and the mobile router is a virtual mobile router. | 04-05-2012 |
20120089707 | Virtual Network and Management Method of Virtual Network - There is a need to generate a virtual network across multiple physical networks without the need for users to understand information about the respective physical networks. | 04-12-2012 |
20120089708 | IDENTIFIER MANAGEMENT SERVER, APPLICATION SERVICE PLATFORM, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECOGNIZING DEVICE USING IDENTIFIER OF SENSOR NODE - Provided is a method that may provide an application extensibility by providing an open operation structure where an application service platform provides a service in interoperation with a sensor node or a sensor network including n sensor nodes. A device recognition system using an identifier of a sensor node may include: an identifier management server to obtain the identifier of the sensor node, and to provide address information regarding metadata and interface configuration software that are associated with the obtained identifier; and an application service platform to download the metadata and the interface configuration software using the provided address information, and to communicate with the sensor node based on the downloaded metadata and interface configuration software. | 04-12-2012 |
20120089709 | System and Method of Synchronizing Real Time Clock Values in Arbitrary Distributed Systems - A system for establishing a primary master node in a computer system includes a plurality of nodes, each node configured with an update interval, a hierarchy of master nodes selected from the plurality of nodes, wherein the master nodes are configured to synchronize the plurality of nodes with a clock value by sending out its clock value when its update interval has expired, wherein each node resets its update interval when it receives the clock value, a primary master node selected from the hierarchy of master nodes based on its update interval, and at least one backup master node selected from the hierarchy of master nodes based on its update interval, the backup master node configured to become the primary master node when the plurality of nodes do not receive the clock value after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. | 04-12-2012 |
20120089710 | Synchronizing Configuration Information Among Multiple Clients - A user of multiple client devices (clients) makes application configuration changes on the clients from time to time. The configuration changes are stored in a local event log on each client, as well as in a synchronization server. When one of the clients connects to the synchronization server, for example when the user logs into the synchronization server while using a respective client, the configuration information in the server and client is synchronized. Conflicts, if any, in the configuration changes for a respective application are resolved in accordance with a conflict resolution procedure or conflict resolution rules associated with that application. | 04-12-2012 |
20120096131 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTERACTING WITH ACCESS CONTROL DEVICES - Described herein are systems and methods for interacting with access control devices. In overview, a human user physically identifies an access control device with which he/she wishes to interact, for example in the context of providing commissioning and/or configuration data. The user then makes a physical local interaction with the device, for example by way of a smartcard having predefined characteristics. This causes the access control device to enable a wireless communications protocol, thereby to allow the user to discover the device using a portable device which implements a complementary wireless communications protocol. Commissioning information is then provided by way of the portable device to the access control device in a wireless manner. Once this is complete, the access control device disables the wireless communications protocol. | 04-19-2012 |
20120096132 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING INTERNET CONNECTION BASED ON AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK INTERFACE - Methods and apparatus are provided for configuring sharing of an Internet connection at first and second devices. A program for configuring the Internet connection is transmitted from the first device to a second device via a cable. The program is stored in the first device. Messages are exchanged between the first device and the second device, via the cable, for configuration of network interfaces of the first device and the second device, after the second device executes the program. Network interfaces of the first device and the second device are configured in accordance with the program and the messages exchanged between the first device and the second device. The Internet connection of at least one of the first device and the second device is shared based on the configured network interfaces. | 04-19-2012 |
20120096133 | System and Method for Serving and Managing Independent Access Devices - A third party service provider can provide data, management, and configuration services to a plurality of unrelated entities. The services are separated from the management and configuration aspect, and a system of trust is arranged to avoid the unrelated parties affecting one another. | 04-19-2012 |
20120102159 | RESOURCE CONFLICT AVOIDANCE SYSTEM AND METHOD - A diskless workstation and method avoids resource conflict when the diskless workstation is booted by a server. The diskless workstation downloads a boot program, a kernel, an image file and a configuration file from a server to a memory of the diskless workstation. The kernel is stated and a temporary file directory is created in the memory. The created temporary file directory is mounted to a default temporary file directory of the root directory. A subdirectory in the created temporary directory is created and a record file in the subdirectory is created for recording information during the running of the operating system. | 04-26-2012 |
20120102160 | Automatic Management of Configuration Parameters and Parameter Management Engine - A mechanism is provided for an automatic management of configuration parameters of computing resources between related computing systems. Services instances of computing systems are generated according to associated configuration parameter sets and respective corresponding configuration parameter values. A determination is made of configuration parameter value changes in the configuration parameter sets for each generated service instance of the computing systems. The configuration parameter value changes for each generated service instance are compared with a first subset configuration parameter values and with a second subset configuration parameter values. The determined configuration parameter value changes in one service instance are then propagated to another service instance according to a definition of rules for mapping configuration parameters and their values between second subsets of configuration parameters. | 04-26-2012 |
20120102161 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING AD-HOC NETWORK IN CPNS ENABLER - A method and device for controlling an ad-hoc network using a CPNS entity having a secure element (SE) in a CPNS enabler are discussed. According to an embodiment, the invention provides a method including receiving ad-hoc network information and SE information from each of the CPNS entities; designating one of the CPNS entities to be an ad-hoc network controller for an ad-hoc network based on the ad-hoc network information and the SE information; transmitting a command to perform a configuration of the ad-hoc network, information about the designated ad-hoc network controller, and service constraint information, to the designated ad-hoc network controller; and receiving service use information prepared based on the service provided in the ad-hoc network from the designated ad-hoc network controller. | 04-26-2012 |
20120110142 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT UTILITY - Embodiments of the present invention provide apparatuses and methods for managing the configuration settings of one or more servers within a business. The configuration management apparatuses and methods generally relate to creating a configuration schema; creating configuration items to assign to the configuration schema; assigning the configuration schema to one or more servers in the business; capturing a snapshot of the configuration settings for a server based on the configuration schema and assigning it to the configuration schema as the reference snapshot; capturing a current snapshot of the actual configuration settings for one or more servers; and comparing the reference snapshot with the current snapshot to determine the differences in the configuration settings. Embodiments of the present invention also allow a report to be generated that displays the differences between the reference snapshot and the current snapshot, such as the new settings, changed settings, and missing settings. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110143 | DIFFERENTIATING IMAGE FILES IN A NETWORKED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - In general, embodiments of the invention provide an approach to differentiate and/or customize image files in a networked (e.g., cloud) computing environment. Specifically, a plurality of images corresponding to a requested instance, and all configuration files corresponding to the plurality of images, will be identified. In identifying the configuration files, a first subset of configuration files that are common to all of the plurality of images, and a second subset of configuration files that are unique to individual images will be determined. The user can then individually select configuration files from the two subsets, and the requested instance can be generated based thereon. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110144 | CRYPTOGRAPHICALLY GENERATED ADDRESSES USING BACKWARD KEY CHAIN FOR SECURE ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL - Enhanced cryptographically generated addresses (ECGA) for MIPv6 incorporate a built-in backward key chain. The backward key chain prevents time-memory attacks to discover a network address and helps prevent spoofing a network address of a mobile node. The backward key chain also provides a means to authenticate network addresses of a mobile node. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110145 | ALLOCATION OF INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) ADDRESSES AND USAGE DURING SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) TRANSMISSION - Disclosed herein are method embodiments and apparatus embodiments for allocating IP addresses for MTC devices, transmitting and receiving SMS using the allocated IP addresses. In an embodiment, the MTC device may be allocated with an IP address without activating a packet data protocol (PDP) context. In addition, after the IP address has been allocated, SMS messages may be transmitted from and to MTC devices using the IP address. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110146 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REALIZING NETWORK TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY - The present invention provides a method for realizing network topology discovery, which relates to a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) client, a plurality of intermediate devices and a DHCP server and comprises: the intermediate devices recording successively address information of the intermediate devices into a DHCP option of a message in a DHCP message request sent by the DHCP client when receiving the message; and when receiving the message, the DHCP server storing a physical address of the DHCP client and information in the DHCP option carried in the message, while assigning an IP address to the DHCP client. The present invention is simple to implement, and can be implemented using only each sub-option in the original Option82 of the DHCP conveniently without additional devices, therefore it is suitable for network topology discovery of the LAN, and has high system performance-price ratio. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110147 | USING WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY TO DIRECT COMPLEX WIRING CONFIGURATIONS - An apparatus, method and computer program for managing a computer network, the network comprising at least one network device and a plurality of unconnected network ports, the apparatus comprising: a send component for sending an identification message to each network device; a receive component, responsive to the send component sending the identification message, for receiving at least one identification response from the network; an analyze component, responsive to the receive component receiving an identification response, for determining the plurality of unconnected network ports comprising a first network port; an identify component, responsive to the analyze component determining the plurality of unconnected network ports, for determining the first network port; and a send component, responsive to the identify component determining the first network port, operable for sending a first location message to the first network port. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110148 | DOMAIN NAME RESOLUTION USING A DISTRIBUTED DNS NETWORK - A distributed DNS network includes a central origin server that actually controls the zone, and edge DNS cache servers configured to cache the DNS content of the origin server. The edge DNS cache servers are published as the authoritative servers for customer domains instead of the origin server. When a request for a DNS record results in a cache miss, the edge DNS cache servers get the information from the origin server and cache it for use in response to future requests. Multiple edge DNS cache servers can be deployed at multiple locations. Since an unlimited number of edge DNS cache servers can be deployed, the system is highly scalable. The disclosed techniques protect against DoS attacks, as DNS requests are not made to the origin server directly. | 05-03-2012 |
20120110149 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A CLIENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and computer program product for obtaining a main configuration file from a client electronic device upon the client electronic device being coupled to at least a portion of a media distribution system. The main configuration file defines one or more enhanced functionalities of the client electronic device. The client electronic device is coupled to the at least a portion of the media distribution system using a binary transfer protocol configured to transfer media data from the at least a portion of a media distribution system to a client electronic device. | 05-03-2012 |
20120117203 | MANAGING CONFIGURATIONS OF DISTRIBUTED DEVICES - A method manages configurations of devices in a system that communicates information between a device and an enterprise. The method includes building a defined configuration for a device type. The defined configuration includes a set of value requirements. An actual configuration having values associated with the device is compared to the defined configurations. The actual configuration and defined configuration are stored in a database of the enterprise. The method also includes determining, in the enterprise, if the values of actual configuration match the corresponding value requirements of the defined configurations. The method runs business logic associated with the device based on a result from the step of determining if the values of the actual configuration match the corresponding values of the defined configurations. The matched configurations are stored for subsequent use. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117204 | Method for Automatically Negotiating Type of Service and Aggregation Apparatus Therefor - The present invention provides a service type auto-negotiation method and an aggregation device. The method comprises: comparing a service type capability set of a local device with that of a peer device to select a communal service type capability set; configuring a service type on an optical transmission network chip using the highest priority service type in the communal capability set; the service type capability sets including various service types supported by the devices and their corresponding priorities. The method negotiates automatically service types supported by both interconnected devices through a protocol and configures device hardware based on the negotiation result such that service interworking can be achieved without network management, thereby greatly decreasing the complexity of service development. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117205 | Automatic Connectivity Analysis For A DICOM Network - A method, a computer program product, a system and a connectivity analyzer are disclosed for determining available communication functionalities during the configuration of a DICOM node in a DICOM network. According to an embodiment of the invention the available communication functionalities are registered automatically by way of test communication requests and analysis of the test communication responses. Following the analysis the result containing the detected communication functionalities can be provided automatically. The result is preferably provided in the configuration phase and already prior to the entry into operation of the respective DICOM node. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING AND MANAGING CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENTS - A method and apparatus for configuring and managing customer premises equipments (CPE) are disclosed. The method includes obtaining information of the data model supported by the CPE; extracting the CPE data model and the relationship between the CPE data model and the CPE from the obtained information; finding the data model supported by a specific CPE according to the relationship between the CPE data model and the CPE; and configuring and managing the specific CPE according to the found data model of the CPE. The present invention is able to configure and manage a specific CPE based on CPE data model by associating in advance the CPE data model with the device class information of the CPE and finding the data model of the CPE based on the device class information of the CPE. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117207 | Method and System for Opening/Blocking Service - A method for activating/deactivating a service is disclosed, and the method includes: when a user creates an end-to-end service, a system saves service related information of the service; when a user chooses to activate or deactivate a service, the system calculates the configuration required in activating or deactivating the service based on the service related information of the service; and the system detects whether the resources related to the service are available based on the configuration required in activating or deactivating the service, and when the resource related to the service are available, the corresponding configuration is packaged and sent to a corresponding network element device for execution. A corresponding system for activating/deactivating a service is also disclosed. | 05-10-2012 |
20120124184 | Discrete Mapping for Targeted Caching - Some embodiments provide systems and methods for implementing discrete mapping for targeted caching in a carrier network. In some embodiments, discrete mapping is implemented using a method that caches content from a content provider to a caching server. The method modifies a DNS entry at a particular DNS server to resolve a request that identifies either a hostname or a domain for the content provider to an address of the caching server so that the requested content is passed from the cached content of the caching server and not the source content provider. In some embodiments, the particular DNS server is a recursive DNS server, a local DNS server of the carrier network, or a DNS server that is not authoritative for the hostname or domain of the content provider. | 05-17-2012 |
20120131153 | DISCOVERY OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES IN A COMBINED NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention are generally directed to discovery of electronic devices in a combined network. An embodiment of a method includes determining an identifier for a first device in a combined network according to a first network protocol, the combined network including a first network using the first network protocol and a second network using a second network protocol, where the identifier is determined based on a unique designation for the first device, and determining addressing information for the first device according to the second network protocol, where determining the addressing information includes establishing a physical address and a logical address for the first device. The method further includes broadcasting one or more messages containing identification information and capabilities of the first device to devices in the first network and to devices in the second network. The first device records and processes information from messages received by the first device, the messages being one or more messages under the first network protocol and one or more message under the second network protocol. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131154 | Synchronous Transport of Business Configuration Data in a Distributed Computing System Environment - Methods, systems, and articles are provided for synchronously exchanging configuration settings in a distributed software system in which interrelated software-implemented business processes execute on both a service provider and a customer landscape. The service provider and the customer landscape each comprise at least one server that in turn include at least one data processor and memory. The service provider includes a test environment and a service provider production environment. The customer landscape includes a quality assurance (QA) environment and a customer landscape production environment. Such an arrangement allows for synchronous transfer of business configuration data in a distributed computing environment. | 05-24-2012 |
20120131155 | CONTEXT-BASED DYNAMIC POLICY SYSTEM FOR MOBILE DEVICES AND SUPPORTING NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE - Systems and methods dynamically adapt network policies for mobile devices by accessing context-based values to allocate or restrict capabilities on the mobile devices or within the network. Context-based values may include position or velocity as well as more general environment features such as proximity of other devices, the presence or absence of other wireless signals or network traffic, parameters measured by local or remote sensors, user credentials, or unique user or signal inputs to the device. Relevant capabilities may include access to hardware and software interfaces and related parameter sets including priority settings. | 05-24-2012 |
20120136974 | IDENTIFYING KEYBOARD INACCESSIBLE NODE ON WEB PAGE - A method and apparatus for identifying a keyboard inaccessible node on a web page. The method may include acquiring all nodes in a DOM tree of the web page; identifying a mouse operable node among all the nodes; checking whether or not said mouse operable node is keyboard navigable and whether or not said mouse operable node is keyboard operable; and extracting the keyboard non-navigable node and the keyboard inoperable node as said keyboard inaccessible node. | 05-31-2012 |
20120144002 | CLUSTER STORAGE SETTING METHOD, SYSTEM, AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A storage cluster including a first storage apparatus and a second storage apparatus is defined. Communication between the first storage apparatus and the second storage apparatus uses a first network and an access request from a host computer uses a second network. Each of the first and second storage apparatuses defines internal LUs by using storage devices included in that storage apparatus. The first storage apparatus defines other internal LUs by using internal LUs of the second storage apparatus and the second storage apparatus defines other internal LUs by using internal LUs of the first storage apparatus. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144003 | Hosted video discovery and publishing platform - A hosted system provides any Internet user with the ability to quickly set up and customize a video channel, preferably as a web page or site that can be reached from any Internet-accessible device having a browser. The solution includes tools for use by channel site creators to customize look, feel, and page design. A particular web page or site may be associated with a given subject. A page or site that has such an association is sometimes referred to as “subject-specific.” Once a subject-specific channel is created, a site administrator or individual visitors can search and choose to bring those search results into the channel architecture. The system also enables a multiplatform search, and search results may be automatically populated into the channel content. The system enables the characterization of the material returned, preferably according to a user-generated taxonomy. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144004 | AUTHENTICATION SERVER APPARATUS, AUTHENTICATION SERVER APPARATUS-USE PROGRAM AND AUTHENTICATION METHOD - An authentication server apparatus is capable of simply and accurately assessing whether a user terminal is being operated by a person. In the authentication server apparatus connected to the user terminal, operating instructions for instructing operation by an operator by using objects are associated with operation information and stored. A session ID is imparted for each session with the user terminal, operating instructions are selected for each session, a page provided with the selected operating instructions and the objects is generated, and position information is received corresponding to operations executed at the user terminal that has displayed the page. At authentication time, operating instructions using the session ID of the session are associated with position information received from the terminal, and using the stored operation information associated with the operating instruction that have been associated with the received position information, and the position information, an assessment is made of whether or not the operations were made by an operator. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144005 | Address Server - A mechanism is provided for attributing network addresses to virtual machines. A request for a number of addresses is received from a requesting entity, thereby forming a requested number of addresses. A length of continuous ranges of available addresses is compared to the requested number of addresses. A range of available addresses comprising a number of addresses greater than the requested number of addresses is selected from a memory, thereby forming a selected range of available addresses. A first new range comprising the requested number of addresses excised from the selected range of available addresses is defined and one or more farther new ranges are defined, comprising the remainder of the selected range of available addresses not belonging to the first new range. The first new range is attributed for the use of the requesting entity. | 06-07-2012 |
20120144006 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD OF COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM ON WHICH PROGRAM IS STORED - A control method of a computer system where a management server having configuration management information for managing I/O switches for connecting a plurality of computers with a plurality of I/O devices controls the allocation of the I/O devices for the computers where the management server acquires identifiers of a first computer and an I/O device that has been allocated to the first computer and stores them in the configuration management information, receives a switch from the first computer to a second computer, stops the first computer, allocates the I/O device that had been allocated to the first computer to the second computer, activates the second computer, and rewrites the identifier of a specific I/O device among the I/O devices that have been switched to the second computer to a pre-set virtual identifier. | 06-07-2012 |
20120151017 | Dynamic Host Profiles for Option Modules - Aspects of the invention support different products having a host device and a communications device. The host device may interact with the communications device to exchange messages containing data objects over a fieldbus network for transporting messages containing data objects. Read/write requests to the fieldbus data objects may be answered locally in the communications device, or the fieldbus data object may be mapped to host data when host access is required. The communications device stores a profile image associated with a designated host type, so that the communications device may map the data object to host data for the host device and then exchange the host data with the host device. The communications device may subsequently interact with a different host type if a corresponding profile image is downloaded to the memory device. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151018 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A NODE CLUSTER SYSTEM IN A NETWORK AND NODE CLUSTER SYSTEM - Operating a node cluster system with a plurality of nodes in a network, wherein the cluster system appears to be a single node with only one specific network address to its network environment. Providing a shared socket database for linking network connection port identifications of a common set of network connection port identifications to the individual nodes, assigning a master function to one of the nodes, sending incoming traffic to all nodes of the cluster system wherein each node verifies its responsibility for this traffic individually, exclusive assignment of a network connection port to the responsible node for the duration of a connection of the corresponding application process by means of the corresponding network connection port identification and the link established by the shared socket database and processing of the traffic by the responsible node or otherwise by the node having the master function. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151019 | MEDIA EXTENSION APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR USE IN AN INFORMATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for extending the capabilities of a client device (e.g., consumer premises equipment in a cable network) using one or more on-demand applications. In one aspect, an improved media handling extension is provided within the device with which the various application(s) can interface to facilitate on-demand interaction between the CPE and the head end or other network entity. In one exemplary embodiment, the client device comprises a digital set-top box (DSTB) having Java-enabled middleware adapted to implement the OCAP/ACAP/MHP mandated Java Media Framework (JMF) APIs. A specially configured application is downloaded to the DSTB and run, the application configuring the paths within the device to provide, inter cilia, media access to the on-demand application(s) according to one or more network specific protocols. Accordingly, the network MSO can also uniquely configure the CPE within its network for on-demand capability according to its own specific protocols from the head-end. Improved client device and head-end configurations, as well as methods of operating these systems, are also disclosed. | 06-14-2012 |
20120158919 | CHANGING DEVICE CONFIGURATION BASED ON MACHINE-READABLE CODES - In general, this disclosure describes techniques for providing users of computing devices the ability to connect to a network using a computer-generated image. A subscriber to a network with access to the network through a network device can generate a computer-generated image that encodes network configuration information corresponding to the network device. These techniques allow a user with a computing device to scan the computer-generated image, launching a reader application to decode the encoded network configuration information. The network configuration information may be automatically used to configure a network interface on the computing device to connect to the network. The network connection may be initiated and configured without requiring user input other than capturing the computer-generated image. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158920 | VIRTUAL MACHINE PROVISIONING ENGINE - Embodiments described herein extend to methods, systems, and computer program products for setting up, configuring, and customizing one or more virtual machines. A scenario definition file may be accessed and parsed to provide information to a virtual machine provisioning server. A virtual machine is provisioned and instantiated according to the information contained in the scenario definition file. A virtual machine is instantiated upon a host machine. Upon instantiation, a virtual machine communicates with a custom action service to execute an action upon the virtual machine. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158921 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING A REGISTRATION STORM - Systems and methods for user device registration are disclosed. In certain embodiments, at least a first edge device in a group of edge devices enters a mass-restart mode. The first edge device receives a request for registration from a user device and determines whether the user device is currently registered through the first edge device. The first edge device generates a notification associated with the user device if the user device is not currently registered through the first edge device. A second edge device in the group of edge devices receives the notification and determines whether the user device is currently registered through the second edge device based on the notification. Registration information about the user device is deleted from the second edge device if the user device is currently registered through the second edge device. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158922 | CHANGING DEVICE CONFIGURATION BASED ON MACHINE-READABLE CODES - In general, this disclosure describes techniques for providing users of computing devices the ability to connect to a network using a computer-generated image. A subscriber to a network with access to the network through a network device can generate a computer-generated image that encodes network configuration information corresponding to the network device. These techniques allow a user with a computing device to scan the computer-generated image, launching a reader application to decode the encoded network configuration information. The network configuration information may be automatically used to configure a network interface on the computing device to connect to the network. The network connection may be initiated and configured without requiring user input other than capturing the computer-generated image. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158923 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES OF A SERVER TO A VIRTUAL MACHINE - A system and methods of allocating resources of a server to a virtual machine are disclosed. A method comprises discovering a system configuration of the server | 06-21-2012 |
20120158924 | NETWORK DESIGNING SYSTEM, NETWORK DESIGNING METHOD, DATA TRANSFER PATH DETERMINATION METHOD AND NETWORK DESIGNING PROGRAM - Data transfer with high throughput is enabled between servers. With respect to a candidate of a network operation unit applied at least one to each site of a plurality of sites forming a network, a combination of the network operation units each one of which is to be used by each site is determined such that all the sites become reachable based on a connection relationship applied to each pair of the candidates of the network operation units between different sites. | 06-21-2012 |
20120166597 | SATISFYING APPLICATION DEPENDENCIES - The dependencies of an application are identified by intercepting application programming interface calls made by an application. A determination is then made at the runtime of the application as to whether the dependencies of the application are present. If the dependencies are not present, a client device upon which the application is executing is configured such that the dependencies are present and are made available only to the authorized application. If the dependencies are present and the application is authorized to interact with the dependencies, the application is permitted to execute. | 06-28-2012 |
20120166598 | DISTRIBUTED NETWORK COORDINATE SYSTEM - This document relates to a distributed network coordinate system. One implementation provides computer-readable storage media including instructions that may cause a processor to perform certain acts. For example, the acts may include storing an initial network location of a first device in a network. The network may include the first device and a second device. The acts may also include monitoring one or more network performance metrics related to existing application communications with the second device, and determining an updated network location of the first device, based on the initial network location and the network performance metrics. Aspects of network health can be derived from monitoring changes in the network locations of various devices within the coordinate system. | 06-28-2012 |
20120166599 | MANAGING NETWORK DEVICES - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for managing network devices. A central management system stores shared configuration objects in a central configuration database. A network device stores shared configuration objects and device-specific configuration objects in a local configuration database. The local configuration database's shared configuration objects correspond to shared configuration objects in the central configuration database. The network device can be configured locally or using the central management system. | 06-28-2012 |
20120166600 | Method, remote access server and system for configuring a quality of service parameter - A method, a remote access server and a system for configuring a QoS parameter are provided. In the method, the RAS and the system, when performing QoS configuration, a first network sends data traffic description information of a data traffic to be transmitted to a second network, so that the second network may perform QoS configuration of the second network according to the data traffic description information; and after completing local configuration, an RAS of the first network directly returns a configuration completion response to a QoS management device of the first network without waiting for a configuration completion message returned by the second network, so that the QoS management device of the first network continues performing the QoS configuration of the first network, thereby achieving parallel QoS configuration of the first network and the second network, reducing the delay of the QoS configuration. | 06-28-2012 |
20120173678 | NETWORK AWARE PROVISIONING IN A MOBILITY SUPPORTING CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and computer program product for network aware provisioning in a mobility supporting cloud computing environment. In an embodiment of the invention, a method for network aware provisioning in a mobility supporting cloud computing environment is provided. In the method, a request is received from a mobile computing device for access to a service in a cloud computing environment and both an expected path of travel for the mobile computing device and also a network access speed along the expected path of travel is determined. Thereafter, a particular instance of the service executing in a host in the cloud computing environment able to accommodate a degree of interaction between the mobile computing device resulting from the network access speed determined for the expected path of travel is selected. Finally, the particular instance of the service is provisioned for access by the mobile computing device. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173679 | ADAPTATION METHOD, ADAPTER AND ADAPTER SYSTEM FOR NETWORK SERVICE COMMUNICATION - A method for adaptation, an adapter and adapter system for the network service communication are provided in the present invention. Said method includes: transforming a network service request received from a first entity into a network service request comprehended by a second entity; sending the transformed network service request to the second entity; receiving a returned network service response responded by the second entity for said network service request; transforming the received network service response into a network service response comprehended by the first entity; returning the transformed network service response to the first entity. A client application system can send a network service request in its own format, a network service request corresponding to a third party system is not needed, and the repeated compiling of such network service code is avoided. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173680 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE BUILT-IN AND MOBILE VPN CONNECTIVITY - A system and method for facilitating the establishment of a virtual private network between a network and a remote computer, the system having: a mobile device connectable to the remote computer and storing a user profile, virtual private network information, and password information; virtual private network software being located on one of the mobile device and the remote computer; an access point communicating with the network; and communication means for communications between the access point and one of the mobile device and the remote computer, wherein the user profile, virtual private network information, and password information is passed to the virtual private network software upon connection of the mobile device to the remote computer, the virtual private network software using the user profile, virtual private network information, and password information to establish a virtual private network through the communications means and the access point to the network. | 07-05-2012 |
20120179789 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PEER-TO-PEER AUTHORIZATION VIA NON-ACCESS STRATUM PROCEDURES - Peer-to-peer (P2P) authorization by a mobile entity of a wireless communications system may include receiving a P2P authorization accept message from a management entity via a non-access stratum (NAS), receiving a radio resource control (RRC) P2P configuration request from a network entity, and sending an RRC P2P configuration complete message to the network entity via an access stratum. A management entity receiving a P2P authorization request message from a mobile entity may perform a P2P authorization check based on the received P2P authorization request message, and if the mobile entity is authorized, send a P2P authorization accept message to the mobile entity via the NAS. Alternatively, P2P authorization by a mobile entity may include sending a registration message including a P2P authorization request to a core network, and receiving a registration accept message from the core network that includes an initial context setup request and a P2P authorization response. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179790 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING AN IP ADDRESS TO MOBILE COMMUNICATION USER EQUIPMENT - Disclosed is a method of allocating an IP address in a mobile communication system. The method of allocating an IP address includes: receiving a PDN connection request message including one or more of version information indicating an IP version requested from a UE and information regarding capability of the UE; obtaining subscriber information of the UE from a subscriber information server in response to reception of the PDN connection request message; checking the IP version information included in the PDN connection request message; when an address of IPv6 is requested according to the checking of the version information, determining whether or not the UE moves frequently or substantially stationary on the basis of one or more of the subscriber information of the UE, the capability information of the UE, and a TAU (Tracking Area Update) frequency; and when the UE is substantially stationary, transmitting a request message including particular indication information indicating to maintain router information although a timer with respect to the router information expires so long as the UE belongs to a particular PDN gateway and information corresponding to an interface ID allocated for the UE, to the UE. | 07-12-2012 |
20120191823 | Software-Implemented Communications Adapter - A communications adapter is provided for use with or within a user device such as a personal communications device. The communications adapter includes a software defined radio, which can be dynamically configured to allow the user device to communicate with various different radio-enabled devices. | 07-26-2012 |
20120191824 | Method and System for Modeling a Network Using Historical Weather Information and Operation with Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) - A method of dynamically modeling performance of a communications network that may involve modeling a communications network using a processor by performing a link budget analysis (LBA) for a proposed configuration of the communications network with at least one transmitter, at least one satellite repeating relay, and at least one remote receiver, determining link performance of the communications network by applying historical environmental data to the model, adjusting one or more network configuration parameters based on the determined link performance to improve performance of the modeled communications network, and determining one or more final network configuration parameters by iteratively performing the LBA and adjusting the one or more network configuration parameters based on the determined link performance and historical environmental data. | 07-26-2012 |
20120191825 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR ALLOCATING ADDRESS IN IP NETWORK - A method for allocating an address in an IP network includes: receiving, by a server, a request message from a client, where the client is connected to the server through at least one routing device, and the request message received by the server carries a device identifier of a preceding stage routing device of the client; obtaining, by the server, according to the device identifier of the preceding stage routing device, a first address prefix pool that is pre-allocated to the preceding stage routing device, and allocating a second address prefix pool to the client according to the first address prefix pool, where an address range corresponding to the second address prefix pool falls within an address range corresponding to the first address prefix pool; and sending, by the server, the second address prefix pool to the client. | 07-26-2012 |
20120203874 | SMART SUBSTATION MANAGEMENT - An electrical substation management system maintains, and activates a backup device with, a backup configuration file if a primary device becomes inactive. Peer-to-peer communication may be used in an embodiment so that primary devices communicate with other devices so configured. A master device, such as a substation computer, in an embodiment may monitor status of all connected devices status, while a primary device or a backup device may monitor primary device or IED status and select a backup device for activation if a primary device changes status, and/or retain backup configuration files. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203875 | Migrating Port-Specific Operating Parameters During Blade Server Failover - Migrating port-specific operating parameters during blade server failover including querying, by a system management server of a data center, a switch for port-specific operating parameters of a first port, the data center comprising blade servers coupled for data communications to one another and to the system management server by a network, the system management server comprising a computer subsystem that automates server management processes in the data center, the switch comprising a data communications component of the network, the switch comprising ports, the ports comprising physical points of connection between the switch and blade servers, each port having associated port-specific operating parameters, the switch connected at the first port to a failing blade server; and assigning, by the system management server, the port-specific operating parameters to a second port in a same switch or another switch connected at the second port to a replacement blade server. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203876 | INTELLIGENT LUN GENERATION AND MANAGEMENT - A method for generating and managing logical units (LUNs) in a storage network environment is disclosed herein. In one embodiment, such a method includes determining a type of LUN, identifying one or more servers that will access the LUN, and identifying a storage system that will host the LUN. The method then generates a LUN name that encapsulates the type, the one or more servers, and the storage system. The method then assigns the LUN name to the LUN. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also disclosed herein. | 08-09-2012 |
20120209968 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A COMPUTING CLUSTER - A method and system for managing a computing cluster including hosting a plurality of machines in a networked computing cluster, wherein the plurality of machines include service instances running on hosts, where the services have configured machine state; and wherein machine state includes configuration data and software of the machine; integrating the plurality of machines of the cluster with at least one configuration controller component; and the at least one configuration controller component, altering the machine state of at least one service instance. | 08-16-2012 |
20120215891 | Port-independent topologically planned real-time network - For an industrial network, for example a PROFInet IRT net for a motion control or in general a network with an isochronous time structure for transmitting time-critical data, it is the object according to the invention to considerably simplify the handling during installation or during maintenance and device replacement. For this purpose, a port-independent, topologically predefined real time network is introduced which provides the compliance with the at least similar safety standard as the PROFInet IRT while dispensing with the (target) specification of a network interface being used. The apparatus according to the invention is illustrated. | 08-23-2012 |
20120221688 | METHOD OF SETTING NETWORK, SERVER APPARATUS USING THE METHOD, AND NETWORK SYSTEM INCLUDING THE SERVER APPARTUS - A method of setting a network quickly includes: storing network setting information corresponding to a network connection device included in an individual household in a database of a predetermined server apparatus; transmitting unique device information of the network connection device to the predetermined server apparatus; detecting the network setting information corresponding to the unique device information from the database and transmitting the detected network setting information to the network connection device; and performing network setting needed to form a network in the individual household by using the network setting information. | 08-30-2012 |
20120221689 | CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTE CONFIGURATION - A method for controlling remote configuration includes: a configuration management terminal requesting a configuration file to be remotely configured and managed from a configuration management server; the configuration management server returning a configuration item of the configuration file to the configuration management terminal according to a configuration definition corresponding to the configuration file, with the configuration definition including the attributes of the configuration item in the corresponding configuration file; and the configuration management terminal modifying the configuration item and then submitting the modified configuration item to the configuration management server, and the configuration management terminal modifying the configuration file after modifying and verifying the submitted configuration item according to the attributes of the configuration item. A system for controlling remote configuration maintains and manages the configuration items of various configuration files according to the configuration definitions corresponding to the configuration files, so as to achieve universal management of configuration files. | 08-30-2012 |
20120226786 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PORTING OF DEVICE SOFTWARE - Systems and methods are provided for porting software. In one embodiment, a container generator is provided. The container generator is configured to translate a field device description file into a plug-in file having executable instructions and a parameter configuration file having configuration information. The plug-in file and the parameter configuration file are further configured for use by a destination application to communicate with a device. | 09-06-2012 |
20120233295 | Declarative Service Domain Federation - A mechanism for declarative service domain federation uses a declarative approach to both the visibility aspect and the management aspect of service domain federation. Instead of manually exporting services, that is, selecting individual services from source domains to be visible in the target domain, using the present system, a federation architect uses a federation console to specify federation intent. The federation intent may include federation rule, query-based service group, and quality-of-service (QoS) policy. Based on the declared federation intent, a planning engine resolves the individual services based on the group query, generates the service visibility configuration, and creates the necessary service proxies and/or mediation objects to satisfy the goal. At runtime, a service monitor collects the performance metrics of federated services and dynamically adjusts the mediation/proxy configurations to maintain the QoS objectives specified by the federation architect. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233296 | IEC 61850 SUBSTATION GATEWAY - An IEC 61850 Network Control Center (NCC) server is provided at a gateway intelligent electronic device (IED) of a Substation Automation (SA) system. The NCC server serves, via the MMS/TCP/IP part of IEC 61850, process data from substation Intelligent Electronic Devices IEDs to a NCC. The NCC server uses functional names for gateway Logical Nodes (LN) corresponding to substation LNs. The functional names are devoid of any reference to a substation IED related name of the substation LNs, but can be automatically translated to substation IED related names in case of changing SA communication and substation IED architecture. Thereby, functional names as defined by the substation section within a SCD file of the SA system are used for the communication link between the gateway IED and the NCC. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233297 | Environment Customization Based On Location - A user's location is automatically transmitted to a network, and the network automatically customizes one or more environments, such as by customizing communication devices, other types of devices, or the like, based on the detected location and on profile information. Customizing an environment may include enabling services, such as setting up a public telephone or hotel telephone with a user's home base telephone settings and/or services, and/or may include disabling functions, such as disabling long-distance service when the user is away from home. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233298 | MANAGEMENT OF APPLICATION SERVER-RELATED USER DATA - In onse aspect, there is provided a method for the management of Application Server AS-related user data stored in a Home Subscriber Server HSS. In an embodiment, said method comprises a step of:
| 09-13-2012 |
20120233299 | MANAGING CONFIGURATIONS OF SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AGENTS IN A DISTRIBUTED ENVIRONMENT - A method, system and computer program product for managing system management agent configurations which include agent system management programs and program parameters in a distributed environment. A configuration management server sends upon request from the agents installed on the distributed system a description of their configuration. To this effect, the configuration management server maintains a database storing the agent configuration information, this database being usually updated by a system management administrator. The agents get from the server the list of peer distributed systems having the same agent configuration and their configuration from one distributed system of the list or obtain an agent configuration directly from the configuration management server if the peer distributed systems have modified their configuration. The agents advise the system management server when a new configuration has been installed. | 09-13-2012 |
20120239788 | AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF DEVICES - Exemplary methods, computer systems, and computer program products for automatic registration of devices in a computer environment are provided. In one embodiment, the computer environment is configured for, in response to a fabric login (FLOGI) and/or a fixed disk (Fdisk) received from an initiator and/or a target disk, executing an automatic name server registration, state change registration, and management server registration to identify at least one of the devices. | 09-20-2012 |
20120239789 | STORAGE DEVICE, CONTROLLER, AND ADDRESS MANAGEMENT METHOD - A storage device has a wide link in which any one of addresses that a server has is assigned to a plurality of ports that are connected to the server. A change detecting unit detects a change in the state of any port of the ports. When a change is detected, an address acquiring unit acquires the addresses that are assigned to the ports. An address expecting unit and a physical-address acquiring unit, in accordance with the acquired addresses and with identification information for identifying the ports, manage addresses that the plurality of connection-ports-connected-server can possibly have. | 09-20-2012 |
20120239790 | ESTABLISHING SECURE REMOTE ACCESS TO PRIVATE COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for providing users with access to computer networks, such as to enable users to interact with a remote configurable network service to create and configure computer networks that are provided by the configurable network service for use by the users. Secure private access between a computer network provided for a user by the configurable network service and one or more other remote computing systems of the user (e.g., a remote private network) may be enabled in various ways. For example, a user may programmatically invoke an API provided by the configurable network service to obtain assistance in establishing remote access from a remote location to a provided computer network of the configurable network service, such as to establish a VPN connection from the remote location to the provided computer network using hardware and/or software supplied to the remote location in response to the API invocation. | 09-20-2012 |
20120246280 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication network apparatus and method for routing communication signals form a source device to a receiving device. The apparatus performs only local processing on communication signals to thereby increase the speed of processing the signals. A plurality of the processing nodes is combined into a plurality of sub-networks that comprise the network apparatus. Each processing node of a sub-network need only process address information pertaining to the node's current layer, one layer above it, if any, and one layer below it, if any. Additionally, each processing node has associated communication signal frequencies/wavelengths that identify the processing node as the intended recipient of the communication signal. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246281 | J2EE APPLICATION VERSIONING STRATEGY - The present invention is a method, system, and computer program product enabling multiple versions/releases of a J2EE application to be served to clients from a single application server. One or more JNDI proxies are situated between each client and the application server. The JNDI proxies allow a same public “service name” to be utilized by different clients to access different programs/services on the application server. The JNDI proxies do this by translating the service name into a non-public “alias name” on behalf of the client. The alias name is a private name that the service provider who administers the application server understands and uses to locate the specific version of programs/services that the clients need. | 09-27-2012 |
20120254372 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF A CLIENT-SERVER RELATIONSHIP - A network client may retrieve a unique ID for the network client and a first server identifier from within the network client. The network client may send the unique ID to a first server identified by the first server identifier. The first server may look up a second server identifier using the unique ID as a key in a database query and return the second server identifier to the network client. The network client may send data to a second server identified by the second server identifier | 10-04-2012 |
20120254373 | HUB BASED CLEARING HOUSE FOR INTEROPERABILITY OF DISTINCT UNIFIED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A hub-based clearing house for interoperability of distinct unified communication systems is disclosed. According to one embodiment, a system comprises a database that stores configuration information for the system; an administrator module that maintains the configuration information; a federation server that is connected to a first unified communications system and a second unified communications system. The federation server comprises a first translator that translates a first formatted message received from the first unified communications system into a common language formatted message, a second translator that translates the common language formatted message into a second formatted message, and a routing engine that routes the second formatted message to the second unified communications system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254374 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROXY ADDRESS NEUTRALITY - To provide proxy address neutrality, in particular for mobile server devices, a server application can register its network address with a discovery application. Whenever the server application acquires a new network address, the server application updates the discovery application. A client application providing proxy services for the server application can invoke calls to the server client using the network address for the server application that is currently stored in the client device. If the current network address is invalid, the client application obtains an updated network address from the discovery application. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254375 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTION EFFICIENCY - In a distributed object computing system, a server application may create multiple, uniquely identified, server contexts that each provide one or more services to a service consumer (client). Instead of creating a connection to a client for each server context, a single connection can be used. A service request handler may be configured to handle service requests for each server context. Service requests may be generated in the client with a service context identity. When a service request is received by the server application, the service request handler resolves the service context identity and forwards the service request to the appropriate server context. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254376 | END-TO-END PROVISIONING OF ETHERNET VIRTUAL CIRCUITS - Methods and systems are disclosed for providing a signaling protocol to enable a bi-directional point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Circuits (EVC) to be configured between any two network elements, as part of a network infrastructure. The bi-directional EVC is established by configuration of a source network element and a destination network element, and defines a bi-directional data path across the network infrastructure therebetween. The EVC may include one or more network elements over which the data path may traverse. The methods and systems disclosed may be applied to linear, ring and mesh network topologies. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254377 | Redundant Automation System - A method for redundantly operating an automation system comprising one or more user computers, at least two gateway computers and a plurality of programmable logic controllers, the user computers and the gateway computers being connected to a first bus system of a first type and the gateway computers and the programmable logic controllers being connected to a second bus system of a second type, as a result of which the programmable logic controllers can be controlled and/or monitored by the user computers via one of the gateway computers, wherein to set up a communication link between one of the user computers and one or more of the programmable logic controllers, the user computer contacts a virtual gateway computer having a virtual identifier for all gateway computers of the automation system, which virtual gateway computer establishes a physical communication link to a selected one of the gateway computers. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254378 | STORAGE AREA NETWORK CONFIGURATION - For storage area network configuration across redundant fabrics, a set of redundant fabrics is defined. A fabric is a network between devices of a storage area network. A first fabric communicates with the other fabrics in a set of redundant fabrics to send configuration information. Each redundant fabric examines the first fabric's configuration information for devices to which the redundant fabric is also connected and resolves ports for devices to which the first fabric and the redundant fabric are connected to provide ports on the redundant fabric equivalent to the ports on the first fabric. | 10-04-2012 |
20120259959 | CLIENT DEVICE CONFIGURATION WITH HOOKS - Some embodiments include a method for configuring a client device. The method includes associating a hook in a configuration bundle with customized programming. The method includes downloading the configuration bundle for a client device to a services gateway, including downloading a generic configuration bundle to the services gateway. The method also includes executing the configuration bundle on the services gateway, including calling the hook and executing the generic configuration bundle. The executing of the generic configuration bundle further includes reading, from the client device, a configuration prompt stored on the client device, providing the configuration prompt to a user, receiving configuration parameters from the user, and writing the configuration parameters to the client device. | 10-11-2012 |
20120265860 | Sharing A Hosted Device In A Computer Network - Sharing a hosted device in a computer network that includes at least one hosted device and a plurality of hosts, including: registering a hosted device with a router, wherein the hosted device is hosted by a host; assigning, by the router, a network-wide identifier to the hosted device; and mapping, by the router, the network-wide identifier for the hosted device to an identifier for the host. | 10-18-2012 |
20120265861 | METHOD FOR SHARING ACCESS TO A WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A method for sharing access to a wireless LAN access point is applicable between a target client device and a host device which is coupled to the wireless LAN access point, and includes the steps of: configuring the host device to send an invite request to the target client device, configuring the host device to receive an invite response sent by the target client device, and configuring the host device to exchange connection information with the target client device, such that the target client device may connect to the wireless LAN access point according to the connection information. | 10-18-2012 |
20120265862 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE MANAGEMENT, AND DEVICE - The present invention discloses a method and a system for device management and a device, and relates to the field of communications technologies. The method includes: mapping information of a first command supported by a proxied device to an object in a data model; receiving a second command which is used for setting the object in the data model and is sent by a management device; and sending the first command to the proxied device according to the setting of the object in the data model by the second command, and reporting a result of executing, by the proxied device, the first command to the management device as a response of the second command. | 10-18-2012 |
20120265863 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EFFICIENTLY MANAGING AND CONFIGURING VIRTUAL SERVERS - The present invention is related to providing faster and more efficient ways to deploy and manage virtual server configurations in a hosted virtual server service. Broadly, a web interface allows a user to set conditions upon which specific types of virtual servers will be instantiated or terminated on a third-party hosted virtual server service. For example, the user may wish to instantiate a new virtual server each time the load on existing virtual servers exceeds a predetermined threshold. The web interface may also allow a user to select from among a plurality of hosted virtual server services. The web interface may further allow a user to incorporate dynamic variables into configurations of instantiated virtual servers. | 10-18-2012 |
20120271924 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY ADDRESSING DEVICES IN A MULTI-DROP NETWORK - Systems and methods that automatically assign addresses to devices coupled to a shared bus are provided. In one example, a system for assigning addresses to a plurality of devices within a network includes a memory and at least one processor coupled to the memory. The system is configured to instruct all of the plurality of devices to respectively select a first dynamic address from a first set of dynamic addresses, respectively assign a different static address to each device having a first dynamic address that uniquely identifies the device, instruct all of the plurality of devices having a first dynamic address that identifies at least two devices to respectively select a second dynamic address from a second set of dynamic addresses and respectively assign another different static address to each device having a second dynamic address that uniquely identifies the device. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271925 | Virtual Address for Virtual Port - A device to detect storage devices coupled to the device in response to receiving a query from a switch, include the storage devices in logical units, create virtual ports for the logical units, assign virtual addresses for the virtual ports, and send a response with the virtual addresses to switch. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271926 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A COMPUTING CLUSTER - A method and system for managing a computing cluster including hosting a plurality of machines in a networked computing cluster, wherein the plurality of machines include service instances running on hosts, where the services have configured machine state; and wherein machine state includes configuration data and software of the machine; integrating the plurality of machines of the cluster with at least one configuration controller component; and the at least one configuration controller component, altering the machine state of at least one service instance. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271927 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A COMPUTING CLUSTER - A method and system for managing a computing cluster including hosting a plurality of machines in a networked computing cluster, wherein the plurality of machines include service instances running on hosts, where the services have configured machine state; and wherein machine state includes configuration data and software of the machine; integrating the plurality of machines of the cluster with at least one configuration controller component; and the at least one configuration controller component, altering the machine state of at least one service instance. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271928 | Network Connection Segment Monitoring - A method and ingress node for configuring intermediate OAM monitoring entities to monitor the quality of segments of a communication connection between an ingress node and an egress node. The ingress node constructs an object that includes technology-independent OAM parameters, identities of the OAM monitoring entities to be configured, and technology-specific attributes, wherein the technology-independent OAM parameters define an OAM type and desired monitoring actions by each of the identified OAM monitoring entities, and the technology-specific attributes define descriptors for configuring the 0AM monitoring entities in accordance with a communication protocol utilized for the connection. The ingress node utilizes Generalized Mu Its- Protocol Label Switching, GMPLS, signaling to send the object to the OAM monitoring entities. The object may be a Hop Attributes sub-object or a Label Switching Protocol, LSP, Attributes object including a Segment OAM Configuration Type-Length-Value, TLV, field that includes the technology-independent OAM parameters and technology-specific attributes. | 10-25-2012 |
20120271929 | System and Method for Network Design - A method includes accessing network information stored at a remote device, the network information identifying one or more available physical locations to deploy one or more network nodes of a proposed network. The method further includes receiving data indicating a number of core layer nodes to be included in the proposed network. The method further includes determining a number of aggregator layer nodes to be included in the proposed network, the number of aggregator layer nodes determined based on incrementing a threshold number of aggregator layer nodes that supports a coverage area of the proposed network. The method further includes generating a network design of the proposed network. The network design identifies particular physical locations of the one or more available physical locations to deploy each of the core layer nodes and each of the aggregator layer nodes of the proposed network. | 10-25-2012 |
20120278452 | AUTOCONFIGURED CONNECTION PATHS TO A TARGET DEVICE - A connecting device discovers a first connection path to a target device and configures a first connection with the target device. The connecting device receives information about additional available connection paths from the target device via the first connection path. The connecting device automatically configures at least a second connection with the target device via an additional available connection path. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278453 | Takeover Processes In Security Network Integrated With Premise Security System - An integrated security system is described comprising a gateway located at a first location. The gateway includes a takeover component that establishes a coupling with a first controller of a security system installed at the first location. The security system includes security system components coupled to the first controller. The takeover component automatically extracts security data of the security system from the first controller. The gateway automatically transfers the security data extracted from the controller to a second controller. The second controller is coupled to the security system components and replaces the first controller. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278454 | Gateway Device Application Development System - Configuring and managing gateway devices. A gateway device may be installed at a location, such as a merchant location or home. The gateway device may manage (e.g., monitor and/or control) one or more devices at the location. For example, the gateway device may manage various fuel tank devices, point of sale devices, refrigeration devices, liquid dispensing devices, etc., at a convenience store. The gateway device may provide reported information to and receive commands from a cloud server, which may be in communication with other devices which may be used to view reported information of or control the managed devices. The cloud server may also be configured to install applications, e.g., for execution by the cloud server, the gateway device, and/or other devices. For example, the gateway device may install applications provided by the cloud server to manage the devices coupled to the gateway device. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278455 | ISSUING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - The disclosure discloses an issuing method and an issuing system for configuration information, wherein the method comprises: a configuration server issuing the modified configuration information to a peer node which serves as a bootstrap node in the Peer-to-Peer (P2P) network when it is determined that the configuration information of a P2P network is modified; and the bootstrap node issuing the configuration information to peer nodes other than the bootstrap node in the P2P network. By the disclosure, the configuration information of the peer nodes in a P2P network can synchronize with that of a configuration server in time. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA CONFIGURATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for data configuration. The data configuration method includes: before a network element accesses a network, invoking, by a management unit, a first interface between the management unit and a managed unit to request the managed unit to download configuration data of the network element from a position designated by the management unit; and invoking, by the management unit, a second interface between the management unit and the managed unit to request the managed unit to generate a full configuration data file of the network element according to the configuration data. Through the method and the apparatus for data configuration provided in the embodiments of the present invention, automatic download of the configuration data of the network element may be implemented, and human cost of deployment is reduced. | 11-01-2012 |
20120284374 | VARIOUS METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR A CENTRAL MANAGEMENT STATION FOR AUTOMATIC DISTRIBUTION OF CONFIGURATION INFORMATION TO REMOTE DEVICES - A method, apparatus, and system are described for a central management system to configure remote devices. A device service manager server (DSM) may have an IP redirector module configured to cooperate with two or more device service controllers (DSCs) that are behind a firewall on a wide area network relative to a location of the DSM on the wide area network, where the DSM serves as a central management station for a distribution of initial configuration information to the DSCs, wherein an executable boot up file uploaded via a drive port in that DSC is scripted to gather configuration information for that DSC and network devices on the same network as that DSC and without a prompt by the DSM then sends configuration files to the DSM which makes a master copy of the device configuration file in the DSM's registry for that DSC. | 11-08-2012 |
20120290689 | Network Interface Auto Configuration of Wireless Devices - The invention described herein covers methods, apparatus and systems for auto configuring a wireless electronic device, such as an IP camera, to communicate with a wireless network, such as a home WiFi network router. | 11-15-2012 |
20120290690 | METHOD FOR EXTENDING BUSINESS SYSTEMS TO A MOBILE WORKFORCE - Systems, software, and methods for reliable wireless communication are provided. In one aspect, a computer program control device, called a node, is configured to be transmitted from a first device for receipt and processing on a second, disparate device. The node comprises a collection of managed objects or managed object representations that is effective to control said disparate device. In one exemplary illustrative non-limiting implementation, the node is configured to control the processing of multiple data types. | 11-15-2012 |
20120290691 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR OPERATING A COMPUTER CLUSTER - A method is disclosed for operating a computer cluster distributed over multiple locations using quorum mechanism. The cluster includes interconnected defined system instances. The method includes distributing the cluster configuration to each system instance, and constantly checking system instance connectivity to determine reachable system instances. Each healthy system instance determines a subcluster of itself and all reachable system instances. Information of the distributed cluster configuration is used to calculate a corresponding subcluster configuration. Subcluster configuration information and the cluster configuration information is used for computing a new quorum decision for the corresponding subcluster, using a location quorum function considering proportions of connected locations containing reachable system instances, and weights of the reachable system instances in the locations. Workload placement decisions are made based on the new quorum granting permission to place workload to system instances in a specific subcluster, or refusing the permission, whenever the subcluster changes. | 11-15-2012 |
20120290692 | Static Ring Network for Vehicle Communications - A method for operating a ring network includes the steps of configuring the ring network with static configuration information and then deterministically exchanging operational data between a plurality of nodes on the ring network, while operating the ring network in accordance with the static configuration information. This system facilitates communications that meet the high reliability and performance requirements of vehicle communications, in particular in aircraft data networks (ADNs), while reducing the cost, weight, and complexity of conventional implementations. | 11-15-2012 |
20120297035 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING POLICIES ON A COMPUTER - An apparatus, system, and method are disclosed for managing policies on a computer having a foreign operating system. Policies may specify hardware or software configuration information. Policies on a first computer with a native operating system are translated into configuration information usable on a second computer having a foreign operating system. In an embodiment, a translator manager manages the association between the policy on the first computer and the translator on the second computer. Computer management complexity and information technology management costs are reduced by centralizing computer management on the native operating system. Further reductions in management complexity are realized when the present invention is used in conjunction with network directory services. | 11-22-2012 |
20120303767 | AUTOMATED CONFIGURATION OF NEW RACKS AND OTHER COMPUTING ASSETS IN A DATA CENTER - A configuration tool is used to configure new server racks and computing assets in a data center. When new server racks are placed in a data center, the configuration tool scans the racks to identify any unconfigured server racks and then determines their virtual locations. The tool queries a mapping between the physical and virtual rack locations in the data center to determine the physical location for each rack based on its virtual location. Using the acquired physical and virtual locations for each unconfigured rack, the configuration tool can configure the unconfigured racks. For example, the configuration tool may identify the assets contained in the rack and associate the rack's physical location with those assets. In addition, the configuration tool can determine the rack's VLAN and use that information to configure the TOR switch associated with the rack. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303768 | MODULARIZED CONTROL SYSTEM TO ENABLE NETWORKED CONTROL AND SENSING OF OTHER DEVICES - This invention provides a standard method of interfacing an arbitrary non-network connected device to computer networks such as the Internet. The invention modularizes the communications interface by providing a plug-in communications module, which may be compatible with a standard solid-state memory card interface and form factor, thus removing the burden of wireless approvals testing (the module is tested vs. the whole product). The invention also integrates a programmable arbitrary device controller and associated software into this same communications module, thus removing the burden of the majority of the software development for most arbitrary non-network connected devices. The invention further provides a unified internet-based service that can help configure the module's network configuration, and download appropriate control code for whatever arbitrary device the module is currently connected to. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303769 | METHOD FOR MOUNTING NETWORK ATTACHED STORAGE NAS DEVICE, AND DIGITAL MEDIA PLAYER DMP - A method for mounting a network attached storage (NAS) device, and a digital media player are provided, which includes broadcasting a discovery message for searching a network attached storage NAS device; parsing a configuration response message, which is sent by the NAS device according to the discovery message, and obtaining configuration information of the NAS device; and mounting the NAS device according to the configuration information. According to the present invention, the automatic mounting of the NAS device is realized by discovering and obtaining the configuration information of the NAS device in the network, and personally-recorded-video-contents or downloaded media contents, where the personally-recorded-video-contents or the downloaded media contents are stored in the NAS device, can be played according to the selection of a user in the case that local data storage is not supported, so as to enable a digital home user to obtain a better user experience. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303770 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONFIGURATION SETTINGS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND SERVICES - A method for implementing policy settings in a user device comprising a plurality of applications, wherein the policy settings comprise at least one application policy setting for managing at least one of the plurality of applications and at least one client policy setting for managing the user device, the method comprising determining a set of policy settings for the user device, providing an update of the policy settings and causing implementation of the policy settings by the user device, to control management of the at least one of the plurality of applications and management of the user device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120311105 | SIMPLIFYING SETUP OF MANAGEMENT SERVERS CONTROLLING ACCESS TO VOLUMINOUS CONFIGURATION DATA REQUIRED FOR APPLICATIONS - An aspect of the present invention simplifies setup of management servers controlling access to voluminous configuration data required for applications. In one embodiment, a schema specifying the parameters (and the corresponding data types) in the configuration data is examined and a set of management interfaces is generated consistent with the corresponding data types based on the examining of the schema. The generated management interfaces are registered with a management server, such that the management server makes available to applications the values corresponding to the specified parameters according to the set of management interfaces. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311106 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELF-MOVING OPERATING SYSTEM INSTALLATION IN CLOUD-BASED NETWORK - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for a self-moving operating system installation in cloud-based network. A guest operating system can be instantiated in a cloud-based host environment to support a set of virtual machines. The operating system can be configured with resources in the kernel to detect and manage the identity of the cloud in which the operating system is installed, as well as to interrogate potentially new target host clouds to determine the configuration settings required to move or copy the guest operating system to that target. The resulting mobility of the guest operating system affords the ability to be self-moving, and an administrator or other user can simply specify a desired target cloud to host the operating system without a need to manually configure APIs or other resources. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311107 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONFIGURE VIRTUAL PRIVATE MOBILE NETWORKS TO REDUCE LATENCY - Methods and apparatus to configure virtual private mobile networks for latency are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes provisioning logically a virtual private mobile network within a wireless network to reduce latency of a communication associated with a latency sensitive application, determining a mobile device is communicatively coupling to the wireless network via the latency sensitive application, and coupling the mobile device to the virtual private mobile network to reduce latency of the communication associated with the latency sensitive application. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311108 | Providing Access to Configurable Private Computer Networks - Techniques are described for providing users with access to computer networks, such as to enable users to interact with a remote configurable network service in order to create and configure computer networks that are provided by the configurable network service for use by the users. Computer networks provided by the configurable network service may be configured to be private computer networks that are accessible only by the users who create them, and may each be created and configured by a client of the configurable network service to be an extension to an existing computer network of the client, such as a private computer network extension to an existing private computer network of the client. If so, secure private access between an existing computer network and new computer network extension that is being provided may be enabled using one or more VPN connections or other private access mechanisms. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311109 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INSTALLING SMART CARD APPLET - Disclosed are a system and a method for installing a smart card applet. A response message for an OTA message received from an external remote server is transmitted to form a communication channel based on HTTP (hyper text transfer protocol) between a smart card and the remote server. The applet is installed based on applet installation information received through the communication channel. A large scale applet is installed in a card within a short period of time. | 12-06-2012 |
20120317247 | CONFIGURING MULTIPLE NETWORK DEVICES IN A SETUP FLOW - A smart network may include a smart network host device as well as a smart network connector device, a smart network extender device and one or more client devices configured to connect to the smart network. An installation module is configured to connect to the smart network host device to determine whether a user is attempting to setup multiple network devices substantially simultaneously. The installation module then configures the multiple network devices based on the other network devices connected to the smart network host device. The installation module simplifies setup of the smart network by combining the configuration of multiple network devices into a single setup flow. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317248 | Systems and Methods for Secure Provisioning of Consumer Network Services - Provided are systems and methods for secure provisioning of consumer network services. For example, there is a broadband modem for secure provisioning of a network service, where the broadband modem includes a controller having an embeded memory. The controller is configured to enable an unmanaged interface of the broadband modem, to establish a subscription interface link over the enabled unmanaged interface, and to download, over the subscription interface link, a subscriber firmware enabling a managed interface corresponding to the network service. Power cycling the broadband modem erases the downloaded subscriber firmware and disables the managed interface. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317249 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR EXTREME CAPACITY MANAGEMENT - Embodiments of the disclosed invention include an apparatus, method, and computer program product for. In one embodiment, a machine-readable tangible and non-transitory medium having instructions for managing resources is disclosed. The instructions when read by a machine, causes the machine to establish a workload profile for each tier within a plurality of tiers based on a computing request rate, a network request rate, and a storage request rate for each of the tiers. The machine also determines a configuration based on the workload profile for each of the tiers, wherein the configuration balances the computing request rate, the network request rate, and the storage request rate for each of the tiers. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317250 | METHOD FOR GENERATING A PUBLIC SIP ADDRESS ASSOCIATED WITH A PRIVATE IDENTITY ON AN IMS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for generating a permanent public SIP address associated with a private identity on an IMS network. According to the invention, the method consists of applying, to the private identity, a one-to-one, non-reversible and collision-free function in order to obtain the permanent public SIP address. The invention enables the ISIM of an end point to be directly addressed. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317251 | Methods, Systems, and Apparatus for Determining and Automatically Programming Network Addresses for Devices Operating in a Network - A method for configuring a network device includes activating a sensor of the network device to receive data. The data from the sensor is analyzed to determine physical location information indicated thereby. A network address is automatically assigned to the network device based on the physical location information indicated by the data from the sensor. Related methods, systems, and apparatus are also discussed. | 12-13-2012 |
20120324061 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONFIGURATION AND REGISTRATION INFORMATION FOR SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL DEVICES - A system is provided for configuring a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) device. The system includes at least one SIP server in communication with the SIP device over an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The at least one SIP server includes a database that stores SIP device configuration data and a receiver that receives a first SIP message to initiate SIP device configuration. The at least one SIP server also includes a transmitter that transmits configuration data to the SIP device in response to receiving the first SIP message. The receiver also receives a second message from the SIP device indicating whether the SIP device was successfully configured based on the configuration data. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324062 | IDENTIFICATION OF THE LOCATION OF NODES DISTRIBUTED IN AD HOC NETWORKS - A location of node i in a network having a plurality of nodes is identified by intersecting regions that are guaranteed to contain the node i with respect the other nodes that are neighbors of the node i and iteratively minimizing the size of the intersection region containing the node i. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324063 | METHOD, NETWORK DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING NETWORK DEVICE IN IPV6 NETWORK - The present invention provide a method, network device and system for configuring a network device in an IPv6 network. A network device is configured to obtain an IP address of the network device by sending a router solicitation message to an advertisement router, obtain an IP address of a network management system by sending a DHCP request message to a DHCP server; generate a static route according to the IP address of the network device, the IP address of the network management system, and an IP address of the advertisement router; and register to the network management system according to the generated static route. The network device implements an automatic discovery of a newly added IP device in an IPv6 network in the network management system, which improves network deployment efficiency. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324064 | MANAGING NETWORK DEVICES - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for configuring network devices. A central management system stores shared configuration objects in a central configuration database. A network device stores shared configuration objects and device-specific configuration objects in a local configuration database. The local configuration database's shared configuration objects correspond to shared configuration objects in the central configuration database. The central management system determines the network device has received a request to update a shared configuration object, where the request did not originate from the central management system, and updates the central configuration database. | 12-20-2012 |
20120331113 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR CLOUD COMPUTING PLATFORMS - A system for managing allocation of resources based on service level agreements between application owners and cloud operators. Under some service level agreements, the cloud operator may have responsibility for managing allocation of resources to the software application and may manage the allocation such that the software application executes within an agreed performance level. Operating a cloud computing platform according to such a service level agreement may alleviate for the application owners the complexities of managing allocation of resources and may provide greater flexibility to cloud operators in managing their cloud computing platforms. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331114 | APPLICATION PLACEMENT AMONG A SET OF CONSOLIDATION SERVERS UTILIZING LICENSE COST AND APPLICATION WORKLOAD PROFILES AS FACTORS - Applications in a data center can be consolidated by identifying different combinations of software executing on hardware. The software can include a set of applications that execute upon a set of servers. The different combinations can have different arrangements of applications running on different ones of the servers. For each of the different combinations, a licensing cost, an operating cost, and a total cost can be calculated. The total cost of operation for each of the configurations can be calculated by summing the licensing costs, the operating costs adjusted for the cost savings for complementary workload patterns, and migration costs for adjusting a current configuration of the applications and servers to arrive at the configuration. The total cost results per configuration can be reported to a user for at least a set of the configurations. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331115 | OPTIMAL NETWORK CONFIGURATION REPAIR - Changing a network configuration to restore compliance to one requirement may invalidate the network compliance with another requirement. A method changes a configuration to restore compliance to all requirements at minimum cost. The requirements are a hybrid of symbolic, arithmetic and bit-vector constraints, so traditional optimization techniques such as linear programming, that work only for purely arithmetic constraints, do not apply. The requirements are represented as SMT (satisfiability-modulo-theory) constraints on configuration variables, and then a weighted Max-SAT solver is used to compute the optimal configuration changes in order to minimize the cost. | 12-27-2012 |
20120331116 | Method and System for Configuring Settings for a Communications Client Utilizing Host Device Drivers - A system and method for configuring a client on a host device using a configuration application on a configuring device, the system comprising: a link between the configuring device and the host device; host drivers for communicating between the host device and the configuring device over the link; and an interface between the host drivers and the configuration application, wherein said interface allows said configuration application to be independent of the host drivers while allowing the configuration application to configure the client. | 12-27-2012 |
20130013751 | ENHANCED NETWORK ADAPTER FRAMEWORK - An enhanced network adapter framework, in which parameters are stored in a configuration table, the parameters being customized for a network and an application. A network adapter customized for the network and the application is instantiated based on invoking a generic network adapter which externally references the configuration table, and communication between the application and the network is effected using the instantiated network adapter. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013752 | System and Method for Handling a Configuration Request - The invention relates to a system, device and method for handling a configuration request. The system comprises a plurality of auto-configuration servers and an auto-configuration server management device communicatively coupled to the plurality of auto-configuration servers. The auto-configuration server management device is arranged for communication over the network with a manageable electronic device, and is arranged for receiving the configuration request from the manageable electronic device. One or more auto-configuration servers that can handle the configuration request are identified based on the identification of the manageable electronic device. The load of the one or more identified auto-configuration servers is analyzed, and based on the load analysis, an auto-configuration server is selected as destination address for the configuration request. The invention improves the configuration of customer premises devices. | 01-10-2013 |
20130018993 | EFFICIENT USE OF DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL IN LOW POWER AND LOSSY NETWORKSAANM Hui; Jonathan W.AACI Foster CityAAST CAAACO USAAGP Hui; Jonathan W. Foster City CA USAANM Woo; Lik Chuen AlecAACI Union CityAAST CAAACO USAAGP Woo; Lik Chuen Alec Union City CA USAANM Hong; WeiAACI BerkeleyAAST CAAACO USAAGP Hong; Wei Berkeley CA US - In one embodiment, each of a plurality of devices in a computer network is configured to i) transmit a unicasted dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) solicit message to a neighbor device having a route to a border router as an assumed DHCP relay without regard to location of a DHCP server, and ii) operate as a DHCP relay to receive unicasted DHCP solicit messages and relay the solicit message to the border router of the network without regard to location of the DHCP server, and to relay a DHCP reply to a corresponding requestor device. | 01-17-2013 |
20130018994 | NETWORK CONNECTIVITY WIZARD TO SUPPORT AUTOMATED CREATION OF CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATIONS FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE CLOUD COMPUTING NETWORKSAANM FLAVEL; AshleyAACI New YorkAAST NYAACO USAAGP FLAVEL; Ashley New York NY USAANM LUND; CarstenAACI Berkeley HeightsAAST NJAACO USAAGP LUND; Carsten Berkeley Heights NJ USAANM NGUYEN; HanAACI MarlboroAAST NJAACO USAAGP NGUYEN; Han Marlboro NJ US - A method of implementing a cloud computing network includes defining, for a cloud computing network including tangible network storage elements and tangible network computing elements, a library of network connectivity building blocks for designing a virtual private cloud computing network within the cloud computing network. Each building block has user-definable attributes and each building block is translatable into a set of network element configuration statements that instantiate an action particular to the building block. Usage rules specifying how the building blocks can be used are defined for the cloud computing network. Dynamically-selected building blocks from the library are accepted and assembled into a configuration template. The configuration template is validated against the usage rules. The virtual private cloud computing network is implemented in accordance with the validated configuration template. | 01-17-2013 |
20130018995 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHODAANM Sansom; Patrick MichaelAACI LondonAACO GBAAGP Sansom; Patrick Michael London GBAANM Valentine; Ian JamesAACI LondonAACO GBAAGP Valentine; Ian James London GB - The present invention relates to a communications system ( | 01-17-2013 |
20130018996 | FLEXIBLE GRAPHICAL EXTENSION ENGINE - A flexible graphical extension engine having a function block engine combined with extensions in communications with a wall module bus to make it possible to provide fixed function, configurable function and programmable function devices which implement additional function block behavior, and provide an automated configuration approach for generating configuration files for a programmable wall module. In other words, the engine not only depends on fixed inputs and outputs (I/O's) and fixed features in a control solution, but also may allow for flexible blocks and the ability to change an interface on the fly (i.e., during operation). | 01-17-2013 |
20130018997 | Distribution of Content Document to Varying Users with Security, Customization and Scalability - A system and method for receiving a request for a container document, determining whether the request is for a container document associated with a user group, determining whether a requestor of the request is associated with a level of status within the user group among a plurality of levels of status within the user group, determining the level of status of the requestor based on a determination that the requestor is associated with a level of status within the user group, requesting configuration information based on a determination that the container document is associated with a user group and the level of status, receiving the configuration information, and serving the container document using the configuration information. | 01-17-2013 |
20130018998 | MANAGING APPLICATION INTERACTIONS USING DISTRIBUTED MODALITY COMPONENTS - A method for managing multimodal interactions can include the step of registering a multitude of modality components with a modality component server, wherein each modality component handles an interface modality for an application. The modality component can be connected to a device. A user interaction can be conveyed from the device to the modality component for processing. Results from the user interaction can be placed on a shared memory are of the modality component server. | 01-17-2013 |
20130024551 | ENABLING CLUSTER SCALING - Embodiments of the present invention relate to methods and apparatuses for enabling cluster scaling. Specifically, there is disclosed a method of recording a context of configuration for an initial node of a cluster, comprising: retrieving at least one file to be used for configuring the initial node; and recording a context while configuring the initial node using the at least one file, the recorded context being information on the configuration of the initial node and to be used for enabling addition of a new node into the cluster. There is also disclosed a method of enabling addition of a new node into a cluster. Corresponding apparatuses are also disclosed. According to embodiments of the present invention, the efficiency of improving cluster scaling may be effectively improved. | 01-24-2013 |
20130024552 | SYSTEM SOFTWARE PRODUCTIZATION FRAMEWORK - A unified framework is established based on a domain-specific system description model representative of physical network system topology, network system device capability and/or logical network system structure. The framework can be employed to streamline a network system configuration process and/or a software system deployment process and the like. Some instances can also be utilized in establishing a unified framework in a broadcast equipment environment to augment network system based technologies. Additionally, network devices having multiple network interfaces that are dedicated to specific network usages can be automatically configured. A method in accordance with an aspect of the present principles includes generating a site model with a plurality of groups of device model network interfaces that can represent dedicate networks. The device model interfaces are grouped according to usage and network medium type and are logically associated with pre-defined IP addresses. The site model is applied to the network devices to logically associate them into dedicated networks by automatically assigning the pre-defined IP addresses to the network interfaces of the devices. | 01-24-2013 |
20130031223 | SELF-CONFIGURING ROUTER AND METHOD THEREFOR - A self-configuring router for data transfer has a first storage device for storing historic performance and configuration data. A configuration device is coupled to the first storage device for configuring the router based on the performance and configuration data. A data collector is coupled to the configuration device for measuring operational data of the router. An analysis device is coupled to the data collector and the first storage device for analyzing the operational data. | 01-31-2013 |
20130031224 | AUTOMATED PROVISIONING AND MANAGEMENT OF CLOUD SERVICES - A system for managing the provisioning of cloud based services includes a collection module, a configuration module, a licensing module and a set up module. The collection module automatically obtains and stores information from end user machines that relevant to the provisioning of the could-based services. The configuration module uses the obtained information to automatically configure the use of the cloud based services. The licensing module automatically configures the account and licensing information allowing an end-user machine to access the cloud based services. The setup module automatically configures the end user machines to access and use the cloud-based services. | 01-31-2013 |
20130036207 | COMMUNICATION HANDLING - An apparatus, method, system and computer-readable medium are provided for abstracting a public facing identity associated with one or more devices, such as user devices. In some embodiments, a unique identity may be associated with a device. A mapping may be used to establish a relationship between the public facing identity and the unique identity. In some embodiments, configuration data may indicate how a communication (e.g., an incoming or outgoing communication) is to be handled or routed. For example, the configuration data may indicate preferences as to which device(s) amongst a plurality of devices is to receive an incoming communication and/or which public facing identity/identities amongst a plurality of public facing identities is to be used in transmitting an outgoing communication. | 02-07-2013 |
20130036208 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC HARDWARE PROVISIONING BASED ON APPLICATION CHARACTERISTICS - Systems and methods are provided for automatically provisioning resources based on application characteristics. In accordance with an embodiment, a system can include a computer, including a computer readable medium and processor, and a template engine, executing on the computer. The template engine is configured to receive applications and associated metadata. The system can also include a virtualized environment, and a plurality of templates, each defining a different resource available within the virtualized environment. When the template engine receives an application and associated metadata, the template engine determines resource requirements for the application based on the associated metadata, compares the resource requirements with the plurality of templates, identifies appropriate templates for the resource requirements, and provisions resources in the virtualized environment using the appropriate templates. Hardware resources can then be allocated dynamically according to the needs of the virtualized environment. | 02-07-2013 |
20130036209 | Method of Medium Access Control Type Detection - A method of medium access control (MAC) type detection for a communication device compatible of a plurality of media each conformed to a communication standard in a network system is disclosed. The method comprises generating a library, wherein the library includes at least a character for each medium, configuring a MAC layer of the communication device according to the library, and determining the existence of a medium according to the configuration result. | 02-07-2013 |
20130041987 | System and Method for Deploying a Dynamic Virtual Network Address Translation Appliance - According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for deploying a virtual network address translation (NAT) appliance includes receiving a request to generate a virtual machine environment. The method also includes generating the virtual machine environment from an environment template, the virtual machine environment comprising a first virtual machine. The method further includes configuring a hostname for a virtual NAT appliance instance, and configuring one or more private network settings for the virtual NAT appliance instance. The method also includes generating the virtual NAT appliance instance from the NAT appliance template, the NAT appliance instance comprising a public network interface and a private network interface. | 02-14-2013 |
20130041988 | Method and Device for Configuring Terminal Devices - A method for configuring terminal devices is provided. The method includes sending a first message containing parameter values to a first terminal. The first terminal includes a data structure containing designations for each parameter value. The method includes storing, in response to receiving the first message, the parameter values in associated elements of the data structure. The method includes reading the data structure. The method includes determining the associated elements by determining the associated designations of the associated elements; or, comparing the data structure and an initial data structure before sending the first message. The first terminal contains the initial data structure. The method includes generating a second message including instructions for storing a parameter value in a second terminal. The instructions are generated as a result of evaluating the data structure. The instructions include the determined associated designations. The method includes sending the second message to the second terminal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130046863 | Prioritizing Local and Network Traffic - According to some aspects as described herein, a user may purchase or otherwise be provided with an accelerated service for selected software applications, devices, and/or ports to experience a high level of communication. The accelerated service may be created, for example, by using a dedicated network data flow such that the user's customer premise equipment (CPE) network access device may put priority traffic in a different upstream data flow than the commonly shared flow, which may involve tagging the traffic upstream to the network with a priority indicator such as a flow identifier. Based on similar factors, the user may also control local priority of data received downstream from the network for distribution to one or more local devices. | 02-21-2013 |
20130046864 | Deriving Unique Local Addresses From Device Names - In one embodiment, accessing a device name, which includes a hostname and a domain name, of a network device; applying a hash function to the domain name to obtain 40 bits as a Global ID of an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) unique local address (ULA); and encoding the hostname to obtain 80 bits as a Subnet ID and an Interface ID of the IPv6 ULA. | 02-21-2013 |
20130046865 | ZERO CONFIGURATION OF A VIRTUAL DISTRIBUTED DEVICE - A method of zero configuration for a virtual distributed device in a distributed network is disclosed. A plurality of peer devices are added as virtual devices to a network device. Configuration information is imported to the network device. A peer group comprising the plurality of peer devices, and corresponding topology of the peer group, are established in the network device. A connection between the network device and one of the plurality of peer devices is established via an uplink switch, the plurality of peer devices being connected to one another by virtual links. The network device distributes the configuration information to the plurality of peer devices in accordance with the established topology via the peer device connected to the uplink switch. | 02-21-2013 |
20130054761 | Implementing a 3G Packet Core in a Cloud Computer with Openflow Data and Control Planes - A method for implementing a general packet radio service (GPRS) tunnel protocol (GTP) in a packet core (PC) of a third generation (3G) network having a split architecture where a control plane of the PC of the 3G network is in a cloud computing system, the cloud computing system including a controller, the controller to execute a plurality of control plane modules, the control plane to communicate with the data plane of the PC through a control plane protocol, the data plane implemented in a plurality of network elements of the 3G network by configuring switches implementing a data plane of the SGSN and GGSN and intermediate switches to establish a first and second GTP tunnel endpoint. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054762 | DETERMINING EXPIRATION TIME OF BINDINGS FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for determining expiration time of bindings for NAT devices. A first device receives a first request including a first source IP address/port pair of a first NAT binding, and transmits a response. The first device receives a second request including a second source IP address/port pair of a second NAT binding, and transmits a response. The first device sets a refresh time T | 02-28-2013 |
20130054763 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONFIGURE VIRTUAL PRIVATE MOBILE NETWORKS WITH VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus to configure virtual private mobile networks with virtual private networks are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes logically provisioning, for a client, the virtual private mobile network to process wireless network communications associated with the client that correspond to a specified address space of the client, provisioning at least a portion of a server within a cloud computing data center to host resources for the client, and configuring at least a portion of an edge router of the cloud computing data center to transmit the wireless network communications between the portion of the server and the virtual private mobile network. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054764 | Registration Method of CIM Provider in CIM System and CIMOM - A registration method includes acquiring, by a second CIMOM, parameters of a CIM provider from a first CIMOM by using information of a namespace to which a device to be configured belongs or device information of the device to be configured. The second CIMOM obtains identification information of the CIM provider in the parameters of the CIM provider through matching according to the device information or model information of the device to be configured. The second CIMOM acquires the CIM provider from the first CIMOM by using the obtained identification information of the CIM provider, and registering the CIM provider. | 02-28-2013 |
20130054765 | Method for Servicing a Field Device - A method for servicing a field device of process automation technology. The data exchanged between the field device and a servicing program is by means of at least one protocol, which has basic commands, via which basic functions of the field device can be invoked. Each field device which is compatible with the protocol has these basic functions available to it, and wherein only basic commands of the protocol are used to transfer data between the servicing program and the field device. | 02-28-2013 |
20130060918 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE CONTROL USING A UNIFORM RESOURCE IDENTIFIER - An electronic device and control method. A uniform resource identifier from a controller defines a parameter setting or value for the electronic device. The parameter setting or value is applied to the electronic device. | 03-07-2013 |
20130060919 | PROVISIONING OF COMPUTER SYSTEMS USING VIRTUAL MACHINES - A provisioning server automatically configures a virtual machine (VM) according to user specifications and then deploys the VM on a physical host. The user may either choose from a list of pre-configured, ready-to-deploy VMs, or he may select which hardware, operating system and application(s) he would like the VM to have. The provisioning server then configures the VM accordingly, if the desired configuration is available, or it applies heuristics to configure a VM that best matches the user's request if it isn't. The invention also includes mechanisms for monitoring the status of VMs and hosts, for migrating VMs between hosts, and for creating a network of VMs. | 03-07-2013 |
20130060920 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING PING INTERVAL IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for setting a ping interval in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes transmitting a ping message to a server after a predefined time period corresponding to a set ping interval and determining whether a response message is received from the server, so as to determine whether a ping test succeeds, determining whether a short interval count value of the set ping interval is 0 by referring to a count table when the ping test is determined to be successful, and resetting the ping interval, and determining whether the short interval count value of the set ping interval is 0 by referring to the count table when the ping test fails, and resetting the ping interval. | 03-07-2013 |
20130060921 | Methods and Systems for Capturing and Transmitting Locations Events Data Using Data Networks - Computer systems and methods for efficiently capturing and transmitting location events data using data networks are provided. In some embodiments, the computer systems and methods may comprise detecting an occurrence of a state change event of interest for an Internet-connectable device; determining optimal Internet-connectable device settings for location event captures and/or transmissions performed by the Internet-connectable device based on the detected occurrence of the state change event of interest; adjusting a configuration of the Internet-connectable device based on the determined optimal settings; and capturing and/or transmitting location events based on the adjusted configuration of the Internet-connectable device. | 03-07-2013 |
20130067041 | AUTOMATIC DIFFERENTIATION OF SETUP TYPE IN ROUTER SETUP APPLICATION - Techniques are presented for configuring multiple client devices to connect to a network device (e.g., a wireless router). In one embodiment, a setup application executing on one of the client devices determines if the network device has previously been configured. For example, the network device may broadcast a predefined network name to advertise that a user access point has been configured. If the polling setup application detects the predefined network name, then it can skip any steps that would configure the network device. Accordingly, the setup application only configures the client device to connect to the network device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067042 | DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATING NETWORK RESOURCES FOR COMMUNICATION SESSION - A primary call admission controller (CAC) system receives a request from a client to allocate a network resource such as a network bandwidth. The primary CAC system may determine subordinate CAC to delegate the allocation and transfer the request to the subordinate CAC. Subsequently, the subordinate CAC analyzes the communication session attributes to determine an available network resource for the communication session. Upon a positive determination, the subordinate CAC allocates the network resource and signals the allocation up the network chain to the primary CAC and the client. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067043 | Recording Stateless IP Addresses - Techniques are described for recording stateless internet protocol (IP) addresses. A DHCP server may receive information requests and/or other communications from a stateless IPv6 client that can be employed to ascertain corresponding IP addresses generated by the client. In one approach, the DHCP server is configured to parse appropriate communications to find information indicative of a stateless IP address. This may include extracting a subnet prefix of the IPv6 client and an interface ID which identifies the specific network interface employed by the client for communications. The DHCP server uses this information to generate corresponding IP addresses. The DHCP server records the extracted information and/or generated addresses in its database (e.g., IP address event log). The DHCP server is then able to provide a count of clients and percentage utilization for a network using the recorded addressing information. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067044 | MANAGING NETWORK INTERACTION FOR DEVICES - Signals from an unidentified device at a location related to a communications network are correlated with identification patterns of managed devices to identify whether or not the unidentified device corresponds to a managed or unmanaged device in the communications network. Both managed and unmanaged devices can be tracked, and network interaction can be managed for devices that are identified as managed devices. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067045 | INTERSYSTEM COORDINATION APPARATUS IN DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - The intersystem coordination apparatus includes: a storage unit configured to store a pattern of a communication protocol between the system and the other system, a protocol definition in which system configurations of these systems and network configurations, a non-functioning requirement which is a unique requirement of a predetermined application for the system to access the other system by using the predetermined application, and a plurality of modules configured to execute the application in accordance with the protocol definition and the non-functioning requirement; an application processing unit configured to execute the predetermined application; and a combination processing unit configured to select a module required to execute processing by the application from the plurality of modules based on the non-functioning requirement and a requirement value required to perform processing between these systems determined based on the communication protocol pattern, the system configuration, and the network configuration included in the protocol definition. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067046 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVISIONING A COMMUNICATION CLIENT - A method, system and apparatus for provisioning a communication client. The method comprises receiving via a communication network a request from the communication client. The method further comprises determining a positioning object associated with the communication client. The method further comprises, based on the positioning object, determining a subscription profile associated with the communication client. The method further comprises, based on the subscription profile, compiling a configuration file, which is released. The configuration file comprises data for enabling said communication client to log into a communication service provided by a network element, | 03-14-2013 |
20130073698 | Method for Testing Connectivity of Software Applications Hosted on Networked Computers - A method for verifying the connectivity of software applications hosted on networked computers. The connectivity of hosted function applications to be loaded into networked computers is verified and validated using quasi-hosted function applications that simulate the communications functions (i.e., connectivity) of those hosted function applications. The quasi-hosted function applications are run on the same hardware that the real hosted function applications will be run on. Furthermore, the connectivity of a real hosted function application loaded into one computer can be verified and validated by simulating communications of that real hosted function application with a multiplicity of quasi-hosted function applications running on the networked computers. | 03-21-2013 |
20130073699 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING REMOTE IP ADDRESS - A method and an apparatus for obtaining a remote Internet Protocol (IP) address are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a first client, a first detection IP packet from a remote server through a Point to Point Protocol (PPP) interface, in which the first detection IP packet carries a first IP address allocated by the remote server for the first client; and configuring the first IP address to be an IP address of the first client. Through the method and the apparatus, the remote server is capable of allocating a remote IP address of a client. | 03-21-2013 |
20130080602 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOLVING CONFLICTING UNICAST ADVERTISEMENTS IN A TRANSPORT NETWORK - A method, apparatus and computer program product for resolving conflicting unicast advertisements in transport network is presented. A particular Backbone Virtual Local Area Network (BVLAN) as a first BVLAN (BVLAN | 03-28-2013 |
20130080603 | Fault Tolerant External Application Server - A fault tolerant external application server. The external application server is a web based system that allows a user of a client computing device to work with a file over a network via a general client application communicating with a host. The host brokers the functionality and provides a platform for interacting with the external application server. The external application server is implemented as a server farm. A fault tolerant farm system combines latent configuration replication between farm members, interchangeable farm members, and optional health monitoring to allow the external application server farm to provide on-the-fly configuration while maintaining full functionality without requiring a real time state management database. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080604 | SYSTEM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT METHOD - The present invention is for efficiently managing large numbers of apparatuses using multiple management protocols. A management information acquisition part | 03-28-2013 |
20130080605 | NETWORK STORAGE TARGET BOOT AND NETWORK CONNECTIVITY THROUGH A COMMON NETWORK DEVICE - The present disclosure includes systems and techniques relating to booting to a network storage target. In general, in one implementation, a bus-to-network device driver is loaded during a machine boot, where the bus-to-network device driver is capable of sending machine bus commands over a network, providing access to the network for a network device driver, and distinguishing between received responses to the machine bus commands and other network traffic corresponding to the network device driver. Loading of the bus-to-network device driver can occur in response to an operating system load of bus drivers. For example, the bus-to-network device driver can be an iSCSI driver, and the operating system load of bus drivers can be the operating system load of SCSI drivers. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080606 | NETWORK STORAGE TARGET BOOT AND NETWORK CONNECTIVITY THROUGH A COMMON NETWORK DEVICE - The present disclosure includes systems and techniques relating to booting to a network storage target. In general, in one implementation, a bus-to-network device driver is loaded during a machine boot, where the bus-to-network device driver is capable of sending machine bus commands over a network, providing access to the network for a network device driver, and distinguishing between received responses to the machine bus commands and other network traffic corresponding to the network device driver. Loading of the bus-to-network device driver can occur in response to an operating system load of bus drivers. For example, the bus-to-network device driver can be an iSCSI driver, and the operating system load of bus drivers can be the operating system load of SCSI drivers. | 03-28-2013 |
20130086230 | TRANSPARENT CONFIGURATION OF VIRTUAL HOSTS SUPPORTING MULTIPLE TIME ZONES IN AN ENTERPRISE PLATFORM - A method, system, and computer program product for transparent configuration of virtual hosts to support timestamping of documents that are processed in multiple time zones within an enterprise platform. Embodiments use network address translation and virtual host initialization techniques to configure a port listener such that the port listener receives IP packets from the network interface and uses the subnet's network address IP address to map to a time zone correspondence. When the identified time zone corresponds to a first time zone, then the port listener forwards the IP packet to a first virtual host process that has been initialized with a first time zone virtual time clock used for timestamping. When the identified time zone corresponds to a second time zone, the port listener forwards the IP packet to a second virtual host process that has been initialized with a second time zone virtual time clock used for timestamping. | 04-04-2013 |
20130091254 | Providing Virtualized Visibility Through Routers - A method implemented by a network element to track IPv6 addresses of devices in a home network, wherein the network element provides DHCPv6 service to the home network and a home network router on the home network assigns IPv6 address to the devices using a prefix provided by the DHCPv6 service, the method including receiving a DHCPv6 request for a prefix delegation from a home network router, sending a DHCPv6 message including an assigned prefix to the home network router, the DHCPv6 message including a request for notification of configured IPv6 addresses, receiving a first ICMP message from the home network router, including a MAC address and corresponding IPv6 address for a configured device, and sending the home network router a second ICMP message to acknowledge recording the IPv6 address for the configured device, enabling the network element to provide services and forward traffic directly to the configured device. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091255 | IP ADDRESS ASSIGNING METHOD AND DATA CENTER USING SUCH METHOD - An IP address assigning method is provided. Firstly, an IP address request packet containing a media access control address is transmitted to a DHCP server. The IP address request packet is analyzed, so that the media access control address is acquired. Then, at least one address forwarding table of at least one network switch is acquired. Then, the address forwarding table is analyzed according to the media access control address, so that an assigned number of a port of the network switch is acquired. Then, a predetermined IP address listed in an IP address assigning table is assigned to the network device according to the assigned number of the port of the network switch. Afterwards, the media access control address and/or the assigned IP address is recorded in a field of the IP address assigning table corresponding to the assigned number of the port of the network switch. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091256 | SELECTION OF AN APPROPRIATE ONLINE CONTENT SOURCE BASED ON PROGRAM INFORMATION - Methods and arrangements for selecting a content source from a plurality of potential content sources based on program information are described. A network resource maintains a mapping between itself and a static URL to be accessed by an application when updating content used in the application. The network resource can receive, over an electronic network, a configuration request providing the static URL and program information that at least identifies the application and version of the application. Based on the received information that is specific to the identified application version and from which content specific for that application version can be obtained, the network resource determines a second URL and provides the second URL to the application in response to the request. | 04-11-2013 |
20130103806 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING BUSINESS RULES IN A CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus for maintaining businesses rules in a configuration system are disclosed. The presently disclosed system allows systems to be configured using a plurality of rules that are syndicated by a plurality of different manufacturers. Each manufacturer syndicates a portion of the overall system attributes and/or configuration rule set for use by others. Configuration users, such as the sales channel, may then create additional rules and/or configure products with the most recent version of the component attributes and configuration rules, and no single entity is burdened with maintaining the entire attribute and/or rule set. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103807 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method of exchanging configuration information needed to authenticate an unregistered Wi-Fi client device to an access point of a wireless local area network is described. A SSID of the AP and a temporary hidden secondary SSID of the AP are enabled for a preset time period with a residential gateway providing the AP of the WLAN. A message is received in the form of IP UDP packets by the residential gateway to the temporary hidden secondary SSID of the AP during the preset time period requesting network configuration information. The residential gateway transmits the requested network configuration information via return message in the form of IP UDP packets on the temporary hidden secondary SSID of the AP. Additional methods and apparatus are described. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103808 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXECUTING AND UNDOING DISTRIBUTED SERVER CHANGE OPERATIONS - A method and system for executing and undoing distributed server change operations for a collection of server objects across multiple target servers in a transaction-safe manner is provided. In one embodiment, server change operations for a collection of server objects, such as files and configuration file entries, are specified in a transaction package. The target servers to which the specified change operation are directed are also identified in the transaction package. Parameter values for each of the identified target servers are specified through a parameter file in the transaction package. The transaction package is sent to the identified target servers, which execute the change operations on the target servers in a transaction-safe manner using these parameter values. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103809 | Logical Networks - An invention is provided for creating logical network abstractions of physical networks, and deploying computer services to physical networks based on a specified logical network. In an embodiment, a physical network is divided into one or more logical networks. Upon receiving an indication to deploy a computer service to a logical network, a mapping from that logical network to a sub-network of the physical network is determined, the service is configured to execute on the sub-network of the physical network, and an indication of this configuration of the service is stored. | 04-25-2013 |
20130110991 | REGISTRATION METHOD AND REGISTRATION APPARATUS | 05-02-2013 |
20130110992 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING INTERDOMAIN PROFILE-BASED INFERENCES | 05-02-2013 |
20130110993 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK BY VIRTUAL PRIVATE CLOUD | 05-02-2013 |
20130110994 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RELAYING COMMUNICATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130117420 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING DATA TRANSMISSION PATH - Disclosed are an apparatus and method for setting data transmission paths. The disclosed apparatus for setting data transmission paths may include: a cluster grouping unit configured to classify a plurality of clusters into two or more cluster groups each containing one or more clusters based on a distance from a sink node; a first data transmission path setting unit configured to set a first data transmission path at the cluster group level; and a second data transmission path setting unit configured to set a second data transmission path at the cluster level on a basis of the first data transmission path. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117421 | DETERMINING VLAN-IDs FOR A SWITCHED-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORK OF A PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - A Process Control (PC) or Substation Automation (SA) system is disclosed with appropriate message filtering based on Virtual Local Area Network identifiers VLAN-IDs as communication sub-network identifiers. The VLAN-IDs are determined in order to optimize data flow in the sense that receiver IEDs only receive the intended messages, while at the same time the number of sub-network identifiers can be reduced to a maximum extent. Restricting the real time traffic in such a way can ensure proper operation of the systems, such as large SA systems using GOOSE for interlocking and having sensors connected with the Sampled Value (SV) protocol according to IEC 61850-9-2. | 05-09-2013 |
20130124700 | EFFICIENT DISTRIBUTION OF FUNCTIONAL EXTENSIONS TO A 3D MODELING SOFTWARE - Functional extensions are provided for use with a modeling software. The functional extensions provide functionality not otherwise provided by the modeling software. The functional extensions are received from a client device by a server and stored in a database. Thereafter, the server transmits the functional extensions to a second client device, sometimes in response to receiving a request for the functional extension from the second client device. The server may update a user profile to indicate that a functional extension was received from a user operating the client device and, additionally, may transmit the functional extension to the second client device when the server receives an indication that the user is operating the second client device. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124701 | METHOD, ARRANGEMENT AND PROGRAM FOR EFFICIENT CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK NODES - A method for configuration of a plurality of network nodes for use with a network includes: for each network node of the plurality of network nodes in a first step, assigning, by the network, a preliminary Internet Protocol link to the network node; in a second step, transmitting, by the network, preliminary configuration parameters to the network node; and in a third step, using, by the network node, the preliminary configuration parameters to retrieve, by using a standardized naming convention in a request to the configuration server entity, additional configuration information, wherein the additional configuration information comprises at least one of a vendor- or technology-specific commissioning file. | 05-16-2013 |
20130132529 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A DATA FORMAT FOR PROCESSING DATA AND DEVICEEMPLOYING THE SAME - A method for determining a data format for processing data to be transmitted along a communication path is disclosed. In one aspect, the method includes identifying at run-time an operational configuration based on received information on the conditions for communication on the communication path. The method may also include selecting according to the identified operational configuration, a data format for processing data to be transmitted among a plurality of predetermined data formats. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132530 | MANAGEMENT DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A device management service receives acquisition request of application information for the application to be applied from the image forming apparatus, generates and transmits application information corresponding to the image forming apparatus when device configuration information of the image forming apparatus satisfies a applicable condition of the application included in basic set application information and a license for utilizing to apply to the image forming apparatus is present. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132531 | ARCHITECTURE OF NETWORKS WITH MIDDLEBOXES - Some embodiments provide a system for implementing a logical network that includes a set of end machines, a first logical middlebox, and a second logical middlebox connected by a set of logical forwarding elements. The system includes a set of nodes. Each of several nodes includes (i) a virtual machine for implementing an end machine of the logical network, (ii) a managed switching element for implementing the set of logical forwarding elements of the logical network, and (iii) a middlebox element for implementing the first logical middlebox of the logical network. The system includes a physical middlebox appliance for implementing the second logical middlebox. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132532 | LOAD BALANCING AND DESTINATION NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION MIDDLEBOXES - A controller of a network control system for configuring several middlebox instances is described. The middlebox instances implement a middlebox in a distributed manner in several hosts. The controller configures a first middlebox instance to obtain status of a set of servers and disseminate the obtained status to a second middlebox instance. The controller configures the second middlebox instance to use the status to select a server from the set of servers. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132533 | CONTROL PLANE INTERFACE FOR LOGICAL MIDDLEBOX SERVICES - Some embodiments provide a non-transitory machine readable medium of a first middlebox element of several middlebox elements to implement a middlebox instance in a distributed manner in several hosts. The non-transitory machine readable medium stores a set of instructions for receiving (1) configuration data for configuring the middlebox instance to implement a middlebox in a logical network and (2) a particular identifier associated with the middlebox in the logical network. The non-transitory machine readable medium stores a set of instructions for generating (1) a set of rules to process packets for the middlebox in the logical network and (2) an internal identifier associated with the set of rules. The non-transitory machine readable medium stores a set of instructions for associating the particular identifier with the internal identifier for later processing of packets having the particular identifier. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132534 | INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SERVICE MANAGEMENT - A desired instance of a service model is stored, and an observed instance of the service model is provided. Inconsistencies between the desired instance and the observed instance may be detected based on a comparison between the desired instance and the observed instance. | 05-23-2013 |
20130144990 | CONFIGURATION METHOD AND SYSTEM OF COMPLEX NETWORK AND CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT MODULE OF SERVER RESOURCES - A method and system for configuring a complex network and a server resource configuration and management module are provided. The method comprises: obtaining an access record of each cloud computing server in a cloud server pool in a network; constructing a complex network model according to the access record(s); performing a community division process to the complex network model to obtain a community structure and memberships of members in each community; and configuring a structure of the network according to the community structure and the memberships of the members in each community. The provided technical scheme is applicable to a cloud computing network. The method and system for configuring a complex network and the server resource configuration and management module, realize configuring the network according to the usage of each cloud computing server in the current network, solve the problem of no mechanism for configuring a cloud computing network reasonably. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144991 | Wireless Configuration For A Computing Device - Wireless configuration for a computing device, the computing device including computer memory, a wireless receiver, and a device configuration management module, including: receiving, by the device configuration management module via the wireless receiver, configuration data for the computing device, wherein the computing device is packaged in original equipment manufacturer (‘OEM’) packaging; and storing, by the device configuration management module, the configuration data for the computing device in the computer memory of the computing device. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144992 | Distributed Dynamic Virtual Machine Configuration Service - An approach is provided in which a local module receives a discovery message from a virtual network endpoint that is devoid of a corresponding virtual IP address. The local module sends one or more unicast network configuration messages to a dynamic configuration service and, in turn, the local module receives one or more unicast network configuration responses from the dynamic configuration service. One of the unicast network configuration responses includes one or more network configuration parameters. The local module configures the virtual network endpoint according to one or more of the network configuration parameters. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144993 | Network Data Configuration Method and Network Data Configuration System - The disclosure provides a network data configuration method and a network data configuration system. The network data configuration method includes the following steps: when receiving a configuration command that instructs configuring data for a network device, the network data configuration system enters a global configuration mode; when receiving in the global configuration mode a mode switch command that instructs switching to a first configuration mode, the network data configuration system switches directly from the global configuration mode to the first configuration mode, wherein the first configuration mode is any configuration mode under the global configuration mode; when receiving in the first configuration mode a mode switch command that instructs switching to a second configuration mode, the network data configuration system exits from the first configuration mode and switching directly to the second configuration mode, wherein the second configuration mode is the global configuration mode or any configuration mode under the global configuration mode. The application of the disclosure can effectively reduce mode switch operations in the process of network data configuration and improve the configuration efficiency of network data. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144994 | Content Delivery Network and Method for Content Delivery - The disclosure provided a content delivery network, which comprises a content locating system, a delivery configuration managing system and at least one content providing node; wherein the content providing node is configured to acquire and provide a content; the content locating system is configured to determine a download location of a content requested to be downloaded and provide the determined download location information to a content download requester; and the delivery configuration managing system is configured to maintain and/or generate the delivery configuration information of the content, determining a delivery configuration of the content to be downloaded according to the received information of the content requested to be downloaded, and notify the same to the download requester. Further the disclosure provided a method for content delivery on the basis of the content delivery network described above. The technical solution of the disclosure supports various content delivery configurations with relatively low complexity and costs. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144995 | CONTROL APPARATUS, A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD AND A RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING RECORDED THEREON A COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A control apparatus for controlling packet transfer between terminals belonging to a first virtual network identified by a first identifier includes a network configuration information management unit for holding configuration information on a second virtual network identified by a second identifier so that the terminals belong to the second virtual network; and a path control unit for controlling communication between the terminals based on the configuration information on the second virtual network. | 06-06-2013 |
20130151674 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ASSIGNING A TEMPLATE TO AN EXISTING NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Methods of assigning network service templates in a communication network including a plurality of network elements that are configured to implement a plurality of network services are provided. The methods include providing a plurality of network service templates for a first network service, providing a network service model for providing the first network service by at least one network element in the communication network, comparing the plurality of network service templates with the network service model, and associating at least one network service template with the network service model in response to the comparison. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151675 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT IN A WIRELESS MESH - A computing environment containing a mesh network that is adapted to provide a reliable transport mechanism over which services may be delivered. Nodes of the mesh can automatically select routable addresses without conflicts, which allows nodes of the mesh to be accessed, even as the mesh changes through the addition or deletion of nodes. Also, nodes communicate with a protocol that supports service advertisements. These advertisements can identify mesh nodes that supply services, such as file or print servers, for which devices that have not yet connected to the network may be searching. Advertisements can also identify services to be used by nodes in the network, allowing, for example, anode to select a gateway providing a reliable connection to an external network. The mesh network can be used as a transport for communication using protocols, such as TCP/IP, that generally exhibit poor performance when using unreliable transports. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151676 | LOGICAL L3 ROUTING WITH DHCP - For a network controller for managing a set of hosts, a method for configuring a host to provide a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) service is described. The method configures a DHCP module in a first host to provide a DHCP service. The method configures a managed forwarding element in the first host to ( | 06-13-2013 |
20130151677 | DEVICE IDENTIFIER SELECTION - A method includes receiving an enumeration message via a host interface of a device that is operatively coupled to a host device and to one or more other devices. The method includes identifying the enumeration message as a command originated by the host device or as a response message from one of the other devices. In response to identifying the enumeration message as a command, an enumeration response message is sent to the host device. The enumeration response message indicates a distinctive device identifier value. The method also includes, in response to identifying the enumeration message as a response message from one of the other devices, reading from the response message an identifier value used by such other device and at least temporarily storing this identifier value at the device to enable the device to select the distinctive device identifier value. | 06-13-2013 |
20130159476 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING DEVICE PROFILES - An approach for providing cloud-based profile access is described. A profile platform receives, at a cloud-based service platform, a request for a device profile from a mobile device, wherein the device profile specifies information relating to configuration of a graphical user interface and one or more applications associated with the mobile device, determines context data for the mobile device, selects one of a plurality of device profiles based on the determined context data, and generates a control message specifying the selected device profile for configuring the mobile device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159477 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A DISTRIBUTED AVIONICS CONTROL SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for configuring synchronous table-driven operations of a distributed avionics control system comprising a plurality of processing nodes (S | 06-20-2013 |
20130166701 | System Having Trace Resources - A system includes a functional unit having a plurality of components. The system further includes trace resources for tracking processes executed by the functional unit. The trace resources include a network configuration having a plurality of nodes and a plurality of monitors, wherein each of the monitors is coupled to a node and is configured to determine trace information of a component. Further, a trace unit is coupled to the network configuration. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166702 | Method, Device, System, and Program for Optimizing Software Configuration Values using CMDB - A method, device, system, and program able to automatically optimize configuration values in software constituting an integrated system. The integrated system introduction support device collects from a configuration management database (CMDB) software configuration values related to other integrated systems sharing interactive aspects with the software constituting the target integrated system, and generates a regression model of configuration values having a high correlation among the collected software configuration values. When configuration values in a predetermined software program constituting the integrated system have been specified by the user, the integrated system introduction support device applies the specified configuration values to the regression model, and calculates an optimum value for the other software programs constituting the integrated system. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166703 | System And Method For Management Of Network-Based Services - In one embodiment, a system includes an interface configured to receive a first request sent from a first customer for a first service provided by a first service provider, the first request being of a first type. The system also includes at least one processor configured to determine a first set of configuration parameters from a first policy associated with the first service provider in response to receiving the first request. The at least one processor also causes a node associated with the first service provider to provide the first service in response to receiving the first request using the first set of configuration parameters. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166704 | Mass Generation of Individual Virtual Servers, Virtual Web Sites, and Virtual Web Objects - Techniques for inducing a contact to invoke a resource prepared by a promoter when the resource resides on a network include generating a resource location description for the resource that includes a name of the contact. The promoter provides access to the resource at a location on the network according to the resource location description and also prepares a message to notify the contact about the resource location description. Thus a promoter can provide a website for each contact whom the promoter has identified, the website having a domain name that prominently displays the contact's identity. The displayed website content is determined according to the website domain name for the contact. The system may optionally maintain a record of access for a particular website domain and display website content that is determined according to the frequency and type of prior access to the website domain. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166705 | NETWORK CONNECTIVITY WIZARD TO SUPPORT AUTOMATED CREATION OF CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATIONS FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE CLOUD COMPUTING NETWORKS - A cloud computing network is implemented by defining a plurality of network connectivity features for designing a virtual private cloud computing network within the cloud computing network. Each network connectivity feature has user-definable attributes and each network connectivity feature is translatable into a set of network element configuration statements that instantiate an action particular to the network connectivity feature. Usage rules specifying how the features can be used are defined for the cloud computing network. Selected features from the plurality of network connectivity features are accepted and assembled into a template for configuring the virtual private cloud computing network. The template for configuring the virtual private cloud computing network is validated against the usage rules. The virtual private cloud computing network is implemented in accordance with the validated template for configuring the virtual private cloud computing network. | 06-27-2013 |
20130173761 | Systems and Methods for Player Setup Room Names - Systems, methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to facilitate configuration and naming of a multimedia playback device on a local playback network are disclosed. An example method includes identifying and analyzing local network topology to identify playback device(s) connected to the network at location(s). The example method includes analyzing a playback device to be added and comparing the playback device to be added to the playback device(s) already connected to the network. The example method includes displaying available option(s) to name the playback device to be added based on the analysis of the network, the already connected playback device(s) and the playback device to be added to the network. The example method includes naming the playback device to be added based on a selected available option. | 07-04-2013 |
20130173762 | INTELLIGENT IDENTIFICATION OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT FOR SYNCHRONIZATION - An intelligent synchronization tool ensures access to desired content in a manner that automatically keeps the content current on the portable media device. A variation threshold or user-specified degree of content variation may be introduced among content downloaded to a user's mobile device to prevent the user from becoming bored. Furthermore, intelligent synchronization may automatically populate the portable media device with popular content to save a user time and/or use passive monitoring techniques to ascertain a user's preferences for subsequent population. | 07-04-2013 |
20130173763 | ARRANGEMENT FOR OPERATING A COMPUTER CLUSTER - An arrangement is disclosed for operating a computer cluster distributed over multiple locations using quorum mechanism. The cluster includes interconnected defined system instances. The arrangement includes distributing the cluster configuration to each system instance, and constantly checking system instance connectivity to determine reachable system instances. Each healthy system instance determines a subcluster of itself and all reachable system instances. Information of the distributed cluster configuration is used to calculate a corresponding subcluster configuration. Subcluster configuration information and the cluster configuration information is used for computing a new quorum decision for the corresponding subcluster, using a location quorum function considering proportions of connected locations containing reachable system instances, and weights of the reachable system instances in the locations. Workload placement decisions are made based on the new quorum granting permission to place workload to system instances in a specific subcluster, or refusing the permission, whenever the subcluster changes. | 07-04-2013 |
20130173764 | COORDINATED INFORMATION COLLECTION SYSTEM, COORDINATED INFORMATION COLLECTION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A management server has: a terminal state management unit that manages state information transmitted from information terminals and including information on an information terminal and a user associated with each information terminal; and a network configuration management unit that selects adjacent information terminals of each information terminal based on the state information of each information terminal managed by the terminal state management unit, and calculates a connection link, which is a network for interconnecting adjacent information terminals, wherein the information terminal has: an internal state management unit that manages the state information of the information terminal; an adjacent management unit that manages information on adjacent information terminals selected by the network configuration management unit; and a messaging unit that stores a message acquired from an adjacent information terminal via the connection link and a message inputted by the user in a message box opened to the other information terminals, and manages these messages, and the network configuration management unit calculates a degree of dissimilarity among information terminals based on the state information of each information terminal, and calculates a first type connection link that creates a connection link sequentially from an information terminal having a lower degree of dissimilarity, and a second type connection link which is created stochastically based on the degree of dissimilarity. | 07-04-2013 |
20130179548 | Uniquely identifying a machine - An endpoint machine has a unique endpoint identifier based on a configurable set of hardware attributes for an endpoint type. The endpoint agent running on that machine has an associated software identifier registered with the endpoint management solution upon install. The management server generates the unique endpoint identifier and provides it to the endpoint agent. Periodically, checks are run on the endpoint by the endpoint agent to determine if any of the hardware attributes have changed. If so, the endpoint identifier and the new hardware attribute values are sent to the management server, which uses the information to recognize the endpoint as the same endpoint or to detect a clone of known endpoint. If the endpoint type is unknown or does not exist, the unique software identifier may be used to facilitate the identification process, including the ability to detect a cloned machine. | 07-11-2013 |
20130185400 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES AND METHODS FOR PROVISIONING, PAIRING AND ACTIVATING A NEWLY MANUFACTURED DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC JOINING OF CUSTOMER'S NETWORK - The invention provides systems and methods for providing a unified single-scan user interface for accessing and managing a remotely located device throughout its life cycle, including cellular network provisioning, cloud data provider registration, initialization and activation, as well as providing end users with easy access to the device and its data. The end user simply powers the device on and the device automatically connects with the communication network and the cloud data provider. The device comes to the end user already provisioned and paired and activated with the cloud data provider and the communication network provider. Further, the user account, or accounts, for the use of the device is both active and recorded for billing by the various service providers supporting the device use, i.e., the communication network provider(s). | 07-18-2013 |
20130185401 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - [Problem] To provide a configuration management device which derives a combination of a plurality of types of devices having two indices where the total of a first index (P1) is equal to or greater than a specified value and the total of a second index (P2) becomes the minimum. | 07-18-2013 |
20130191516 | AUTOMATED CONFIGURATION ERROR DETECTION AND PREVENTION - A Configuration Management System (or CMS) assists human operators with administering infrastructure elements in a data center. Configuration state information is collected and stored as a hierarchical set of features and feature attributes. The CMS save a configuration snapshot immediately before a change is implemented and immediately after a change. Comparing the pre-change and post-change configuration states, the CMS can automatically identify potential configuration errors and help better manage the consequences of implementing a change. | 07-25-2013 |
20130191517 | SYSTEM, SERVER AND METHOD FOR REPRODUCING TOPOLOGICAL CHANGE USING DEVICE EVENTS - A system, a server and a method for reproducing topological change using device events are provided. Using a server to collect device messages of network devices in a network environment and after determining and producing a device event that includes reproducing data based on the collected device messages, the device event is sent to a reproducing client. The reproducing client updates and displays topological change in the network in accordance with the reproducing data in the device event. The system and the method can use a GUI to display topological change in the network, and achieve the effect of understanding the change in linking state of network devices in the network intuitively. | 07-25-2013 |
20130191518 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC SERVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTIVITY - Apparatus and methods for automatic service discovery and connectivity include acts of or components for retrieving service metadata associated with one or more service devices from a connectivity entity, wherein the service metadata comprises connectivity parameters, and configuring one or more links with at least one of the one or more service devices based on the service metadata. Further, the apparatus and methods may include acts of or components for using a service available from the one or more service devices through the one or more links. | 07-25-2013 |
20130198346 | AUTOMATED BUILD-OUT OF A CLOUD-COMPUTING STAMP - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for automatically configuring an inventory of hardware to interact seamlessly with a cloud-computing fabric of a data center are provided. Initially, hardware devices within the hardware inventory are located by sending and receiving communications to network devices via serial-based connections and network-based connections, respectively. Information collected during hardware-device location is cross-referenced against a template file for purposes of validation. This information is also employed to generate an infrastructure state of the hardware inventory. The infrastructure state is shared with a controller of the fabric to integrate the hardware inventory therein. Upon integration, services and security measures are provisioned on the hardware inventory, which is designated as a fabric-computing cluster of the data center in order to extend reachability of the fabric, while distributed services are deployed and enabled on available portions of the hardware inventory, which are managed by the fabric controller. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198347 | SAFE STATE FOR NETWORKED DEVICES - A method placing a device in safe state is disclosed. The method includes initiating a safe state for a device. In one embodiment, an operational functionality of the device is disabled. A safe state message at an interface of the device may be received. The interface may be designated as a management interface. Information may be received at the management interface, wherein the information manages the device. The method may also include disabling a non-management interface of the device, wherein the non-management interface is an interface that does not receive a safe state message. The method may further include shutting down a non-management interface of the device, wherein the non-management interface is an interface that does not receive a safe state message. A normal state for the device may be initiated, wherein in the normal state the device restores the operational functionality of the device. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198348 | MANAGING NETWORK DEVICES - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for managing network devices. A central management system stores shared configuration objects in a central configuration database. A network device stores shared configuration objects and device-specific configuration objects in a local configuration database. The local configuration database's shared configuration objects correspond to shared configuration objects in the central configuration database. The network device can be configured locally or using the central management system. | 08-01-2013 |
20130204983 | ENHANCING INITIAL RESOURCE ALLOCATION MANAGEMENT TO PROVIDE ROBUST RECONFIGURATION - A description of a resource associated with a service of an entity can be captured. The service can be associated with one or more resources, a constraint, and a demand. The resource can be associated with one or more characteristics including a utility, a limited availability, and a consumption rate. The entity can be an organization or a system. An initial allocation problem associated with the resource can be formulated as a two phase problem. The first phase can be an optimization problem and the second phase can be a restricted allocation problem. The initial allocation problem can be associated with reconfiguring a previously established allocation of a baseline scenario. The optimization problem can be solved optimally or approximately to establish a favorable allocation. The favorable allocation can minimizes the reconfiguration cost of the reconfiguring. The baseline scenario can be a normal operation of the service. | 08-08-2013 |
20130204984 | Management Record Specification for Management of Field Replaceable Units Installed Within Computing Cabinets - A management record specification for use with a frame or other structure holding one or more field replaceable units (FRUs) such as rack-mount servers or blade enclosures that broadly allows for management of installed FRUs. The management record specification is implemented within a number of programmable read-only memory (PROM) images such as a worker PROM image stored in memory of a number of frame arms that receive or interface with respective FRUs, and a manager PROM image that is accessed by the “frame manager” of the frame. Installed FRUs access respective worker PROM images to determine their roles within the frame, physical locations, and the like. The frame manager obtains manager PROM image information to manage installed FRUs in relation to hot-swapping, firmware updates, and the like. | 08-08-2013 |
20130204985 | TRANSPARENT HETEROGENOUS LINK PAIRING - A method, system and computer program product for managing at least two physical links. A TCP/IP stack configures a first interface with attributes. The TCP/IP stack activates the first interface. The TCP/IP stack detects a channel path identifier (CHPID). The TCP/IP stack creates a second interface. The TCP/IP stack associates the second interface with the first interface. The first interface and the second interface are logically linked to exchange traffic corresponding to a single internet protocol address. The TCP/IP stack configures the second interface with at least one attribute. The TCP/IP stack activates the second interface. The two physical links may rely on two different physical link types. | 08-08-2013 |
20130204986 | Remote Configuration of Client Devices - Remote configuration ensures compliance of remote client devices. A server polls a client device for its configuration file. The server compares the configuration file to a compliance policy. If the configuration file fails the compliance policy, the server retrieves a compliant configuration file that conforms to the compliance policy. The server sends the compliant configuration file to the client device with an instruction to replace the configuration file. | 08-08-2013 |
20130212233 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method for configuring a first electronic device that includes first and second wireless communication systems. A first wireless connection is established between the first electronic device and a second electronic device using the first wireless communication system. Configuration information pertaining to the second wireless communication system is transmitted from the first electronic device to the second electronic device using the first wireless connection. Configuration instructions are transmitted from the second electronic device to the first electronic device over the first wireless connection. The configuration instructions are used to configure the first electronic device to communicate using the second wireless communication system, and the first wireless connection can then be terminated. | 08-15-2013 |
20130212234 | PROVIDING CONFIGURABLE WORKFLOW CAPABILITIES - Techniques are described for providing clients with access to functionality for creating, configuring and executing defined workflows that manipulate source data in defined manners, such as under the control of a configurable workflow service that is available to multiple remote clients over one or more public networks. A defined workflow for a client may, for example, include multiple interconnected workflow components that are specified by the client and that each are configured to perform one or more types of data manipulation operations on a specified type of input data. The configurable workflow service may further execute the defined workflow at one or more times and in one or more manners, such as in some situations by provisioning multiple computing nodes provided by the configurable workflow service to each implement at least one of the workflow components for the defined workflow. | 08-15-2013 |
20130212235 | MAINTAINING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN SHARED FORWARDING ELEMENTS MANAGED BY A NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM - A non-transitory machine readable medium storing a program that manages a plurality managed forwarding elements that forward data through a network is described. The program receives user inputs that define forwarding performance constraints of a set of managed forwarding elements. Based on the inputs, the program generates a set of universal flow entries for configuring the set of managed forwarding elements to apply the forwarding performance constraints to data traffic that the managed forwarding elements forward. The set of universal flow entries is for subsequent conversion into a set of customized flow entries for the managed forwarding elements. | 08-15-2013 |
20130219028 | DYNAMIC HTTP LOAD BALANCING - The invention is a method and apparatus for facilitating facilitates load balancing in a server farm. In accordance with various aspects of the invention, all of the information about each server necessary for a load balancing program to define and execute a load balancing algorithm is stored at a predetermined URL for each server. The load balancer can query the predefined URL, which returns the necessary information. The load balancer then dynamically configures the load balancing algorithm in accordance with the returned information. | 08-22-2013 |
20130227089 | BUILDING VIRTUAL MACHINE DISK IMAGES FOR DIFFERENT CLOUD CONFIGURATIONS FROM A SINGLE GENERIC VIRTUAL MACHINE DISK IMAGE - A computer system receives a request to instantiate a virtual machine (VM) in a first target cloud and a second target cloud. The target clouds operate with different configuration parameters. The system modifies a generic VM disk image that is not formatted for the first or second target cloud to create a cloud-formatted VM disk image for the first target cloud and a cloud-formatted VM disk image for the second target cloud. The first target cloud cloud-formatted VM disk image is based on the first target cloud configuration parameters, and the second target cloud cloud-formatted VM disk image is based on the second target cloud configuration parameters. The system instantiates a VM in the first target cloud using the first target cloud cloud-formatted VM disk image and a VM in the second target cloud using the second target cloud cloud-formatted VM disk image. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227090 | REMOTE ENTERPRISE POLICY/CLIENT CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION FOR COMPUTING DEVICES - Systems and methods for remote an enterprise policy/client configuration installation for client computing devices are provided. In some aspects, a method includes receiving, on a client computing device, via a network, a message including an updated enterprise policy/client configuration associated with an operating system and a signature. The signature identifies a source of the message. The method also includes authenticating the message based on the signature. The method also includes installing the updated an enterprise policy/client configuration. At least a first portion of an enterprise policy/client configuration is configured not to be updatable without receiving the message via the network. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227091 | PROVISIONING AND MANAGING A CLUSTER DEPLOYED ON A CLOUD - A system is provided to provision and manage cloud-based clustered application deployment. In one example embodiment, a clustered computing application is detected as being launched on a cluster of nodes. Each node in the cluster is a virtual instance of a machine within a virtualization service. Status of the nodes in the cluster are monitored to detect availability of a server within the virtualization service A notification message addressed to the server is issued in response to detecting the availability of the server. The notification message includes information for connecting to the cluster. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227092 | METHODS OF STRUCTURING DATA, PRE-COMPILED EXCEPTION LIST ENGINES AND NETWORK APPLIANCES - A computer executed method is disclosed for sorting a plurality of internet protocol (IP) addresses. The method includes dividing the range of IP addresses into a plurality of clusters representing a plurality of contiguous sub-ranges, assigning each IP address to the cluster associated with the sub-range that includes that IP address, and assigning the IP addresses in each cluster to one of a plurality of pages. If one of the pages has a size less than a page size limit, the method includes duplicating on that page at least one of the IP addresses assigned to that page. For each page, the IP addresses assigned to that page are ordered by numeric value. A network appliance incorporating aspects of the method is also disclosed. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227093 | Unified System Area Network And Switch - A network switch, based on the PCI Express protocol, is disclosed. The switch includes a processor, local memory and a plurality of non-transparent bridges. By configuring the non-transparent bridges appropriately, the network switch can facilitate a number of different communication mechanisms, including TCP/IP communication between servers, server clusters, and virtualized I/O device utilization. For example, the network switch may configure the non-transparent bridges so as to have access to the physical memory of every server attached to it. It can then move data from the memory of any server to the memory of any other server. In another embodiment, the network switch is connected to an I/O device, and multiple servers are given access to that I/O device via virtualized connections. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227094 | VIRTUAL NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT - A Hardware Management Console (HMC) configures virtual networks. The HMC extends Internal Queued Direct I/O to an intra-ensemble data network (IEDN) within a cluster of virtual servers to define a single channel path identifier, and to define a channel parameter. The HMC defines at least one virtual network. The HMC defines a bridge port within each CPC that supports at least one of the virtual servers. The HMC defines a network interface for each virtual server within each cluster. The HMC grants access to a corresponding virtual network for each virtual server. | 08-29-2013 |
20130232237 | PROGRAMMABLE PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR AIRBORNE OPERATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments of the present invention provide improved systems and methods for a programmable portable electronic device for airborne operational communications. In one embodiment, a method comprises loading application configuration information onto a storage medium on the portable electronic device from an external storage medium, the application configuration information defining an application configuration for the avionic operational data communications application and configuring an avionic operational data communications application stored in the storage medium on the portable electronic device according to the application configuration information stored in the the storage medium. Further, the method includes receiving avionic operational data from an airborne server; executing the avionic operational data communications application to process the avionic operational data, wherein the execution of the avionic operational data communications application produces operational communications according to the application configuration information stored in the storage medium; and communicating the operational communications with a ground peer. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232238 | MOBILE DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE SECURITY DOMAINS - Included within a shared housing are at least one user interface element; a first isolated computational entity; a second isolated computational entity; and a switching arrangement. The switching arrangement is configured to, in a first mode, connect the first isolated computational entity to the at least one user interface element; and, in a second mode, connect the second isolated computational entity to the at least one user interface element. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232239 | DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM, AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A data processing apparatus includes a receiving unit configured to receive an input of user information, a determining unit configured to determine a destination corresponding to the user information, a preparing unit configured to prepare a computer program for enabling an information terminal device to which the computer program is installed to use a data processing function provided by the data processing apparatus and configuration information related to the data processing function, and a transmitting unit configured to transmit instruction information giving an instruction as to how the computer program and the configuration information are acquired to the destination thus determined over a network. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232240 | CENTRALIZED DASHBOARD FOR MONITORING AND CONTROLLING VARIOUS APPLICATION SPECIFIC NETWORK COMPONENTS ACROSS DATA CENTERS - A computer implemented method for monitoring and controlling a one or more networking components in a one or more datacenters is provided. The computer implemented method includes (i) receiving, at a monitoring module, a performance data from each of the one or more networking components, (ii) storing, at a database, the performance data received from each of the one or more networking components, (iii) displaying, using a dashboard module, a dashboard that includes (a) a first traffic level managed by a first datacenter, and (b) a second traffic level managed by a second datacenter, (iv) receiving a first input includes a modification of at least one of the first traffic level and the second traffic level displayed in the dashboard, and (v) configuring, at a traffic management module, the one or more networking components in the first datacenter and the second datacenter based on the first input. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232241 | Method And System For Configuring A Device That Has Failed To Obtain Network Address - Method and system for configuring a device that has failed to obtain a network address. In one aspect of the invention, a method for remotely configuring a device includes attempting to obtain a network address from a network server over a network, and receiving a valid network address over the network from a remote device connected to the network in response to failing to obtain the network address from the network server. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232242 | ESTABLISHING A SECURE WIRELESS NETWORK WITH A MINIMUM HUMAN INTERVENTION - Techniques for automatically configuring necessary parameters of a device to be coupled to a network with minimum human intervention are disclosed. In one embodiment, a wired and/or wireless Ad-hoc network is established to facilitate communications among a group of devices. When a new device is added to the network, a rudimentary communication path is initially established between one of the devices in the network and the new device such that necessary parameters (e.g., SSID, WEP security, channel frequency) can be exchanged for the new device to function properly in the network. To ensure the parameters are exchanged in a secure fashion, an additional public security procedure can be used between the two devices. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232243 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR IDENTIFYING, CONFIGURING AND ACCESSING A DEVICE ON A NETWORK - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for identifying, configuring, and accessing a device connected to a network. In operation, a device connected to a network is automatically identified. Additionally, the device is automatically configured. Strictly as an option, the device may be accessed on the network, | 09-05-2013 |
20130238768 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMPARING CONFIGURATION FILES AND GENERATING CORRECTIVE COMMANDS - The present disclosure is directed to systems and methods of synchronizing a target configuration file of a target device with a source configuration file of a source device. A parser of a first device may group commands from a source configuration file of a source device into subsets of commands. Each subset of the subsets of commands may comprise commands uniquely identified by a common attribute. A configurator of the first device may load into memory a command from a target configuration file, the command having a first identifying attribute. The configurator may load into memory a subset of commands having a common identifying attribute that matches the first identifying attribute. The configurator may compare the command with each command in the loaded subset. The configurator may generate a command for the target device, to synchronize a portion of the target configuration file with the source configuration file. | 09-12-2013 |
20130238769 | DYNAMIC LEARNING BY A SERVER IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - In one embodiment, receiving a neighbor solicitation message from a stateless address configuration host; processing the neighbor solicitation message to obtain a device identifier and an internet protocol version six (IPv6) address; storing a mapping between the device identifier and the IPv6 address in a database associated with the network device; and sending the mapping in a new message to a server. In more particular embodiments, the method can include evaluating the database in order to determine whether a particular IPv6 address is a duplicate; and marking an entry associated with the particular IPv6 address in the database for deletion. | 09-12-2013 |
20130238770 | DUAL-STACK SUPPORT FOR DEMARC AUTO CONFIGURATION (DAC) MECHANISM IN DOCSIS PROVISIONING OF EPON (DPOE) NETWORK - Systems, devices and techniques for operating a server in an Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) include receiving a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) control message from a demarcation device, processing the DHCP control message depending on a target mode of operation, such that when the DHCP control message is inconsistent with the target mode of operation, the DHCP control message is dropped and when the DHCP control message is consistent with the target mode of operation, the DHCP control message is forwarded to the EPON and indicating, to the demarcation device, the target mode of operation by including a Mode Select Option field in a DHCP response message to the demarcation device. | 09-12-2013 |
20130246587 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING THE IMPACT OF CHANGES IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - The impact of device configuration changes on operational issues and policy compliance in a computer network can be discerned from a visual data presentation that jointly shows representations of changes, issues, and policy compliance in a common view for a group of network devices. Configuration information is collected from devices in the computer network and processed to determine whether a change has occurred in a configuration of any of the devices, whether any operational issues exist for each of the devices, and whether any of the devices are not in compliance with any applicable operational policies. A display device displays the visual data presentation to allow an operator to see trends and relationships between device configuration changes and operational issues and incidents of policy non-compliance. The visual data presentation can be depicted as a graphical timeline view, a network topology view, or a table view of the information. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246588 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DATA MOBILITY WITH A CLOUD ARCHITECTURE - Aspects of the present disclosure describe systems and corresponding methods for storing and/or redistributing data within a network. In various aspects, data and/or sets of data stored in a database, data store, or other type of database storage system may be pulled, pushed, distributed, redistributed, or otherwise positioned at one or more data caches and/or servers strategically located across an enterprise network, a content delivery network (“CDN”), etc., and may be accessible over such networks, other networks, and/or the Internet. | 09-19-2013 |
20130254355 | IDENTIFICATION OF THE LOCATION OF NODES DISTRIBUTED IN AD HOC NETWORKS - A location of node i in a network having a plurality of nodes is identified by intersecting regions that are guaranteed to contain the node i with respect the other nodes that are neighbors of the node i and iteratively minimizing the size of the intersection region containing the node i. | 09-26-2013 |
20130254356 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RECOVERY FROM NETWORK CHANGES - Systems, methods and apparatus for recovery from network changes. In some embodiments, a first network device may operating in a network comprising a second network device having a designated role according to at least one communication protocol. The first network device may detect a change relating to the second network device and determine whether the change is of a type among one or more selected types of changes. The first network device may further determine whether to inhibit operation of the first network device based at least in part on whether the change is of a type among the one or more selected types of changes. | 09-26-2013 |
20130262637 | DNS PROXY SERVICE FOR MULTI-CORE PLATFORMS - In a multi-core platform in which secondary processing cores do not have direct WAN connectivity, methods and apparatus are described that enable the secondary processing cores to provide DNS resolution services to their network applications and/or client devices attached thereto. In an exemplary embodiment, a primary processing core having direct WAN connectivity and a DHCP client includes a DNS proxy service module which acts as a DNS server to the platform's secondary processing cores. Each secondary processing core sends DNS queries to the primary core DNS proxy service module. A primary core DNS resolver regenerates DNS queries based on the DNS queries from the secondary cores and forwards them for resolution to WAN-side DNS servers whose IP addresses were provided to the DHCP client in response to an IP lease request. The resolved IP addresses are returned by the WAN-side DNS servers to the primary processing core, which provides them to the requesting secondary core applications or client devices, via the DNS proxy service module. | 10-03-2013 |
20130268638 | MAPPING REQUIREMENTS TO A SYSTEM TOPOLOGY IN A NETWORKED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an approach for mapping requirements (e.g., functional and/or non-functional requirements) to components and/or policies of a system topology in a networked computing environment (e.g., a cloud computing environment). In a typical embodiment, a set of functional requirements is mapped to a set of components. A set of dependencies between the set of functional requirements is then indentified so that a set of interrelationships between the set of components may be identified. A set of non-functional requirements is then mapped to a set of policies that are then applied to the set of components. Based on the set of components, the set of interrelationships, and the set of policies, a system topology is generated. Upon implementation of the system topology, runtime metrics may be collected as feedback that is utilized for refinement of the system topology, as well as a system topology deployed in the future. | 10-10-2013 |
20130275565 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION METHOD - A network I/O system includes a central communication unit having a communication port and a plurality of terminal communication units each having an upstream communication port and a plurality of downstream ports wherein the central communication unit transmits, to the terminal communication units, routing data of the central communication unit to the terminal communication units for setting identification numbers in the terminal communication units and data of the identification number of the terminal communication units, the terminal communication units refer to the data to transmit to the downstream communication port and set the identification number in a targeted terminal communication unit, and a communication port number of the downstream communication port is appended to routing recognition data to be transmitted from the terminal communication units to the central communication unit at a time of passing through the terminal communication units, thereby recognizing a network configuration. | 10-17-2013 |
20130275566 | Method for Configuring One or More Devices in an Ethernet-Based Communication Network - A method for configuring at least one device in an Ethernet-based communication network comprising a plurality of devices with Ethernet capability, wherein the topological position of a respective device to be configured, which is associated with a device type, in the communication network is ascertained, the respective device is sent configuration data, which correspond to its device type and to its ascertained topological position, from a database which contains a plurality of configuration data for at least one device type and a plurality of topological positions of the at least one device type, and the respective device is then configured based on the transmitted configuration data. | 10-17-2013 |
20130282879 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTERING A CLIENT DEVICE IN A MULTI-ROOM DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDING SYSTEM - A system and method for registering a client device with a server device includes the server device having a display. The display displays a first identifier in response to entering a registration mode. A client device is in communication with the server device. The client device detects that the server device is in registration mode and communicates a second identifier to the client device. The server device compares the first identifier and the second identifier and, after comparing, registers the client device at the server device. | 10-24-2013 |
20130282880 | CLOUD-BASED SOFTWARE ECO-SYSTEM - A novel eco-system is provided which first supplies a standardized template of one or more virtual machine images for software module providers/vendors. A plurality of modules executing on the virtual machine images is selected by a user to comprise a plurality of configurations. A suitable configuration may be determined according to a metric and the determined suitable configuration of software modules is subsequently used to build an end-to-end solution. | 10-24-2013 |
20130290495 | METHOD OF SETTING OPTIMAL PING INTERVAL AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - A method of setting an optimal ping interval and an electronic device therefor can reduce power consumption due to computation of each of the portable terminals by calculating a ping interval and transmitting the calculated ping interval to each of the portable terminals at a server. The server may obtain an optimal ping interval quickly because a request of each of a plurality of portable terminals is used for calculating a ping interval. The method includes setting a ping value to a ping interval, when there is the ping value received from a server and attempting to ping packets to the server using the ping interval, when a network connection is not lost when attempting to ping packets to the server. | 10-31-2013 |
20130290496 | CONFIGURABLE, CONNECTORIZED SERVER-AUGMENTED CONTROL SYSTEM - A configurable, connectorized system for providing supervisory and distributed control dramatically reduces the number of wire connections that must be made to connect sensors and actuators to a control system, reducing the number of different control hardware components required to connect one or more sensors and actuators through use of a configurable I/O module. | 10-31-2013 |
20130297752 | PROVISIONING NETWORK SEGMENTS BASED ON TENANT IDENTITY - In one embodiment, a request is generated for a particular device of a computer network for a unique segment identifier (ID) for a network segment comprising one or more devices sharing a unique tenant ID. The request has a request-context that includes the tenant ID and a protocol of the network segment. The request is transmitted a segment ID manager and, as a result, the segment ID manager generates and transmits a response that indicates the unique segment ID for the network segment based on the request-context. Subsequently, the particular device may then be configured to communicate on the network segment with the one or more devices based on the unique segment ID of the response. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297753 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A UNIFIED VIRTUAL NETWORK INTERFACE - An apparatus for sharing network capabilities of a host system by one or more virtual machines. A unified virtual network interface instance is included within an operating system of a virtual machine operating within a virtual environment. The interface instance provides device specific network capability for the virtual machine. A host system supports the virtual machine and includes a network capability provider instance that interfaces with the unified virtual network interface to provide the device specific network capability for the virtual machine. A network capability provider enforces sharing of host-wide network capability as implemented through the one or more unified virtual network interfaces supported by the host system. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297754 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING CONNECTIVITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems, methods, and devices for configuring connectivity in a wireless network are described herein. In some aspects, a wireless device configured to connect to a first wireless network includes a receiver configured to receive a first dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) message from a first network device on the first wireless network. The wireless device further includes a processor configured to determine whether the first DHCP message indicates that the first wireless network does not provide access to a second network. The processor is further configured to determine whether to maintain a connection to the second network accessed using a third wireless network based on the first DHCP message. The leader device further includes a transmitter configured to transmit a second DHCP message to the first network device to connect to the first wireless network. The wireless device is further configured to supply devices on a first wireless network with access to a second network. | 11-07-2013 |
20130297755 | NETWORK ELEMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for network element configuration management is disclosed. In the method the apparatus maintains configuration data on the network element. A set of configuration objects is created in the configuration data, wherein if a predetermined condition is satisfied, yet another configuration object is created in the configuration data. If said yet another configuration object satisfies said predetermined condition or another predetermined condition, one or more further configuration objects are created in the configuration data. Dependency information on the configuration objects satisfying said predetermined condition or said another predetermined condition and on the configuration objects created based on said predetermined condition or said another predetermined condition is stored in the configuration data. | 11-07-2013 |
20130304876 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMPUTER NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION - A system for simplifying the configuration and administration of computer networks. A the server system first sends a broadcast message out to the other network nodes on the computer network to learn configuration of each other network nodes on the local network. Next, network software within each other network node (not shown) responds to the broadcast message with a response containing configuration information and an identifier key value. In one embodiment, the identifier key value may be a randomly generated number. The server system then builds a table of network nodes using the information received in the response messages sent in response to the broadcast message. The server may then communicate with systems having duplicate addresses using the identifier key value. In some embodiments, the server system may send request messages to one or more network nodes specifying a network configuration change. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304877 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF ISN STORE-BASED OVERLAY NETWORK - A system for dynamically configuring an overlay network using an intelligent service networking (ISN) store is provided. The system includes an ISN store configured to register and manage information on network OT resources for providing an overlay network-based service available in a network; a DCON device configured to receive network OT resource information necessary for a service provider to provide the overlay network-based service from the ISN store upon the requests of the service provider and a service user and to dynamically configure an overlay network for providing the overlay network-based service based on the received network OT resource information; and a network OT resource provider configured to register the network OT resources in the ISN store. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304878 | METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND ALGORITHM FOR COMPUTING NETWORK SERVICE VALUE PRICING BASED ON COMMUNICATION SERVICE EXPERIENCES DELIVERED TO CONSUMERS AND MERCHANTS OVER A SMART MULTI-SERVICES (SMS) COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for providing multi-services within a communication network according to various exemplary embodiments can include storing, in a database of a computer, user-defined sets of rules and instructions for providing multi-services to end user devices connected to a communication network comprising a Hybrid Fiber-Wireless (HFW) network having policy management capabilities. The system and method can receive, at one or more processors, the user-defined sets of rules and instructions from a plurality of end users via a plurality of end user devices. The system and method can configure a virtual network for each end user within the communication network using the policy management capabilities based on the user-defined sets of rules and instructions provided by each end user. The user-defined sets of rules and instructions define provisioning and delivery of resources and services provided by the communication network to the end user. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304879 | CONFIGURATION OF AN END DEVICE FOR AN ACCESS TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method is provided to configure an end device ( | 11-14-2013 |
20130304880 | CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK SERVICE AND FUNCTION OF VIRTUAL DESKTOP APPLICATION IN CLOUD - A network access control method for a virtual desktop service is provided. The network access control method provides the user's virtual desktop IP allication, network access control, and user service group authorization. The network access control method provides a convenient and efficient way for virtual desktop service management. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304881 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING APPLICATION SECURITY PROFILES - A method for intercepting, by an agent of a client, communications from the client to be transmitted via a virtual private network connection includes the step of intercepting communications based on identification of an application from which the communication originates. The agent receives information identifying a first application. The agent determines a network communication transmitted by the client originates from the first application and intercepts that communication. The agent transmits the intercepted communication via the virtual private network connection. | 11-14-2013 |
20130318215 | SERVER, MANAGEMENT SERVER, METHOD OF SETTING NETWORK DEVICE IN COMPUTER SYSTEM - In the case of switching the current server to a new server, the redundant configuration of the network devices in the current server is inherited. In the case of transferring a system on a transfer source server, which includes a plurality of network devices provided with a redundant setting, from the transfer source server to a virtual server of the new server, a virtualization system of the new server obtains unshared information of making the plurality of network devices of the transfer source unshared, and then makes the plurality of virtual network devices of the new server correspond separately to the plurality of network devices provided to the new server with reference to the unshared information obtained. | 11-28-2013 |
20130326028 | SERVER MIGRATION - In one embodiment, the invention provides a method of configuring a migration from a plurality of distributed virtual servers to a system of blades, the method comprising: identifying among the plurality of distributed virtual servers a plurality of candidate virtual servers for inclusion in the migration; collecting performance data for each candidate virtual server; consolidating the performance data for each candidate virtual server into a usage profile; normalizing the usage profile to allow representation of a statistical measure of resource usage by the candidate virtual server; and constructing a configuration for the plurality of candidate virtual servers within the system of blades. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326029 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - Aspects of the present disclosure describe systems and methods for automatically configuring, managing, updating, and/or monitoring the configuration of various computing resources and/or network devices within a communications network, such as a telecommunications network. Configuration code may be deployed to a repository for a cluster of computing resources and one or more layers may be defined describing configurable aspects of the cluster. Subsequently, a script may be identified and executed to configure the cluster based on the configuration code. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326030 | DISCOVERY OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES IN A COMBINED NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention are generally directed to discovery of electronic devices in a combined network. An embodiment of a method includes determining an identifier for a first device in a combined network according to a first network protocol, the combined network including a first network using the first network protocol and a second network using a second network protocol, where the identifier is determined based on a unique designation for the first device, and determining addressing information for the first device according to the second network protocol, where determining the addressing information includes establishing a physical address and a logical address for the first device. The method further includes broadcasting one or more messages containing identification information and capabilities of the first device to devices in the first network and to devices in the second network. The first device records and processes information from messages received by the first device, the messages being one or more messages under the first network protocol and one or more message under the second network protocol. | 12-05-2013 |
20130332586 | PROVIDING IPV6 CONNECTIVITY THROUGH SHARED EXTERNAL INTERFACES ON ELECTRONIC DEVICES - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that shares an Internet connection. During operation, the system provides, on an electronic device, an external interface with the Internet connection and a set of internal interfaces sharing the external interface. Upon detecting a support of Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) by the external interface, the system configures the electronic device to provide IPv6 connectivity to the internal interfaces. First, the system provides an IPv6 router to client devices connected to the internal interfaces. Next, the system uses the IPv6 router and an IPv6 prefix from the Internet connection to perform prefix proxying with the client devices. | 12-12-2013 |
20130339494 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VALIDATING A CONFIGURATION IN A CLUSTER - The present disclosure is directed towards systems and methods for validating a configuration across a cluster of intermediary devices. Within the cluster, a configuration change is entered at one node and propagated to the remaining nodes of the cluster. Before propagation, the new configuration is validated. The systems and methods include creating, on a first intermediary device, a configuration to be propagated to a plurality of routing daemons; executing, by a validation module of the first intermediary device, the configuration on a plurality of pseudo routing daemons, each pseudo routing daemon of the plurality of pseudo routing daemons corresponding to the routing daemon of a corresponding intermediary device of the cluster; and determining from results of executing the second configuration whether to propagate the second configuration to each routing daemon. | 12-19-2013 |
20130339495 | CONFIGURING NETWORK DEVICES USING COMPILATIONS OF COHERENT SUBSECTIONS OF CONFIGURATION SETTINGS - A method of configuring a networking device comprises: collecting data regarding the networking device; conveying the data to a remote server; selecting configuration slice instances based on the data using the server, wherein templates for the slice instances are stored on the server; compiling the configuration slice instances using the server; and delivering the compiled configuration slice instances to the networking device; wherein the slice instances are coherent sub-sections of configuration settings for the networking device. | 12-19-2013 |
20130339496 | ENTERPRISE DEVICE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure generally relates to a system and method for enterprise device customization. An example system may comprise an enterprise customization service and a device. The enterprise customization service may be configured to provide at least one of configuration or software to the device based on enterprise customization data. The device may include at least an enterprise customization application and the enterprise customization data. The enterprise customization application may be configured to cause the enterprise customization service to at least one of configure the device or to download software to the device based on the enterprise customization data. | 12-19-2013 |
20130346569 | METHOD AND PROCEDURE FOR DYNAMIC SERVICES ORCHESTRATION THAT RUNS WITHIN AN ON DEVICE SOFTWARE CONTAINER - A system for providing network services is provided. The system includes a device configured to interface with the network to receive a container, where the container is configured to interface with an operating system of the device and a plurality of applications operating on the device. The container is further configured to interface with a network services provider of one or more network services and one or more third party service providers. | 12-26-2013 |
20140006567 | Managing a Fleet of Electronic Devices | 01-02-2014 |
20140006568 | PRIORITIZATION BASED ON IP POOL AND SUBNET BY DHCP | 01-02-2014 |
20140006569 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ASSOCIATING A DEVICE TO A NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
20140006570 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CUSTOMER SPECIFIC TEST SYSTEM ALLOCATION IN A PRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT | 01-02-2014 |
20140006571 | PROCESS EXECUTION METHOD AND APPARATUS | 01-02-2014 |
20140012960 | NETWORK CONNECTION SETTING SYSTEM, NETWORK ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND CONNECTION SETTING METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a network connection setting system, a network electronic device and a connection setting method thereof. The network connection setting system includes a network electronic device and an external display device. The network electronic device has a transmission function of a wireless personal area network to selectively transmit a wireless link signal. The external display device has a transmission function of a wireless personal area network to receive the wireless link signal for connecting matchedly with the network electronic device. The external display device is used for inputting configuration information for network connection setting of the network electronic device. | 01-09-2014 |
20140012961 | FAST LINKUP ARBITRATION - A data processing system comprising: first and second network ports each operable to support a network connection configured according to one or more of a predetermined set of physical layer protocols; and a processor configured to, on a network message being formed for transmission to a network endpoint accessible over either of the first and second network ports: estimate the total time required to, for each of the predetermined set of physical layer protocols, negotiate a respective network connection and transmit the entire network message over that respective network connection; select the physical layer protocol having the lowest estimate of the total time required to negotiate a respective network connection and transmit the network message over that respective network connection; and configure at least one of the first and second network ports to use the selected physical layer protocol. | 01-09-2014 |
20140012962 | PRECONFIGURED FILTERS, DYNAMIC UPDATES AND CLOUD BASED CONFIGURATIONS IN A NETWORK ACCESS SWITCH - Methods and systems for providing a configuration file on a network access switch that may be configured by a third party. A third party remotely defines a set of filters for the network access switch, absolving the user of any responsibility to update or configure the filters on the device. The configuration files may be stored and accessed remotely in the cloud. The system and method also provide for a simple software interface to facilitate easy implementation of the filters stored in the configuration files. | 01-09-2014 |
20140012963 | Linked List Scripting Engine - A system and a method are creating a linked list scripts for a networking device. The system receives a set of nodes defining script functionality and generates a script by coupling the nodes in a nodal structure based on desired order of execution, wherein a leaf node is an standalone node with no child node, and wherein a nugget node includes one or more child nodes, each child node being a nugget or leaf node. The system then determines an execution path through a subset of nodes in the nodal tree structure based on one or more input values. The system also compiles the subset of nodes into a linked list of operations, which follows the execution path, and executes the path of operations within the compiled linked list of operations. | 01-09-2014 |
20140012964 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING POLICIES ON A COMPUTER - An apparatus, system, and method are disclosed for managing policies on a computer having a foreign operating system. Policies may specify hardware or software configuration information. Policies on a first computer with a native operating system are translated into configuration information usable on a second computer having a foreign operating system. In an embodiment, a translator manager manages the association between the policy on the first computer and the translator on the second computer. Computer management complexity and information technology management costs are reduced by centralizing computer management on the native operating system. Further reductions in management complexity are realized when the present invention is used in conjunction with network directory services. | 01-09-2014 |
20140019597 | SEMI-AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY AND GENERATION OF USEFUL SERVICE BLUEPRINTS - According to one general aspect, a method of semi-automatically discovering and generating useful service blueprints may include collecting, by an apparatus, a plurality of configuration information sets regarding a plurality of network service applications. The method may also include converting, by the apparatus, the plurality of configuration information sets into one or more normalized application instance graphs. The method may further include generating, by the apparatus, one or more application blueprint files based, at least in part, upon the one or more normalized application instance graphs. | 01-16-2014 |
20140019598 | Tracing with a Workload Distributor - A load balanced system may incorporate instrumented systems within a group of managed devices and distribute workload among the devices to meet both load balancing and data collection. A workload distributor may communicate with and configure several managed devices, some of which may have instrumentation that may collect trace data for workload run on those devices. Authentication may be performed between the managed devices and the workload distributor to verify that the managed devices are able to receive the workloads and to verify the workloads prior to execution. The workload distributor may increase or decrease the amount of instrumentation in relation to the workload experienced at any given time. | 01-16-2014 |
20140025788 | METRICS FOR NETWORK CONFIGURATION ITEMS - A system may include a discovery engine to perform a discovery process on a network of multiple configuration items and to populate a data structure with information about each discovered configuration item in the network. The information may include a configuration parameter for each configuration item and a metric to be monitored for the configuration item. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025789 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF INSTALLING AND OPERATING DEVICES WITHOUT EXPLICIT NETWORK ADDRESSES - A method of discovering addressing information of one or more upstream devices to respond to specific messages by a second device on behalf of the one or more upstream devices in a network includes acquiring the addressing information in an upstream direction from one or more downstream devices to the one or more upstream devices. The method further includes acquiring the addressing information in a downstream direction from the one or more upstream devices to the one or more downstream devices. The method further includes responding to specific messages using the acquired addressing information about the one or more upstream devices. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025790 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF USING BEACON MESSAGES TO DISCOVER DEVICES ACROSS SUBNETS - A method of discovering a device to be discovered in a communication network having multiple interconnected nodes includes transmitting, by a discoverer, at least one beacon signal including an IP address to the network. The device to be discovered receives the at least one beacon signal. The device to be discovered configures the IP address located in the at least one beacon signal. Additionally, the device to be discovered transmits an advertisement to a server specified by the discoverer. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025791 | Incremental Browser-Based Device Fingerprinting - A method for incrementally fingerprinting a computing device includes steps for executing device-identification code programmed to retrieve a complete set of device configuration metrics from a web browser of the computing device, interrupting execution of the device-identification code after retrieval of a first subset of the device configuration metrics, generating a partial device fingerprint from the first subset, generating a temporary device identifier from the partial device fingerprint, and generating a subset indicator identifying the device configuration metrics that compose the first subset. Additional steps include writing the temporary device identifier and the subset indicator to browser-based storage of the computing device, resuming execution of the device-identification code, querying the browser-based storage for presence of the temporary device identifier, and retrieving, responsive to detecting the temporary device identifier, a second subset of the device configuration metrics, the second subset comprising device configuration metrics not identified by the subset indicator. | 01-23-2014 |
20140032722 | Controlling Characteristics of Network Device Widgets through a Network Device - The embodiments described herein provide various techniques to control characteristics of widgets on a network device. A widget control application is provided to a first network device. This widget control application provides a user interface having a list of available widgets and a graphical emulation of a second network device. An ordered list of widgets is received from the first network device and used to generate a configuration file. The configuration file is provided to the second network device over a communication network in order to cause the second network device to display the ordered list of widgets, thus synchronizing the ordered list between the first network device and the second network device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140032723 | System and Digital Token for Personal Identity Verification - A system and a digital token for user identity verification comprise a control device for communicating over a network. The control device executes program applications and displays outputs to a user. A server communicates over the network to the control device and to other devices. The server comprises a personal identity model, a personal identity engine and a personal identity controller. The personal identity model collects and stores user information comprising personal information, personality, and biometric information. The personal identity engine processes the stored user information to produce the digital token. The personal identity controller manages exchange of the digital token in a user identity verification process. A claim point exchanges the digital token with the server in the user identity verification process in which upon verification the user's identity, the claim point provides a service to the user. | 01-30-2014 |
20140032724 | TECHNIQUES FOR WORKLOAD COORDINATION - Techniques for workload coordination are provided. An automated discovery service identifies resources with hardware and software specific dependencies for a workload. The dependencies are made generic and the workload and its configuration with the generic dependencies are packaged. At a target location, the packaged workload is presented and the generic dependencies automatically resolved with new hardware and software dependencies of the target location. The workload is then automatically populated in the target location. | 01-30-2014 |
20140040438 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF APPLICATIONS DEPLOYED IN A CLOUD - A system is provided to deploy a computing application in a cloud using a service provider interface. The system comprises a configuration request detector, a configuration object retriever, and a configuration installer. The configuration request detector receives, at a computer system provided within a virtualization service, a configuration request. The configuration object retriever retrieves a configuration object in response to the configuration request. The configuration installer uses the configuration object, to automatically install a configuration associated with the configuration object to produce a second version of the computing application. The second version of the computing application provides additional features or services according to the definition of the configuration object. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040439 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SEGMENT PROTECTION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention described herein, discloses a method and a system for segment protection system in an Ether-net communication network. In one embodiment herein, a ‘periodic integrity check’ message frame being created at the source-node and is multicasted to the destination-node directly and via the peer node(s) within a segment protection domain. A Σ1 receiver is configured at the destination-node for receiving the multicasted message frames. The Σ1 receiver ‘selects’ only single message frame from the multicasted message frames being received at all maintenance points, for maintaining at least one fault-less path between the source-node and the destination-node. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040440 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MAC ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT USING DYNAMIC MAC ADDRESS PROTOCOL - A hypervisor and a DMAP server in a network are described herein. The hypervisor is configured to generate a universally unique identifier (UUID), associate the UUID with a virtual NIC, construct a discover message including the UUID and the hypervisor's network address, broadcast the discover message in the network. The DMAP server is configured to generate a MAC address that is unique in the network, receive the discover message, and associate the generated MAC address with the UUID in response to the discover message, construct an offer message having the MAC address, the UUID, and the network address of the DMAP server, and transmit the offer message to the hypervisor. | 02-06-2014 |
20140040441 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE CONFIGURATION OF A CLUSTERED SIMULATION NETWORK - A system and method are provided for configuring a clustered simulation network using virtualization. A user configures access to the main engineering personal computer (PC) being used for the plant solution, and the user configures the physical host PCs which are used for performing virtual machines containing simulators. The user selects the objects that should be simulated and based on the engineering data that the engineering PC provides, a framework application is provided to configure the required simulators, the required network interface, and the required IP addresses as well as the load balancing of the simulation tools, the required number of virtual machines which perform the simulators, and the distribution of virtual machines to the physical PCs. | 02-06-2014 |
20140047079 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EMULATING A DESIRED NETWORK CONFIGURATION IN A CLOUD COMPUTING SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a method and system for configuring a computing system, such as a cloud computing system. A method includes selecting a cluster of nodes for the computing system from a plurality of available nodes coupled to a communication network based on a comparison of a communication network configuration of an emulated node cluster and an actual communication network configuration of the plurality of available nodes. The method further includes modifying a network configuration of at least one node of a cluster of nodes to modify network performance of the at least one node on a communication network coupled to the cluster of nodes. | 02-13-2014 |
20140047080 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING RENDEZVOUS SERVER TO MAKE CONNECTIONS TO FIRE ALARM PANELS - A method and system for using a rendezvous server to make connections to fire alarm panels. In one aspect, an external computer is used to communicate with an authentication computer in a secure overlay network in order for the external computer to establish a secure connection with the secure overlay network and to communicate with a rendezvous server in order for the external computer to, in turn, communicate with the target alarm panels in the secure overlay network. In another aspect, the rendezvous server receives a communication from the electronic device, with the communication indicative of the electronic device seeking to communicate with only devices in the secure overlay network, in response to the communication, accesses information to communicate with the target fire alarm panels and uses the accessed information in order for the electronic device to communicate with the target fire alarm panels. | 02-13-2014 |
20140047081 | CLOUD-BASED VIRTUAL MACHINES AND OFFICES - Cloud-based virtual machines and offices are provided herein. Methods may include establishing a cloud-based virtual office, by providing selections, corresponding to backups of servers of a computing network, to a user interface, establishing a cloud gateway for the virtual office, virtualizing a backup for each server using a virtualization program to create the cloud-based virtual office that includes virtual server machines networked with one another via the cloud gateway, and providing a workload to the cloud-based virtual office. | 02-13-2014 |
20140047082 | PROVIDING ACCESS TO CONFIGURABLE PRIVATE COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for providing users with access to computer networks, such as to enable users to interact with a remote configurable network service in order to create and configure computer networks that are provided by the configurable network service for use by the users. Computer networks provided by the configurable network service may be configured to be private computer networks that are accessible only by the users who create them, and may each be created and configured by a client of the configurable network service to be an extension to an existing computer network of the client, such as a private computer network extension to an existing private computer network of the client. If so, secure private access between an existing computer network and new computer network extension that is being provided may be enabled using one or more VPN connections or other private access mechanisms. | 02-13-2014 |
20140047083 | ADMINISTRATION INFORMATION GENERATION METHOD, ADMINISTRATION INFORMATION GENERATION PROGRAM, AND ADMINISTRATION INFORMATION GENERATION DEVICE - The present invention relates to a management information generation method for a management information generation apparatus ( | 02-13-2014 |
20140052830 | DHCP COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) communications configuration system includes a client information handling system (IHS) coupled to a controller over a network. The client IHS creates a plurality of DHCP discover messages that include capability data that describes at least one hardware resource on the client IHS, and sends the plurality of DHCP discover messages over the network. The controller receives the plurality of DHCP discover messages and processes the capability data to determine configuration data for the client IHS, creates a plurality of DHCP offer messages including the configuration data for the client IHS, and sends the plurality of DHCP offer messages over the network to the client IHS. The client IHS then uses the configuration data to configure the client IHS. | 02-20-2014 |
20140052831 | MULTICAST SOURCE IN GROUP ADDRESS MAPPING - The present disclosure provides a source specific multicast service that maps multicast group addresses to corresponding source addresses. A boundary routing element can be configured to determine whether a received join request includes a mapped group address. If the join request does not include a mapped group address, boundary routing element can be configured to perform normal join request processing of the join request. If the join request includes a mapped group address, the boundary routing element can be configured to generate a corresponding source address using the mapped group address. The boundary routing element can also be configured to perform alternative join request processing as if the join request were an SSM join request that specified both a source address and a multicast group address. | 02-20-2014 |
20140059187 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POLICY BASED FIBRE CHANNEL ZONING FOR VIRTUALIZED AND STATELESS COMPUTING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes connecting one or more storage arrays to a switch; connecting one or more servers to the switch; creating a virtual storage area network between the one or more storage arrays and the switch; creating a service profile for a zoning configuration; and associating at least one of the one or more servers to the service profile for the zoning configuration. In more specific examples, the method can include configuring virtual host bus adapters for the service profile; configuring parameters for each of the virtual host bus adapters; and associating a target port on one of the one or more storage arrays with a specific one of the virtual host bus adapters. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059188 | LOCATION-AWARE CONFIGURATION - A networking device may operate according to a first configuration profile adapted to cause the device to conform to restrictions applicable within a plurality of different locations. The networking device may obtain a second, location-aware configuration profile, which may include restrictions applicable to the location where the device is deployed. The second, location-aware configuration profile may be provided by a location-aware configuration service responsive to a request from the device. The service may determine a location of the device from the request. The service may identify restrictions applicable within the region the device is located. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059189 | IMPLEMENTATION OF NETWORK DEVICE COMPONENTS IN NETWORK DEVICES - A network device includes an execution engine having an implementation of a network device component to process data received by the network device, and a compiler to dynamically generate the implementation of the network device component through compilation of a general representation using network device data for compiler optimization. | 02-27-2014 |
20140068021 | CONFIGURING CLIENT SERVICES - Techniques for managing content of a virtual workspace include receiving a request from a remote client for client-configuration settings, the remote client associated with a particular user; identifying a set of client-specific attributes associated with the remote client; identifying a set of user-specific attributes associated with the particular user; determining client-configuration settings for the remote client based at least in part on the identified client-specific attributes and the identified user-specific attributes; and transmitting the determined client-configuration settings to the remote client. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068022 | DEPLOYED APPLICATION FACTORY RESET - A method and apparatus for integrating a converged infrastructure platform in a data center is provided. The described apparatus configures the physical and virtual resources that run on the converged infrastructure to communicate with the rest of the data center. The described apparatus further enables a system administrator to rollback configurations of the physical and virtual resources of the converged infrastructure to restore the converged infrastructure to a factory state. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068023 | EMBEDDED THIN DHCP FOR WI-FI DIRECT TO PROVIDE AN IP ADDRESS DURING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - An embedded thin DHCP mechanism may issue an IP address in one or two frames that a P2P group owner (GO) transmits to a client during connection establishment. In particular, the IP address may generally comprise an IPv4 address having four octets, wherein the first two octets are hardcoded, the third octet is derived from a physical address of the GO, and the GO passes the fourth octet to the client during connection establishment. The GO may pass the fourth octet to the client in a frame mandatory to connection establishment or include an attribute in the mandatory frame to specify a subsequent frame that will contain the fourth octet. In response to the client receiving the fourth octet, the client may then generate the complete IP address. Additionally, the embedded thin DHCP mechanism may be suitably modified for use with Internet Connection Sharing or IPv6 architectures. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068024 | Transaction Based Server Configuration Management System and Method Therefor - A request to perform a system configuration operation at an information handling system is received at a service processor included at the information handling system. The service processor determines that the configuration operation completed successfully and prepares an abstraction of the system configuration operation that can be used to replicate the system configuration operation at another information handling system. The abstraction is provided to a coordinating processor. The coordinating processor generates an identifier that uniquely identifies the abstraction and provides the identifier to the service processor. The service processor stores the identifier. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068025 | Method and Node For Automatically Exchanging Network Service Provider Information - A method is provided for automatically exchanging network service provider information between two sets of network service providers. The method comprises configuring at least one address of a proxy function of a second set of network service providers for a proxy function of a first set of network service providers; sending network service provider information of the first set of network service providers to the proxy function of the second set of network service providers with the at least one address of the proxy function of the second set of network service providers; and receiving network service provider information of the second set of network service providers from the proxy function of the second set of network service providers. The network service provider information includes information for addressing the network service provider and ID of service provided by the network service provider. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068026 | SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING SERVER USING PRE-RECORDED CONFIGURATION SCRIPT AND METHOD THEREOF - A system for automatically configuring a server using a pre-recorded configuration script and a method thereof are provided. After transmitting an installation configuration frame displayed by a server from a controller to an operating device when the server configures a target program, the operating device sends interaction data corresponding to a graphic feature prerecorded in a configuration script from the operating device to the controller when the installation configuration frame matches to the graphic feature. The controller provides the interaction data to the target program being configured so that the configuration of the target program automatically enters the next stage. The system and the method can finish configuring a server automatically, and can achieve the effect of quickly configuring a lot of servers of the same type. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068027 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Various embodiments of methods and systems for establishing communication over a wireless communication network between a master device and a partial function device. The master device and partial function device can use a separate communication channel during setup or configuration for communicating over the wireless communication network. The separate communication channel can be, for example, an audio-based channel or optical-based channel. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068028 | NETWORK CONNECTING METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A first electronic device transmits first configuration information of the first electronic device collected by a tamper-resistant chip mounted thereon and approved by a third-party device to a second electronic device over a short-distance network. The second electronic device transmits second configuration information of the second electronic device collected by a tamper-resistant chip mounted thereon and approved by the third-party device to the first electronic device over the short-distance network. The first electronic device transmits the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the second electronic device over a network. The second electronic device controls connection between the first electronic device and the second electronic device over the network based on the first configuration information and the second configuration information received from the first electronic device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068029 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION DECISION DEVICE AND IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION DECISION METHOD - An information processing system has a plurality of information processing units. The information processing system includes: an information collector configured to collect device identification information assigned to each of the information processing units; a storage configured to store history information indicating whether each piece of the device identification information collected by the information collector has been used as system identification information of the information processing system; and a decision unit configured to determine the system identification information from the device identification information collected by the information collector, according to the history information stored in the storage and the device identification information collected by the information collector. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068030 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY APPLYING ACCESS CONTROL POLICIES BASED ON DEVICE TYPES OF NETWORKED COMPUTING DEVICES - Techniques for managing access control policies are described herein. According to one embodiment, access control policies (ACPs) and access control rules (ACRs) are downloaded from a management server to a network access device (NAD) over the Internet, where the network access device is one of a plurality of network access devices managed by the management server over the Internet. In response to a request from a network client device for entering a network, a device type of the network client device is detected and an ACP identifier is determined based on the device type using the ACRs An ACP is selected from the ACPs based on the ACP identifier and enforced against the network client device. At least the selected ACP is reported to the management server to distribute the selected ACP to other network access devices. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068031 | Virtual Service Delivery Platform - A system, computer-implemented method and a computer-readable medium for accessing content on a plurality of computing devices from a plurality of independent frameworks. The system includes a virtual backend service (VBS) platform. A plurality of independent frameworks hosted on the VBS platform, where each independent framework is configured to provide access to an independent set of applications that provide a service over a network. The system also includes a configuration module for configuring each computing device in the plurality of computing devices to access the set of applications particular to the independent framework, wherein the configuring dynamically switches access of each computing device between the independent frameworks, and access the service from each framework by the configured computing device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140074995 | FACILITATION OF CONNECTIVITY AND CONTENT MANAGEMENT IN MOBILE ENVIRONMENTS - Connectivity and/or content management in mobile networks is provided. Information associated with a mobile device of a plurality of mobile devices is determined. In various embodiments, the information can be current or past usage or travel pattern information for the mobile device. The mobile device is configured in association with delivery of content. The configuration is based, at least, on the information associated with the mobile device. The mobile device is configured to request accelerated content delivery if the mobile device is located within a good coverage area, and to request connection re-establishment priority if the mobile device is approaching or located within a poor coverage area or a handoff area. | 03-13-2014 |
20140082155 | USER INTERFACE WITH CONFIGURATION, REGISTRATION, AND RUNTIME SELECTION OF VIEWS - A method, system and computer program product for providing a configurable user interface comprises receiving, by a server computer, a request for information to be rendered in a user interface; and in response to the request, sending, by the server computer, the information to be rendered and an identifier related to one of a plurality of user interface components. Also, in response to the request, the server computer sends a registry of the plurality of user interface components, wherein the registry comprises a respective entry for each of the plurality of user interface components. More particularly, the respective entry for a particular one of the plurality of user interface components comprises: a) a location of a configuration associated with the particular one user interface component; and b) a plurality of attributes and corresponding attribute values associated with the particular one user interface component. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082156 | MULTI-REDUNDANT SWITCHABLE PROCESS POOLING FOR CLOUD IT SERVICES DELIVERY - A system, apparatus, method, and computer program product for providing multi-redundant switchable process pooling cloud IT service delivery with one or more containers are disclosed. The containers comprise one or more processes that are configured to provide the at least one service; one or more adapters that are configured to connect the one or more processes to one or more appliances, applications, and other services that are required to provide the at least one service; a container specification that identifies the one or more appliances, applications, and other services that are required to provide the at least one service; and one or more configuration scripts that, when executed by the processor, are configured to connect the one or more processes to the one or more appliances, application, and other services identified by the container specification utilizing the one or more adapters. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082157 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PERMITTING ENTRY INTO A DEFINED MODE BY DISTRIBUTED CLIENT-SIDE SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS - A system and method for permitting entry into a defined operational mode of a software application on a selective basis. To enter the limited-access mode, action must be taken at both a server and a client device. The client device stores a software application that is configured with inactive functionality for entering the predefined mode in response to user input. The server is operable to provide very limited distribution of configuration settings data to activate the functionality for recognizing predefined user input and responsively entering the predefined mode. The required predefined user input is a widely-kept secret to which access is extremely limited, and is identified to users only an as-needed basis. Accordingly, access to the defined mode is limited to users (i) having a computing device that has received the configuration settings data enabling recognition of the predefined user input, and (ii) knowing and providing the predefined user input. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082158 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING NETWORK DEVICE - In a method, an apparatus and a system for configuring a network device, where the method includes: obtaining, by a configuration server, attribute information of a new device; and delivering, by the configuration server, configuration information of the new device, where the configuration information of the new device is determined according to the attribute information, to the new device, so that the new device performs device configuration according to the configuration information. A configuration server, a new device, an uplink device and a device configuration system are provided. The technical solutions of the present invention not only have network interoperability, but also greatly simplify IPV6 network deployment, thus reducing network configuration costs. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082159 | PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK CONNECTIVITY STATUS - The embodiments disclosed herein provide a system, apparatus, and method for managing requests in a peer-to-peer network. A processor determines whether to reduce an amount of checks for connectivity for the device in the peer-to-peer network in response to a device being in the peer-to-peer network. The processor configures the device to send a message indicating a status of the device to a number of other devices in the peer-to-peer network without receiving a request for the status of the device in response to a determination to reduce the amount of checks for connectivity for the device in the peer-to-peer network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082160 | DEPLOYMENT OF A DRIVER OR AN APPLICATION ON A CLIENT DEVICE HAVING A WRITE-FILTER - The deployment of a driver or an application on a client device having a write-filter is described. A deployment configuration file is obtained, wherein the deployment configuration file includes a plurality of deployment entries each having information for deployment of one of a driver and an application. A first deployment entry is retrieved from the deployment configuration file, and the deployment configuration file is modified to remove the first deployment entry from the deployment configuration file. The modified deployment configuration file is stored in a location of a memory of the client device that is exempt from a write-filter restriction, wherein the write-filter restriction prohibits a file stored on the client device with the write-filter enabled from persisting across a reboot of the client device. The one of the driver and the application of the first deployment entry is then deployed on the client device while the write-filter is disabled. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082161 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING BOOTSTRAP MESSAGE - The present invention discloses a method and a device for transferring a bootstrap message, and relates to the field of communications. The invention is intended to solve a problem in the prior art that a public network tunnel needs to be separately created for a bootstrap message, which consumes a tunnel resource. A technical solution provided in an embodiment of the present invention includes: receiving, by a first provider edge router, a bootstrap message sent by a bootstrap router; sending, by the first provider edge router, to a second provider edge router, a border gateway protocol BGP message including message content of the bootstrap message, so that after receiving the BGP message, the second provider edge router sends, to a customer edge router, the message content included in the BGP message. The embodiments of the present invention are applicable to a next generation multicast virtual private network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082162 | Method and arrangement for Network QoS - A method and intermediate node for service specific configuration of Quality of Service (QoS), preferably end-to-end QoS, in a data network by establishing and enforcing a service specific QoS configuration for a given service supported by a client device. The client device is adapted to be connected to a data network including a service management server and the intermediate node. The intermediate node receives from the service management server, a message including a service configuration for the given service. The service configuration includes information regarding the service specific QoS configuration. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082163 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - An objective of the present invention is to determine a function of each communication apparatus with few steps. A first communication apparatus ( | 03-20-2014 |
20140095674 | Self-Management of Request-Centric Systems - Methods, systems, and computer-readable storage media for configuring a request-centric system. Implementations include actions of monitoring operation of the request-centric system to determine a workload of the request-centric system, wherein the workload includes a plurality of requests, determining a mapping function based on a utility function, the workload and a configuration, the mapping function mapping the workload and the configuration into the utility function, determining an optimal configuration based on the mapping function, the optimal configuration allocating resources of the request-centric system to achieve one or more predefined goals, and applying the optimal configuration to the request-centric system. | 04-03-2014 |
20140095675 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION AND REPORTING WITH DIVERSE TRAFFIC - A network node receiving a preference for a power optimized configuration for a user equipment (UE) can in response change the UE's minimization of drive test (MDT) configuration to conserve UE power. For example, this change can be from immediate reporting of MDT measurements to connected mode logging MDT measurements or no reporting of MDT measurements; or to a longer interval for reporting them, or to drop the reporting of available location information with MDT measurements. Other teachings have actions by the UE, autonomous of the network, to conserve power. A UE receiving a MDT configuration having an MDT measurement reporting or logging interval, and also one or both of a discontinuous reception or paging configuration having a DRX/paging interval can adapt the MDT configuration autonomously of the network to conserve its battery power. For example, the UE can change the MDT measurement reporting/logging interval to be equal to or shorter than the DRX/paging interval, or it can ignore or reject the MDT configuration. | 04-03-2014 |
20140095676 | Elastic Packaging of Application Configuration - Elastic packaging of application configuration may include selecting at least one configurable attribute from an application model hierarchy, generating at least one formula for the selected at least one configurable attribute, the at least one formula including interface parameters, and tag the generated at least one formula with the selected at least one configurable attribute in an application deployment package, the application deployment package including an application to be deployed on a cloud computer. | 04-03-2014 |
20140095677 | CONFIGURATION COMMAND TEMPLATE CREATION ASSISTANT USING CROSS-MODEL ANALYSIS TO IDENTIFY COMMON SYNTAX AND SEMANTICS - In one embodiment, a computer program product for creating a configuration template for a set of devices includes a computer readable storage medium having computer readable program code embodied therewith, the computer readable program code including computer readable program code configured for determining command information for a plurality of devices, computer readable program code configured for identifying a command structure from the command information which is common to a set of devices from the plurality of devices, and computer readable program code configured for associating the set of devices to a common configuration template. In another embodiment, a method for creating a configuration template for a set of devices includes determining command information for a plurality of devices, identifying a command structure from the command information which is common to a set of devices from the plurality of devices, and associating the set of devices to a common configuration template. | 04-03-2014 |
20140095678 | Verification of Configuration Information in BGP VPNs - Described are mechanisms for verifying configuration information in 2547 BGP VPNs. An originating PE generates a first knowledge digest encoding first configuration information associated with a current set of information advertised for a VRF. The originating PE also generates a second knowledge digest encoding second configuration information associated with cumulative information advertised for the VRF. The originating PE is capable of receiving a message from a user PE, the message including a third knowledge digest encoding third configuration information related to the user VRF. The originating PE is capable of comparing the first knowledge digest to the third knowledge digest and producing a first indication if the third configuration information encoded in the third knowledge digest is not a subset of the first configuration information encoded in the first knowledge digest. | 04-03-2014 |
20140108623 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING PLAYBACK OF STREAMING DIGITAL CONTENT - One embodiment of the present invention sets forth a technique for managing playback of digital content on two or more different playback devices. A playback device designated as a controller is associated with a playback device designated as a playback target. Association is implemented via a local network discovery protocol. The controller issues commands to the target, which then streams digital content directly from a content server. The controller is able to separately stream related digital content for independent, but synchronized playback. Server mediated operations, such as device activation and application installation, are advantageously enabled by explicit association between the controller and the target. | 04-17-2014 |
20140108624 | OVERLAY NETWORK - An overlay network is contemplated. The overlay network may be characterized as supporting, or at least virtually supporting, separate networks over a common infrastructure. The common infrastructure may be comprised of a plurality of routers or other devices configured to facilitate directing messages according to various addressing requirements. The use of the separate networks may be dictated according to the particular addressing requirements of each message desired for transport. | 04-17-2014 |
20140108625 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION POLICY EXTRACTION - A method for configuration policy extraction for an organization having a plurality of composite configuration items may include calculating distances in a configuration space between the composite configuration items. The method may also include clustering the composite configuration items into one or more dusters based on the calculated distances. The method may further include identifying configuration patterns in one or more of the clusters, and extracting at least one configuration policy based on the identified configuration patterns. A non-transitory computer readable medium and a system for configuration policy extraction for an organization having a plurality of composite configuration items are also disclosed. | 04-17-2014 |
20140115126 | SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING AND VERIFYING OPEN PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - In a network environment in which pieces of heterogeneous network equipment interwork, a system receives a request including configuration information regarding a network operation with respect to at least one piece of a network equipment. The system verifies whether the request is in conflict with a network configuration and property managed by the system, and when an error does not occur according to verification results, the system transfers the verification results including configuration information to the network equipment. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115127 | Method and Apparatus for Providing a Synthetic System - A method and apparatus of providing a configurable computer system capable of being modeled are disclosed. The system, in one embodiment, includes a configurable component and a clock distributor. The configurable component includes multiple programmable devices arranged in a predefined configuration. The predefined configuration, for example, is a cubical shape having multiple neighboring nodes. The configurable component is capable of being modeled in accordance with policies from a system program for data transmission. The clock distributor further includes a first clock element, which provides long-term accuracy, and a second clock element, which provides short-term accuracy. | 04-24-2014 |
20140122666 | Automatic Deployment, Configuration, and Lifecycle Management of Applications and Infrastructure Components - Apparatuses, computer readable media, methods, and systems are described for automatic deployment of applications and infrastructure components, which may include processing selection of an operating system, processing selection of a stack, creating a stencil based on the operating system and the stack, and publishing the stencil. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122667 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus includes a physical interface, a memory, and a communication controller. The physical interface communicates with any of multiple types of networks. The memory stores network setting information corresponding to each of the multiple types of networks. The communication controller controls, when information unique to a particular type of network, among the multiple types of networks, is obtained via the physical interface, communication of the physical interface on the basis of the network setting information corresponding to the particular type of network. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122668 | METHOD AND A CONTROLLER DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A method for configuring network elements of a software-defined network on the basis of relation data items and action policy rules is presented. Each relation data item expresses two entities and their relationship and each action policy rule expresses an event and an action to be carried out in response to the event. The method comprises deriving ( | 05-01-2014 |
20140122669 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING THE IMPACT OF CHANGES IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - The impact of device configuration changes on operational issues and policy compliance in a computer network can be discerned from a visual data presentation that jointly shows representations of changes, issues, and policy compliance in a common view for a group of network devices. Configuration information is collected from devices in the computer network and processed to determine whether a change has occurred in a configuration of any of the devices, whether any operational issues exist for each of the devices, and whether any of the devices are not in compliance with any applicable operational policies. A display device displays the visual data presentation to allow an operator to see trends and relationships between device configuration changes and operational issues and incidents of policy non-compliance. The visual data presentation can be depicted as a graphical timeline view, a network topology view, or a table view of the information. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122670 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT - A management unit comprising a processor, the management unit is configured to be in communication with at least one management system, the at least one management system configured to be in communication with at least one endpoint machine in an environment of multiple endpoint machines, the processor is configured to: assign for the at least one management system a dynamic group of endpoint machines; execute a relevant adaptor on the management system according to the assigned dynamic group; and apply to the dynamic group of endpoint machines, by the executed adaptor, policy rules relevant to the dynamic group of endpoint machines. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122671 | Method for Assigning Logical Addresses to the Connection Ports of Devices of a Server Cluster, and Corresponding Computer Program and Server Cluster - A method and system for assigning logical addresses to connection ports of devices of a server cluster. The method includes defining a logical addressing policy in respect of said connection ports of devices of the cluster; based on a logical distribution of the devices of the cluster in the data transmission network, a geographic distribution, and a hardware definition of the devices of the cluster, initialising a server cluster administration database; according to the logical addressing policy, assigning logical addresses to the connection ports of devices of the server cluster; and saving the logical addresses assigned in the server cluster administration database. The system includes an automatic logical address allocator configured to perform these functions based on execution settings of a structured description file of the logical addressing policy and the content of a previously initialised administration database. | 05-01-2014 |
20140129685 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROPAGATING VIRTUALIZATION AWARENESS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method provided in one example embodiment includes a first network device receiving a request comprising a name of a port profile to be subscribed to by a virtual interface (“VIF”). For the first subscribing to the port profile, the first network device notifies a second network device concerning use of the port profile and the second network device applies a network configuration in connection with the notifying. The first network device may receive a removal request identifying a port profile to be unsubscribed from by a VIF. For the last VIF unsubscribing from the identified port profile, the first network device notifies the second network device concerning the unsubscription and the second network device applies a new network configuration in connection with the unsubscription notification. In one embodiment, the second network device comprises a virtualization profile corresponding to the port profile preconfigured thereon for specifying the network configuration. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129686 | MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE CONFIGURED TO FILTER AND DETECT APPLICATION PROFILES, A METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THE SAME AND AN EXTERNAL SOURCE FOR DELIVERING HIERARCHICAL FILTERED APPLICATION PROFILES TO MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICES - A mobile computing device, a method of operating thereof, a method of manufacturing and an external source for dynamic profile settings for mobile computing devices. In one embodiment, the mobile computing device includes: (1) a settings reservoir configured to store dynamic sets of profile settings and static set of profile settings for the computing device and (2) a profile generator configured to generate coalesced sets of profile settings for applications on the computing device based on the dynamic sets of profiles and the static set of profiles. | 05-08-2014 |
20140143389 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREATING OR RECONFIGURING A VIRTUAL SERVER IMAGE FOR CLOUD DEPLOYMENT - A system and method to convert a software application, such as a Java application into a virtual server image that is suitable for cloud deployment. In accordance with an embodiment, the system and method allows for building a hypervisor appliance containing a virtual machine running an application. In particular, the hypervisor appliance can be compatible with any hypervisor for server virtualization and the application virtual machine can be a Java Virtual Machine (JVM). | 05-22-2014 |
20140149559 | VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) SYSTEM UTILIZING CONFIGURATION MESSAGE INCLUDING VPN CHARACTER CONFIGURATION STRING - A virtual private network (VPN) system may include a VPN server configured to generate a configuration message comprising a VPN character configuration string, and a VPN client device configured to receive the configuration message and initiate a VPN connection with the VPN server over a communications network based upon the VPN character configuration string. The VPN server may be configured to provide the configuration message to the VPN client device in a non-human-readable form, and the VPN client device may be configured to initiate the VPN connection without user entry of VPN configuration data. | 05-29-2014 |
20140156811 | Object Oriented Networks - An approach is provided in which a system creates a network application model that includes network policy objects and connection rules corresponding to sending data between the network policy objects. The system converts the network application model to network configuration information, which links the network policy objects to the connection rules. In turn, a network control plane is configured based upon the network configuration information to map the network application model to a physical infrastructure. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156812 | CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATION SETTINGS FOR A NETWORK APPLIANCE - Methods and systems for temporarily configuring a network appliance in accordance with externally provided customized configuration settings are provided. According to one embodiment, a network appliance may operate in one of multiple configuration modes, including an internal configuration mode and an external configuration mode. When operating in the internal configuration mode, the network appliance loads and runs configuration settings from a memory internal to the network appliance. When operating in the external configuration mode, the network appliance loads and runs configuration settings from an external storage device coupled to an interface of the network appliance. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156813 | APPLICATION MIGRATION BETWEEN CLOUDS - Embodiments described herein are directed to reinitiating an application on a target computing cloud and to evaluating potential target cloud computing systems. In one scenario, a computing system receives an indication that identifies a target cloud for application migration. The target cloud computing system includes a specified set of hardware and/or environment specifications, associated configuration settings and an assigned rating that indicates how well the application will perform on the target cloud computing system. The computing system determines that the application is to be reconfigured for compatibility with the target cloud computing system and reconfigures some or all of the application to comply with the hardware and/or environment specifications and configuration settings of the target cloud computing system. The computing system also identifies and transfers specified portions of the application to the target cloud, and indicates that the application is to be re-instantiated using the transferred application portions. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156814 | Object Oriented Networks - An approach is provided in which a system creates a network application model that includes network policy objects and connection rules corresponding to sending data between the network policy objects. The system converts the network application model to network configuration information, which links the network policy objects to the connection rules. In turn, a network control plane is configured based upon the network configuration information to map the network application model to a physical infrastructure. | 06-05-2014 |
20140164580 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A MANAGED DEVICE USING AN IMAGE - Systems and methods of the present disclosure can facilitate managing a computing device. The computing device can be a managed device that is managed by a device management server. In some embodiments, the system includes a generation module and an interface module. The generation module may be configured to receive a site location for the computing device, identify an address of the device management server, and generate an optical representation of a configuration based on the site location and the address. The interface module may be configured to provide the optical representation to the computing device and receive a communication from the computing device, the communication corresponding to the configuration. | 06-12-2014 |
20140173059 | Device Commissioning - The disclosed subject matter may provide a system and methods for commissioning a device or appliance into a network. A processor may detect the insertion of a removable device into a data receptacle of a first device. The first device may be an appliance or a network controller. Information may be retrieved from or delivered to the removable device. The information may be information specific to the appliance, such as model number, or may be information related to the network controller. For example, information delivered from the network controller to the removable device may include a network address assignment and network protocol to be used by an appliance when the appliance communicates with the network. The removable device may be removed from the first device and inserted into a data receptacle of a second device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173060 | DEPLOYING A HARDWARE INVENTORY AS A CLOUD-COMPUTING STAMP - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for automatically configuring an inventory of hardware to interact seamlessly with a computing fabric of a data center are provided. Initially, a communicative coupling between a user device and computing units of the hardware inventory is established. The communicated coupling allows an engine running on the user device to provision the computing units with software that allows the hardware inventory to function as a fabric-computing cluster (FCC) of the data center. Provisioning involves deploying a computing fabric to the computing units, and deploying core infrastructure services to run on top of the computing fabric. The computing fabric enables the computing units to interact as a unified logical system, while the core infrastructure services represent operating-system-level components that provide underlying support of applications running on the FCC. Upon carrying out the provisioning, the components internal to the computing units of the hardware inventory are validated. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173061 | DEVICES AND METHODS SUPPORTING CONTENT DELIVERY WITH DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURABLE LOG INFORMATION - A device supporting content delivery is configured to run at least one content delivery (CD) service of a plurality of CD services. The plurality of CD services include dynamically configurable log information. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173062 | Devices And Methods Supporting Content Delivery With Delivery Services Having Dynamically Configurable Log Information - A device supporting content delivery is configured to run at least one content delivery (CD) service of a plurality of CD services. The plurality of CD services include delivery services with dynamically configurable log information. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173063 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SURROUNDING DEVICES, BASED ON TOPOLOGY - A system and method of controlling surrounding devices, based on a topology are provided. The method of controlling sub surrounding devices, which is performed by a main surrounding device, includes receiving a plurality of pieces of surrounding device information about the sub surrounding devices from a host device; receiving context information about a context of the host device from the host device; obtaining topology setting information about topology configuration standards; determining a sub surrounding device to be comprised in a topology from among the sub surrounding devices, based on the context information and the topology setting information; connecting the main surrounding device with the host device and the sub surrounding device; and controlling the sub surrounding device, based on control information received from the host device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140181274 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IP NETWORK SEMANTIC LABEL STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT - Embodiments described herein provide devices, methods, and systems for managing IPv6 and IPv4 addresses within an IP address management (IPAM) system, wherein various subnets are associated with administrator-defined names, which are semantic labels. Such semantic labels may be combined to yield the IP addresses in a user-friendly manner. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181275 | DEVICE ID ASSIGNMENT IN A SYSTEM OF DEVICES - Techniques for assigning device identifiers in a system of devices are provided. In one embodiment, a master device of the system can maintain a first configuration that specifies a set of links between a first subset of the devices, where the first configuration includes a device identifier for each device in the first subset. The master device can further generate a second configuration that specifies a set of links between a second subset of the devices, where the second configuration is based on a physical topology of the system, and where one or more devices in the second subset are unknown devices that are not associated with a device identifier in the physical topology. The master device can then assign device identifiers to the unknown devices in the second subset by comparing the first configuration with the second configuration. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181276 | WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION OF MEDIA CONTENT AND SUBSCRIPTION CONTENT - Arrangements are provided which use a host computer to configure a wireless portable device's network connection parameters. The radio on the portable device may be used to help locate nearby accessible wireless networks. Once a synchronization relationship between the portable device and a media library on a host computer is established, periodically updated content, such as podcasts, may be discovered and subscribed to using software on the host computer, and the content synchronized with the host computer. A portable device may manage episodic content, such as podcasts, using the device's own wireless connection, and may further send such content to other portable devices. A central user profile may be set up on a web server to synchronize multiple wireless or wired devices. | 06-26-2014 |
20140189074 | SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKING GATEWAY - A device determines a network attribute associated with a first network, transmits, to an orchestration device associated with a second network, information that identifies the network attribute, and receives, from the orchestration device, control information that specifies a routing policy, a security policy, or a load balancing policy associated with the first network. The device provisions network devices associated with the first network, based on the control information, and provides packets, associated with a traffic flow, to a network device, based on the control information. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189075 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE ("M2M") DEVICE CLIENT SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND INTERFACES - Exemplary machine-to-machine (“M2M”) device client systems, methods, and interfaces are described herein. An exemplary M2M device includes an M2M device client configured to provide 1) a platform messaging interface through which the M2M device client communicates with an M2M platform and 2) an application interface that includes a set of application program interfaces (“APIs”) through which an application installed on the M2M device interfaces with the M2M device client. The set of APIs may include one or more of the exemplary APIs and/or API function calls described herein. Corresponding systems, methods, and interfaces are also described. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189076 | CONFIGURATION OF COMPUTER SYSTEMS VIA SIMPLE OBJECT ACCESS PROTOCOL CONNECTIONS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a computer system, method, and computer program product for configuring a computer system. According to one aspect of the present invention, a user can create one or more configuration scripts to perform an automated configuration task on a remote managed computer system and transmit the configuration scripts via a simple object access protocol (SOAP) connection. A user of the remote managed computer system can choose to perform actions of the configuration task on an action-by-action basis by executing one or more of the configuration scripts. The creator of the configuration scripts need not have authority (e.g., need not have administrative privileges) to execute the configuration scripts on the managed computer system. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189077 | APPLICATION SERVICE LOCATION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A system for locating and managing application services according to one embodiment includes a location determination circuit configured to determine a physical location of an associated server; and a service location management (SLM) agent associated with the server. The SLM agent is configured to maintain a registry of service applications provided by the server and to transmit multicast messages over a data center network. The multicast messages are configured to advertise: an identification (ID) of the server; the service applications provided by the server; and the physical location of the server. | 07-03-2014 |
20140195654 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONFIGURING A MOBILE WIRELESS HOTSPOT - Example method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed for configuring a mobile wireless hotspot in a wireless network. Example embodiments of the invention include a method comprising: transmitting, by a user's mobile hotspot device, to a cloud server, a message including a description of user specific device connectivity configurations to enable a wireless device, to automatically connect to the mobile hotspot device as a tethered wireless device; and receiving from the user's wireless device a connection request to become a tethered wireless device based on the description of user specific device connectivity configurations that the user's wireless device has received from the cloud server. | 07-10-2014 |
20140195655 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which a NATed IP address of a home base station is communicated to the home base station by a home base station gateway or a mobility management entity. In one embodiment, the gateway or the mobility management entity receives the NATed IP address from a security gateway that is used to establish a secure tunnel with the home base station through an IP network. | 07-10-2014 |
20140201338 | CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK ENTITIES USING FIRMWARE - A method includes receiving firmware at a network entity and determining whether the network entity is to operate as a controlling Fiber Channel forwarder based on the firmware. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201339 | METHOD OF CONDITIONING COMMUNICATION NETWORK DATA RELATING TO A DISTRIBUTION OF NETWORK ENTITIES ACROSS A SPACE - A method and apparatus for conditioning communication network data relating to a distribution of network entities across a space, for subsequent processing of the network data, is disclosed. The method comprises dividing the space into a grid comprising a plurality of discrete cells, so that each cell comprises a unique location within the space. The network data relating to each entity is subsequently processed using a processor to assign the network entity to a cell in dependence of the location of the entity within the space, relative to the cells. Following the discretisation of network entities to a particular cell, the number of entities within the cells is determined. The number of entities associated with the cells is then separately compared with the number of entities within each cell of a respective cell distribution using the processor, to determine the cell maxima of each distribution which comprises the most entities. The location of the cell maxima within the grid is subsequently output to a processor for subsequent processing of the network data, for monitoring of the communication network. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT OF HOME NETWORK DEVICES - Embodiments of a method and system for automatically installing and managing consumer devices in a home network environment are described. A system implements automated configuration and maintenance of devices and their peripherals that connect to the home network, in particular the establishment of a distributed system that serves as a service platform which facilitates automated discovery and initial and ongoing deployment of a home networks and the devices that may interact with or connect to their network automatically or through manual means. An embodiment is directed to a distributed system and method for facilitated automatic configuration, maintenance, and diagnostics of a local area network that in parallel provides for the interoperability of connected intelligent independent computing devices using physical layer, network layer and application layer programmatic interfaces. This distributed system provides a generalized aggregated interface that is a programmatic resource for representing a continuous and historic reference of a local network and connected devices. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201341 | AUTOMATIC CONNECTIVITY ANALYSIS FOR A DICOM NETWORK - A method, a computer program product, a system and a connectivity analyzer are disclosed for determining available communication functionalities during the configuration of a DICOM node in a DICOM network. According to an embodiment of the invention the available communication functionalities are registered automatically by way of test communication requests and analysis of the test communication responses. Following the analysis the result containing the detected communication functionalities can be provided automatically. The result is preferably provided in the configuration phase and already prior to the entry into operation of the respective DICOM node. | 07-17-2014 |
20140207917 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING THE CONFIGURATION OF A NETWORK DEVICE - A system, apparatus and method are provided for dynamically updating a configuration of a network device when relevant sources and destinations of network traffic are added, removed or migrated in a network. A configuration of a network device is associated with a set of network addresses representing a set of relevant sources and destinations of network traffic. The set is dynamic in that the membership of the set can change over time to include different network addresses as the set of relevant sources and destinations of network traffic changes over time. One or more data sources are monitored to obtain the network addresses for the set of relevant sources and destinations and to determine if the membership of the set has changed. When a change is detected, the configuration of the network device is updated on the network device to reflect the network addresses that are currently in the set. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207918 | INSTANCE HOST CONFIGURATION - Methods and apparatus for instance host configuration are disclosed. A system includes a plurality of instance hosts configurable for resource instances of a network-accessible service, and control servers to manage remote configuration of the instance hosts. In response to an instance configuration request from a client, a selected control server transmits, to a selected instance host, a sequence of one or more commands. The selected instance host instantiates a remote command executor. The remote command executor initiates configuration operations corresponding to the command sequence, and terminates. The selected control server provides a response to the instance configuration request, based at least in part on results of the operations initiated by the executor. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207919 | INSTANCE CONFIGURATION ON REMOTE PLATFORMS - Methods and apparatus for instance configuration on remote platforms are disclosed. A storage medium comprises program instructions to implement a control server configured to, in response to an instance configuration request directed to a network-accessible service implemented using resource instances whose configuration is managed from within the provider network, determine whether configuration operations corresponding to the request are to be performed at a remote platform external to the provider network. In response to determining that configuration operations are to be performed at a remote platform, the control server issues commands to a selected remote platform; otherwise, it issues commands to an instance host of the provider network. Based on results of the commands, the control server provides a response to the request. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207920 | VIRTUAL SERVER MIGRATION PLAN MAKING METHOD AND SYSTEM - The management software of virtual servers which collects the information on the configuration change conducted on the physical server, and simulates the state of the physical server after the configuration change is conducted. Thereafter; the simulated information is input to the compatibility check function to confirm the compatibility of the virtual server operation to the physical server changed in the configuration, and used for making the migration plan. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207921 | COMPUTER SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREFOR - Provided is a computer system that requires only a server administrator for construction thereof arid configuration change thereof. A management server acquires connection destination interface identifiers set for external apparatuses, stores the connection destination interface identifiers into a first table, acquires specifications of server computers and identifiers of the server computers, stores the specifications and the identifiers into a second table, acquires specifications of external apparatuses, stores the specifications into the first table, receives a profile to be deployed onto one of the server computers, acquires a server computer satisfying the profile from the second table, acquires an external apparatus satisfying the profile from the first table, acquires a connection destination interface identifier from the first table, and notifies the server computer acquired from the second table of the acquired interface identifier, and the server computer updates an interface identifier of an interface by the received interface identifier. | 07-24-2014 |
20140215027 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE CONFIGURATION OF SWITCHES IN VIRTUAL LINK TRUNKING ENVIRONMENTS - A system and method of determining the configuration of a network switching unit includes receiving a configuration message on a network link. The network switching unit is associated with a first switch ID and belongs to a domain associated with a first domain ID. The system and method further includes identifying a second domain ID and a second switch ID based on at least information associated with the configuration message; determining whether the first domain ID and the second domain ID match; if the first domain ID and the second domain ID match, adding the network link to a first link aggregation group (LAG) associated with the second switch ID and designating the first LAG as part of an intra cluster link (ICL); and if the first domain ID and the second domain ID do not match, adding the network link to a second LAG associated with the second domain ID. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215028 | SHARED INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one implementation, a protocol for dissemination of information, such as configuration information, in a computer network is provided. The dissemination of the payload or content is separated from the dissemination of the fact that a new revision of that payload or content exists. The availability of a new revision of the payload or content is signaled prior to the transfer. Only nodes receiving the notice of existence of the new revision and requesting the new revision receive the payload or content. While the payload or content revision notifications potentially arrive at a receiving node from many different neighbors, the payload or content is only requested once by the receiving node and transmitted once over links between neighbors. This scheme may result in low end-to-end delays and in resiliency. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215029 | Information Handling System Operational Management Through Near Field Communication Device Interaction - Configuration information to configure an information handling system is obtained by sending an identifier for the information handling system to a portable information handling system, such as a mobile telephone, with a first NFC communication. The mobile telephone retrieves the configuration information, such as through a network interface, and sends the configuration information to the information handling system with a second NFC communication. Configuration information includes a variety of information, such as IP and MAC address, BIOS settings, software applications, firmware versions and end user specific settings. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215030 | Information Handling System Physical Component Inventory To Aid Operational Management Through Near Field Communication Device Interaction - NFC communications from a mobile phone to an information handling system initiates an inventory by a management controller of the information handling system. The inventory is provided to the mobile telephone with a second NFC communication so that an end user can see a visual depiction of the interior of the information handling system before opening the chassis of the system. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215031 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERCONNECTING A USER AGENT TO A CLUSTER OF SERVERS - An apparatus (CEG) for interconnecting a user agent to a cluster of servers, the apparatus comprising a first protocol agent configured to exchange first messages with said user agent according to a SIP protocol, wherein said apparatus has the role of a User Agent Server; a second protocol agent configured to exchange second messages with a selected server from among said cluster of servers according to the SIP protocol, wherein said apparatus has the role of a User Agent Client; interconnection means for relaying messages from among said first messages and said second messages between said first protocol agent and said second protocol agent; wherein said second protocol agent is further configured to terminate elasticity control messages received from said cluster of servers. | 07-31-2014 |
20140222975 | LEARNING MACHINE BASED COMPUTATION OF NETWORK JOIN TIMES - In one embodiment, techniques are shown and described relating to learning machine based computation of network join times. In particular, in one embodiment, a device computes a join time of the device to join a computer network. During joining, the device sends a configuration request to a server, and receives instructions whether to provide the join time. The device may then provide the join time to a collector in response to instructions to provide the join time. In another embodiment, a collector receives a plurality of join times from a respective plurality of nodes having one or more associated node properties. The collector may then estimate a mapping between the join times and the node properties and determines a confidence interval of the mapping. Accordingly, the collector may then determine a rate at which nodes having particular node properties report their join times based on the confidence interval. | 08-07-2014 |
20140222976 | SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING A PLURALITY OF MODULES USING A POWER/DATA BACKBONE NETWORK - A Virtual Electrical and Electronic Device Interface and Management System (VEEDIMS) support architecture is provided. In one example, the VEEDIMS support architecture includes a vehicle layer and a shop layer. The vehicle layer has a module and a controller positioned in a vehicle. The module is configured to couple to a device via an input/output (I/O) interface compatible with the device and configured to couple to the controller via a cable adapted to simultaneously carry bi-directional data and uni-directional power to the module. The shop layer is separate from the vehicle layer and has a browser configured to communicate with an HTTP server in the module and an analysis tool configured to receive and analyze event driven and time series data from the controller. | 08-07-2014 |
20140222977 | CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL IN CONTENT DELIVERY FRAMEWORK - A system has multiple service endpoints running on a plurality of devices, wherein each particular service endpoint consumes control resources specifying a configuration for the particular service endpoint. A method includes evaluating a configuration object using first external resource inputs to produce an evaluated configuration object; generating a template, the generating using the evaluated configuration object and second external resource inputs; rendering the template with a set of actual parameter values to produce a localized control resource, the rendering using third external resource inputs; and providing the localized control resource to at least one service endpoint in the system. | 08-07-2014 |
20140222978 | ROLE BASED ROUTER FUNCTIONALITY - Configuration of firewall functionality and/or determining positioning for routers operating within a multi-router network is contemplated. The firewall functionality configured for one or more of the routers may be based router positioning within the multi-router network. The firewall functionality may be automatically selected according to the router positioning in order to facilitate dynamic and/or adaptive router configuring. | 08-07-2014 |
20140237087 | SERVICE POOL FOR MULTI-TENANT APPLICATIONS - A processing device receives a request from a client for a specific service. Responsive to determining that the specific service is not running, the processing device converts a previously instantiated generic service into the specific service. To perform the conversion, the processing device assigns the generic service from a service pool for the specific service and renames the generic service based on a name of the specific service. The processing device additionally queries a directory service for specific service logic associated with the specific service. The processing device receives at least one of the specific service logic or a reference to the specific service logic from the directory service, and updates the generic service to include at least one of the specific service logic or the reference to the specific service logic. | 08-21-2014 |
20140237088 | MANAGING IMAGING OF COMPUTING DEVICES - Systems and methods for managing imaging of computing devices are provided. A device image manager enables selection of one or more device images on the basis of various computing device criteria. The device image manager may obtain hardware qualification information associated with one or more device images, and obtain device configuration information associated with a computing device. The device image manager may select a set of appropriate device images for the computing device based on the hardware qualification information, device configuration information, or various device image selection criteria. | 08-21-2014 |
20140244808 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VIRTUAL NETWORK OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES IN BROADBAND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Systems and methods are provided for more efficient and robust virtual network provision and operating capabilities and functionality. Multiple network management domains (NMDs) are configured within a network management system (NMS), wherein each NMD is associated with a virtual communications network (VCN) provisioned within a host communications network (HCN). A plurality of outroute partitions and inroute partitions are respectively configured via outroute and inroute network elements of the HCN, wherein each outroute/inroute partition supports respective levels of outroute/inroute capacity. The outroute partitions and inroute partitions are respectively allocated VCNs to provide fixed levels of outroute/inroute capacity to the respective VCNs. Operator classifications are configured within the NMD for specifying respective sets of network operator capabilities and permissions allocated respective operators of the respective VCNs. Each operator classification comprises predetermined level of configuration control, operational/management control, monitoring capabilities, and troubleshooting/maintenance capabilities allocated to the network operators assigned to the respective classification. | 08-28-2014 |
20140244809 | SERVICE CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention discloses a service configuration method and apparatus, relating to the field of communication network technologies. The method includes: parsing a received service request to obtain a service identifier; determining, according to a mapping relationship between the service identifier and an invoked service or a relationship between the service identifier and an invoked service interface, a target service or a target service interface corresponding to the service identifier; converting a format of the service request into a format of the target service or a format of the target service interface according to a rule of conversion between a service and the invoked service or the invoked service interface; and forwarding the service request in the converted format to the target service or the target service interface. The solutions provided in embodiments of the present invention can reduce redundant data in a system and improve system processing performance. | 08-28-2014 |
20140250213 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device including a registration unit that registers an IP address of the communication device and a method information including a first method information indicating a first setting method for setting a dynamic IP address and a second method information indicating a second setting method for setting a static IP address. The registration unit includes a change unit that changes registered contents of a memory in accordance with a user's instruction. When the first method information and a first IP address are registered in the memory, the change unit does not change the method information in the memory from the first method information to the second method information in a case where a method change instruction for changing the first setting method to the second setting method is given by the user under a state where the first IP address has not been changed to another IP address. | 09-04-2014 |
20140250214 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, PROGRAM-COOPERATIVE METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A computer system comprises at least one computer having at least one input-output interface that is connectable to at least one external device, at least one storage apparatus having at least one storage area, and a management computer having a computer management part and a storage management part. The computer management part includes a configuration information acquisition part, an allocation control part, and a storage management cooperation part. The allocation control part outputs, as at least one allocation candidate, at least one input-output interface connected to the at least one storage apparatus among the at least one input-output interface of a new computer, and receives at least one input-output interface selected by a user. The storage management part makes it possible to access, from the at least one input-output interface of which the storage management part is notified, the at least one storage area. | 09-04-2014 |
20140258478 | Distributed Functionality Across Multiple Network Devices - According to one embodiment, a method comprises an operation of identifying a plurality of network devices, and detecting a presence of firewall processing functionality in a subset of the network devices. At least one of the network devices not in the firewall subset is configured to forward packets to a network device of the subset for firewall processing. | 09-11-2014 |
20140258479 | MANAGING CONFIGURATION UPDATES - Approaches are described for managing configuration information updates, or other information in a data center, shared resource environment, or other such electronic environment. A management component is provided that can manage distribution of configuration information, operating system (OS) images, authentication data, or other such information for host machines, servers, or other such devices in a network environment. The management component can further perform a number of actions when deploying configuration information updates, such as performing one or more checks to verify the health of a target switch, deactivating the target switch, shifting traffic to and from the target switch, updating a current configuration of the target switch, verifying the target switch's health after the configuration changes, bringing the target switch back in service, among others. | 09-11-2014 |
20140280790 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHARING A SINGLE FIRMWARE IMAGE IN A CHASSIS CONFIGURED TO RECEIVE A PLURALITY OF MODULAR INFORMATION HANDLING SYSTEMS - In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a system may include a chassis configured to receive a plurality of modular information handling systems, wherein each modular information handling system comprises a remote access controller and a management controller disposed in the chassis. The management controller may be configured to be communicatively coupled to one or more remote access controllers of the one or more modular information handling systems received in the chassis and further configured to share a single remote access controller firmware image such that each of the one or more remote access controllers loads and executes the single remote access controller firmware image. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280791 | DYNAMIC PORT TYPE DETECTION - An aspect includes dynamic port type detection. A link initialization frame that includes a protocol identifier is received at a port of a switch. Based on successfully decoding the protocol identifier, the port is configured to a mode of operation compatible with the protocol identifier. A table in the switch is updated to configure one or more other ports of the switch to the mode of operation compatible with the protocol identifier. A handshake response is sent to acknowledge the successful decoding of the protocol identifier. If no handshake response is received at a server prior to expiration of a wait pulse repetition time, the server periodically transmits the link initialization frame with a different protocol identifier for an alternate mode of operation until the handshake response is received or all supported modes of operation are checked. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280792 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVICE FAILURE NOTIFICATION - A method and apparatus of a device that notifies another device of a failed device is described. In an exemplary embodiment, a network element detects that a first device is unavailable, where the network element couples the first device to the second device. In response to detecting that the first device is unavailable, the network element configures a proxy for the first device. The network element additionally receives network data that is destined for the first device, where the second device originated the network data. If the proxy can process the network data, the network element transmits a response to the second device from the proxy, where the response indicates that the first device is unavailable, where the first response includes an address of the first device. If the proxy cannot process the network data, the network element drops the network data. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280793 | CONTENT SUBSCRIPTION PACKAGE MANAGEMENT - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods and storage media are described that are associated with configuration of content subscription packages. In various embodiments, a subscription package management/selection entity (“SPM”) may provide a facility for configuring and/or managing one or more content subscription packages. The SPM may be configured to facilitate generation of subscription packages using one or more tiers. The SPM may be configured to communicate with a content consumption device to provide subscription package information for consumption by a content consumer. The SPM may also be configured to facilitate a consumer in selecting and/or purchasing one or more content subscription packages. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280794 | DEVICE RESOURCE MANAGEMENT BASED ON CONTEXTUAL PLANNING - Technologies for resource management include a mobile computing device configured to communicate with a resource database server. The mobile computing device determines a future context and sends a request to the server for resource information associated with a location defined by the future context. The server determines resources located at the location and sends the requested resource information to the mobile computing device. The mobile computing device automatically configures itself to use the resources. The mobile computing device may automatically download and configure device drivers for the resources. The resources may include printers, displays, and network connections. The resource information may be provided by third-party resource providers. The resource database server may provide recommendations, including travel information recommendations. The mobile computing device may monitor its current context and enable the resources at the location or notify a user of the availability of the resources. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280795 | NETWORK SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A network system includes: a first information processing apparatus that transmits a setting set by an administrator for an application program; and a second information processing apparatus connected to the first information processing apparatus via a network. The second information processing apparatus includes: a communication unit that receives the setting set by the administrator for the application program; an execution unit that executes the application program according to a setting; a setting unit that stores therein and applies a setting for the application program; a setting check unit that determines whether the set setting received by the communication unit and the setting stored in the setting unit match; and a display unit that displays that the setting check unit determines that the set setting and the stored setting do not match. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280796 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A DISTRIBUTED SERVICE CONFIGURATION FRAMEWORK - Systems and method for providing a distributed service configuration framework are provided herein. In some instances, methods may include facilitating an application within a cloud computing system, facilitating a plurality of services of the application, the plurality of services being of a same type, deploying an instance within a given service, and automatically configuring the instance using configuration information obtained by a configuration agent, the configuration agent being associated with the instance. Each instance is associated with its own configuration agent. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280797 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK OF A MOBILE DEVICE THROUGH A PREFERRED NETWORK - A system and method may handle the supervision of the connectivity of a virtual private network (VPN) of a mobile device that is configured to connect through a plurality of network interfaces. A server may configure the mobile device to send a request for data item. The server may track the response of the mobile device to the request. According to one embodiment, the VPN may not be connected through a preferred network interface, while such interface is available. In such case, the data item may be routed through the preferred network and therefore not received by the VPN server within a predetermined period of time. According to another embodiment, the server may identify an internal IP address of the data item. The server may be configured to determine the current network interface based on the internal IP address. The server may disconnect the VPN to permit the VPN to reconnect through the preferred network interface. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280798 | Network Classification - Network DNA may be determined for a computer network that taxonomically classifies the computer network. Network DNA may include derived network DNA components and raw network DNA components. Raw network DNA components may be acquired from local or remote sources. Derived network DNA components may be generated according to derived network DNA component specifications. Derived network DNA component specifications may reference raw network DNA components. Network DNA determined for the computer network may include a network species component capable of indicating network species classifications for computer networks. Network species classifications may include enterprise network, home network and public place network. Network species classifications may be determined as a function of network security, network management and network addressing. One or more network DNA stores may be configured to store network DNA for computer networks. Network DNA stores may store network DNA history as well as current network DNA. | 09-18-2014 |
20140289377 | CONFIGURING NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM OVER A NETWORK - Network storage system configuration via a network is disclosed. An IP assignment component is configured to listen for IP assignment requests over the network. Responsive to identifying an IP assignment request originating from a network storage system, the IP assignment component assigns an IP address to the network storage system, and provides configuration access to the network storage system based upon the IP address. A network device management component is configured to send identification requests over the network. Responsive to receiving a response from a network storage system having a previously assigned IP address, the network device management component provides configuration access to the network storage system based upon the previously assigned IP address. In this manner, a network storage system is (e.g., remotely) configured (e.g., over a network), rather than a technician having to physically connect (e.g., via a serial cable) to the network storage system. | 09-25-2014 |
20140289378 | DEVICE IDENTIFIER SELECTION - A method includes receiving an enumeration message via a host interface of a device that is operatively coupled to a host device and to one or more other devices. The method includes identifying the enumeration message as a command originated by the host device or as a response message from one of the other devices. In response to identifying the enumeration message as a command, an enumeration response message is sent to the host device. The enumeration response message indicates a distinctive device identifier value. The method also includes, in response to identifying the enumeration message as a response message from one of the other devices, reading from the response message an identifier value used by such other device and at least temporarily storing this identifier value at the device to enable the device to select the distinctive device identifier value. | 09-25-2014 |
20140289379 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, VIRTUAL NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus includes: a virtual network configuration information storage unit storing a configuration(s) of a virtual network(s); a terminal point information storage unit associating a virtual terminal point(s) on the virtual network(s) with a terminal point(s) of the packet forwarding node(s) and storing the associated nodes; a control unit controlling packet forwarding on the virtual network(s) configured by the packet forwarding node(s); and a virtual network updating unit performing, when the control apparatus receives a packet from a source that is not connected to an existing virtual terminal point, addition of a virtual terminal point to the virtual network(s) and addition of a new entry to the terminal point information storage unit, based on a virtual terminal point addition rule(s) defining a correspondence relationship between a value in a predetermined field in a packet header and a virtual terminal point connection position on the virtual network(s). | 09-25-2014 |
20140297817 | Managing Software Operations Based Upon User Status In A Unified Communications Environment - Operation of a computing device is facilitated within a unified communications platform, where a user status designation is assigned to the computing device. A user configuration table for the computing device is established, where the user configuration table provides information relating to a plurality of user status designations associated with operation of the computing device within the unified communications platform. In response to identifying an automated software operation scheduled to be performed in association with the computing device, the user configuration table is consulted to determine a rule associated with the user status designation and the automated software operation. In response to a determination of the rule, the rule is applied that controls performance of the automated software operation at the computing device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140304378 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PARTITIONING RECURSIVE NAME SERVERS - A method of applying device preferences to network traffic includes establishing first DNS settings of a first device and establishing second DNS settings of a second device. The first DNS settings are associated with one or more first name servers. The second DNS settings are associated with one or more second name servers. The method also includes transmitting, from the first device, at least a portion of a first DNS query and a public IP address to the first name server. The method further includes transmitting, from the second device, at least a portion of a second DNS query and the public IP address to the second name server | 10-09-2014 |
20140317246 | GROUP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ARRANGEMENT - A group communication system arrangement is provided. The group communication system arrangement includes a configuration of nodes, which are uniquely identified by corresponding identifiers (ID). The nodes are mutually coupled in communication, and are operable to exchange data amongst themselves. Further, the nodes are grouped into proximity segments, depending upon communication characteristics between the nodes. A node of a given second proximity segment of the proximity segments is selected for receiving data to be synchronized. The node of the given second proximity segment is selected based upon an ID of a node of a given first proximity segment of the proximity segments, which is operable to send the data to the node of the given second proximity segment. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317247 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, METHOD FOR STARTING A SERVER COMPUTER, SERVER COMPUTER, MANAGEMENT STATION, AND USE - A computer system includes a server computer including a processor, a main memory and a system management chip, a management station that manages server profiles and selects a server profile from server profiles and associates it with the server computer, and at least one data network via which the server computer and the management station are coupled to interchange data, wherein the system management chip of the server computer is set so that, when the system management chip activates, it sends an inquiry regarding a server profile associated by the management station to the management station, so that, if a management connection can be set to the management station, it configures a component of the server computer by using a network identifier transmitted by the management station, and to otherwise prevent starting of the server computer with a network identifier transmitted by the management station previously. | 10-23-2014 |
20140325035 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF AUTOMATED COMPLIANCE MANAGEMENT - A method and system of automated compliance management is disclosed. The method includes receiving an application call from a remote information handling system (IHS) running an application, the application including a function configured to invoke the application call. The method also includes determining a location of operation of the remote IHS and determining a compliance criterion of the application based on the location of operation of the remote IHS. The method further includes sending a response to the application call from the remote IHS, the response including information for configuring the application to comply with the compliance criterion. Associated apparatuses and systems are disclosed. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325036 | Defining Disjoint Node Groups for Virtual Machines with Pre-Existing Placement Policies - Disjoint node groups are generated for a node cluster to guarantee hardware redundancy for each service group to be configured on the node cluster. Each service group includes service units, and each service unit is a unit of redundancy for services provided and protected by the service group. Hardware dependency is identified between virtual machines in the node cluster and hardware elements to host the virtual machines. A first node group set (NG set) is formed using a first criterion to select the virtual machines into different node groups based on the hardware dependency, such that there is no common hardware element between any two node groups in the first NG set. The first NG set is mapped to a first set of service groups. Different node groups of the first NG set are mapped to different service units in each service group of the first set of service groups. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325037 | Automated Creation of Private Virtual Networks in a Service Provider Network - Data may be collected regarding the configuration of a network, such as a customer network operated by a customer of a service provider operating a service provider network. An appropriate interface, such as a user interface, may be provided to allow a user to add, delete, or otherwise modify the collected network configuration data. The collected, and possibly modified, network configuration data may then be utilized to create a private virtual network in the service provider network. The private virtual network may be implemented such that it has the same, or similar, network configuration as the customer network. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325038 | Technique for Configuring a Software-Defined Network - A technique for configuring a Software-Defined Network (SDN) is provided. A first control message is issued by a Software-Defined Network controller. The first control message is received at a first network device of the SDN. The first control message includes a SDN configuration command. Two or more second network devices of the SDN are determined as recipients of the SDN configuration command or as intermediate nodes towards recipients of the SDN configuration command. The first network device sends second control messages to the determined two or more second network devices. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325039 | DETERMINISTIC SESSION LOAD-BALANCING AND REDUNDANCY OF ACCESS SERVERS IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, for each port of an access node in an access-based computer network, one access server of a plurality of access servers is configured as a preferred access server for that port. Upon receiving a session initiation message at a particular port, the access node forwards the session initiation message to one or more of the access servers based on the configured preferred access server for the particular port. | 10-30-2014 |
20140330943 | Logical Address Configuration And Management - Methods and systems for configuring a network are disclosed. An example method can comprise receiving a request from a first device to connect to a first network. An example method can also comprise determining a first logical address. The first logical address can comprise one or more bits configured to identify the first device on the first network and specify configuration information for the first device. An example method can further comprise providing the first logical address to the first device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140330944 | Time-based Configuration Policy Toggling - Time-based configuration profile toggling may be provided. Configuration profiles associated with user devices may be identified, determinations of whether the user devices are authorized to enable the configuration profiles on the user devices may be made based at least in part on time constraints, and the configuration profiles may be enabled on the user devices if the time constraints are satisfied. | 11-06-2014 |
20140330945 | Location-based Configuration Policy Toggling - Location-based configuration profile toggling may be provided. Configuration profiles associated with user devices may be identified, determinations of whether the user devices are authorized to enable the configuration profiles on the user devices may be made based at least in part on location constraints, and the configuration profiles may be enabled on the user devices if the location constraints are satisfied. | 11-06-2014 |
20140330946 | NETWORK ELEMENT OF A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A network element of a software-defined network includes line interface modules capable of transferring data between each other and providing connections to other network elements. Each line interface module is configurable with configuration data received from a controller of the software-defined network. The line interface modules are configured, in accordance with the configuration data, to support external data-forwarding functionality between the network element and other network elements and to support internal data-forwarding functionality between the line interface modules within the network element. Thus, the controller can manage the line interface modules, as separately controlled devices. The line interface modules are further adapted to support, in accordance with the configuration data, signaling functionality between the line interface modules. The signaling functionality provides internal functionalities of the network element, such as work sharing between the line interface modules, so that also the internal functionalities can be controllable via the controller. | 11-06-2014 |
20140330947 | EFFICIENT USE OF DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL IN LOW POWER AND LOSSY NETWORKS - In one embodiment, each of a plurality of devices in a computer network is configured to i) transmit a unicasted dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) solicit message to a neighbor device having a route to a border router as an assumed DHCP relay without regard to location of a DHCP server, and ii) operate as a DHCP relay to receive unicasted DHCP solicit messages and relay the solicit message to the border router of the network without regard to location of the DHCP server, and to relay a DHCP reply to a corresponding requestor device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140337486 | Method and Apparatus To Orchestrate Any-vendor IT Infrastructure (Compute) Configuration - Methods and apparatuses to to orchestrate any-vendor IT infrastructure (Compute) configuration are disclosed by discovery of compute nodes; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, virtualization configuration of the discovered compute nodes; configuration of nodes covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of nodes across data centers. | 11-13-2014 |
20140337487 | Method and Apparatus To Orchestrate Any-vendor IT Infrastructure (Network) Configuration - Methods and apparatuses to orchestrate any-vendor IT infrastructure (Network) configuration are disclosed by discovery of network components including routers, switches, server load balancers, firewalls; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, access lists, policies, virtualization configuration of the discovered network components; configuration of components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of network atomic units and components across data centers. | 11-13-2014 |
20140337488 | Method and Apparatus To Orchestrate Any-vendor IT Infrastructure (Storage) Configuration - Methods and apparatuses to orchestrate any-vendor IT infrastructure (Storage) configuration are disclosed by discovery of storage components including storage arrays, disks, SAN switches, NAS devices; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, VSAN, security, access lists, policies, virtualization configuration of the discovered storage components; configuration of components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of storage atomic units and components across data centers. | 11-13-2014 |
20140337489 | Method and Apparatus For Rapid Scalable Unified Infrastructure System Management Platform - Method and Apparatus for rapid scalable unified infrastructure system management platform are disclosed by discovery of compute nodes, network components across data centers, both public and private for a user; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, virtualization configuration of the discovered unified infrastructure nodes and components; configuration of nodes and components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of nodes and components across data centers both public and private. | 11-13-2014 |
20140337490 | SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK COORDINATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a SON coordination method, device, and system, and the method includes: obtaining a coordination parameter of a self organizing network function; and coordinating running of the self organizing network function according to the coordination parameter. The coordination parameter of the SON function is obtained before running of a current SON function, so as to use the obtained coordination parameter to coordinate the running of the SON function. In this way, the running of the current SON function may cooperate and coordinate with another SON, thereby avoiding a conflict, more efficiently, more smoothly, and lower repeatedly solving a network problem, improving network application efficiency, or reducing wrong adjustment of a network parameter caused by wrong judgment, which affects user service experience, so as to achieve an object of reducing an operating cost, and improving an utilization rate of an equipment and funds. | 11-13-2014 |
20140344418 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION ANALYSIS - A plurality of configuration files may be received from a plurality of servers. Each configuration file of the plurality of configuration files may comprise a plurality of attribute types and a plurality of attribute values. Each of the plurality of attribute values may correspond to one or more of the plurality of attribute types. A dynamic benchmark configuration file may be generated. The dynamic benchmark configuration file may comprise each of the plurality of attribute types and a benchmark attribute value corresponding to each attribute type of the plurality of attribute types. The benchmark attribute value may comprise an attribute value equivalent to an attribute value of a majority of the plurality of attribute values that correspond to the attribute type. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344419 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, METHOD OF CONTROLLING NETWORK INTERFACE - The purpose of the present invention is to reduce a workload for mapping a physical mounting location of a network interface with the information added to the network interface. A computer system according to the present invention acquires a device address of a network interface recognized by the OS of a computer and identifies the mounting location of the network interface by using a table describing a mapping relationship between the device address of the network interface and the mounting location thereof (see FIG. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344420 | PROXIMITY AND CONTEXT AWARE MOBILE WORKSPACES IN ENTERPRISE SYSTEMS - Methods and systems for configuring computing devices using mobile workspace contexts based on proximity to locations are described herein. A mobile computing device determines that the device is proximate to a location, another device, or an individual associated with an enterprise system. The mobile computing device may then receive a mobile workspace context associated with the location, device, or individual, such as one or more specific wireless networks, enterprise applications, and/or documents, and may configure the device based on the received mobile workspace context. Additional methods and systems are described herein for transmitting and receiving sets of device capabilities between multiple devices, establishing communication sessions, and sharing various capabilities between devices. Still additional methods and systems are described for determining and accessing the capabilities of enterprise system resources using mobile computing devices in an enterprise system. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344421 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING DHCPV6 CLIENT, DHCPV6 CLIENT, NETWORK DEVICE, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for configuring a DHCPv6 client is provided. The method includes: a DHCPv6 client receiving a DHCPv6 advertisement message sent by a network device having a DHCPv6 function, the DHCPv6 advertisement message comprising a management domain identifier of the network device; if the DHCPv6 client does not save the management domain identifier, the DHCPv6 client sending a DHCPv6 request message to the network device; the DHCPv6 client receiving a DHCPv6 response message sent by the network device and completing configuration of the DHCPv6 client. A DHCPv6 client, a network device, and a network system are also provided. Through the technical solution, multiple network devices supporting a DHCPv6 server function can configure the same DHCPv6 client, so as to provide technical support for realizing IPv6 client and network multi-homing. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344422 | MANAGING AN APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE IN A COLLABORATION SPACE - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for managing third-party application programming interfaces in a collaboration space. A collaboration space, such as a wiki site, can host a set of collaboration tools and resources, including, for example, content tools, communication tools, and other resources for the users of the space. The collaboration space can also incorporate and expose a set of application programming interfaces, such as command and data-passing structures to permit users to invoke third-party applications and/or services from within the wiki site or other collaboration space. The set of applications/services be hosted on a remote server or co-hosted on the collaboration server, and can include, for instance, database, spreadsheet, media content, or other applications or services. The invoked applications/services can return data to the requesting user via the collaboration space. Users can subscribe to different applications and/or services available via the collaboration space. | 11-20-2014 |
20140351390 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY PREDICTING WORKLOAD GROWTH BASED ON HEURISTIC DATA - Method and Apparatus for rapid scalable unified infrastructure system management platform are disclosed by discovery of compute nodes, network components across data centers, both public and private for a user; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, virtualization configuration of the discovered unified infrastructure nodes and components; configuration of nodes and components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of nodes and components across data centers both public and private. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351391 | Method and Apparatus to Recommend a Workload Distribution Path Based on Resource Usage Pattern - Method and Apparatus for rapid scalable unified infrastructure system management platform are disclosed by discovery of compute nodes, network components across data centers, both public and private for a user; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, virtualization configuration of the discovered unified infrastructure nodes and components; configuration of nodes and components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of nodes and components across data centers both public and private. | 11-27-2014 |
20140351392 | AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING COMPUTER NETWORK AT HOSPITALITY ESTABLISHMENT WITH RESERVATION-SPECIFIC SETTINGS - A system includes a storage device for storing details of a plurality of reservations of a hospitality establishment. A particular reservation includes a set of reservation-specific settings affecting behavior of the computer network at the hospitality establishment during the reservation. The settings may include a registered device setting for affecting behavior of a computer network at the hospitality establishment toward a user device having a specified device identifier. The system further includes a clock unit for tracking time, and a system controller coupled to the computer network and having access to the storage device and the clock unit. The system controller automatically configures one or more network components of the computer network when a start time of the particular reservation is reached in order to activate the reservation-specific settings. | 11-27-2014 |
20140359085 | ACCESS PERMISSIONS FOR SHARED CONTENT - Various embodiments of the disclosed technology can configure access permissions for content shared via an online content management system. In one example, a first user of the online content management system can share his directory including files with other users (“recipients”). Upon agreeing to the content sharing from the first user, the recipients can reconstruct local representations of the shared directory and any included file (i.e., local representations of shared content). Access permissions associated with the recipients' local representations of the shared content can be configured to prevent unpermitted/unauthorized modifying or deleting of the local representations by the recipients. However, the first user can maintain read and write permissions, permitting him to make modifications or deletions to the shared content. The recipients' local representations of the shared content can be updated by the online content management system to include the modifications or deletions made by the first user. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359086 | REPRESENTATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM TOPOLOGY AND HEALTH IN AN FDT FRAME APPLICATION USING DEVICE DTMS AND VIRTUAL DEVICES - Provided is a system configuration tool for execution on a computer and configured for managing physical field devices within a field device tool environment. The system configuration tool includes a communication device type manager (DTM) component and a first device DTM component configured for communicating, via the communication DTM component, with one of the physical field devices. The one physical field device has FDT capability. The system configuration tool also includes a second device DTM component configured for communicating, via the communication DTM component, with a virtual field device. The virtual field device is representative of another one of the physical field devices, the other physical field device being devoid of FDT capability. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359087 | Method and Apparatus for Clearing Configuration Command in Communication Equipment - A method and an apparatus can be used for clearing a configuration command in communication equipment effectively and rapidly. Hierarchy information of each network element and information of a configuration command deployed on each network element in communication equipment are acquired. The hierarchy information is determined as hierarchy information of the configuration command deployed on each network element. A configuration command tree is constructed in an initial status according to hierarchy information of configuration commands deployed on all network elements. A target status of the configuration command tree is obtained according to a specific configuration status that is specified by a user and the communication equipment needs to recover to. The initial status and the target status of the configuration command tree are compared and a node that needs to be cleared from the configuration command tree is determined. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359088 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOWING USER CONFIGURATION OF DYNAMIC ENDPOINT GENERATORS AND DYNAMIC REMOTE OBJECT DISCOVERY AND BROKERAGE - A method for allowing user configuration of an endpoint for consuming a business object includes: loading a definition of the business object, the definition having properties and methods; mapping the definition to endpoint-supported protocols; and allowing user configuration of the endpoint based upon at least one of: (i) services configuration, (ii) protocol configuration, or (iii) managed configuration. | 12-04-2014 |
20140365621 | NETCONF SNMP GATEWAY - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a network configuration protocol (NETCONF) and simple network management protocol (SNMP) gateway (NSG). The NSG may include: a first interface configured as a NETCONF server, the first interface configured to connect to a NETCONF client and receive NETCONF messages, at least one NETCONF message identifying a managed object; a buffer configured to store the identified managed object; and a second interface configured to send an SNMP message to an SNMP agent, the SNMP message including the managed object stored in the buffer. Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a network gateway, the method comprising: receiving a NETCONF message from a NETCONF client; translating the NETCONF message into a SNMP message; and sending the SNMP message to a configurable node. | 12-11-2014 |
20140365622 | SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING FOR STORAGE AREA NETWORKS - An example method for facilitating software defined networking for storage area networks is provided and includes dividing a control plane of a storage area network (SAN) into a centralized network control plane and a plurality of decentralized control planes, configuring network-wide SAN applications in the centralized network control plane, and configuring switch-level SAN applications in the decentralized control planes. In a specific embodiment, the network-wide SAN applications include at least one selection from a group consisting of: name server, zone server, worldwide name-virtual SAN (VSAN) mapping, device aliases, link-state routing information, principal switch selection, domain manager, and virtual local area network-VSAN mapping. | 12-11-2014 |
20140372574 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REMOTE DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Systems and methods for remote device configuration is provided. In one embodiment, a method comprises outputting, from a computer, to a first computing device, configuration options for a second computing device; receiving, at the computer, from the first computing device, configuration data associated with the configuration options for the second computing device; associating a first security identifier with the configuration data for the second computing device; and in response to a request for the configuration data for the second computing device, outputting, from the computer, to the second computing device, the configuration data for the second computing device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140372575 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus includes plural network interfaces, a specifying unit, a setting unit, and an assigning unit. The plural network interfaces include a first network interface for connection of the apparatus to a network, and a second network interface for direct wireless connection of another device to the apparatus. The specifying unit specifies a subnet by way of which data transmitted from the first network interface pass. The setting unit sets a network address that belongs to a subnet that is different from the specified subnet to the second network interface. The assigning unit assigns a network address that belongs to a subnet that is the same as the network address set to the second network interface to the other device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140372576 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK FABRIC CONFIGURATION IN DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An auto fabric configuration (AFC) mode is provided to enable network elements, when added to a data communication network, to discover each other, using TLVs added to standard protocols. The AFC mode further allows for automatic configuration of the network fabric. For example, core features, such as link aggregation, Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and Shortest Path Bridging (SPB) adjacencies, can be automatically configured. | 12-18-2014 |
20140379876 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING POLICIES ON A COMPUTER - An apparatus, system, and method are disclosed for managing policies on a computer having a foreign operating system. Policies may specify hardware or software configuration information. Policies on a first computer with a native operating system are translated into configuration information usable on a second computer having a foreign operating system. In an embodiment, a translator manager manages the association between the policy on the first computer and the translator on the second computer. Computer management complexity and information technology management costs are reduced by centralizing computer management on the native operating system. Further reductions in management complexity are realized when the present invention is used in conjunction with network directory services. | 12-25-2014 |
20140379877 | CIRCLE-MESH OVERLAY NETWORK CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN METHOD - A method of constructing and maintaining a circle-mesh overlay network is disclosed. The method of constructing a circle-mesh overlay network includes: (a) determining a reference member number of a circle overlay by using a total number of participating peers; (b) creating a new circle overlay and adding member peers from among the participating peers to the new circle overlay in consideration of the reference member number; and (c) forming a circle-mesh overlay network by way of interconnection between the new circle overlay and a different circle overlay. | 12-25-2014 |
20140379878 | Generic Device Attributes for Sensing Devices - A method and system is provided for optimizing time and complexity during an interoperation of at least two smart sensing device's operating in a heterogeneous environment, each device is configured to predetermined characteristics for a heterogeneous environment with a dynamic degree of prioritization in interoperation. The said method and system is adapted for creation of generic device attributes for smart sensing devices by an edge gateway system during the device discovery phase and at the same time performing semantic analysis on the content of the attributes to optimize the device interoperation mechanism in any smart environment. | 12-25-2014 |
20140379879 | PROVIDING CONFIGURABLE WORKFLOW CAPABILITIES - Techniques are described for providing clients with access to functionality for creating, configuring and executing defined workflows that manipulate source data in defined manners, such as under the control of a configurable workflow service that is available to multiple remote clients over one or more public networks. A defined workflow for a client may, for example, include multiple interconnected workflow components that are specified by the client and that each are configured to perform one or more types of data manipulation operations on a specified type of input data. The configurable workflow service may further execute the defined workflow at one or more times and in one or more manners, such as in some situations by provisioning multiple computing nodes provided by the configurable workflow service to each implement at least one of the workflow components for the defined workflow. | 12-25-2014 |
20150012621 | NETWORK-ASSISTED CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING OF GATEWAYS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for network-assisted configuration and programming of gateways in a network environment is provided and includes registering a non-Virtual eXtensible Local Area Network (VXLAN) device with a central controller, for example, by generating registration information associating the non-VXLAN device with a virtual local area network (VLAN) in a network environment, receiving a communication request from a VXLAN enabled device to communicate with the non-VXLAN device, mapping, based on the registration information, a VXLAN segment corresponding to the VXLAN enabled device with the VLAN associated with the non-VXLAN device, and configuring a gateway with the mapping through a suitable application programming interface exposed at the gateway. | 01-08-2015 |
20150012622 | INFORMATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, INFORMATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Using a dependency table generated from communication with a component in operation of a system configuration element and describing the component in operation of each system configuration element and a dependency between the system configuration elements, and a CFIA analysis table which describes a redundancy detail of each system configuration element, a design information integration part associates the redundancy detail to the component in operation of each system configuration element. A display part displays the component in operation of each system configuration element and a dependency between system configuration elements. Based on associating by the design information integration part, the display part displays the redundancy detail of each system configuration element in correspondence with displaying the component in operation of each system configuration element. | 01-08-2015 |
20150012623 | AUTOMATED STANDALONE BOOTSTRAPPING OF HARDWARE INVENTORY - Embodiments of the present invention provide systems, methods, and computer storage media for automated standalone bootstrapping of hardware inventory that includes a provisioning workflow of discovering, validating, and configuring hardware inventory. In an exemplary embodiment, an in-rack computing device, such as a chassis manager or selected blade, initializes an intra-rack communication network with a hardware inventory of the rack. The in-rack computing device initiates intra-rack communication with the hardware inventory in the rack, using the intra-rack communication network, to discover at least a set of computing units in a hardware inventory. Intra-rack communications that include traffic received from the set of computing units. The in-rack computing device validates operational configurations of the hardware inventory based on comparing expected operational configuration parameters with actual operational configuration parameters, at least a portion of the operational configuration parameters retrieved from the information carried within the traffic received from the set of computing units. | 01-08-2015 |
20150019696 | DYNAMIC PORT TYPE DETECTION - An aspect includes dynamic port type detection. A link initialization frame that includes a protocol identifier is received at a port of a switch. Based on successfully decoding the protocol identifier, the port is configured to a mode of operation compatible with the protocol identifier. A table in the switch is updated to configure one or more other ports of the switch to the mode of operation compatible with the protocol identifier. A handshake response is sent to acknowledge the successful decoding of the protocol identifier. If no handshake response is received at a server prior to expiration of a wait pulse repetition time, the server periodically transmits the link initialization frame with a different protocol identifier for an alternate mode of operation until the handshake response is received or all supported modes of operation are checked. | 01-15-2015 |
20150026311 | MANAGING A STORAGE SYSTEM - A method of and system for managing a storage system is disclosed. The method and system may include determining a first operational characteristic of a first configuration. The determination may be made using first data of the first configuration of the storage system and second data related to element interactions of the storage system. The method and system may include generating, using the second data, at least a second configuration of the storage system that differs from the first configuration. The method and system may include predicting, using the second data, at least a second operational characteristic of the second configuration. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026312 | NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER SELECTION FOR VEHICLE-CONNECTED MOBILE DEVICES - Systems and methods for network service provider selection for vehicle connected mobile devices are disclosed. A particular embodiment includes: establishing data communication with a first network and a second network; determining if a mobile device is in communication with an in-vehicle multimedia module and one or more vehicle subsystems of a vehicle; configuring the in-vehicle multimedia module to select the first network or the second network under pre-defined conditions; and establishing data communication between the mobile device and the selected network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026313 | DATA CENTER BRIDGING NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT - A Data Center Bridged (DCB) Information Handling System (IHS) network include a plurality of switch IHSs that are connected together to provide the IHS network, and a management IHS coupled to each of the plurality of switch IHSs through a management network. The management IHS is configured to identify a plurality of data traffic flows and, for each identified data traffic flow, to determine a flow path through the IHS network. The flow paths include at least some of the plurality of switch IHSs, and the management IHS provides configuration information to each of the switch IHSs included in a flow path such that a quality of service (QoS) is provided for the data traffic flow along that flow path through the DCB IHS network according to the configuration information. Thus, the systems and methods utilize flow based networking to configure and manage DCB IHS networks. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026314 | NETWORK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM UTILIZING PHYSICAL NETWORK IDENTIFICATION FOR BRIDGING OPERATIONS - The disclosed network resource management system employs a hardware configuration management (HCM) information handling system (IHS) that may couple to a single administered IHS or to multiple administered IHSs via an administrative network. An HCM tool in the HCM IHS may generate, modify and store hardware configuration information, including physical network identifications (PNet IDs), in an HCM database and share the HCM database with the administered IHSs. The administered IHS may be a bridging IHS. A bridging tool may extract hardware configuration information, including PNet IDs, from the HCM database. The bridging tool may utilize the hardware configuration information, including PNet IDs, to enable the bridging IHS to bridge networks internal to the bridging IHS with networks external to the bridging IHS. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026315 | NETWORK PARAMETER CONFIGURATION BASED ON END USER DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS - Systems, methods, and software for operating a content node are provided herein. In one example, a method of operating a content node is presented. The method includes receiving a characteristic of an end user device, and configuring one or more transmission control protocol (TCP) parameter for communications with the end user device based on at least the characteristic of the end user device. The method also includes transferring the communications using the one or more TCP parameters for delivery to the end user device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026316 | ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD, INLCUDING AUTO-PROVISIONING CAPABILITY - According to an aspect of the disclosure, a provisioning system for a network includes a first device associated with a site. The first device includes a communication chip associated therewith. The system also includes a second device including a device identifier associated therewith. The communication chip is configured to read the device identifier on the second device to obtain information about the second device. The device identifier of the second device is transmitted to a cloud server. Information about the second device is received at the first device from the cloud server based on the device identifier. Based on the information from the cloud server about the second device it can then be joined to the network by the first device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150032861 | Device Abstraction in Autonomous Wireless Local Area Networks - According to embodiments of the present disclosure, a managed network device assigns to itself an IP address, in absence of a DHCP service, in a link local address space within a wireless network. The system further responds to a network frame received from another device based on the assigned IP address in the link local address space. The network frame can be a network traffic frame, a control path frame, and/or a management frame. The control path frame comprises a source IP address and a destination IP address that correspond to internal IP addresses in the link local address space that are self-assigned by managed network devices. The management frame comprises the self-assigned internal IP address for the managed network device, and provides for management of managed network devices in the wireless network through a single IP address when a virtual controller is configured for the wireless network. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032862 | Service Provisioning Method, Device, and System in Coaxial Cable System - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a service provisioning method in a coaxial cable system, the method comprises: a CMC receives a DHCP Ack message from a DHCP server and replaces an address of a TFTP server in the DHCP Ack message with an IP address of the CMC; the CMC sends the DHCP Ack message carrying the IP address of the CMC to the CM; and the CMC receives a request message from the CM for delivering a configuration file, acquires a configuration file corresponding to the CM, and after converting the configuration file corresponding to the CM into a format identifiable by the CM, sends the configuration file to the CM. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032863 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF ENDPOINT COMMUNICATION DEVICES TO SET UP A VOIP NETWORK - Implementations relate to automatic configuration of endpoint communication devices to set up a communication network such as a VOIP network. In some implementations, a method includes a server receiving an extension request for device extension from an endpoint communications device connected to a communication network, mapping an identifier for the endpoint communications device to a device extension, and transmitting the device extension to the endpoint communications device. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032864 | CONFIGURING AND CUSTOMIZING A SPECIFIC-PURPOSE CLIENT HAVING A WINDOWS-BASED EMBEDDED IMAGE USING EXTENSIBLE MARKUP LANGUAGE (XML) CONFIGURATION - Examples of methods and apparatus are provided for configuring and customizing a specific-purpose local client having a windows-based embedded image using extensible markup language (XML) configuration and obviating reinstallation of an entire windows-based embedded image onto the specific-purpose local client. The apparatus may include a retrieval module of the specific-purpose local client configured to automatically locate a remote repository server containing an XML configuration file and automatically obtain the XML configuration file from the remote repository server each time the specific-purpose local client boots up. The apparatus may include an apply settings module of the specific-purpose local client configured to automatically apply a configuration change to the windows-based embedded image based on the XML configuration file each time the specific-purpose local client boots up. The configuration change persists across a reboot of the specific-purpose local client while obviating reinstallation of an entire windows-based embedded image onto the specific-purpose local client. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032865 | Methods, Secure Element, Server, Computer Programs and Computer Program Products for Improved Application Management - It presented a method, performed in a secure element, the secure element being arranged to enable user applications of the secure element to verify authenticity of incoming user application commands. The method comprises the steps of: receiving a command from a secure element reader for a user application on the secure element, the command comprising an application identifier of the user application; determining whether there is a matching user application in the secure element; invoking the matching user application; and establishing, when there is an absence of any matching user applications, a communication channel with a remote application manager server and sending an absent user application message to the application manager server indicating that the user application has been requested on the secure element. A corresponding secure element, method for an application manager server and application manager server are also presented. | 01-29-2015 |
20150039731 | Method and Apparatus to Securely Process Streams of Data of Compute Devices of Private Enterprise Clouds in Batch from the Public Cloud - Method and Apparatus for rapid scalable unified infrastructure system management platform are disclosed by discovery of compute nodes, network components across data centers, both public and private for a user; assessment of type, capability, VLAN, security, virtualization configuration of the discovered unified infrastructure nodes and components; configuration of nodes and components covering add, delete, modify, scale; and rapid roll out of nodes and components across data centers both public and private. | 02-05-2015 |
20150046572 | Extending Virtual Station Interface Discovery Protocol (VDP) and VDP-Like Protocols for Dual-Homed Deployments in Data Center Environments - Techniques are provided for provisioning network resources for virtual machines. At a first switch device, a configuration request message is received from a virtual switch to provision virtual network segmentation resources for a virtual machine managed by the virtual switch. The first switch device provisions the virtual network segmentation resources for the virtual machine. The first switch devices sends to a second switch device a first synchronization message that includes information describing the virtual network segmentation resources. The second switch device is a peer of the first switch device. The first switch device also sends to the second switch device a second synchronization message that includes state information indicating that the first switch device is in an active state for servicing the virtual machine and that the second switch device is to be placed in a dormant state for servicing the virtual machine. | 02-12-2015 |
20150052228 | DATA CENTER ACTIVATION AND CONFIGURATION - A device is configured to receive, from a source device, activation information associated with a set of server devices, to cause a first server device, of the set of server devices, to be activated based on the activation information. The device is configured to receive, from the source device, configuration information associated with the set of server devices. The device is configured to activate and configure at least one other server device, of the set of server devices, based on the activation information and the configuration information. | 02-19-2015 |
20150058456 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A NETWORK - A method of managing a network. The method includes receiving an activation key transmitted from a device connected to the network, automatically transmitting a configuration to the device, automatically maintaining the configuration of the device, and receiving log information from the device. | 02-26-2015 |
20150058457 | BRIDGE FOR IMPLEMENTING A CONVERGED NETWORK PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL NETWORKS - Provided are a computer program product, system, and method for implementing a converged network protocol to facilitate communication between different communication protocol networks. There are configuration parameters in a memory for communication between the first adaptor implementing a first communication protocol and the second adaptor in a converged network protocol to indicate to the second adaptor that the converged network protocol is supported. A packet is received at the first adaptor encoded in a second communication protocol directed to a third communication protocol network, forwarded to the second adaptor, and then forwarded to the third communication protocol network. A command is received at the second adaptor, directed to the first adaptor, to implement a first function in the converged network protocol for communication between the first and second adaptors. A second function in the first communication protocol to implement the first function is transmitted to the first adaptor. | 02-26-2015 |
20150067112 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK ADDRESS ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT IN FEDERATED CLOUD COMPUTING NETWORKS - Techniques for performing network address allocation, administration and management in federated cloud computing networks are described. In one example embodiment, network interface cards (NICs) in a local network services appliance and a remote network services appliance register with an associated local network cloud and remote network cloud in the federated cloud computing networks. The local cloud network and the remote cloud network are then configured to send packets with unclaimed network address to the associated registered NICs. A layer-2 (L2) network tunnel including a data channel and a control channel is then formed between the local network services appliance and the remote network services appliance by stitching the local cloud network and the remote cloud network. Network address allocation, administration and management in the federated cloud computing networks are then performed using the formed L2 network tunnel. | 03-05-2015 |
20150074245 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR FACILITATING A CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES - Methods, devices and systems for facilitating a connection are described. In one aspect, a method for facilitating a connection between a public internet protocol (IP) address allocated remote management server (RMS) and private IP address allocated customer-premises equipment (CPE) devices that are serviced by a home gateway device (HGD) is described. The CPE devices are located within a different type of network than the RMS. The HGD implements the method which includes: receiving, from an operation support system, a request to download a service module stored on a storage server, the request including an identifier associated with a CPE device; in response to receiving the request, downloading the service module from the storage server; initiating the downloaded service module on the HGD; and in response to initiating the service module, instructing an identified CPE device based on the identifier to establish the connection with the RMS via the HGD. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074246 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTO-PROVISIONING NETWORK DEVICES IN A DATA CENTER USING NETWORK DEVICE LOCATION IN NETWORK TOPOLOGY - A non-transitory computer readable medium includes instructions, which, when executed by a processor, perform a method on a network device. The method includes receiving, from a configuration server, a master configuration script that includes an instruction set, a network topology for network devices, and a dictionary. The dictionary includes network device specific configuration scripts for the network devices. The method also includes executing the instruction set on the network device to configure the network device. Executing the instruction set includes obtaining link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) information for the network device, determining a most common interface (MCI) connected to the network device using the LLDP information, determining a network device identity using the MCI, obtaining, from the dictionary, a network device specific configuration script for the network device based on the network device identity, and executing the network device specific configuration script to configure the network device. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074247 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP COMPUTTING ENVIRONMENTS - A method for setting up a computing environment, which includes: storing data for setting up computing environments necessary for the update of a plurality of client terminals that are connected through a network; receiving information about computing environments that are configured on the client terminals from the client terminals; upon receiving a request for the update from the client terminals, classifying the client terminals that share the same system image; and transferring the latest version of the data for setting up the computing environments which are higher than the client terminals of the client terminals; and updating the classified client terminals with the latest version of the data. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074248 | Managing Configurations of Distributed Devices - A method manages configurations of devices in a system that communicates information between a device and an enterprise. The method includes building a defined configuration for a device type. The defined configuration includes a set of value requirements. An actual configuration having values associated with the device is compared to the defined configurations. The actual configuration and defined configuration are stored in a database of the enterprise. The method also includes determining, in the enterprise, if the values of actual configuration match the corresponding value requirements of the defined configurations. The method runs business logic associated with the device based on a result from the step of determining if the values of the actual configuration match the corresponding values of the defined configurations. The matched configurations are stored for subsequent use. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074249 | IDENTITY MANAGEMENT AND SERVICE ACCESS FOR LOCAL USER GROUP BASED ON NETWORK-RESIDENT USER PROFILES - A profile-based system is employed to manage user identities and preferences, devices, content and/or other aspects of service delivery. The user profiles may be maintained in one or more servers or other elements located in an external network access via a customer premises equipment (CPE) gateway of a local network. The profiles can be used to map users to identities, devices, services, and other features that affect the manner in which a particular user communicates with (or through) the external network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150081853 | NETWORK ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT WITH DUPLICATION DETECTION - Network storage system configuration via a network is disclosed. A network address assignment component is configured to listen for network discovery requests over the network. Responsive to receiving a network discovery request from a network storage system, one or more candidate network addresses are (e.g., randomly) generated until an available candidate network address is generated. For example, if a first candidate network address is determined as available (e.g., not used by another device within the network), then the first candidate network address is offered and/or assigned to the network storage system as an initial configuration network address that may be used to provide configuration access to the network storage system, otherwise a second candidate network address is generated and/or evaluated for availability. As such, configuration access may be provided over the network to the network storage system regardless of whether the network comprises an IP address assigning (e.g., DHCP) server. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081854 | DYNAMIC AGENT REPLACEMENT WITHIN A CLOUD NETWORK - A computing device receives information from one or more agents, wherein the one or more agents monitor one or more resources in a cloud network. The computing device determines that the configuration of the one or more agents monitoring the one or more resources needs to be changed based on at least the information received from the one or more agents. The computing device changes the configuration of the one or more agents monitoring the one or more resources based on at least the information received from the one or more agents. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081855 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSIGNING MULTI-INSTANCE SERVICES IN A PROVIDER NETWORK - A system and method for placing inline services having multiple instances in a service provider network. In one implementation, a topology of the service provider network and services to be placed therein are defined, wherein a network node may include a data forwarding functionality and a control plane functionality. Using service chaining policy requirements, the number of service instances, etc. as input, services and their multiple instances are placed within the network such that an overall network metric is optimized for all subscriber data flows. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081856 | CLUSTER CONFIGURATION - Computer implemented methods, system and apparatus for configuring a cluster using a plurality of hosts include identifying a plurality of features for forming the cluster. The plurality of features define requirements needed in a host for forming the cluster. A plurality of hosts are identified to be part of the cluster. A compatibility analysis is executed for each of the identified hosts. A plurality of suggested adjustments to particular hosts are presented to enable the particular hosts to be compatible with the features requirements. A configuration template is constructed for the hosts in the cluster that are compatible with the requirements. The hosts are configured for the cluster using the configuration settings in the configuration template. The configured hosts enable the features in the cluster. | 03-19-2015 |
20150089031 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CONFIGURATION MODULARITY IN AN APPLICATION SERVER, CLOUD PLATFORM, OR OTHER ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an embodiment, described herein is a system and method for providing configuration modularity in an application server, cloud platform, or other environment. For example, in a cloud computing environment, application server modules, e.g., WebLogic Server or GlassFish modules, can be embedded within the environment to provide various cloud platform functionalities. In accordance with an embodiment, the system comprises a configuration modularity logic for use in determining, for a particular application or service deployment, a configuration of application, module or service components, including determining if a configuration is provided by a global or domain configuration, determining if annotations are provided by the particular application or service deployment for use in configuring the application, module or service components, and/or determining if a default configuration is provided for use with the particular application or service deployment. | 03-26-2015 |
20150095465 | METHOD FOR SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF A COMPUTER CONNECTED WITH A ONE-TO-MANY WIRELESS DEVICE GROUP DURING BOOTING OF THE COMPUTER - A method for setting system configuration of a computer connected with a one-to-many wireless device group during booting of the computer is provided. The wireless device group includes a wireless connector electrically connected to the computer and a wireless input device and a wireless audio device: The method of the invention comprises the steps of: setting the wireless connector in a first state to form wireless connection with the wireless input device; performing system configuration setup by a user through the wireless input device after the computer has loaded a Basic Input/Output System to perform Power-On Self Test and judge that the first state conforms to a test threshold; and triggering the wireless connector to switch to a second state of forming wireless connection with the wireless input device and wireless audio device so that the computer can transmit audio data to the wireless audio device through the wireless connector. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095466 | DISJOINT PATH COMPUTATION FOR ARBITRARY DIRECTED GRAPH - Systems and methods for accessing network configuration data identifying one or more working path(s) configured to transport data between source and destination nodes, wherein multiple working paths are prioritized, and including at least one first diversity weight of a first value indicative of at least one communication link in the working path(s), and at least one second diversity weight of a second value indicative of at least one communication link outside of the working path(s); calculating a disjoint protection path with the network configuration data, the first diversity weight, and the second diversity weight; the disjoint protection path including at least the source node and the destination node and at least one communication link that is mutually exclusive from the at least one communication link of the first set; and outputting at least one setup signal to configure the disjoint protection path within the mesh network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095467 | ENABLING CONFIGURATION IN NETWORKS - Embodiments generally relate to enabling configuration in networks. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a message from an edge configuration device, wherein the message contains shortest path bridging (SPB) configuration information. The method also includes performing an intermediate system-to-intermediate system (IS-IS) configuration in response to receiving the message. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095468 | SYNCHRONIZING CONFIGURATIONS AMONGST MULTIPLE DEVICES - A data handling network includes a management system and a plurality of devices in communication with the management system. Each device may operate under various configurations. The management system includes a configuration version table that includes a device identifier and an intended configuration version number. A configuration manager within a device queries the management system with a query that includes a device identifier and a current device operating configuration version number. The management system may interrogate the configuration version table to determine if the current device operating configuration version number is similar to the intended configuration version number. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095469 | IDENTIFIER-BASED COMMUNICATION METHOD USING APPLICATION PROGRAM INTERFACE - An identifier (ID)-based communication method using an application program interface (API) is provided. The method, which is performed by an application, includes generating an ID plug interface, and binding an ID of the application to the generated ID plug interface; requesting a domain controller to do a domain search through the ID plug interface; receiving a domain socket interface list from the domain controller through the ID plug interface; selecting one domain socket interface in the domain socket interface list; and requesting a combination (plug-in) of the ID plug interface and the selected domain socket interface. | 04-02-2015 |
20150100670 | TRANSPORTING MULTI-DESTINATION NETWORKING TRAFFIC BY SENDING REPETITIVE UNICAST - In a distributed network environment, a first virtual machine sends a first virtual machine control information to a first network system. The first network system sends a first control information to a first network control system in response to receiving the first virtual machine control information. The first network control system sends a portion of the first control information to a number of network systems. The first network control system sends a second control information to the first network system. The first virtual machine sends a first packet to the first network system which generates a unicast packet using a portion of the first packet and a portion of the second control information. A second network system receives and processes the unicast packet. The second network system sends a copy of the processed unicast packet to a second virtual machine associated with a second tenant. | 04-09-2015 |
20150106482 | Identifying A Largest Logical Plane From A Plurality Of Logical Planes Formed Of Compute Nodes Of A Subcommunicator In A Parallel Computer - In a parallel computer, a largest logical plane from a plurality of logical planes formed of compute nodes of a subcommunicator may be identified by: identifying, by each compute node of the subcommunicator, all logical planes that include the compute node; calculating, by each compute node for each identified logical plane that includes the compute node, an area of the identified logical plane; initiating, by a root node of the subcommunicator, a gather operation; receiving, by the root node from each compute node of the subcommunicator, each node's calculated areas as contribution data to the gather operation; and identifying, by the root node in dependence upon the received calculated areas, a logical plane of the subcommunicator having the greatest area. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106483 | SYSTEM FOR BUSINESS SUITE AND NETWORK INTEGRATION - A system includes a suite of business applications and an add-on module coupled to the suite of business applications. The add-on module is configured with Commerce eXtensible Markup Language (cXML) and is operable to enable the suite of business applications to communicate with a network using cXML and a direct web service call to the network. The network is configured to operate using cXML. The direct web service call uses no middleware between the suite of business applications and the network. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106484 | GATEWAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AND METHOD THEREOF - A gateway configuration management method includes: receiving scanned information comprising address information of a configuration management server obtained by a scanning unit by scanning a scan code of a cloud gateway device; controlling a terminal device to connect to the configuration management server according to the address information; obtaining an unique identifier and a network address of the cloud gateway device after the terminal device is connected to the configuration management server; determining configuration data corresponding to the obtained unique identifier of the cloud gateway device according to relationships between the configuration data and the unique identifiers; sending the configuration data corresponding to the unique identifier to the cloud gateway device according to the network address of the cloud gateway device; and configuring the cloud gateway device according to the configuration data received by the cloud gateway device. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106485 | System and Method for Facilitating Design Configuration and Management of Data Center - System(s) and method(s) for facilitating design configuration of data center to provide management of the data center is disclosed. Input parameters providing design and operational requirements are received. Based on the input parameters, objectives are determined. The objectives refer to one or more technical requirements with respect to plurality of phases associated with the life cycle of the data center. The objectives are then used to create a generic configuration with respect to one or more services associated with the life cycle. The generic configuration is mapped with a predefined set of configuration stored in a knowledge repository in order to obtain a technology specific format. The generic configuration is further used to design a tool specific configuration to provide management of each phase of the life cycle of the data center. | 04-16-2015 |
20150113105 | AUTOMATED PROVISIONING OF A HYBRID NETWORK - An improved provisioning process for a hybrid network that makes use of Layer 2 technologies instead of Layer 3 technologies to enable automated provisioning of a custom hybrid network for a customer. In some embodiments, the automated provisioning can commence after a customer makes selections of the servers and/or services to be included in the hybrid network. The customer selections can trigger an automated process whereby the resources to be shared can be added, and the networking configuration and protocols can be automatically configured for all communication between all of the servers/components on the hybrid network | 04-23-2015 |
20150120885 | LOADING AN OPERATING SYSTEM OF A DISKLESS COMPUTE NODE USING A SINGLE VIRTUAL PROTOCOL INTERCONNECT ('VPI') ADAPTER - Loading an operating system of a diskless compute node using a single Virtual Protocol Interconnect (‘VPI’) adapter, including: setting, by a VPI firmware module during startup of the compute node, an operational mode of the VPI adapter to operate in accordance with a first data communications protocol, the VPI adapter including a preboot execution environment module that supports the first data communications protocol prior to loading an operating system and a driver for the first data communications protocol; retrieving, by the VPI firmware module from a network source via the VPI adapter in accordance with the first data communications protocol, the operating system and a driver for the second data communications protocol; and responsive to loading the operating system and the driver for the second data communications protocol, switching the operational mode of the VPI adapter to operate in accordance with the second data communications protocol. | 04-30-2015 |
20150120886 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SERVICE IMPORT/EXPORT IN A CLOUD PLATFORM ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an embodiment, described herein is a system and method for exporting and importing a PaaS service and associated configurations across service domains are provided. The system comprises a cloud platform component provided as an installable software suite within a cloud environment; a test to production (T2P) framework module that includes a PaaS plugin and a plurality of T2P plugins and tools; and a user interface where the plugins and tools can be invoked to export domain configurations from a source service domain, and import the domain configurations to a target domain. In accordance with an embodiment, the system further includes a service provider interface (SPI) that can be implemented by an SME of each service housed in a service domain, to provide service backup and restore functionalities for exporting and importing that service. | 04-30-2015 |
20150120887 | DEPLOYING A CLUSTER - A method and system for deploying a cluster, wherein the cluster contains a plurality of cluster members, the method comprising: obtaining a unique identifier for each cluster member; according to the unique identifier of each cluster member, obtaining cluster configuration information for the cluster member; configuring the cluster member using the obtained cluster configuration information of the cluster member; and deploying the cluster. The method and system can enhance the cluster deployment efficiency. | 04-30-2015 |
20150127783 | CENTRALIZED NETWORKING CONFIGURATION IN DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for centralized networking configuration in distributed systems are disclosed. Networking related metrics from a plurality of sources within a distributed system are obtained at a networking configuration server. A set of rules to be used to apply a network configuration option to a particular category of traffic associated with a node of the distributed system is determined based on the collected metrics and on networking management policies. A representation of the set of rules is transmitted to the node of the distributed system to schedule network transmissions in accordance with the networking configuration option. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127784 | DYNAMIC CONVERSION OF HARDWARE RESOURCES OF A SERVER SYSTEM - Embodiments herein provide for a method of dynamically converting servers and a computer and storage readable medium configured to do the same. In the method a first server enters a server conversion while a second server performs one or more network services. A current physical hardware configuration and logical hardware configuration of a first server and a second server is verified. Possible conversions are calculated of one or more valid logical hardware configurations and one or more valid physical hardware configurations based on the current hardware configurations of the first server and the second server. A valid physical hardware configuration is selected for both servers from the calculated possible conversions. The physical hardware is updated for the conversion of the physical hardware configuration of the first server. The current logical configuration of the first server converts to a valid logical hardware configuration based on the calculated possible conversions. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127785 | GATEWAY SERVICE MANAGER FOR BUSINESS OBJECT APPLICATIONS - A system includes a backend server with business applications within a business object processing framework. The business object processing framework includes a framework data format. The system also includes a generic gateway service manager coupled to the business object processing framework, and a gateway coupled to the generic gateway service manager. The gateway includes a gateway data format, and the generic gateway service manager is positioned between the business object processing framework and the gateway. The generic gateway service manager is configured to retrieve the framework data format from the business object processing format and store the framework data format in the gateway. The gateway is configured to transfer data between the business object processing framework and a user interface using the framework data format stored in the gateway. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127786 | Communicating Data Associated with Different Personas of a User - An electronic device has a plurality of environments including respective communication stacks. The environments correspond to respective different user personas. Data associated with the different user personas are communicated in corresponding separate transport flows over the network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127787 | DEPLOYMENT DEVICE AND DEPLOYMENT METHOD - When constructing a system, normality of the system is confirmed more efficiently. In deployment device ( | 05-07-2015 |
20150134788 | GEOSPATIAL BASED MANAGEMENT OF CONFIGURATION PROFILES - A system, method and program product for managing profiles for devices in a network. A computer system is disclosed having a configuration management system for managing configuration profiles for a set of devices within a network, and includes: a boundary definition system that employs a computerized process for defining a plurality of geospatial boundaries; a device manager that employs a computerized process for interfacing with remote agents associated with respective devices to recognize when a device has migrated into a new geospatial boundary; and a profile management system that employs a computerized process for uploading an updated configuration profile to the remote agent in response to the device being migrated to the new geospatial boundary. | 05-14-2015 |
20150142932 | NETWORK ELEMENT AND A CONTROLLER FOR MANAGING THE NETWORK ELEMENT - A network element (101-104) of a software-defined network is adapted to construct a configuration system on the basis of configuration data received from a controller ( | 05-21-2015 |
20150149601 | Computer Implemented System for Collecting Usage Statistics for IT Systems - Methods of gathering usage statistics related to computer programs implemented on one or more network computers include providing instructions comprising a configuration file generally defining settings for data exchange between specified computer programs installed on said computers and a central server, loading said instructions into a memory media and executing said instructions by a processing unit of the central server, and receiving, upon startup of a computer program, data from the computer program at the central server using the processing unit and memory media. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149602 | INCREMENTALLY MANAGING DISTRIBUTED CONFIGURATION DATA - A configuration management system provides a partitioned data model for collecting and representing configuration information from a diverse set of sources to allow easier modeling of very large, highly redundant sets of enterprise configuration information. The system partitions large configuration schema into logical subcomponents that can be combined, shared, and reused. The system also partitions instantiated data models into logical sub-models that can be combined, shared, reused, and incrementally updated. Each product team can provide its own configuration schema, which allows the domain experts in a particular field to provide reusable models for their products. These models may include sub-models that allow reuse of selected portions of the configuration schema. When the system stores data related to each portion of the model, it stores the data in a partitioned manner that makes incremental updates of each component of the model more straightforward and less resource intensive. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149603 | DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING SYSTEM - There is provided a distributed processing system including: a data store server for storing data; a data store part for storing data in the data store server; a data acquisition part for obtaining data from the data store server; and an operation manager part for performing configuration change on the whole system. The distributed processing system has a function of managing the configuration content and the configuration order for each device according to the change content, to determine the target and order to be configured based on the managed information by the operation manager part. Further, the distributed processing system has a function of performing a configuration change process on the data store part, the data acquisition part, and the data store server by the operation manager part. | 05-28-2015 |
20150149604 | CONTENT SWITCH MANAGEMENT - Embodiments of a system and method manage a configuration of a plurality of content switching devices in a networked system by generating a first configuration data file and translating the first configuration data file into one or more device specific configuration data files, each device specific configuration file corresponding to a device type of the one or more content switching devices. Some embodiments of the system and method then communicate the one or more device specific configuration data files to each content switching device of a corresponding device type to configure each content switching device. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295757 | MANAGEMENT OF MOBILE DEVICES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A network environment can include a proxy management server. The proxy management server can have access to multiple disparately located MDM servers. A mobile device receives configuration information including a network address of the proxy management server. The mobile device stores the network address of the proxy management server. In response to receiving a management notification such as notification that one or more of the multiple MDM servers has management information (e.g., commands, data, etc., to be executed by the mobile device) available for the mobile device, the mobile device utilizes the stored network address to communicate with the proxy management server. The proxy management server checks availability of the management information from multiple disparately located MDM management servers. The proxy management server retrieves the management information from the management servers and forwards it to the mobile device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295765 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF REMOTE CAPTURE AGENTS FOR NETWORK DATA CAPTURE - The disclosed embodiments provide a method and system for facilitating the processing of network data. During operation, the system obtains, at a remote capture agent, configuration information for the remote capture agent from a configuration server over a network. Next, the system uses the configuration information to configure the generation of event data from network packets at the remote capture agent. Upon receiving an update to the configuration information from the configuration server, the system uses the update to reconfigure the generation of the event data by the remote capture agent during runtime of the remote capture agent. | 10-15-2015 |
20150301982 | GENERATING PROXY AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION SCRIPTS - Methods and systems for generating a proxy automatic configuration (PAC) script based on the location of a device. One example method includes receiving a request for a proxy automatic configuration (PAC) script from a source address associated with a device; determining, based at least in part on the source address, a location of the device; generating a PAC script based at least in part on the determined location of the device; and sending a response to the request for the PAC script including the generated PAC script. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304161 | SCRIPT TERMINATION - A scheduler may run a script. The script may have a plurality of configuration commands for a network device. A first configuration command of the plurality of configuration commands may be called to begin. A script engine may determine whether a termination request has been received. The script engine may run the first configuration command when it is determined the termination request is not received. While the first configuration command is running, the script engine may receive the termination request. Instead of terminating immediately upon detection of a termination request, the first configuration command may complete. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304169 | INFORMATION ASSET PLACER - A computer-implemented method for the placing of information assets, including: discovering information about a new or changed information asset; determining one or more characteristics of an ideal location for the information asset; determining one or more characteristics of one or more locations in an information technology environment; determining the compatibility of the information asset with the location(s) by comparing the characteristic(s) of the ideal location to the characteristic(s) of the actual location(s); reporting the compatibility to a user; and optionally suggesting alternative placement locations. The locations may be part of one or more locational schemas. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312096 | Method for Configuring a Communication Device Within an Industrial Automation System and Distribution Unit for a Configuration Server of the Industrial Communication Network - A configuration unit of a communication device which communicates a datagram with a configuration request to a configuration server in order to configure a communication device within an industrial automation system, wherein the configuration server allocates to the communication device, in response to the configuration request, at least one first topological device name component assigned to a spatial or hierarchical arrangement of the configuration server, each forwarding distribution unit adds a further topological device name component assigned to a spatial or hierarchical arrangement of the respective forwarding distribution unit, and the configuration unit of the communication device generates the device name thereof from the topological device name components and a name component that is unique within the subnetwork of the device. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312097 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK CONFIGURATION OF A PRE-CONFIGURED HYPER-CONVERGED COMPUTING DEVICE - In a computer-implemented method for automatic network configuration of a pre-configured hyper-converged computing device network configuration information is requested from another pre-configured hyper-converged computing device already configured on a network. The network configuration information is received from the another pre-configured hyper-converged computing device. The network configuration is automatically performed by the pre-configured hyper-converged computing device such that the pre-configured hyper-converged computing device is automatically configured to the network. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312131 | Software Defined Wireless Device Management - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device for software-defined client device management. Specifically, a network device can cause a client device to switch association with a first access point to a second access point. The network device determines whether a number of times the client device has been caused to switch association with an access point exceeds a threshold value for the first period of time. If not, the network device causes the client device to switch to an association with a third access point. Also, the network device determines a configuration indicating when any access point with which a client device is associated may be modified. Based on the configuration, the network device determines whether an association of the client device should not be modified. Also, based on one or more attributes, the network device selectively causes the client device to switch an association. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319037 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VIRTUALIZING LAYER-3 (NETWORK) ENTITIES - A method for virtualizing the commonly used network (ISO layer-3) entities is described. The entities include router, routing/topology database, firewall, load balancer, etc. The virtualization paradigm helps network-aware services and devices to be more effective, and it is equally attractive for service-/device-aware networks. In terms of using the network entities, the Applications and Services can utilize either virtual entities or physical entities or a combination of both in order to gracefully support service experience, overload and faults, seamlessly. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319039 | Policy Configuration Management Console - Methods and systems for managing policy configurations of different device types are described herein. An interface may be provided to a user where individual settings of different device types that are similar or the same are mapped to the same setting on the interface. The valid options or values for the individual device types are evaluated to identify common options or values. The user may select the common options or values of each common setting. The values selected as common settings values may be saved as the values for the corresponding individual settings of the different device types. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326430 | Home Network Information - An example includes a communication interface and a mapping module. The communication interface is to receive a request from an access point, wherein the request is for home network information. The mapping module is to receive the request from the communication interface and determine, based on a first table, a second switch where the requested home network information is stored. The mapping module is then to cause the communication interface to transmit the request received from the access point to the second switch; receive, via the communication interface, a response from the second switch, wherein the response comprises the requested home network information. The mapping module then causes the communication interface to transmit the received home network information to the access point. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326431 | ESTABLISHING A SECURE WIRELESS NETWORK WITH A MINIMUM HUMAN INTERVENTION - An example method disclosed herein includes receiving, at a controller device, a user input; based on the user input, displaying a prompt to direct a user to press one or more buttons on a playback device; subsequently, receiving from the playback device over a first network, network information associated with the playback device; determining, based on the received network information, that the playback device is not a part of a secure playback network; based on a determination that the network information is not a part of a secure playback network, generating network parameters for a secure second network; subsequently, (i) joining the secure second network based on the generated network parameters, and (ii) causing the playback device to join the secure second network based on the generated network parameters; and displaying an indication that the controller device and the playback device have joined the secure second network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333956 | CONFIGURATION OF A CLUSTER SERVER USING CELLULAR AUTOMATA - A cluster computer server is configured after a system reset or other configuration event. Each node of a fabric of the cluster compute server is employed, for purposes of configuration, as a cell in a cellular automaton, thereby obviating the need for a special configuration network to communicate configuration information from a central management unit. Instead, the nodes communicate configuration information using the same fabric interconnect that is used to communicate messages during normal execution of software services at the nodes. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333957 | CENTRALIZED DISTRIBUTION OF CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR A CLUSTER SERVER - A management node of a server maintains a database of configuration parameters that stores the individual configuration parameters for each compute node. In response to a boot request at a compute node, a configuration parameter control module at the node intercepts locally targeted requests to load configuration parameters. The configuration parameter module sends the requests to the management node and in response the management node sends configuration parameters responsive to the requests. The configuration parameter module provides the configuration parameters to the compute node, thereby emulating a local boot memory for the compute node. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333959 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A method and system for providing device management are shown. The system and method provides an installation of Mobile Enterprise Stack system for managing one or more devices and services associated with the one or more devices. The system and method further provide a process of managing configuration and management of the one or more devices in accordance with predefined rules and templates. The system and method further provides configuring an application data model comprising configuration template selected for each of the device, wherein the configuration template provides a resource operation for performing a task thereby providing management of device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334084 | DHCP COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) communications configuration system includes a client information handling system (IHS) coupled to a controller over a network. The client IHS creates a plurality of DHCP discover messages that include capability data that describes at least one hardware resource on the client IHS, and sends the plurality of DHCP discover messages over the network. The controller receives the plurality of DHCP discover messages and processes the capability data to determine configuration data for the client IHS, creates a plurality of DHCP offer messages including the configuration data for the client IHS, and sends the plurality of DHCP offer messages over the network to the client IHS. The client IHS then uses the configuration data to configure the client IHS. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341207 | CONFIGURATION INFORMATION AUTO-MANAGEMENT METHOD BASED ON INTELLIGENT SUBSTATION - The invention discloses a method of automatic management on configuration information based upon an intelligent substation, the intelligent substation applying the IEC-61850 standard including IED devices and a switch, wherein the method includes the following steps: parsing an intelligent substation configuration file to acquire communication configuration information and communication association configuration information of the IED devices; and generating a switch configuration file from the communication configuration information and the communication association configuration information of the IED devices. The invention can parse the intelligent substation configuration file, generate the switch configuration file and perform automatic configuration of the industrial Ethernet switch in the intelligent substation using the switch configuration | 11-26-2015 |
20150341218 | DYNAMIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION BASED ON CLOUD-COLLABORATIVE EXPERIMENTATION - A server includes a first module that receives information from a plurality of systems. Each system of the plurality of systems includes functional units that are dynamically configurable during operation of the system. The information from each system of the plurality of systems includes performance data collected while executing a program when the functional units are configured according to a configuration setting respective to the system. The server also includes a second module that analyzes the received information to select a best-performing configuration setting of the configuration settings received from the plurality of systems. The server also includes a third module that provides a new configuration setting to the plurality of systems. The new configuration setting is a modification of the best-performing configuration. The server iterates on receiving the information from the plurality of systems, analyzing the received information and providing the new configuration setting to the plurality of systems. | 11-26-2015 |
20150350009 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENHANCED AUTO-NEGOTIATION FOR NGBASE-T - A system and method for enhanced auto-negotiation for NGBASE-T. Link partners can be configured to exchange advanced NGBASE-T configuration information such as type, profile, capability and mode information of the PHY in one or more next page messages. Determined cabling parameters that are reflective of communication channel characteristics can be used in the auto-negotiation selection of a configuration for NGBASE-T operation. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350010 | USER-CONTROLLED NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR HANDLING MULTIPLE CLASSES OF SERVICE - A network configuration method includes receiving end user input indicative of a network configuration. The end user input may include: a plurality of service classes, a particular packet header field for each of the plurality of service classes, and a particular service class mixture for the plurality of service classes. The particular service class may be indicated by a particular value of the particular packet header field. The method may further include configuring an ingress router to prioritize packets sent to the end user in accordance with the network configuration and configuring an egress router to queue network packets sent from the end user in accordance with the network configuration. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350011 | PROVIDING LOGICAL NETWORKING FUNCTIONALITY FOR MANAGED COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for providing logical networking functionality for managed computer networks, such as for virtual computer networks provided on behalf of users or other entities. In some situations, a user may configure or otherwise specify a network topology for a virtual computer network, such as a logical network topology that separates multiple computing nodes of the virtual computer network into multiple logical sub-networks and/or that specifies one or more logical networking devices for the virtual computer network. After a network topology is specified for a virtual computer network, logical networking functionality corresponding to the network topology may be provided in various manners, such as without physically implementing the network topology for the virtual computer network. In some situations, the computing nodes may include virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems, such as by or on behalf of one or more users. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350012 | USING VIRTUAL NETWORKING DEVICES TO MANAGE ROUTING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN CONNECTED COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for providing managed virtual computer networks whose configured logical network topology may have one or more virtual networking devices, such as by a network-accessible configurable network service, with corresponding networking functionality provided for communications between multiple computing nodes of a virtual computer network by emulating functionality that would be provided by the networking devices if they were physically present. The networking functionality provided for a managed computer network may include supporting a connection between that managed computer network and one or more other managed computer networks, such as via a provided virtual peering router to which each of the managed computer networks may connect, with the functionality of the virtual peering router being emulated by modules of the configurable network service without physically providing the virtual peering router, including to manage routing communications between the inter-connected managed computer networks in accordance with client-specified configuration information. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350034 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFLUENCE DETERMINATION METHOD AND MEDIUM - An information processing according to the present invention device includes: a physical configuration selecting unit which selects a physical device to be determined an influence; a logical configuration range specifying unit which specifies a range of a logical configuration related to the physical device; a service level influence specifying unit which determines an achievement state of a service level on the basis of a service level maintained by a service in the logical configuration and a service level value related to the physical device, and specifies a score which is information indicating the degree of an influence given to the service level of the logic configuration on the basis of the achievement state; and a logic information sorting unit which sorts order of displayed information about the logical configurations on the basis of the score. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350109 | MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE OPERATION THEREOF WITH SHARED COMPUTING RESOURCES - The invention relates to a method for providing computing resources for at least one medical imaging system and/or image processing system and to a medical imaging system and/or image processing system, a computer program and a machine-readable storage medium. The imaging system and/or image processing system exchanges ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150358412 | Method and CPE for promoting portal website based on MAC address - A method and CPE for promoting a portal website base on an MAC address are provided. The method includes: after a WAN connection is established successfully, CPE query a pre-established address association table; when a corresponding MAC address terminal in the address association table is connected with the CPE, the CPE set a portal website redirection rule to the IP address of the corresponding MAC address terminal; and when the terminal accesses an external network, the CPE promote the portal website according to the set portal website redirection rule. The present invention can realize the promotion of a portal website at selectable intervals, and improve the promotion frequency and flexibility of the portal website. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365275 | CLOUD ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION FOR CLOUD APPLICATIONS - Various embodiments of systems and methods for cloud environment configuration for cloud application are described herein. In an aspect, the method includes receiving a request for starting a cloud application. In response to the received request, binaries of the cloud application are invoked and the cloud environment configuration for the cloud application is identified. It is determined whether the binaries of the cloud application are to be uploaded independently of its cloud environment configuration. When the binaries are to be uploaded independently of its cloud environment configuration, the binaries and the cloud environment configuration are uploaded separately in different transactions onto cloud. In case the binaries are not to be uploaded independently of its cloud environment configuration, an archive including the binaries and the cloud environment configuration is generated and uploaded onto the cloud. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365497 | PROVIDING ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACROSS MULTIPLE COMPUTING DEVICES - A system having one or more servers is provided. The one or more servers implement a plurality of agents to access a plurality of data items from each network resource in a plurality of network resources. Each of the network resources corresponds to a network service. The one or more servers integrate data items from each of the plurality of network resources, and enable functionality that operates on a set of integrated data items. The one or more servers implement a plurality of platform interfaces that each corresponds to a platform for a computing device, and provide, through each of the platform interfaces, an output that is based on the set of integrated data items. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372857 | CLOUD FRAMEWORK FOR MULTI-CLOUD EXTENSION - A representation of network resources and relationships among the network resources is established. The network resources include network resources of a tenant and network resources of a plurality of clouds. Input specifying at least one network resource of the tenant, at least one network resource of each of two of the plurality of clouds, and an action directed to the specified network resources is received in the representation. A multi-cloud extension is configured in accordance with the input. The multi-cloud extension extends to network resources of the tenant and the plurality of clouds, and is isolated from network resources of other tenants. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372859 | Device to Device Content Upgrades - In embodiments of device to device content upgrades, a computing device includes a peer sharing manager that shares content and upgrades to content with peer devices. The computing device downloads content and upgrades from sources on the Internet, and shares the content and upgrades with peer devices that lack an Internet connection. A lowest supported version of the content can be shared from the computing device to one of the peer devices. The lowest supported version of the content determines capabilities of the peer device and establishes a peer-to-peer communication link with the computing device. The peer device reports the capability information to the computing device and, if the computing device determines that the peer device is capable of supporting an upgraded version of the content, the computing device communicates the upgraded version of the content to the peer device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372864 | METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY RENUMBERING PORTS AND AN APPARATUS THEREOF - Embodiments of the apparatus of dynamically renumbering ports relate to a network chip that minimizes the total logic on the network chip by limiting the number of states that needs to be preserved for all ports on the network chip. Each pipe on the network chip implements a dynamic port renumbering scheme that dynamically assigns a relative port number for each port assigned to that pipe. The dynamic port renumbering scheme allows for internal parallelism without increasing the total amount of state space required for the ports on the network chip. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381403 | DELIVERY OF CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FOR CROSS-PLATFORM APPLICATION INTEGRATION - A method and a device are disclosed including one or more plug-in or Add-on Software Components (ASC) provided by a Social Business Platform (SBP) to deliver configuration information for the integration of various applications, services, and functionality from other platforms in an integrated environment. Each ASC may deliver a particular type of configuration information usable to configure and/or integrate services from various platforms, the services including data tiles and data streams, storage and document management services, single-function applications, core applications like communication and task management services, and other application-specific add-ons. In various embodiments, the configuration information may be distributed as packages of one or more files, which describe the configuration to be applied to the integrated services. In some embodiments, a global registry may be used to identify and deploy the available add-ons, while in other embodiments, the add-ons may be deployed manually or in other custom manners. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381410 | System and Method for Affinity-based Network Configuration - Embodiments are provided to perform affinity analysis and management of network services. The embodiments use model-driven engineering to capture more generic affinity-based relationships, including between applications and endpoints and between customers and the network infrastructure. In an embodiment method, upon receiving at a network component a request for an application, affinity analysis is performed on the application. A network configuration is then determined according to results of the affinity analysis. The affinity analysis is performed and the network configuration is determined according to business rules defining application and customer priorities. The business rules are defined using a single information model and implemented using at least one data model. The network infrastructure is then configured according to the affinity analysis and the network configuration. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381411 | CLOUD ORCHESTRATION ENGINE - An orchestration engine that interfaces with the various clouds to implement the system solution. The orchestration engine builds, configures, and converges the single system solution. The orchestration engine builds the system by instantiating machines and services on the various clouds. The orchestration engine configures the system according to input from the client and the solution provider and then converges the various systems by establishing relationships and connections between the various services. Optionally, the orchestration engine also runs tests to verify that the system is working properly. Once the system has been built, configured and converged, the orchestration engine provides the client with a single entry point for using the system solution. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381412 | TRANSPORTING MULTI-DESTINATION NETWORKING TRAFFIC BY SENDING REPETITIVE UNICAST - In a distributed network environment, a first virtual machine sends a first virtual machine control information to a first network system. The first network system sends a first control information to a first network control system in response to receiving the first virtual machine control information. The first network control system sends a portion of the first control information to a number of network systems. The first network control system sends a second control information to the first network system. The first virtual machine sends a first packet to the first network system which generates a unicast packet using a portion of the first packet and a portion of the second control information. A second network system receives and processes the unicast packet. The second network system sends a copy of the processed unicast packet to a second virtual machine associated with a second tenant. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381413 | GEOGRAPHIC AWARENESS IN A DISTRIBUTED STRICT QUEUE - Methods and systems for implementing geographic awareness in a distributed strict queue are disclosed. A plurality of queue servers are selected to receive a plurality of messages from a plurality of queue producers. The queue servers are selected from a pool of available queue servers to optimize the performance of a distributed strict queue system. The plurality of messages are distributed to the queue servers based on strict order parameters for the messages. Messages that share a value for the strict order parameter are distributed to the same queue server. The messages are enqueued at the queue servers. Messages that share a value for the strict order parameter are enqueued in a strict order based on the time of receipt at the queue server. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381461 | SELECTIVE IP ADDRESS ALLOCATION FOR PROBES THAT DO NOT HAVE ASSIGNED IP ADDRESSES - Systems and methods for managing communication in an IF network between a server and a probe that does not maintain an IP address, by selectively restricting which IP addresses that are identified, as active in the network may be borrowed for the probes. Restriction of IP addresses may include a black list to exclude specific IP addresses, a white list from which IP addresses can be drawn or both. This permits control over which IP addresses may be borrowed by probes, reducing false alarms, alerts or other network concerns caused by unexpected IP traffic on a particular IP address in the network. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381472 | ABSTRACTION LAYER AND DISTRIBUTION SCOPE FOR A LOGICAL SWITCH ROUTER ARCHITECTURE - A tool for forwarding plane support in a distributed system. The tool receives, by one or more computer processors, one or more messages. The tool determines, by one or more computer processors, a distribution scope for the one or more messages. The tool determines, by one or more computer processors, a destination endpoint ID for the one or more messages. The tool sends, by one or more computer processors, the one or more messages to one or more forwarding plane agents. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381753 | OPTIMIZATION OF ENHANCED NETWORK LINKS - A method and apparatus for dynamic network link acceleration provides a managed communication link for accelerated and reliable network communication between a client and other network devices. In one or more embodiments, a client computing device which generates communication packets of a first type is enhanced with a front end mechanism which selectively encodes the data packets into packets of a second type. The data packets which are encoded into a second type are transmitted over a managed communication link which may provide error correction, security, quality of service, and other services including acceleration of communications. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006605 | NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE AND NETWORK SETTING SYSTEM - A typical network setting control device according to the present invention can be configured by a control device which includes an input device, an output device, a storage device, and a processing device and is connected to at least one communication device through a network. The control device performs network setting in the communication device on the basis of network setting data. The processing device creates a setting procedure of network setting. The setting procedure of the network setting is determined on the basis of the network setting data and an existing network configuration. | 01-07-2016 |
20160013975 | CONFIGURING INTERACTION CONTROL IN MULTI-CONTROLLER NETWORK | 01-14-2016 |
20160016596 | Train Network Management System and Method - A train network management system for a train having a locomotive and railcars, including a node computer on the railcar and communicating with a high-speed network device for receiving and transmitting data over a high-speed network, and a locomotive computer on the locomotive and communicating with a high-speed network device for receiving and transmitting data over the high-speed network, where a communication path is generated between at least two high-speed network devices of the railcars and the high-speed network device of the locomotive, such that high-speed data communication is provided between the high-speed network devices of the railcars and the locomotive. A railcar network unit is also disclosed. | 01-21-2016 |
20160018881 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A POWER-EFFICIENT FRAMEWORK TO MAINTAIN DATA SYNCHRONIZATION OF A MOBILE PERSONAL COMPUTER TO SIMULATE A CONNECTED SCENARIO - An apparatus and method for a power-efficient framework to maintain data synchronization of a mobile personal computer (MPC) are described. In one embodiment, the method includes the detection of a data synchronization wakeup event while the MPC is operating according to a sleep state. Subsequent to wakeup event, at least one system resource is disabled to provide a minimum number of system resources required to re-establish a network connection. In one embodiment, user data from a network server is synchronized on the MPC without user intervention; the mobile platform system resumes operation according to the sleep state. In one embodiment, a wakeup alarm is programmed according to a user history profile regarding received e-mails. In a further embodiment, data synchronizing involves disabling a display, and throttling the system processor to operate at a reduced frequency. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020954 | Network Device Configuration by Mobile Device - In one implementation, a wireless network device is automatically accessed and configured through a mobile device. The mobile device receives provisioning data encoded for installation and operation of a network device and decodes the provisioning data to identify at least one access parameter for the network device. The mobile device accesses a wireless network of the network device according to the access parameter. Once access has been established, the mobile device transmits a configuration signal including a network configuration setting through the wireless network to the network device for the installation of the network device. The network device is provisioned based on the network configuration setting. | 01-21-2016 |
20160028582 | Storage Unit Priority Based on Configuration Information - Examples disclosed herein relate to storage unit priority based on configuration information. For example, a processor may analyze configuration information associated with the storage units to create a priority order associated with the storage units. The configuration information associated with each storage unit may be standardized for comparison to the configuration information associated with the other storage units. The processor may perform an action related to the storage units according to the priority order. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028656 | Extending Virtual Station Interface Discovery Protocol (VDP) and VDP-Like Protocols for Dual-Homed Deployments in Data Center Environments - Techniques are provided for provisioning network resources for virtual machines. At a first switch device, a configuration request message is received from a virtual switch to provision virtual network segmentation resources for a virtual machine managed by the virtual switch. The first switch device provisions the virtual network segmentation resources for the virtual machine. The first switch devices sends to a second switch device a first synchronization message that includes information describing the virtual network segmentation resources. The second switch device is a peer of the first switch device. The first switch device also sends to the second switch device a second synchronization message that includes state information indicating that the first switch device is in an active state for servicing the virtual machine and that the second switch device is to be placed in a dormant state for servicing the virtual machine. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028817 | WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION OF MEDIA CONTENT AND SUBSCRIPTION CONTENT - Arrangements are provided which use a host computer to configure a wireless portable device's network connection parameters. The radio on the portable device may be used to help locate nearby accessible wireless networks. Once a synchronization relationship between the portable device and a media library on a host computer is established, periodically updated content, such as podcasts, may be discovered and subscribed to using software on the host computer, and the content synchronized with the host computer. A portable device may manage episodic content, such as podcasts, using the device's own wireless connection, and may further send such content to other portable devices. A central user profile may be set up on a web server to synchronize multiple wireless or wired devices. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028844 | GENERIC REMOTE CONNECTION TO A COMMAND LINE INTERFACE APPLICATION - A method to establish a generic remote connection to a command line interface (CLI) application is provided. A server is implemented. The server is configured with a data input channel, a data output channel, and an error output channel, each connected to the CLI application. A second socket for routing a dedicated error data stream is configured. The dedicated error stream in the second socket may execute concurrently with data streams being executed in a first socket. At least one client is implemented. The at least one client is configured with the data input channel, data output channel, and the error output channel. | 01-28-2016 |
20160036632 | COMPUTER SYSTEM - In a computer system connected to a client, the client has a system configuration including a first storage that stores data and a first computer, the computer system has a second storage that stores data and a second computer that processes data stored in the second storage and a management server, the management server acquires an identifier of an application processed in the first computer, data utilized for executing the application and stored in the first storage and information of the system configuration of the client from the client, the system configuration is composed in the second storage and the second computer based upon the acquired information of the system configuration, the application specified by the identifier is operated in the composed system configuration using the acquired data, and a result of the operation is output to the client. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036650 | MICROCONTROLLER AT A CARTRIDGE OF A CHASSIS - A method for monitoring computing resources of a cartridge is described herein. The method may include receiving, via the microcontroller, data associated with the computing components of the cartridge. The method may include providing, via the microcontroller, the data based on the monitoring to a management controller that is remote from the cartridge. The method may include analyzing, via the management controller, the data received. The method may include communicating, via the management controller, operational signals based on the analysis to the microcontroller in response to data received. | 02-04-2016 |
20160043903 | EXTENSIBLE FRAMEWORK TO SUPPORT DIFFERENT DEPLOYMENT ARCHITECTURES - A method for managing services and resources across a plurality of deployment architectures is described. The method begins by defining a profile corresponding to a deployment architecture. Each profile is defined according to a meta-model. The meta model comprises a service object representing a service that is accessible over a network, resource objects representing resources consumed by the service, inter-relationships between the service and resources, inter-relationships between the resources. For each profile, a topology is generated based on the profile. The topology includes the resources used to perform a task. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043919 | IDENTIFYING UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO NETWORK ELEMENTS AND DETERMINING THE IMPACT OF UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO NETWORK ELEMENTS ON NETWORK SERVICES - Methods of managing an information technology (IT) infrastructure include detecting by a configuration management system an unauthorized change to one of a plurality of network elements, determining by the configuration management system that the unauthorized change to the one of the plurality of network elements creates a risk condition to an operation of one of the services provided by the IT infrastructure, and initiating an action to remedy the unauthorized change in response to determining that the unauthorized change to the one of the plurality of network elements creates the risk condition to the operation of one of the services provided by the IT infrastructure. Related systems and computer program products are disclosed. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044114 | AUTOMATED CONFIGURATION OF ENDPOINT SECURITY MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for managing configuration of a client security application based on a network environment in which the client device is operating are provided. According to one embodiment, a network connection state of a client device with respect to a private network is determined by a client security application running on the client device. The client security application, then selects a configuration based on the determined network connection state. Finally, the client security application launches one or more functions of the client security application that are designated by the selected configuration. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044116 | AUTOMATED ORCHESTRATION OF INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICE BLOCKS IN HOSTED SERVICES - Orchestration of infrastructure service blocks (ISBs) within a hosted service may be automated. A datacenter deploying the hosted service may include one or more zones, each zone including at least a network and a server farm comprising one or more servers performing various roles within an infrastructure of the hosted service. A first orchestrator may receive a network and server manifest from the datacenter to be configured within an automation framework of the first orchestrator to create an ISB and/or update another ISB for each zone of the datacenter. The created ISB and/or updated other ISB may be deployed to a second orchestrator that may image the servers within each zone of the datacenter with the created ISB and/or updated other ISB. The hosted service may then be deployed at the datacenter such that the servers within each zone of the datacenter include the created ISB and/or updated other ISB. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044138 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, FUNCTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus includes a function management unit, a function-information acquisition unit, and a function-presenting unit. The function management unit manages an application having one or more functions and being capable of directly invoking any of the functions, where the management of the application is performed on a basis of the function. The function-information acquisition unit acquires information about functions relative to a running function of another application on a basis of the function being managed by the function management unit. The function-presenting unit that presents the information about functions acquired by the function-information acquisition unit. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050100 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR USING AN INTERMEDIATION FUNCTION - The present disclosure relates to methods and systems for generating an intermediation function and performing the intermediation function. The first method selects at least one command among a plurality of pre-defined commands stored at a configuration server, configures parameters of the at least one command, processes the at least one command to generate the intermediation function, transmits the intermediation function and the parameters to an intermediation platform, and stores the intermediation function and the parameters at the intermediation platform. The second method receives the intermediation function and parameters from the configuration server, stores the received intermediation function and the parameters at the intermediation platform, receives data from a user based on the parameters, processes the user data with the intermediation function based on the parameters, and transmits information generated by the processing of the user data to a database server. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050108 | OPTIMIZING A CLOUD-COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A method and associated systems for optimizing a computing platform. A processor joins sets of configurable parameters into groups that each identifies a configuration of the computing environment or of a component or subsystem of the computing environment. The processor generates a set of variations of each group, where each variation identifies a candidate configuration of the component, subsystem, or platform, and where each candidate configuration identifies a distinct set of values of the group of parameters associated with that component, subsystem, or platform. Each configuration of this first generation of configurations undergoes a massively parallel iterative procedure that generates a next generation of configurations by performing operations upon the first generation that are similar to those of a natural-selection process. The procedure repeats until successive generations converge, within resource constraints, to a fittest generation that represents an optimal or most nearly optimal configuration of the computing platform. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050239 | AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF DEVICES - Exemplary methods, computer systems, and computer program products for automatic registration of devices in a computer environment are provided. In one embodiment, the computer environment is configured for monitoring a fibre channel. In response to one of a fabric login (FLOGI) and a fixed disk (Fdisk) received from one of an initiator and a target disk, executing each of an automatic name server registration, a state change registration, and a management server registration to identify at least one of the plurality of devices, and signing up one of the initiator and the target disk for the automatic name server registration, the state change registration, and the management server registration, wherein port initialization is eliminated for the initiator. | 02-18-2016 |
20160056975 | System and Method for Virtualizing an IT Infrastructure with Remotely Accessible Virtual Desktops - A system and method for virtualizing an IT infrastructure providing remotely accessible virtual desktops. The system includes a portal for interfacing with a user to obtain and display IT infrastructure configuration and operating data. The system also includes platform creation module for creating, on a computer network accessible IT infrastructure platform device, a virtual computer network accessible over the TCP/IP computer network and comprising at least one remotely accessible virtual desktop. The platform creation module performs such operation automatically through use of specialized software scripts. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057101 | ASSET DETECTION SYSTEM - A pluggable asset detection engine is used to identify devices within a network. The pluggable asset detection engine includes a set of pluggable discovery sensors and is adapted to identify particular address information of a particular computing device within a network, using a first pluggable discovery sensor in the set of discovery sensors, and send an identification of the particular address information of the particular computing device to an asset management system for inclusion of the particular address information in an asset repository managed by the asset management system. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065482 | DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Measures for configuring a network aggregation device in a network. First routing data for a plurality of internet protocol (IP) flows configured on at least one edge device of a service provider network is identified. The edge device is located towards the service provider network from the network aggregation device. At least one utility metric for at least one IP flow in the identified plurality of IP flows is calculated. The at least one utility metric is calculated at least in part on the basis of one or more destination IP addresses associated with the at least one IP flow. A subset of IP flows from the identified plurality of IP flows is selected at least in part on the basis of the calculated at least one utility metric. Second routing data for the selected subset of IP flows is configured on the network aggregation device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065676 | Control Of Network Connected Systems - Technology for controlling network connected systems is disclosed. A wireless network can be scanned in order to determine a list of active network addresses. The list of active network addresses can be associated with a plurality of wireless devices that are actively communicating within the wireless network. One or more active network addresses of interest can be identified from the list of active network addresses. An address profile associated with the active network addresses of interest can be identified. One or more network connected systems can be controlled according to a predefined set of rules in the address profile. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065697 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A COMPUTING DEVICE TO USE A COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - A method for configuring a computing device to use a communication protocol is provided. The method is performed by a computing device that includes a host processor coupled to a bus processor and to memory. The method includes receiving, by the host processor, a human-readable configuration file that includes parameters for communication using the communication protocol. The method additionally includes generating, by the host processor, at least one data structure based on the parameters in the human-readable configuration file. Additionally, the method includes providing, to the bus processor, memory location associated with the at least one data structure for use in communicating using the communication protocol. | 03-03-2016 |
20160072667 | METHOD, NODE AND DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING A NETWORK OF CDN CACHING NODES - The invention relates to a method, a server and a distributed system for configuring a network of CDN caching nodes. The network comprises a hierarchy of virtual CDN caching nodes collocated in a single layer of physical CDN caching nodes. Each physical CDN caching node runs a client-server application and at least one physical CDN caching node runs a server instance of the application. The server instance of the application is operative to detect a modification in the layer of physical CDN caching nodes and to receive traffic load information from the physical CDN caching nodes. The server instance is also operative to compute a new network configuration for the virtual CDN caching nodes based on the modification detected, the traffic load information received and locations of the physical CDN caching nodes and to configure the network of physical CDN caching nodes with the new network configuration. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072669 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A VIRTUAL NETWORK EDGE AND OVERLAY WITH VIRTUAL CONTROL PLANE - A network system is provided between at least a first client site and a second client site. A client site network component is implemented at least at the first client site, the client site network component aggregating one or more diverse network connections so as to configure an aggregated connection that has increased throughput. At least one network server component may be configured to connect to the client site network component using the aggregated connection. A cloud network controller may be configured to manage the data traffic and a virtual edge providing transparent lower-link encryption for the aggregated connection between the client site network component and the network server component. The network server component includes a virtual control plane interface configured to establish a unicast path between the network server component and each of a plurality of remote network server components. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072683 | SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR CLOUD-PLATFORM INFRASTRUCTURE LAYOUTS - A system maintains, generates, and manages infrastructure layouts. The infrastructure layouts interconnect infrastructure components and capture relational aspects between the components within the interconnections. The infrastructure layouts map northbound services, which are service outputs, to southbound services, which are service capabilities, for fulfilment. The system may traverse a mapping from a northbound service to a fulfilling southbound service to generate a workflow to support deployment of the northbound service. In various implementations, the system may compare a path, which maps a northbound service to a southbound service, to a policy model to determine compliance with the policy. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072761 | AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SERVER NETWORK TOPOLOGY - Embodiments generally relate to network device management. The present technology discloses techniques that can enable an automatic generation of a network topology table for network management. It can use customized identifiers for servers in a server network. It can further enable an automated harvest of network information by utilizing service controllers embedded at different levels of a network. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073330 | INFRASTRUCTURE ACCESS VIA NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORKING DATA PATH - A first neighbor awareness networking (NAN) device may access data network infrastructure and may advertise a service associated with the data network infrastructure to a second NAN device. For example, the first NAN device may announce the service via a service announcement. The second NAN device may subscribe to the service through the first NAN device, and the second NAN device may proxy the service announcement to another NAN device. The other NAN device may also subscribe to the service in response to receiving the service announcement. For example, the second NAN device may operate as a “relay point” to provide the service to the other NAN device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080204 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING AND MANAGING CLOUD CONFIGURATIONS - A cloud configuration management method implemented in a cloud configuration management system communicatively coupled to one or more cloud nodes in a cloud system includes creating a plurality of golden configurations for each of a plurality of roles, wherein each of the one or more cloud nodes has one of the plurality of roles for operation in the cloud system; defining metadata rules for each of the plurality of golden configurations; performing a configuration analysis to audit the one or more cloud nodes using the metadata rules; and providing results of the configuration analysis to determine misconfiguration of any of the one or more cloud nodes. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080205 | Plug and Play Camera Configuration Tool for Internet Protocol Cameras with Export to Third-Party Video Management Software Support, Batch Firmware Update, and Other Capabilities - A camera configuration tool that facilitates a method for configuring and managing Internet Protocol (IP) cameras across a network. A software program scans a network to discover a plurality of IP cameras, wherein camera data for each of the plurality of IP cameras is retrieved and added to a camera table as a camera item that is selectable. Through a graphical user interface, a user can then manage and configure the plurality of IP cameras. A web interface access request, restart request, live feed request, and reset request can be sent to a specific camera from the plurality of IP cameras through the graphical user interface in addition to adjusting image settings and transmission settings, and uploading a firmware file to the specific camera. The camera data for the plurality of IP cameras can also be exported to a video management software, spreadsheet file, or text file. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087834 | Smart Home System and Control Method Therefor - Provided are a smart home system and control method therefor, the system comprising: a client ( | 03-24-2016 |
20160087835 | Methods and Apparatus to Provision Cloud Computing Network Elements - Methods and apparatus to provision cloud computing network elements are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving a selection of a cloud networking template from a client, wherein the cloud networking template includes a data center connector type and a wide area network connector type, configuring a virtual machine on a host server based on the cloud networking template, configuring a data center connector based on the data center connector type, configuring a wide area network connector based on the wide area network connector type, and coupling the wide area network connector to the data center connector and coupling the data center connector to the virtual machine within the host server to enable the client to access the virtual machine. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087839 | NETWORK GROUPING SYSTEM AND THE NETWORK GROUPING METHOD THEREOF - A network grouping system and a network grouping method thereof are provided. The network grouping system includes a controlling server and a connecting server. The connecting server connects to the controlling server via a switch. The connecting server embeds a grouping identifier into a network packet, and transmits the network packet to the controlling server via the switch. The controlling server retrieves the grouping identifier from the network packet, and creates a grouping configuration according to the grouping identifier. The grouping configuration records a matching relation of the grouping identifier with the connecting server. The controlling server further transmits the grouping configuration to the switch so that the switch passes on network packets according to the grouping configuration. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087843 | HOST PROFILES IN A STORAGE AREA NETWORK (SAN) ARCHITECTURE - Reference profiles for managing configurations of host machines in a cluster may include a subprofile that specifies a boot LUN in a SAN storage architecture. Processing of a reference profile includes properly resolving the boot LUN specified in the reference profile and the actual boot LUN used in a target host machine. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094360 | Method and Device for Commissioning a Smart Home Appliance - The disclosure provides a method for commissioning a smart home appliance, having the following features: detecting that the smart home appliance is due to be commissioned; configuring the smart home appliance in an interactive voice operation with a user of the smart home system; and adding the smart home appliance to the smart home system. The disclosure also provides a corresponding device, a corresponding computer program and a corresponding storage medium. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094381 | METHODS OF STRUCTURING DATA, PRE-COMPILED EXCEPTION LIST ENGINES, AND NETWORK APPLIANCES - A computer executed method is disclosed for sorting a plurality of internet protocol (IP) addresses. The method includes dividing the range of IP addresses into a plurality of clusters representing a plurality of contiguous sub-ranges, assigning each IP address to the cluster associated with the sub-range that includes that IP address, and assigning the IP addresses in each cluster to one of a plurality of pages. If one of the pages has a size less than a page size limit, the method includes duplicating on that page at least one of the IP addresses assigned to that page. For each page, the IP addresses assigned to that page are ordered by numeric value. A network appliance incorporating aspects of the method is also disclosed. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094386 | MULTI-ENROLLMENTS OF A COMPUTING DEVICE INTO CONFIGURATION SOURCES - Various technologies described herein pertain to managing multiple enrollments of a computing device into configuration sources. Respective enrollment types for the enrollments into the configuration sources can be detected. Moreover, respective control data for the enrollments into the configuration sources can be set based on the enrollment types. Provisioning elements (e.g., policies, preferences, configuration profiles, and resources) that satisfy the respective control data can be permitted to be applied to the computing device by the configuration sources as part of the enrollments. Further, disparate provisioning elements that fail to satisfy the respective control data can be prevented from being applied to the computing device as part of the enrollments. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094393 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, METHOD OF MANAGING A NETWORK AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A management apparatus that manages a network apparatus having a packet control function, wherein the network apparatus has configuration information that sets the control function, and wherein the management apparatus has: parameter information that manages settings of the control function of the network apparatus; and an inconsistent data detection module that obtains the configuration information from the network apparatus, and upon comparison of the configuration information with the parameter information, detects, as inconsistent data, information that does not match. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094512 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus determines, when a data transmission is executed, whether or not a host name designated as a destination of the data transmission is set to a terminal list indicating an external terminal that is permitted as a data transmission destination, and if a result of the determination is that the host name is set to the terminal list, permits data transmission irrespective of whether or not an IP address corresponding to the host name is set to the terminal list; and executes data transmission if data transmission is permitted. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099839 | TARGET MAPPING AND IMPLEMENTATION OF ABSTRACT DEVICE MODEL - A Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) for a target computing device that is equipped with an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) or other hardware element that provides forwarding and/or switching capability is used to analyze an abstract candidate device model. The abstract candidate device model is received from a controller and specifies intended forwarding behavior for the target device. The HAL analyzes the abstract candidate device model based on its knowledge of the architecture of the ASIC or other hardware element providing forwarding or switching capability to the target device. If the behavior is supported by the target device's architecture, the model may be implemented in a specific manner supported by that architecture and used to control forwarding behavior on the target device. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105321 | CROSS-CLOUD POLICY MANAGEMENT FOR HYBRID CLOUD DEPLOYMENTS - A method is provide for managing a migration of a virtual machine from a private data center managed by a first organization to a public cloud computing system by a second organization and where the first organization is a tenant. The configurations of physical infrastructure of the private data center that underlies the virtual machine are determined, along with a corresponding match preference indicating a level of criticality for some corresponding configuration at the public cloud system. The configurations and match preferences generated as part of a migration package. The public cloud computing system instantiates a corresponding VM based on the determined configurations and corresponding match preferences. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105390 | DISTRIBUTED COMPONENTS IN COMPUTING CLUSTERS - The subject disclosure is directed towards components in different server clusters, e.g., comprising software components such as components of a distributed computing system. Components are available for use by distributed computing system applications, yet managed by the distributed computing system runtime such that only a single instance can be activated and exist within communicating (non-partitioned) clusters. Also described is recovery from a situation in which no longer partitioned clusters each have created the same component. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105391 | CLIENT-DRIVEN LOAD BALANCING OF DYNAMIC IP ADDRESS ALLOCATION - Techniques are described for load balancing between DHCP servers at a DHCP client. Embodiments include receiving, at the DHCP client, a respective DHCPOFFER message from each of two or more DHCP servers, wherein each of the DHCPOFFER messages includes an IP address offer and load information describing a current workload of the respective DHCP server. One of DHCP servers is selected, at the DHCP client, to accept an offer for an IP address from, based on the received load information and a subnet on which the selected DHCP server is located. Embodiments transmit a DHCPREQUEST message, from the DHCP client, to the selected DHCP server, to accept the IP address offer from the selected DHCP server. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105392 | CENTRAL NAMESPACE CONTROLLER FOR MULTI-TENANT CLOUD ENVIRONMENTS - A centralized namespace controller allocates addresses in a distributed cloud infrastructure on-demand. Upon receiving a request to allocate addresses for a network to be provisioned by a cloud computing system included in the distributed cloud infrastructure, the centralized namespace controller allocates a network address that is unique within the distributed cloud infrastructure. Further, the centralized namespace controller allocates a range of virtual network interface cards (NIC) addresses that are unique within the network. The centralized namespace controller then allocates addresses from the range of virtual NIC addresses on an as-requested basis—when a virtual NIC is being created by the first cloud computing system on the network. Advantageously, by centralizing the allocation of addresses and dedicating independent NIC address ranges to different cloud computing systems, the centralized namespace controller enables stretched L2 networks between cloud computing systems while preventing duplicated addresses on the stretched networks. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105393 | CROSS-CLOUD NAMESPACE MANAGEMENT FOR MULTI-TENANT ENVIRONMENTS - Conditional address translation is performed in a multi-tenant cloud infrastructure to effectively support tenant-assigned addresses. For each tenant, the multi-tenant cloud infrastructure deploys both a private network used to communicate between the tenant and the cloud and a tenant-facing gateway to manage the private network. The multi-tenant cloud infrastructure also includes an externally-facing gateway used to communicate between the multi-tenant cloud and a public network. The tenant-facing gateways are configured to bypass address translation—providing consistent addressing across each private network irrespective of the physical location of resources linked by the private network. By contrast, the public-facing gateway is configured to translate source addresses in outgoing packets to addresses that are unique within the public network. Advantageously, discriminately mapping addresses enables multiple tenants to interact in a uniform fashion with both on-premises resources and cloud-hosted resources without incurring undesirable address collisions between tenants. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112254 | ADDRESS AUTOCONFIGURATION USING BLOOM FILTER PARAMETERS FOR UNIQUE ADDRESS COMPUTATION - In one embodiment, a method comprises generating, by a network device, a Bloom filter bit vector based on applying Bloom filter parameters to a candidate address autoconfigured by the network device; and selectively repeating, by the network device, the autoconfiguring of the candidate address until the corresponding Bloom filter bit vector includes a bit set at a reserved bit vector position that is reserved for the network device, the reserved bit vector position providing uniqueness of the candidate address within a link layer domain. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112255 | PE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ADVERTISING INFORMATION ABOUT PE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present application disclose a method for advertising information about a PE device and a related apparatus, which are applied to a BGP-based MVPN. The method includes: a PE device in the MVPN determines a role of the PE device in the MVPN and a working status corresponding to the role, where the role is a root node and/or a leaf node, and the working status is active or standby; the PE device generates a BGP update message, carrying an IP address of the PE device, an identifier of the MVPN, the role of the PE device, and the working status of the PE device; and the PE device sends the BGP update message to a BGP neighbor of the PE device in the MVPN. The method and apparatus may alleviate a configuration workload and reduce an error occurrence during an application of a BGP-based MVPN. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112259 | Home Cloud with Virtualized Input and Output Roaming over Network - A home cloud computing system employs a virtualization system to virtualize data of a device and adaptively transform type or format of the virtualized data for one or more other devices, thus leveraging resources of the device for the one or more other devices. Through data virtualization and adaptive transformation, devices of heterogeneous types are seamlessly connected to one another and can act as input or output devices for each other to create a home cloud network of devices. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112261 | LAWFUL INTERCEPT MANAGEMENT MODULES AND METHODS FOR LI-CONFIGURATION OF AN INTERNAL INTERCEPTION FUNCTION IN A CLOUD BASED NETWORK - A method and a Lawful Intercept, LI, management module for LI configuration of an Internal Interception Function, IIF, which is hosted by a Virtual Network Function, VNF, in a cloud based network and for keeping a LI administration mediation function, ADMF, in a LI system, updated regarding the current LI configuration in the cloud based network. The method comprises receiving a notification comprising a VNF and its VNF characteristics, making LI configuration decisions based on VNF characteristics and a LI policy from a LI policy database, performing a LI configuration of the VNF and the IIF in accordance with configuration decisions, storing the VNF/IIF characteristics in the LI policy database, if configuration was successful, and updating the LI ADMF about new LI configuration of the cloud based network. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112270 | DISCOVERING AND GROUPING APPLICATION ENDPOINTS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for discovering and grouping application endpoints in a network environment is provided and includes discovering endpoints communicating in a network environment, calculating affinity between the discovered endpoints, and grouping the endpoints into separate endpoint groups (EPGs) according to the calculated affinity, each EPG comprising a logical grouping of similar endpoints for applying common forwarding and policy logic according to logical application boundaries. In specific embodiments, the affinity includes a weighted average of network affinity, compute affinity and user specified affinity. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119186 | ZERO-CONFIGURATION NETWORKING PROTOCOL - According to an example, a network device serving as a monitoring device for a zero-configuration network protocol is in a subnet in a network including multiple subnets. The monitoring device may receive and update a service in another subnet that is notified by a manager. Also, the monitoring device may respond to a query for the service from a terminal in the subnet when the queried service is in another subnet. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119275 | High Availability Internet Protocol Address Solution for Disaster Recovery - A system, a method, and a computer program product for providing a high availability internet protocol address are disclosed. At a first customer routing domain, a high availability internet protocol (“HA IP”) address is generated and configured on a first computing device located within the first customer routing domain. The HA IP address is forwarded to a second computing device located within at least one of the first customer routing domain and a second customer routing domain. The forwarded HA IP address is configured on the second computing device. The second customer routing domain is connected to the first customer routing domain using a transport mechanism. The first and second computing devices can be configured as a host for providing a communication capability to the customer routing domains based on the high availability internet protocol address. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119434 | INTELLIGENT NEGOTIATION SERVICE FOR INTERNET OF THINGS - Disclosed herein are devices, methods, and systems for providing negotiation between IoT Things, IoT entities, and/or IoT applications as a service. IoT entities may be admitted to a negotiation service that may locate a target service and request service from the target service on behalf of the requesting IoT entity. A variety of services and related parameter may be negotiated, such as a work schedule for a set of devices performing a similar function in a similar space, price of service, and duration of service. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127174 | METHOD AND SERVER OF CONFIGURING SCENARIO MODE FOR SMART DEVICES - The present disclosure relates to a method and a server for configuring a scenario mode. The method includes: acquiring device information of a plurality of smart device bound to a user account; pushing, according to the device information of the smart devices, at least one predefined scenario mode template to a controlling device bound to the user account; receiving, from the controlling device, scenario mode template selection information indicating a selected scenario mode template; and defining, according to the scenario mode template selection information, a scenario mode corresponding to the selected scenario mode template for the smart devices, wherein the smart devices comprise at least one first smart device and at least one second smart device, and the scenario mode represents an operation mode for controlling actions of the at least one second smart device according to a status parameter collected by the at least one first smart device. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127179 | RESOURCE-LIMITED DEVICE INTERACTIVITY WITH CLOUD-BASED SYSTEMS - Resource limited devices may be provided with a communications module enabling the resource limited device to communicate with a more powerful user computing system using a personal area networking protocol. The communications with the user computing system may be used to configure the resource limited device and/or its communications module to communicate with a remote computing system using a local or wide area networking protocol. This technology may shift processing functions that cannot be performed by resource-limited processors of the electronic device to more powerful computing systems, including, but not limited to cloud based systems. Bridges may also coordinate communications between multiple resource limited devices and the more powerful computing systems. Shifting these processing functions to more powerful computing systems may avoid the need for device manufacturers to include more expensive processors and may reduce device manufacturing costs. Devices and methods are provided. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127187 | ZONE CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING THE SAME - A zone control system includes a zone controller (ZC), an apparatus control node, and a sensor. The ZC includes a LAN structure template which records a network topology in a zone where the ZC is installed. The ZC executes calculations of correlation degree for adjacent apparatus control nodes and sensors, automatically connects to the highest correlation degree of the apparatus control nodes, and controls the connected apparatus control nodes to connect to the highest correlation degree of the sensors according to the calculation results and the LAN structure template. Accordingly, the ZC can automatically configure the LAN structure in the zone where the ZC is installed and establish a zone control system in the zone. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127313 | Identifying Port Misconnections On A Network Device - Identifying port misconnections on a network device is disclosed. In an embodiment, host-to-port configuration data for a second network device is received at a first network device, wherein the host-to-port configuration data identifies, for each port of a plurality of ports of the second network device, a host that was connected to the port of the second network device. A particular host that is currently connected to a particular port of a plurality of ports of the first network device is determined. A second host was connected to a port of the second network device that corresponds to the particular port of the first network device, where the second host is different than the particular host, is determined. In response to determining that the particular host is different than the second host, an alert signal associated with the particular port is presented. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127455 | SHARING AN APPLICATION CONFIGURATION AMONG SOCIAL NETWORKS - A machine may generate and store a correlation among multiple identifiers of the user that enable access to an application through multiple systems. For example, the user may have a first identifier for using a first social network system, and a second identifier for using a second social network system, and the machine may generate and store a correlation between the first identifier and the second identifier. The machine may identify the user based on the first identifier and access a database that stores the correlation. The machine may then access a configuration of the application based on the correlation and configure the application in accordance with the configuration. The machine may generate a visual representation of the configured application, provide the visual representation to a device of a further user, receive an indication of an opinion of the further user on the visual representation, and present the indication. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134584 | DYNAMICALLY ASSIGNING NETWORK ADDRESSES - Dynamically assigning network addresses provided by a server in a network to virtual network adapters in virtual machines, in which a reassignment of the assigned network addresses due to suspending virtual machines is prevented. Network addresses of the virtual machines in the network are logged. Network addresses are combined with information about suspending and/or resuming virtual machines by a control instance. Information about the network addresses of suspended virtual machines for its virtual network adapters with dynamically assigned network addresses is sent to the server. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142251 | NETWORK CONTROLLER AND A COMPUTER IMPLEMENTED METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY DEFINE FORWARDING RULES TO CONFIGURE A COMPUTER NETWORKING DEVICE - A network controller and a method for automatically define forwarding rules to configure a computer networking device, | 05-19-2016 |
20160149758 | NETWORK SYSTEM, METHOD OF MANAGING NETWORK SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A network system, having: a gateway apparatus set in a network; a physical computer coupled to the gateway apparatus; a virtualization unit that allocates computer resources of the physical computer to virtual machines; and a management computer that manages the physical computer, the virtualization unit, and the gateway apparatus, wherein the management computer includes: a network mapping unit that controls the gateway apparatus by configuring settings in a virtual network and another gateway apparatus and a VLAN coupled to the virtual network; and a virtualization management unit that controls the virtualization unit, wherein the virtualization unit includes: a virtual port coupled to the virtual machines; and a virtual switch that configures settings for the VLAN coupling the virtual port to the gateway apparatus, and wherein the gateway apparatus converts transmissions between a format of the VLAN and a format of the virtual network and performs transmission. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150043 | SOURCE IP ADDRESS TRANSPARENCY SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Systems and methods for source address transparency in a communication network include a proxy server and an IP gateway in which the proxy server receives a traffic flow from an end-user device and determines a source address for the detected traffic flow; the proxy server further creates a virtual interface corresponding to the end-user device from which the traffic flow was received and uses the virtual interface for that end-user device to exchange data between the end-user device and a designated web server. The virtual interface sends the traffic flow to the designated web server using the source address that is the same as or a variant of the source address for the end-user device from which the traffic flow was received. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156508 | INTEGRATED NETWORK CONTROLLING SYSTEM, NETWORK CONTROLLING APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND A READABLE MEDIUM CONTAINING THE METHOD | 06-02-2016 |
20160156509 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing an Active Information Model | 06-02-2016 |
20160156512 | FAST LINKUP ARBITRATION | 06-02-2016 |
20160156513 | Systems and Methods for Providing Customized Virtual Wireless Networks Based on Service Oriented Network Auto-creation | 06-02-2016 |
20160156530 | M2M-based ticket application method and system, and terminal device | 06-02-2016 |
20160162863 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND SOFTWARE FOR HOUSE AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION AT POINT OF SALE - A Point of sale device, system and computer program for configuration of house automation, including a reader arranged to read an identity associated with a sensor for home automation, an interface arranged to receive input of installation data of the sensor; and a communication module arranged to send the installation data and associated identity of the sensor to a server. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164724 | INSTALLATION OF NETWORKABLE DEVICES - Embodiments described herein include systems, apparatuses, and methods for attempting to wirelessly communicate with a networkable device with a mobile device to retrieve an identifier for the networkable device; receiving the identifier from the networkable device; storing the identifier in the mobile device; and sending a request to a provisioning server to provision the networkable device. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164727 | CLOUD COMPUTING PLACEMENT AND PROVISIONING ARCHITECTURE - Provisioning resources into the cloud is a constantly increasing technical challenge as more cloud service providers emerge, each offering disparate computing platforms, services, assets, supported technical components, and other features. A cloud computing provisioning architecture implements a sequence of complex technical analyses that successfully provisions complex cloud computing services. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164743 | TECHNICAL COMPONENT PROVISIONING USING METADATA STRUCTURAL HIERARCHY - Determining placement options for technical components of a specified service is a difficult technical challenge. A metadata architecture addresses, in part, the technical challenge by defining a complex metadata collection and attachment mechanism. In one implementation, the metadata architecture defines metadata domains and obtains descriptive metadata for those domains, e.g., metadata for the technical components from multiple disparate sources and across multiple different characteristics of the technical components. The metadata architecture is linked to the technical components and the metadata architecture injects specific metadata subsets into, e.g., a placement pipeline that determines where the technical components may be placed in the extensive provider/platform/service space. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164744 | DYNAMIC NETWORK COMPONENT PLACEMENT - A network component placement architecture addresses the difficult technical challenge of determining where specific technical components of an overall service may be provisioned. However, the placement decision can change over time in response to complex updates relating to service providers, the regions they support, the assets they support, and many other dynamic factors. Dynamic network component placement effectively determines updated possibilities for placing the technical components of a specified service, while meeting all of the applicable technical constraints on the placement of the technical components. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164746 | NETWORK COMPONENT PLACEMENT ARCHITECTURE - A network component placement architecture addresses the difficult technical challenge of determining where specific technical components of an overall service may be provisioned. The architecture is particularly effective at determining where, among a myriad of possible service provides, platforms, and regions, the technical components can be placed and meet all of the applicable technical constraints on the placement of the technical components. In one implementation, the placement architecture includes a sequence of pipeline stages that define an analysis sequence leading to a set of possible placement options. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173326 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION USING SERVICE IDENTIFIER | 06-16-2016 |
20160173328 | Server Connection Method and System | 06-16-2016 |
20160173441 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING IP ADDRESS BY DIRECT COMMUNICATION TERMINAL | 06-16-2016 |
20160173679 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE CONNECTED TO ANOTHER ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME | 06-16-2016 |
20160182248 | Method for Realizing Smart Home Service, Smart Home Terminal and Service Hotspots | 06-23-2016 |
20160182280 | A NETWORK ELEMENT AND A CONTROLLER FOR MANAGING THE NETWORK ELEMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160182283 | USING GLOBAL VARIABLES TO DATA-DRIVE RULE ENGINE EVALUATION | 06-23-2016 |
20160182287 | CONTROL APPARATUS, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM | 06-23-2016 |
20160182288 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR MEDIA PROCESSING IN DISTRIBUTED CLOUD | 06-23-2016 |
20160182299 | AUTO DISCOVERY OF CONFIGURATION ITEMS | 06-23-2016 |
20160191310 | MANAGING USE OF ALTERNATIVE INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION COMPUTING NODES FOR PROVIDED COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for managing communications for a managed computer network by using a defined pool of alternative computing nodes of the managed computer network that are configured to operate as intermediate destinations to handle at least some communications that are sent by and/or directed to one or more other computing nodes of the managed computer network. For example, a manager module associated with a source computing node may select a particular alternative intermediate destination computing node from a defined pool to use for one or more particular communications from the source computing node to an indicated final destination, such as based on a configured logical network topology for the managed computer network and/or on one or more other selection criteria (e.g., to enable load balancing between the alternative computing nodes). The manager module then forwards those communications to the selected intermediate destination computing node for further handling. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191318 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE INSTALLATIONS - According to at least one embodiment, a system including a server is provided. The server includes a memory and at least one processor coupled to the memory. The at least one processor is configured to receive configuration information encoded in a QR code, the configuration information being based on one or more values of one or more configuration options for at least one programmable device. The at least one processor is also configured to determine if the configuration information is in accord with target configuration information and transmit a message indicating whether the configuration information is in accord with the target configuration information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191321 | RELATIONAL STRUCTURE FOR WIRELESS NODES AND OPTIMIZING METHOD FOR THE RELATIONAL STRUCTURE - An optimizing method for a relational structure is presented. Firstly, a zone controller (ZC) receives a relational structure information related to a located zone and executes a classification for multiple sub-relational structure information thereof. The ZC then executes searching and calculation respectively based on different types of the sub-relational structure information, and receives multiple optimum solutions for each type of the sub-relational structure information respectively. Finally, the ZC establishes different types of sub-relational structures based on the multiple optimum solutions, wherein each sub-relational structure comprises at least one wireless node of the located zone, and connects with the multiple sub-relational structures for establishing the relational structure. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191324 | SUBSEQUENT ADDRESS FAMILY IDENTIFIER FOR SERVICE ADVERTISEMENTS - A method for routing network traffic between network elements within a computer network is disclosed. The method comprises configuring the computer network to include a control plane and a forwarding plane; configuring each network element of the forwarding plane to periodically compose and transmit a control plane protocol message to every other network element of the forwarding plane, said control plane message comprising network, next-hop; and service information; via the control plane, provisioning at least some of the network elements with at least one policy to control routing of the network traffic based on at least one service; and processing the network traffic by the network elements of the forwarding plane based on the at least one policy. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191341 | SECURE CLOUD INTERCONNECT PRIVATE ROUTING - A network device is located in a cloud routing services center that is separate from a customer network. The network device provides a user interface to solicit, from a customer device outside the cloud routing services center, structured routing criteria for virtual private network (VPN) routes over a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) network and receives, from the customer device, customer routing criteria selected from the structured routing criteria. The network device retrieves network configuration data for the MPLS network and applies the customer routing criteria to the network configuration data to generate a customer VPN routing plan for the MPLS network. The network device analyzes the customer VPN routing plan to determine if the routing plan is viable and, if the routing plan is viable, configures devices in the MPLS network to implement a customer VPN based on the customer VPN routing plan. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191669 | CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A control system comprising: a server and a plurality of communication devices, wherein the server stores first mode information for each user, the first mode information being associated with a mode of an application and selected from among a plurality pieces of mode information of the mode, and transmits the first mode information of a first user to the plurality of communication devices operated by the first user, and the plurality of communication devices receive the first mode information, obtain second mode information set to the mode of the application installed to the communication device, record an operation content related to mode information change performed on the communication device, and determine whether the second mode information set to the mode of the application is switched to the first mode information, based on the operation content, the first mode information, and the second mode information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191670 | PERIPHERAL DEVICE DETECTION WITH SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - In general, embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to techniques for configuring a mobile device according to detection of one or more peripheral devices in an environment using short-range wireless communication. In one example, a method includes, receiving, by a computing device that communicates with a peripheral device using short-range wireless communication, a unique identifier of the peripheral device. If the computing device recognizes the unique identifier of the peripheral device, the computing device may determine a configuration operation based on the unique identifier that changes a current operating state of at least one application executing on the computing device to a different operating state. If the computing device does not recognize the unique identifier of the peripheral device, the computing device may send a lookup request to a network resource external to the computing device that requests data specifying the configuration operation for the computing device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160197775 | DATA CENTER BRIDGING NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT | 07-07-2016 |
20160204991 | METHODS FOR DISCOVERING, PARTITIONING, ORGANIZING, AND ADMINISTERING COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A TRANSFORMER AREA NETWORK | 07-14-2016 |
20160205226 | AUTO-CONFIGURABLE TRANSPORT STACK | 07-14-2016 |
20160254950 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE EMPLOYING LEVEL-BASED TRANSMISSION OF CONFIGURATION INFORMATION | 09-01-2016 |
20160254958 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR VIRTUALIZING A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION | 09-01-2016 |
20160255123 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A DATA FEED FOR INTERNET OF THINGS | 09-01-2016 |
20160255156 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING BETWEEN TWO DEVICES | 09-01-2016 |
20160380812 | CONTROL PLANE INTEGRATION WITH HARDWARE SWITCHES - Some embodiments provide a managed hardware forwarding element (MHFE) controller that serves as an intermediary between one or more central controllers in a central control plane (CCP) cluster and one or more third-party hardware devices (e.g., physical switches and routers, applicances such as firewalls, load balancers, etc.). The MHFE controller of some embodiments uses (i) a first protocol to communicate with the CCP cluster and (ii) a second protocol to communicate with the one or more third-party devices managed by the MHFE controller, thereby enabling the CCP cluster to distribute logical network configuration information to the physical workloads (e.g., third-party servers connected to a third-party Top of Rack (TOR) switch). | 12-29-2016 |
20160380813 | CONFIGURATION OF DISTRIBUTED DATA ACQUISITION EQUIPMENT - Configuring distributed data acquisition equipment including at least one data collection unit and at least one data acquisition unit coupled to the data collection unit, including obtaining configuration data for the at least one data acquisition unit, generating a message comprising the configuration data, transmitting said message to a data collection unit coupled to the at least one data acquisition unit, extracting in the data collection unit the configuration data, and transmitting the extracted configuration data to the at least one data acquisition unit. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380815 | PROVISIONING LOGICAL ENTITIES IN A MULTI-DATACENTER ENVIRONMENT - A system provisions global logical entities that facilitate the operation of logical networks that span two or more datacenters. These global logical entities include global logical switches that provide L2 switching as well as global routers that provide L3 routing among network nodes in multiple datacenters. The global logical entities operate along side local logical entities that are for operating logical networks that are local within a datacenter. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380830 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE DEVICES WITHIN A NETWORK SYSTEM - The disclosure is related to a method and a system for managing multiple devices within a network system. For the purpose of configuration or firmware synchronization for the devices within a network segment, the system allows an operator to optionally select the nodes operating as different roles such as a master, synchronization-source device, and slave. A selected device being the master is embedded with a web-based management mechanism, and therefore is remotely accessible. The management program provides a management interface in response to a management link. The management interface allows the operator to instruct the master to synchronize its configuration/firmware with the other selected nodes. Alternatively, through the master, one of the nodes is selected to be the synchronization-source device, and instructed to share its configuration to the other nodes. Through this management mechanism, the multiple nodes can be synchronized as applying the configuration, or/and firmware simultaneously. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380964 | NETWORK TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NETWORK TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR A MULTI-LAYER NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR STRUCTURE - A peer-to-peer server sends a first internal internet protocol (IP) address and a first internal port number of a first node to a second node, and sends a second internal IP address and a second internal port number of the second node to the first node. The first node sends a first packet to the second internal IP address and the second internal port number via a network address translator. The network address translator send a second packet corresponding to the first packet from an intermediary IP address and an intermediary port number to the second node. The second node sends a third packet to the intermediary IP address and the intermediary port number. The network address translator performs a lookup operation to send a fourth packet corresponding to the third packet to the first internal IP address and the first internal port number. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237608 | SCALABLE AND AUTOMATED NETWORK-PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT | 08-17-2017 |
20170237610 | Automated Detection Of Communicational System Type | 08-17-2017 |
20170237612 | SUPPLEMENTAL AND ALTERNATIVE DIGITAL DATA DELIVERY AND RECEIPT MESH NETWORK REALIZED THROUGH THE PLACEMENT OF ENHANCED TRANSFORMER MOUNTED MONITORING DEVICES | 08-17-2017 |
20180026836 | PROTOCOL FOR OUT OF BAND COMMISSIONING OF LIGHTING NETWORK ELEMENT | 01-25-2018 |
20180026914 | CONFIGURATION ORCHESTRATION | 01-25-2018 |
20190149400 | CONFIGURABLE DEVICE STATUS | 05-16-2019 |
20190149401 | ACCESSING GATEWAY MANAGEMENT CONSOLE | 05-16-2019 |
20190149402 | ACCESSING GATEWAY MANAGEMENT CONSOLE | 05-16-2019 |
20190149404 | METHODS ARE PROVIDED FOR FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SERVICES IN A CLOUD ENVIRONMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190149410 | SECURE CONFIGURATION OF CLOUD COMPUTING NODES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149414 | ASYNCHRONOUS IMAGING OF COMPUTING NODES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149420 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190149639 | DYNAMIC PORT TYPE DETECTION | 05-16-2019 |